Prosper Complete

Petroleum Experts
PROSPER
Single Well Systems Analysis

Version 9.1
December 2005
USER GUIDE
The information in this document is subject to change as major improvements and/or
amendments to the program are generated. When necessary, Petroleum Experts will
issue the proper documentation.
The software described in this manual is furnished under a licence agreement. The
software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It
is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in
the license agreement. No part of this documentation may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose
other than the purchaser's personal use, unless express written consent has been
given by Petroleum Experts Limited.
All names of companies, wells, persons or products contained in this documentation

are part of a fictitious scenario or scenarios and are used solely to document the use of
a Petroleum Experts product.
Address: Registered Office:
Petroleum Experts Limited Petroleum Experts Limited

Spectrum House Spectrum House
2 Powderhall Road 2 Powderhall Road
Edinburgh, Scotland Edinburgh, Scotland
EH7 4GB EH7 4GB
Tel : (+44 131) 474 7030
Fax : (+44 131) 474 7031
Email : [email protected]
Web Site: http://www.petex.com
1-7 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Using PROSPER................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 PROSPER and Systems Analysis...................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 A Note About PROSPER........................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Examples .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.1 Example 1 – Naturally Flowing Oil Well................................................................................................... 7
1.3.2 Example 2 – Gas Lift Design ................................................................................................................... 7
1.3.3 Example 3 – Well and Flowline Modelling ............................................................................................... 7
1.3.4 Example 4 – Temperature Prediction ...................................................................................................... 8
1.3.5 Example 5 – ESP Lifted Well................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.6 Example 6 – HSP Lifted Well................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.7 Example 7 – Retrograde Condensate Well ............................................................................................. 9
1.3.8 Example 8 – Gravel Packed well ............................................................................................................. 9
1.3.9 Example 9 – Horizontal Well – Friction dP .............................................................................................. 9
1.3.10 Example 10 – Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss........................................................................................... 9
1.3.11 Example 11 – Multi-lateral well ................................................................................................................ 9
1.3.12 Example 12 – Modelling of a smart well completion using multilateral option in PROSPER .................. 10
1.3.13 Example 13 – Gas injector with downhole chokes using multilateral model.......................................... 10
1.3.14 Example 14 – Multilateral model including PCP .................................................................................... 10
2 File Management ................................................................................................................................................. 1
2.1 PROSPER Files ................................................................................................................................................. 1
2.1.1 PVT Data (*.PVT) .................................................................................................................................... 1
2.1.2 Input Data (*.SIN) .................................................................................................................................... 1
2.1.3 Analysis Data (*.ANL) ............................................................................................................................. 2
2.1.4 Output Data (*.OUT) ............................................................................................................................... 2
2.1.5 Creating a New File ................................................................................................................................. 3
2.1.6 Opening an Existing File.......................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.7 Saving a File ............................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1.8 Copying a File.......................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Preferences ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.1 Screen ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.2 File ........................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.3 Plot........................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.2.4 User Applications..................................................................................................................................... 9
2.2.5 Limits ..................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.2.6 Units....................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Software Key Maintenance............................................................................................................................. 11
2.4 Evaluate OpenServer Statement .................................................................................................................... 11
2.5 User Correlations............................................................................................................................................ 12
2.6 Printing............................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.6.1 Preparing to Print................................................................................................................................... 13
2.6.2 Selecting and configuring a Printer........................................................................................................ 13
2.6.3 Printing Export Data............................................................................................................................... 13
2.6.4 Selecting an Exported Data to Print....................................................................................................... 15
2.6.5 Word Processing in PROSPER............................................................................................................... 15
2.6.6 Clipboard Command.............................................................................................................................. 15
2.7 Command Buttons .......................................................................................................................................... 16
3 Quick Start Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 1
3.1 Example – Naturally Flowing Oil Well ............................................................................................................... 1
3.1.1 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................... 1
3.1.1.1 Options ......................................................................................................................................................... 2
3.1.1.2 PVT Data...................................................................................................................................................... 3
3.1.1.3 Equipment Data............................................................................................................................................ 8
3.1.1.4 IPR Data..................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1.2 Matching of the model to a test.............................................................................................................. 15
3.1.2.1 VLP Matching ........................................................................................................................................ 15
3.1.2.2 IPR Matching ......................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1.3 Performing a System Analysis............................................................................................................... 25
3.1.4 Calculating Gradient Traverses ............................................................................................................. 30
3.1.5 Generating VLP Curves for Simulators.................................................................................................. 32
4 Data Input - General ............................................................................................................................................ 1
4.1 PROSPER Main Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 1
PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2-7
4.1.1 File ........................................................................................................................................................... 2

4.1.2 Options .................................................................................................................................................... 2
4.1.3 PVT.......................................................................................................................................................... 2
4.1.4 System..................................................................................................................................................... 2
4.1.5 Matching .................................................................................................................................................. 2
4.1.6 Calculation ............................................................................................................................................... 2
4.1.7 Design...................................................................................................................................................... 2
4.1.8 Output ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
4.1.9 Wizard NEW!!! ........................................................................................................................................ 3
4.1.10 Units......................................................................................................................................................... 3
4.1.11 Help ......................................................................................................................................................... 3
4.2 Options Selection.............................................................................................................................................. 3
4.2.1 Fluid Description ...................................................................................................................................... 5
4.2.2 Well.......................................................................................................................................................... 7
4.2.3 Artificial Lift .............................................................................................................................................. 7
4.2.4 Calculation Type .................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.5 Well Completion..................................................................................................................................... 12
4.2.6 Reservoir ............................................................................................................................................... 13
4.2.7 User Information .................................................................................................................................... 13
5 PVT Data Input..................................................................................................................................................... 1
5.2 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
5.3 Black Oil - Oil and Water .................................................................................................................................. 2
5.3.1 Input Data ................................................................................................................................................ 2
5.3.2 Emulsions ................................................................................................................................................ 3
5.3.3 Tables ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
5.3.4 Match Data .............................................................................................................................................. 5
5.3.5 Regression............................................................................................................................................... 6
5.3.6 Match ....................................................................................................................................................... 6
5.3.7 Calculations ............................................................................................................................................. 8
5.3.8 Saving the PVT Data ............................................................................................................................. 11
5.3.9 Recalling a PVT File .............................................................................................................................. 11
5.3.10 Correlations ........................................................................................................................................... 12
5.3.11 Composition........................................................................................................................................... 12
5.3.12 Non-Newtonian Fluid ............................................................................................................................. 13
5.3.13 Emulsions .............................................................................................................................................. 14
5.3.14 Power Fluid Data .................................................................................................................................. 17
5.3.15 Hydrates Formation table ...................................................................................................................... 18
5.4 Black Oil - Dry and Wet Gas ........................................................................................................................... 20
5.4.1 Input Data .............................................................................................................................................. 20
5.5 Black Oil - Retrograde Condensate ................................................................................................................ 21
5.5.1 Input Data .............................................................................................................................................. 21
5.5.2 Calculations ........................................................................................................................................... 22
5.6 Equation of State - All Fluids .......................................................................................................................... 23
5.6.1 EOS Model Setup .................................................................................................................................. 25
5.6.2 EOS PVT Input Data.............................................................................................................................. 30
5.6.3 Using the EoS........................................................................................................................................ 31
6 Equipment Data Input ......................................................................................................................................... 1
6.1 Predicting Pressure Only .................................................................................................................................. 1
6.1.1 Deviation Survey...................................................................................................................................... 2
6.1.2 Surface Equipment .................................................................................................................................. 5
6.1.3 Downhole Equipment............................................................................................................................... 8
6.1.4 Temperature Survey .............................................................................................................................. 10
6.1.5 Summary ............................................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 Predicting Pressure and Temperature (Enthalpy Balance) ............................................................................ 12
6.2.1 Deviation Survey.................................................................................................................................... 12
6.2.2 Surface Environment ............................................................................................................................. 12
6.2.3 Drilling and Completion.......................................................................................................................... 13
6.2.4 Lithology ................................................................................................................................................ 15
6.2.5 Surface Equipment ................................................................................................................................ 16
6.2.6 Downhole Equipment............................................................................................................................. 19
6.2.7 Databases.............................................................................................................................................. 21
6.3 Rough Approximation ..................................................................................................................................... 22
PROSPER MANUAL

6.3.4 Geothermal Gradient ............................................................................................................................. 25
6.3.5 Average Heat Capacities ....................................................................................................................... 26
6.4 Improved Approximation ................................................................................................................................. 26
6.4.4 Geothermal Gradient ............................................................................................................................. 29
6.4.5 Sea Temperature Gradient .................................................................................................................... 30
7 IPR Data Input...................................................................................................................................................... 1
7.1 IPR Single Well Data Entry ............................................................................................................................... 1
7.1.1 The Main Data Entry Screen ........................................................................................................................... 2
7.1.2 Action Buttons.................................................................................................................................................. 3
7.1.3 Model Selection Screen................................................................................................................................... 4
7.1.4 Data Input Screen............................................................................................................................................ 5
7.2 IPR Models for Oil Wells ................................................................................................................................... 7
7.2.1 P.I. Entry .......................................................................................................................................................... 9
7.2.2 Vogel................................................................................................................................................................ 9
7.2.3 Composite........................................................................................................................................................ 9
7.2.4 Darcy ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
7.2.5 Fetkovich ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
7.2.6 Multi-rate Fetkovich ....................................................................................................................................... 10
7.2.7 Jones ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
7.2.8 Multi-rate Jones ............................................................................................................................................. 11
7.2.9 Transient........................................................................................................................................................ 11
7.2.10 Hydraulically Fractured Well ........................................................................................................................ 11
7.2.11 Horizontal Well - No Flow Boundaries ......................................................................................................... 12
7.2.12 Horizontal Well - Constant Pressure Upper Boundary ................................................................................ 13
7.2.13 Multi-Layer Inflow......................................................................................................................................... 14
7.2.14 External Entry .............................................................................................................................................. 15
7.2.15 Horizontal well - dP Friction ......................................................................................................................... 15
7.2.16 Multi-Layer - dP Loss................................................................................................................................... 19
7.2.17 SkinAide....................................................................................................................................................... 21
7.2.18 Dual Porosity ............................................................................................................................................... 21
7.2.19 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures ..................................................................................... 21
7.2.20 Thermally Induced Fracture Model .............................................................................................................. 22
7.2.21 Using Relative Permeabilities in PROSPER ................................................................................................. 24
7.2.22 Coning Calculation....................................................................................................................................... 28
7.3 IPR for Gas and Retrograde Condensate....................................................................................................... 28
7.3.1 Jones ............................................................................................................................................................. 28
7.3.2 Forcheimer..................................................................................................................................................... 29
7.3.3 Back Pressure ............................................................................................................................................... 29
7.3.4 C and n .......................................................................................................................................................... 29
7.3.5 Multi-rate C and n .......................................................................................................................................... 30
7.3.6 Multi-rate Jones ............................................................................................................................................. 30
7.3.7 External Entry ................................................................................................................................................ 30
7.3.8 Petroleum Experts ......................................................................................................................................... 30
7.3.9 Hydraulically Fractured Well .......................................................................................................................... 32
7.3.10 Horizontal Well - No-Flow Boundaries......................................................................................................... 32
7.3.11 Multi-layer Inflow.......................................................................................................................................... 32
7.3.12 Horizontal Well - dP Friction ........................................................................................................................ 32
7.3.13 Dual Porosity ............................................................................................................................................... 33
7.3.14 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures ..................................................................................... 33
7.3.15 Modified Isochronal Inflow Model NEW!!! .................................................................................................. 33
7.4 Skin Models .................................................................................................................................................... 34
7.4.1 Mechanical/Geometrical Skin ........................................................................................................................ 35
7.4.2 Deviation/Partial Penetration Skin ................................................................................................................. 39
7.5 Gravel Packed Completions ........................................................................................................................... 39
7.6 Injection Wells................................................................................................................................................. 42
7.7 SkinAide.......................................................................................................................................................... 43
7.7.1 SkinAide Theoretical Background.................................................................................................................. 43
7.7.2 Using SkinAide .............................................................................................................................................. 47
7.8 Multi-Lateral Interface ..................................................................................................................................... 60
7.8.1 Network Interface........................................................................................................................................... 60
7.8.2 Data Entry...................................................................................................................................................... 70

7.8.3 Example of How to Set Up a Simple System................................................................................................. 72

8 Artificial Lift Data Input....................................................................................................................................... 1
8.1 Gas Lift Input Data............................................................................................................................................ 1
8.1.1 Fixed Depth of Injection ........................................................................................................................... 2
8.1.2 Optimum Depth of Injection ..................................................................................................................... 2
8.1.3 Valve Depth Specified ............................................................................................................................. 3
8.1.4 Gas Lift (Safety Equipment)..................................................................................................................... 4
8.1.5 Gas Lift (Allow injection in Pipe Line above wellhead) ............................................................................ 5
8.2 ESP Input Data ................................................................................................................................................. 6
8.2.1 Pump Database ....................................................................................................................................... 7
8.3 HSP Input Data................................................................................................................................................. 9
8.3.1 Pump Database ....................................................................................................................................... 9
8.4 Progressive Cavity Pumps.............................................................................................................................. 11
8.5 Coiled Tubing Gas Lift .................................................................................................................................... 12
8.6 Diluent Injection .............................................................................................................................................. 12
8.7 Jet Pumps ....................................................................................................................................................... 13
8.7.1 Pump Database ..................................................................................................................................... 13
8.8 Multiphase Pumps .......................................................................................................................................... 15
8.8.1 Pump Database ..................................................................................................................................... 15
9 Matching Menu .................................................................................................................................................... 1
9.1 A Note on VLP Correlation Applications ........................................................................................................... 2
9.2 VLP/IPR Match and Quality Check ................................................................................................................... 4
9.2.1 VLP Matching .......................................................................................................................................... 5
9.2.2 IPR Matching ........................................................................................................................................... 8
9.3 Gradient Matching ............................................................................................................................................ 9
9.4 Surface Pipe Matching.................................................................................................................................... 10
9.5 Correlation Comparison.................................................................................................................................. 11
9.6 QuickLook for Gas Lift .................................................................................................................................... 14
9.6.1 Input....................................................................................................................................................... 14
9.6.2 Performing the QuickLook Calculation .................................................................................................. 17
9.7 QuickLook for ESP ......................................................................................................................................... 19
9.7.1 Input....................................................................................................................................................... 19
9.8 QuickLook for HSP ......................................................................................................................................... 22
9.8.1 Input....................................................................................................................................................... 23
9.9 Vertical Pipe Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 25
9.10 Surface Flow line Parameters......................................................................................................................... 26
9.11 Correlation Thresholds ................................................................................................................................... 26
10 Calculation Menu................................................................................................................................................. 1
10.1 Calculation Options for Predicting Pressure Only or Rough/Improved Approximation Temperature Cases .... 2
10.1.1 Inflow (IPR) .............................................................................................................................................. 2
10.1.2 System (Ipr + Vlp) .................................................................................................................................... 5
10.1.3 Gradient (Traverse) ............................................................................................................................... 16
10.1.4 VLP (Tubing Curves) ............................................................................................................................. 22
10.1.5 Choke Performance............................................................................................................................... 29
10.1.6 Generate for GAP .................................................................................................................................. 30
10.2 Calculation Menu – Rough Approximation Cases Only .................................................................................. 31
10.2.1 Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure ....................................................................................31
10.3 Calculation Menu - Enthalpy Balance Temperature Model Only .................................................................... 33
10.3.1 Constrained System .............................................................................................................................. 34
10.3.2 Constrained VLP.................................................................................................................................... 36
10.3.3 Unconstrained System........................................................................................................................... 38
10.3.4 Unconstrained VLP (tubing curves) ....................................................................................................... 40
10.3.5 Unconstrained Gradient......................................................................................................................... 42
10.3.6 Correlation Comparison......................................................................................................................... 44
10.3.7 Correlation Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 45
11 Design Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 1
11.1 Gas Lift Design ................................................................................................................................................. 1
11.1.1 New Well.................................................................................................................................................. 2
11.1.2 Existing Mandrels Design ...................................................................................................................... 12
11.1.3 Gas Lift Adjustments.............................................................................................................................. 20
PROSPER MANUAL
11.2 Electrical Submersible Pump Design.............................................................................................................. 23

11.2.1 ESP Calculate........................................................................................................................................ 25
11.2.2 ESP Design (Pump, Motor and Cable Selection) .................................................................................. 26
11.3 Hydraulic Pump Design .................................................................................................................................. 29
11.3.1 HSP Calculate ....................................................................................................................................... 30
11.3.2 HSP Design (Pump and Turbine Selection) .......................................................................................... 31
11.4 Progressive Cavity Pump Design ................................................................................................................... 34
11.4.1 PCP Calculate ....................................................................................................................................... 35
11.4.2 PCP Design (Pump and Rod Selection) ................................................................................................ 36
11.5 Coiled Tubing GasLift Design ......................................................................................................................... 37
11.6 Jet Pump Design NEW!!! .............................................................................................................................. 39
11.6.1 Jet Pump Calculate................................................................................................................................ 40
11.6.2 Jet Pump Design (Pump Selection)....................................................................................................... 41
11.7 Artificial Lift Database ..................................................................................................................................... 42
11.7.1 Gas Lift Valve Database ........................................................................................................................ 43
11.7.2 ESP Database ....................................................................................................................................... 44
11.7.3 HSP Database ....................................................................................................................................... 49
11.7.4 PCP Database ....................................................................................................................................... 52
11.7.5 Jet Pumps Database NEW!!! ................................................................................................................. 56
11.7.6 MultiPhase Pumps Database NEW!!! .................................................................................................. 57
12 Output................................................................................................................................................................... 1
12.1 Report ............................................................................................................................................................... 2
12.1.1 Setting Up the Reporting System ............................................................................................................ 2
12.1.2 Reports .................................................................................................................................................... 2
12.2 Export ............................................................................................................................................................. 16
12.2.1 Export Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 16
12.3 Plot.................................................................................................................................................................. 18
12.3.1 Plot Command Summary....................................................................................................................... 19
13 Units ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
13.1 Units Summary ................................................................................................................................................. 1
13.1.1 Unit Systems............................................................................................................................................ 2
13.1.2 Changing Unit Systems for some variables............................................................................................. 3
13.1.3 Changing the Units .................................................................................................................................. 3
13.1.4 Validation Limits....................................................................................................................................... 4
13.2 Units Details...................................................................................................................................................... 5
13.3 Units Reset ....................................................................................................................................................... 5
14 Wizard................................................................................................................................................................... 1
14.1 Running the Wizard .......................................................................................................................................... 1
14.2 Creating/Editing a Wizard ................................................................................................................................. 1
14.2.1 Notes of OS strings.................................................................................................................................. 2
14.2.2 Wizards examples ................................................................................................................................... 3
15 Help....................................................................................................................................................................... 1
15.1 Finding Information in Help ............................................................................................................................... 1
15.1.1 Use the Search feature in Help................................................................................................................ 1
15.1.2 Use the Help Index .................................................................................................................................. 1
15.1.3 Context Sensitive Help ............................................................................................................................ 2
15.2 Accessing Help ................................................................................................................................................. 2
15.2.1 Help Through the Menu ........................................................................................................................... 2
15.2.2 Getting Help Using the Mouse................................................................................................................. 2
15.2.3 Getting Help Using the Keyboard ............................................................................................................ 2
15.2.4 To Minimise Help ..................................................................................................................................... 2
15.3 What’s New....................................................................................................................................................... 2
15.4 Worked Examples............................................................................................................................................. 3
15.5 Flow Correlations.............................................................................................................................................. 3
15.6 Help About PROSPER ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Appendix A Worked Examples.................................................................................................................................. 1
A1 Example 1 - Gas Lift Design.................................................................................................................................. 1
A1.1 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................... 1
A1.2 Edit IPR Model.................................................................................................................................................. 2
A1.3 Setting up the Gas Lift Design Parameters ............................................................................................. 3
A1.4 Calculating Sensitivities ........................................................................................................................... 6
A2 Example 2 - Well and Flow line Modelling............................................................................................................. 9

A2.1 Calculating the System Solution ............................................................................................................ 11
A2.2 Plotting the Temperature Profile ............................................................................................................ 12
A3 Example 3 - Temperature Prediction................................................................................................................... 13
A3.1 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................. 14
A3.2 Defining the Equipment Data.......................................................................................................................... 14
A3.3 Calculation Section ......................................................................................................................................... 17
A3.4 Generating a Temperature Gradient Plot ....................................................................................................... 18
A4 Example 4 - ESP Lifted Well ............................................................................................................................... 20
A4.1 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................. 20
A4.2 Designing the pump........................................................................................................................................ 22
A4.3 Checking the design for different conditions................................................................................................... 24
A5 Example 5 - HSP Lifted Well ............................................................................................................................... 26
A5.1 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................. 26
A5.2 Designing The Pump ...................................................................................................................................... 28
A5.3 Checking the Design for Changed Conditions................................................................................................ 30
A6 Example 6 – Jet Pump Design ............................................................................................................................ 32
A6.1 Menu Options ................................................................................................................................................. 32
A6.2 Jet Pump Design ............................................................................................................................................ 32
A6.3 Jet Pump Database ........................................................................................................................................ 32
A6.4 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................. 33
A6.5 PVT Section .................................................................................................................................................... 33
A6.6 Inflow performance relationship...................................................................................................................... 38
A6.7 Downhole Equipment...................................................................................................................................... 39
A6.8 Jet Pump Design Calculation.......................................................................................................................... 39
A7 Example 7 - Retrograde Condensate Well.......................................................................................................... 42
A7.1 Entering EOS PVT .......................................................................................................................................... 42
A7.2 Matching Menu / Correlation Selection.................................................................................................. 45
A7.3 BLACK OIL Condensate PVT................................................................................................................ 47
A7.3.1 Selecting the Options............................................................................................................................. 47
A7.3.2 Matching/ Correlation Selection............................................................................................................. 48
A8 Example 8 - Gravel Packed Gas Well ................................................................................................................. 50
A8.1 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................. 50
A8.1.1 Options Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 51
A8.1.2 PVT menu .................................................................................................................................................. 51
A8.1.3 System Menu (Equip & Inflow) ................................................................................................................... 51
A8.2 Sensitivity Calculation Menu ........................................................................................................................... 53
A8.2.1 IPR Liquid Sensitivity.................................................................................................................................. 56
A9 Example 9 - Horizontal Well - Friction dP............................................................................................................ 57
A9.1 Model Set Up .................................................................................................................................................. 57
A9.1.1 IPR Data Input............................................................................................................................................ 57
A9.2 Coning Calculations for Horizontal Wells........................................................................................................ 59
A10 Example 10 - Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss .................................................................................................. 61
A10.1 Model Set Up.............................................................................................................................................. 61
A10.2 IPR Data Input............................................................................................................................................ 62
A10.2.1 STEP1: Defining the top of the multi-layer system..................................................................................... 62
A10.2.2 STEP2: Defining the to Top Producing layer.............................................................................................. 62
A10.2.3 STEP3: Defining the non producing zone .................................................................................................. 63
A11 Example 11 – Multilateral well ........................................................................................................................ 65
A11.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................. 65
A11.2 Model Set Up.............................................................................................................................................. 66
A11.3 Inflow Calculations ..................................................................................................................................... 82
A12 Example 12 – Modelling of a smart well completion using Multilateral option in PROSPER ........................... 87
A12.1 Statement of the problem ........................................................................................................................... 87
A12.2 Model Set Up.............................................................................................................................................. 88
A12.3 Entering PVT Data ..................................................................................................................................... 89
A12.4 Entering the Equipment data...................................................................................................................... 90
A12.5 Modelling the smart well completion (IPR) ................................................................................................. 92
A13 Example 13 - Gas Injector with down-hole chokes using Multi-lateral model............................................... 114
A13.1 Model Set Up............................................................................................................................................ 115
A13.2 Entering the PVT data .............................................................................................................................. 116
A13.3 Entering the Equipment data.................................................................................................................... 117
A13.4 Defining the IPR data (Inflow) .................................................................................................................. 119
A13.5 Inflow Calculations ................................................................................................................................... 137
A13.6 System Calculations................................................................................................................................. 138
A14 Example 14 - Using Multi-lateral model and PCP......................................................................................... 144
PROSPER MANUAL
A14.1 Model Set Up............................................................................................................................................ 144

A14.2 Inflow Calculations ................................................................................................................................... 159
A14.3 System Calculations................................................................................................................................. 161
A14.4 PCP Set Up and Design........................................................................................................................... 163
A15 Example 15. Condensate Black Oil Model Validation................................................................................... 166
A15.1 Objectives................................................................................................................................................. 166
A15.2 Model Set Up............................................................................................................................................ 167
A15.3 Gradient Traverse Calculation using the EOS ......................................................................................... 168
A15.4 Black Oil Model Validation ....................................................................................................................... 171
A16 Files location ................................................................................................................................................. 172
Appendix B References ............................................................................................................................................. 1
B1 PVT Calculations................................................................................................................................................... 1
B2 IPR Calculations.................................................................................................................................................... 2
B3 Multiphase Flow Calculations................................................................................................................................ 3
B4 Temperature Calculations ..................................................................................................................................... 4
Appendix C - Equations ................................................................................................................................................... 1
C1 Black Oil Model for Condensate ....................................................................................................................... 1
C1.1 Mass Balance Calculations...................................................................................................................... 1
C1.2 Using the mass balance results to define Condensate Model................................................................. 4
C1.3 Estimation of CGRmin ...............................................................................................................................5
C2 Multiphase Pseudo Pressure............................................................................................................................ 6
C3 Temperature Models......................................................................................................................................... 8
C4 Default Thermal Properties Database ............................................................................................................ 11
C4.1 Dry Rock Properties ...................................................................................................................................... 11
C4.2 Rock In Situ Fluids ........................................................................................................................................ 12
C4.3 Downhole Equipment .................................................................................................................................... 12
C5 Rough Approximation Temperature Model..................................................................................................... 12
C6 Choke Calculation........................................................................................................................................... 13
C7 Multi-Phase Flow Correlations........................................................................................................................ 14
Appendix D Dietz Shape Factors .............................................................................................................................. 1
Appendix E File Formats ........................................................................................................................................... 1
E1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................ 1
E2 External PVT Tables ............................................................................................................................................. 1
E3 Lift Curves ............................................................................................................................................................. 2
E4 IPR ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3
E5 ESP PUMPS ......................................................................................................................................................... 3
E6 ESP MOTORS ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
E7 ESP CABLES ........................................................................................................................................................ 4
E8 HSP PUMPS ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
E9 HSP TURBINES.................................................................................................................................................... 5

1 Introduction
Welcome to PROSPER, Petroleum Experts Limited's advanced PROduction and
Systems PERformance analysis software. PROSPER can assist the production or
reservoir engineer to predict tubing and pipeline hydraulics and temperatures with
accuracy and speed. PROSPERs powerful sensitivity calculation features enable
existing designs to be optimised and the effects of future changes in system
parameters to be assessed.
By separately modelling each component of the producing well system, then

allowing the User to verify each model subsystem by performance matching,
PROSPER ensures that the calculations are as accurate as possible. Once a
system model has been tuned to real field data, PROSPER can be confidently used
to model the well in different scenarios and to make forward predictions of reservoir
pressure based on surface production data.
1.1 Using PROSPER

These are the main features available in PROSPER:
1. PROSPER is a fundamental element in the Integrated Production Model

(IPM) as defined by Petroleum Experts, linking to GAP, the production
network optimisation program for gathering system modelling and MBAL, the
reservoir engineering and modelling tool, for making fully integrated total
system modelling and production forecasting.
2. Its PVT section which can generate fluid properties using standard
correlations and allows them to be modified to better fit measured lab data.
PROSPER allows detailed PVT data in the form of tables to be imported for
use in the calculations. A third option is to use the Equation of State method.
This option also allows the User to enter the equation of state model
parameters and uses the standard Peng-Robinson EOS model to generate
properties given a multi-stage separator scheme. With this option the Users
can also import all PVT data in the form of tables, which could have been
generated using their own proprietary EOS models.
3. The tool can be used to model reservoir inflow performance (IPR) for single,
multilayer, or multilateral wells with complex and highly deviated
completions, optimising all aspects of a completion design including
perforation details and gravel packing.
4. It can be used to accurately predict both pressure and temperature profiles

in producing wells and along surface flow lines.
5. The sensitivity calculations capabilities easily allow the engineer to model

and optimise tubing, choke and surface flow line performance.
6. It can be used to design, optimise and troubleshoot gas lifted, coiled tubing,
ESP, PCP, HSP (hydraulic pump), Jet pump equipped wells (NEW!!!).
2 - 10 Chapter 1 - Introduction
7. Its choke calculator can be used to predict flow rates given the choke size,
or the choke size for a specified production rate and of course, the pressure
drop across a known choke at a specified rate.
8. The multiphase flow correlations implemented can be adjusted to match

measured field data to generate vertical lift performance curves (VLP) for
use in simulators and network models.
9. The tool can utilise externally programmed dynamic link libraries (DLL) for
multiphase flow correlations, Equation of State (EOS) PVT calculations,
choke calculations and Inflow (IPR) models.
10. The tool can be used in a matching or predictive mode. Matching of real
data is available in the PVT, IPR, Gradient matching and VLP matching
sections.
• In matching mode, real data can be entered and matched using non-
linear regression methods to create custom correlations that fit the
input data.
• In predictive mode, the correlations created can be used to make
estimates of future well performance.
11. PROSPER can be used to model complex (topographically) and extensive (in
length) surface pipelines. Complex steady state slug analysis can also be
performed by taking into account slug build up and decay due to pipeline
topography, giving an indication of expected slug length and frequency.
12. The software also accepts Black Oil PVT tables directly from Petroleum
Experts’ PVTP thermodynamics analysis program. EOS fluid
characterisation parameters can also be directly imported.
13. A flexible units system has been implemented. Data may be input using one
set of units and output using a second set of units. Validation limits and
display resolution can be independently set for each variable type.
14. It has the utility for flagging of potential hydrate formation, if the User
chooses this in the options. The additional input required for this calculation
is the hydration formation tables as a part of PVT.
15. The following situations can be modelled:
Fluid Type:
• Oil and Water (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
• Dry and Wet Gas (Black oil or Equation of State PVT)
• Retrograde Condensate (Black Oil or Equation of State PVT)
• Emulsion viscosity can be optionally applied for any combination of
inflow, tubing and ESP’s or HSP’s.
• Separation mode: Single or Two Stage separation or Multistage (for
Compositional model)
• Modelling of non-Newtonian fluids for oil wells
• Modelling of Condensed Water Vapour for gas wells
Chapter 1 - Introduction 3-10
Well Flow Configuration:

• Tubing or Annular flow or Tubing + Annular flow
• Producer or Injector
Artificial Lift Method:

• Naturally flowing well
• Gas lifted well
• Electric submersible pump (ESP)
• Hydraulic drive downhole pump (HSP)
• Progressive Cavity Pumps
• Jet Pumps NEW!!!
• Gas Lift with Coiled Tubing
• Injection of Diluents NEW!!!
• Multiphase Pumps NEW!!!
Prediction Type:
• Pressure Only
• Pressure and Temperature Offshore
• Pressure and Temperature on Land
Temperature Model:
• Enthalpy Balance
• Rough Approximation
• Improved Approximation
Completion:
• Cased Hole
• Open Hole
• Gravel Pack
Reservoir:
• Single Well
• Multi-lateral Well in a Multi-layered Reservoir
• Gas Coning (Rate dependent GOR calculator)
1.2 PROSPER and Systems Analysis

PROSPER can help petroleum producers maximise their production earnings by
providing the means to critically analyse the performance of each producing well.
Each well system component that contributes to overall performance is separately
modelled: Inflow performance, pressure drop in the tubing and pressure losses in
the surface gathering system are individually calculated and performance matched
where possible.
Well potential and producing pressure losses are both dependent on fluid (PVT)
properties. The accuracy of systems analysis calculations is therefore dependent
on the accuracy of the fluid properties model (i.e. PVT). The pressure drop in a
pipeline or wellbore is the summation of 3 components:
PROSPER MANUAL
• Gravity head
• Friction loss
• Acceleration
i.e. ∆ptotal = ∆pgravity + ∆p friction + ∆pacceleration
The gravity component is due to the density of the fluid mixture at each point in the
system and is a complex function of the relative velocity of the phases present.
PROSPER makes a flash computation at each calculation step to determine the
proportion of oil, water and gas present. The no-slip density is then calculated
using the proportions of each phase and the predicted density at each pressure and
temperature step.
Industry standard 2-phase correlations are then applied to determine the increase
in apparent fluid density due to the higher vertical velocity of gas compared to oil
and water (slippage). The gravity head loss is proportional to the fluid density
corrected for slip. The slip correction to be applied depends on the flow regime,
fluid velocity etc. The need for an accurate PVT description for predicting the
gravity head loss is clear.
Friction losses are controlled by fluid viscosity and geometric factors (pipe diameter
and roughness). In the majority of oilfield applications, (i.e. large elevation
difference between inlet and outlet with liquids present) the gravitational component
normally accounts for around 90% of the overall head loss. Therefore, the total
pressure drop function is not particularly sensitive to the value of the friction loss
coefficient.
The acceleration component is usually small except in systems involving significant

fluid expansion. However, it is accounted for in all PROSPER calculations.
Historically, systems analysis software has lumped all flowing pressure loss terms
together and allowed the User to match real data by adjusting the roughness
coefficient of the friction loss term. This will certainly achieve a match for a
particular rate, but cannot be expected to achieve a match over a significant range
of rates due to the different dependencies of the gravity and friction loss terms on
liquid velocity.
PROSPERs approach is to first construct a robust PVT model for the reservoir fluid.
Entering laboratory PVT data and adjusting the correlation model until it fits the
measured data improve the accuracy of forward prediction.
Constructing an accurate PVT model confines the uncertainty in the gravity loss
term to the slip correction only.
In the VLP matching phase, PROSPER divides the total pressure loss into friction
and gravity components and uses a non-linear regression technique to separately
optimise the value of each component. Not only does the matching process result
in a more accurate model, it will quickly highlight inconsistencies in either the PVT
or equipment description.
Provided sufficiently accurate field data is available, robust PVT, IPR and VLP
models can be prepared by performance matching. Each model component is
separately validated; therefore dependency on other components of the well model

is eliminated. Trouble shooting changes in production rates is simplified as the
matching process can eliminate many variables that could otherwise confuse the
situation.
1.2.1 A Note About PROSPER

PROSPER can predict either Pressure Only or Pressure and Temperature. The
Pressure Only option makes PROSPER a "Systems Analysis" package in the
traditional sense. In Pressure Only mode, the well temperature profile must be
input by the User. Temperature data is normally recorded whenever a pressure
survey is made, as the temperature is required to correct the downhole pressure
readings. This type of calculation is fast and sufficiently accurate for the majority of
pressure loss calculation purposes.
The Pressure and Temperature calculation option will generate both temperature
and pressure profiles. Three temperature models are provided. The Rough
Approximation model utilises a User-input overall heat transfer coefficient. It
determines the steady state temperature profile from the mass flow rates of oil,
water and gas before commencing the pressure loss calculations. This method
runs quickly, but unless calibrated using measured temperature data, it is not
accurate.
The Enthalpy Balance model calculates the heat transfer coefficients at each
calculation step by considering heat flow and enthalpy changes. The Joule
Thompson effect, convection and radiation are modelled. These calculations
require considerably more input data than for pressure only calculations and must
commence from a known temperature and pressure (the sand face for producers or
wellhead for injectors). Computation times are longer than for the Rough
Approximation option, but this method is predictive and gives accurate results
over a wide range of conditions. The Enthalpy Balance model is completely
transient and can be used to study temperature changes over time.
Temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:
• long pipelines transporting Retrograde Condensate.

• subsea wells with long flowlines
• high pressure/temperature exploration wells
• predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/hydrate deposits
The production riser is properly accounted for by PROSPER. The User-input riser
geometry determines the heat loss coefficients calculated by the program between
the seabed and wellhead.
The Improved Approximation is a full Enthalpy Balance model, with the difference
that the heat exchange coefficient is not calculated but defined by the User along
the completion. Like the Enthalpy Balance model, the Joule Thompson effect is
accounted for.
PROSPER is also able to predict condensate liquid drop out using either black oil or
compositional models.
PROSPER MANUAL
PROSPER uses a "Smart Menu" system. Only data relevant to a particular problem
need to be entered.
The flow chart shown over leaf gives an outline of the calculation steps required to
carry out a simple systems analysis using PROSPER.

1.3 Examples
To help illustrate the power of PROSPER, examples are provided with the program.
We suggest running through them to become familiar with the program and its
various options. These examples are in ~\samples\PROSPER directory. The location
of this directory depends on where the program has been installed.
A very useful Quick Start Guide (NEW!!!) will provide the User with an example
showing how to build, match and use a well model.
1.3.1 Example 1 – Naturally Flowing Oil Well

File: Oilwell.out
The objectives of this example are to:
• Show how removing skin can increase production.
• Show how increasing the tubing size can increase production.
• Generate lift curves for a reservoir simulator.
This example demonstrates how to:

• Match the PVT correlations to real data.
• Match the multiphase flow correlations to real data using VLP matching.
• Use IPR matching to determine reservoir pressure.
• Run a system analysis with sensitivities.
• Run a pressure versus depth gradient calculation.
• Generate vertical lift tables for a reservoir simulator.
1.3.2 Example 2 – Gas Lift Design

File: Gaslift.out
• Find the maximum production rate achievable using gas lift.
• Determine the optimum lift gas injection rate and depth.
• Design the operating and unloading valves.

• Setup the gas lift design parameters.
• Calculate the design production and gas injection rates.
• Space out the valves.
• Determine the valve trim sizes and dome pressures.
• Calculate production sensitivities using the gas lift design.
1.3.3 Example 3 – Well and Flowline Modelling

File: flowline.out
• Model a flowline using PROSPER.
• Apply the Rough Approximation temperature model.
• Examine the effect of the flowline on production rate sensitivities.
PROSPER MANUAL
1.3.4 Example 4 – Temperature Prediction

File: enthalpy.out
This test example shows how to use the Enthalpy Balance temperature model to
predict the wellhead flowing temperature (WHFT) of a high pressure / high
temperature oil well.
1.3.5 Example 5 – ESP Lifted Well

File: espwell.out
• Determine the pump duty required to meet a specified offtake rate
• Select a suitable combination of pump, motor and cable for the service
• Determine the maximum water cut at which the pump can still operate with
the design offtake rate.

• Use existing PVT and VLP data as the basis of a new analysis
• Calculate pump intake and outlet pressures
• Design an ESP system
• Evaluate pump operating point sensitivities
• Calculate a flowing gradient for an ESP equipped well.
1.3.6 Example 6 – HSP Lifted Well

File: hspwell.out
• Select a suitable combination of pump, turbine and cable for the service
• Design an HSP system

1.3.7 Example 7 – Retrograde Condensate Well

File: condex.out, condex2.out, condex3.out
• Calculate condensate PVT using convergence pressure, equation of state
(EOS) and black oil methods
• Compare the production rate results obtained from each method
• Calculate and compare pressure traverses from each method

• Enter reservoir fluid composition data and calculate phase behaviour
• Match laboratory and predicted PVT properties
1.3.8 Example 8 – Gravel Packed well

File: gravel.out
• Design a gravel packed completion for a high rate gas well
• Determine the allowable offtake for a specified drawdown on the formation

• Enter the gravel pack and completion parameters
• Calculate sensitivities on gravel pack and perforation variables
• Calculate the pressure loss across the completion and thereby determine the
drawdown at the sandface.
1.3.9 Example 9 – Horizontal Well – Friction dP

File: hwell.out
The example shows how to set up the input data for a Horizontal well - Friction dP
IPR model. It is based on the OILWELL example file. Note that the reservoir
permeability must be increased from 50 in the base example to 500 milli-darcies in
order to see the friction pressures drop along the wellbore.
1.3.10 Example 10 – Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss

File: mlayer.out
The example shows how to set up the input data for a Multi-Layer IPR model. It is
based on the OILWELL example file.
1.3.11 Example 11 – Multi-lateral well

File: multilat1.out
The example shows how to set up the input data for an ordinary multilateral well.
PROSPER MANUAL
1.3.12 Example 12 – Modelling of a smart well

completion using multilateral option in PROSPER
File: multilat2.out
• Show how a complex smart well completion can be modelled by using
the multilateral option in PROSPER
• Show how different tubing sizes can affect the IPR curve
1.3.13 Example 13 – Gas injector with downhole chokes

using multilateral model
File: multilat3.out
• Go through the step-by-step procedure for defining a multi-lateral gas
injector.
• Determine the gas injection rate into the reservoirs for a series of
wellhead pressures.
• See the effect of varying the choke opening on the injectivity.

• Build multi-lateral gas injectors in PROSPER.
• How to perform sensitivity calculation in multilateral wells.
1.3.14 Example 14 – Multilateral model including PCP

File: multilat-PCP.out
• Go through the step-by-step procedure for defining a multi-lateral well
model.
• Determine if the well can flow on its own.
• Considering multilateral model set a PCP pump and determine the pump
requirements to keep the well flowing.

• Build multi-lateral well model in PROSPER.
• How to set design the pump requirements.

2 File Management
This section describes the menus, options and procedures used in PROSPER to
create new files and open or save existing files. The Units system and how to
define printer settings are also outlined. The menus described in this section are
the PROSPER File menu and Units menu.
The File menu provides additional options such as defining the default data
directory, as well as the facility to establish access links to other programs running
under Windows.
PROSPER will (optionally) open the last file accessed when it starts. PROSPER also
displays a file status screen that shows the application options selected in summary
format: input PVT and IPR data, the equipment type summary and the analysis
output.
To protect the work, good practise is to save the data on a regular basis. This
simple procedure could potentially prevent hours of input and analysis being lost.
2.1 PROSPER Files

PROSPER uses a flexible file structure that enables data to be easily exchanged
between files and other application programs. In PROSPER information is grouped
into the following categories:
• PVT • System
• Analysis • Output
and saved into the following types of data file:
2.1.1 PVT Data (*.PVT)

File containing the well fluid data, PVT match data and any PVT tables entered
under the PVT menu. It is possible to save PVT files separately under different
names, and use them with other input, analysis and output files in PROSPER. This
feature is useful when analysing a number of wells from the same producing pool.
2.1.2 Input Data (*.SIN)

SIN files contain the options selected under the Options menu, in addition to the
well IPR and equipment data entered under the System menu. When an input file
is opened or saved, the program automatically opens and saves a .PVT file with the
same name.
2 - 18 CHAPTER 2 - FILE MANAGEMENT
2.1.3 Analysis Data (*.ANL)

This file contains the analyses and sensitivity input data for the calculations
selected under the Analysis menu. When an analysis file is opened and saved, the
program automatically opens and saves a .PVT & .SIN file with the same name.
GAP and PRODMAN manipulate .ANL files to batch calculate well lift curves.
2.1.4 Output Data (*.OUT)

This file contains the results of the calculations. When an output file is opened or
saved, the program automatically opens and saves a .PVT, .SIN & .ANL file of the
same name.
PROSPER files are ranked by their order of input, which essentially reflects the way
data should be entered into the program, that is from the LEFT to the RIGHT of the
PROSPER menu. It is possible to note that the order of files also corresponds to
options on the menu bar as moving through the program.
The file hierarchy does not prevent the User from creating and combining any
number of input and output data files. Until the User becomes familiar with the
program, we recommend to work with *.OUT files. This can avoid confusion as the
program will automatically open and save the required data files to run a complete
analysis cycle.
More experienced users can take advantage of the flexible file structure to combine
the data files from different wells. This "sharing" of data is useful in areas where
wells have similar fluid properties or reservoir IPR's. If disk space is a concern, the
data contained in a .ANL file together with its complementary .PVT and .SIN files
can be used to re-create a given set of calculation outputs, therefore avoiding the
need to always save large .OUT files on disk.
For example, if one wants to run an analysis with the PVT data of Well 1, the input
data (*.SIN) data of Well 2 and the analysis data of Well 3, the following steps can
be followed to achieve that:
• Open Well 3.ANL
• Open Well 2.SIN
• Recall Well 1.PVT under the PVT menu.
• Under the Options menu, select the processing options.
• Modify the data files if necessary.
• Next, select the Save As command and save the data under a new file
name.

CHAPTER 2 - FILE MANAGEMENT 3 - 18
2.1.5 Creating a New File

While working with PROSPER new input or output data files can be created at any
time. To create a new file, from the File menu choose the New command. This
command does not actually create a new and separate file, but reinitialises the
program input/output data.
2.1.6 Opening an Existing File

Existing data files can be opened quickly and easily at any time during the current
working session. To open a file, from the File menu choose the Open option. It is
possible to select one of the following file types:
• Input Data (. SIN)
• Input and Analysis Data (. ANL)
• Input, Analysis and Output Data (. OUT)
by using the “Files of Type” dropdown box.

The file open dialog is exactly the same as in any Windows program.
2.1.7 Saving a File

When files are opened in PROSPER, the program copies the selected file into the
computer's memory. Any changes to the file are made to the copy in memory. In
the event of a power failure or computer crash, these changes would be completely
lost. To prevent this, we recommend saving the data on a regular basis and
especially before quitting the program.
The Save command stores all the changes made in the active file. By default, the
Save command saves a file under its original name and to the drive and directory
last selected. A prompt will be displayed to select one of the following file types:
Input Data (.SIN)

• Automatically saves the input file and corresponding .PVT file.
Input and Analysis Data (.ANL)

• Automatically saves the analysis data and corresponding .SIN & .PVT
data files.
Input, Analysis and Output Data (.OUT)

• Automatically saves the output results and corresponding .SIN, .PVT &
.ANL files if a file of the same name exists in the selected directory, the
file is overwritten. To avoid overwriting an existing file, use the Save As
command and enter a different file name.
PROSPER MANUAL
2.1.8 Copying a File

The Save As command allows making more than one copy or version of an existing
file.
This command is the same as in any other program running under Windows and
allows to save the PROSPER model in any of the file formats (.SIN, .ANL, .OUT).
2.2 Preferences
The Preferences screen is used to customise the program to r particular
requirements. Click Preferences from the File menu to customise PROSPER. Click
on the appropriate tab at the top of the data entry section in order to change the
option require. The various tabs are described below:
2.2.1 Screen
Figure 2-1
Preferences: Screen Tab
This tab is used to customise the appearance of the PROSPER front screen and all
data entry (dialog) screens.
Dialog Font
This changes the font type and size used to display all data entry screens. This
may be useful to make all dialogs smaller in case of a low-resolution screen or
larger to improve readability in case of a high-resolution screen. Use the Reset
button to reset the dialog screen font to its default value.

Status Screen
Selecting On the screen status information will be continuously displayed and
updated during the program usage. Selecting Off the screen status information
screen will not be displayed (apart from whenever a new file is opened).
Font Height
If the font height is modified then an attempt is made to scale the font so that all
information displayed in each panel on the status screen will be visible. This will
vary depending on the relative size of the program window to the total screen. If
the font height is not modified then some information may not be displayed as the
size of the program window is varied.
Screen Font
Use this option to change the font type and size used to display information on the
status (front) screen of the program.
Label Colour
Change the colour used to display labels on the status screen
Text Colour
Change the colour used to display text on the status screen
Background
Change the colour used for the background of the status screen
Box Colour
Change the colour used for the background of each panel on the status screen
Box Shadow
Change the colour used for the 3D shadow effect on the status screen panels
Box Highlight
Change the colour used for the 3D-highlight effect on the status screen panels
For all of the above “Colour” options the Choose button to the right will bring up a
dialog screen to select an appropriate colour.
PROSPER MANUAL
2.2.2 File
Figure 2-2
Preferences:
File Tab
Use this tab to customise various options relating to file management.
Default Data Directory

The directory where data files are normally stored.
Use the Browse buttons to browse for the appropriate directories.
Default Data Directory Choice

This option determines the directory that is used as the default in file dialog. The
choices are either to always use the default data directory (see above) or to use the
directory of the last file opened or saved.
Location of PROSPER.INI
The PROSPER.INI file is used to store all the customised information for r version of
PROSPER. The normal location is in the WINDOWS directory. If Prosper is based
on a network installation, then this option can to use to ensure that each user of the
program can maintain their own customised settings locally.
Location of ESP Databases

The ESP option in PROSPER is driven by a database of pumps, motors and cables.
This option allows specifying the location of these databases.
Location of Hydraulic Pump Databases

The HSP option in PROSPER is driven by a database of pumps and turbines. This
option allows specifying the location of these databases.
Location of Report Output Files

Use this option to specify the default location of output files from the reporting
subsystem.
Location of User-Created Report Files

Use this option to specify the default location of user-created report templates from
the reporting subsystem
Reload Last File On Start Up

Specifies whether the last file that the User was working with should be
automatically reloaded on program start up.
Number of File Names Saved

Specifies the number of previously used files that are to be displayed on the file
menu.
Confirm Calculations
Switches (on or off) the message that appears at the end of any calculation
function.
2.2.3 Plot
Figure 2-3
Preferences
Plot Tab
Use this tab to set defaults for all aspects of the plot.
Always Use Plot Defaults

Each time a plot is done default values will be used rather than the last selected
values for each particular plot type
X Grid Blocks
Number of GAPs between grid lines on X-axis. (Range 1-20)
Y Grid Blocks
PROSPER MANUAL
Number of Gaps between grid lines on Y-axis. (Range 1-20)
Plot Labels
Shows or hides the plot labels.
Plot Scales
Shows or hides the plot scales
Plot Legend
Shows or hides the plot legend. If the legend is hidden, the body of the plot will
expand to fill the whole window.
Scaling Method
Endpoint or rounded. Endpoint means the scales are taken from the exact
extremities of the data being plotted. Rounded means that ranges are chosen to
surround the data but with whole numbers ensured for the end points and the
gridline intervals.
Grid Line Type

Selects from dotted lines, dashed lines, solid lines or tick marks.
Mouse Readout
Switches the mouse cursor position readout no or off.
Date Stamp Title

Selects to append the current data and time to the plot title or not
Line Thickness
To select the thickness of plotted lines
Vertical Font
Selects the default font for all vertical text (Y-axis)
Horizontal Font
Selects the default font for all horizontal text
Default Colours
Sets the default colour scheme for the plot

2.2.4 User Applications
Figure 2-4
Preferences
User Applications Tab
This tab allows to add up to four of the User’s favourite or most-often used
Windows applications to the PROSPER menu. Although PROSPER has a very flexible
reporting system the User may wish to use a spreadsheet (such as EXCEL), a
word processor (such as WORD) and a presentation package (such as Power
Point) to build presentation quality reports using PROSPER output in a slick and
efficient manner.
Any output (plots and reports) produced by PROSPER is automatically copied to the
Clipboard. From there it can easily be pasted into one of the above-mentioned
applications using one simple keystroke. Using the power and flexibility of the
chosen application, high quality reports and presentations can be easily prepared.
All plots can be saved in Windows Metafile format. These can be easily read by
a word processing package or presentation graphics package and give the
maximum flexibility for user customisation.
All reports can be saved in TSV (Tab Separated Variable) format using the Export
facility that means they will automatically be tabulated when read into the favourite
spreadsheet.
Enter a description and a command line for each application to be added to the
PROSPER menu.
The description is the data that appears on the menu.

The command line is the full path name of the program to execute.
Use the Browse buttons to browse for the application requires. Use the Clear
buttons to initialise the appropriate application information.
PROSPER MANUAL
2.2.5 Limits
Figure 2-5
Preferences
Limits Tab
This tab allows the User to specify limiting values and tolerances for the following
parameters:
- Maximum AOF for OIL

- Maximum AOF for GAS
- Maximum AOF for RETROGRADE CONDENSATE
- Minimum GLR Injected for GAP Performance Curves
- VLP Pressure Display Limit: Twice Reservoir Pressure or Unlimited. This controls the
display of large VLP values in SYSTEM calculations
- HSP calculation settings
- Calculation Step Length. It specifies the calculation step during pressure drop
calculation. If No Use Correlation Step Length is selected (default), the flow
correlation will use its internal step
- Document TPD Files. This option adds up explanatory comments in VLP export
files

2.2.6 Units
Figure 2-6
Preferences
Units Tab
This tab allows specifying the default Units Systems to use for new files.
If setting the option "Always Use Default Units" to "Yes", then the units displayed for
any file read in will always be set to the default choice, regardless of the settings in
the file.
2.3 Software Key Maintenance

Viewing the Software Key
The Software Key command activates the REMOTE software utility program that
allows reading the software protection key. This facility allows to see what
programs are currently enabled, their expiry date, and user authorisation codes and
key number. This utility is also used to update the software key. Software keys
must be updated when new programs or modules are required or the key expiry
date changed.
2.4 Evaluate OpenServer Statement

This option can be used to test the OpenServer commands and variables. In the
Evaluate OpenServer screen a field is available where to input the OS string, which
can correspond to a parameter or to a command:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 2-7
Evaluate Open
server command
Type or Paste the OS string in the String field, then select one of basic OS
commands (DoGet, DoSet, DoCommand), if required enter the Value (valid only if
using DoSet) and click Evaluate to perform the function.
In the Returned value it is possible to read the results of the operation.
2.5 User Correlations

PROSPER has been designed to accept outside calculation modules for fluid flow
correlations, Equation of State PVTP calculations, choke models (pressure loss
through restrictions), inflow performance calculations, HSP Gas Derating models,
viscosity models. Users can obtain an authoring kit from Petroleum Experts to enable
the building of a compatible Dynamic Link Library for use in PROSPER.
Before a DLL can be accessed, it must first be installed into PROSPER. This is
done by clicking File ⏐ User Correlations. Select either Flow Correlation, Equation
of State Model, Choke Correlation or Inflow Performance Model. PROSPER will
display a list of the currently installed DLLs of the selected type. To add a
correlation, click Add and select the appropriate file from the file dialogue. Click OK
and it will be hooked into PROSPER.
MODEL EXTENSION
Flow Correlation .COR
Equation of State PVTP .EOS
Model
Choke Correlation .CHK
Inflow Performance Model .RSM
Information about particular correlations can be obtained by clicking the Info button.
A screen similar to the following will be displayed.

Figure 2-8
Flow Correlation
Information
2.6 Printing
2.6.1 Preparing to Print

Once selected a printer and the appropriate set-up options, printing reports is
simple. When ready to print, always verify that the printer is plugged in, on-line and
connected to the machine. The Printer Setup command of the File menu allows to
select a printer and define its set-up options.
2.6.2 Selecting and configuring a Printer

Select the correct printer from the list box provided. Only printers that have been
installed under Windows will be displayed.
The configuration of the printer follows the exact guidelines of any other software
running under Windows.
2.6.3 Printing Export Data

Prior to printing export data, it is always a good idea to save the data file(s). In the
unlikely event that a printer error or some other unforeseen problem occurs, this
simple procedure could prevent the work from being lost.
To print export data, select the Output menu and the Export option. Select the
sections to report on the dialogue box. The program will lead the User through a
series of input screens to set up the required report sections. From the main
dialogue box, select a destination for r data.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 2-9
Output Results Reports
The appearance of printed reports is controlled by the export data set-up options
that have been set.
Click Setup to display the following screen:
Figure 2-10
Export Data Printer
Options
Select a suitable font and set the margins etc. that will be used for printed export
data. Only non-proportional fonts are allowed in reports to maintain vertical
alignment of the columns.
PROSPER default font is recognised by most print set-ups. To avoid
Â potential printing problems, always set up the system to use a font
that is supported on the system prior to printing PROSPER export data
for the first time.
Click OK to return to the output screen. Clicking Print initiates generation of the
export data and sends it to the selected destination.

Export data can be sent to the following entities:
• Printer - the primary printer as set up under Windows.

• File - Creates an ASCII data file and saves it. Clicking Print will display a
dialogue box that requests a file name and destination. Enter a
suitable file name (the program automatically appends a ".PRN"
extension) and click OK to save the file. The Fixed Format option
saves a file in a printer ready format that can be imported into a
DOS based word processor or text editor. Use the Tab Delimited
format to save a file suitable for importing directly into a
spreadsheet such as EXCEL.
• Clipboard - Clicking Print after selecting this option copies the data onto the
Windows clipboard. From the Clipboard, can view, edit and paste
the data directly into another Windows application. E.g. a word
processing program. Tab delimited data can be pasted directly into
spreadsheets.
• Screen - Clicking Print after selecting this option allows viewing the report on
the screen. Scroll through the data using the scrolling thumbs or
arrows. When finished viewing, click OK to return to the main
menu.
2.6.4 Selecting an Exported Data to Print

It is not necessary to be in PROSPER to print a report. Provided to have previously
generated a report file (*.PRN), a report can be easily opened and imported into
any word or spreadsheet program. If the Tab Delimited option was selected, this
will allow the User to easily create tables and/or format the data using a word
processor.
2.6.5 Word Processing in PROSPER

The WordPad command on the File menu gives direct access to the Windows word
processing package. This application can be used to make notes of the current
analysis for later inclusion in reports. If no alternative word processing package is
available, it is possible to use WordPad to edit, format and print the reports.
2.6.6 Clipboard Command

The Clipboard command on the File menu gives direct access to the Windows
clipboard viewer. This feature is useful for checking data input or intermediate
results from e.g. gas lift design calculations that are written to the clipboard by
PROSPER.
PROSPER MANUAL
2.7 Command Buttons

The following command buttons are used in PROSPER.
All This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It will select all input parameters and data
points for automated editing.
Calculate Performs the various calculations on the input parameters for the
correlations selected.
Cancel Returns to the previous screen. Any changes or modifications will be

ignored by the system.
Continue Continues to the next input screen. Any changes to the fields will be
saved and retained in memory for later calculations. A warning
message will be displayed when fields requiring input data are left
blank.
Copy To copy existing data points, select the line entries to duplicate and
click on Copy. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Copy
again. Subsequent line entries will be not be overwritten by this
operation.
Correlations Displays the results of any matching performed under the VLP/IPR
Match option.
Delete This command button is used in the Equipment and Gas Lifted (safety
equipment) option screens. It allows deleting individual or several data
points.
To delete, select the line entries to erase and click on Delete. If one
wishes to delete all existing line entries, click All and then Delete. The
program will clear the input screen.
Done Returns to the previous menu. Any changes or modifications will be

retained in memory by the program.
Edit This command button is used in the main Equipment screen. One or
more items can be modified at a time. When used with 'All', all items
will be selected for editing.
Export Brings up the Data Export interface. This will be specific to the data on
the active window.
Help Provides on screen help for PROSPER. For general information, press
the 'ALT' and 'H' keys together in the Main menu, or the Index button
under any help screen. Specific help screens are also available for
each window.

Import Calls up the general import interface that allows to grab data from any
text file. This button will usually be found where tabular data is to be
input.
Insert This allows to add one or several data points providing there are
sufficient entry fields. Select the line number where to add a new entry
and click on Insert. The program will move existing line entries down to
accommodate the inserted line(s).
Main Returns to the Main Application Menu. Any changes or modifications

will be saved and retained in memory by the program.
Match Displays a variable screen where match data can be entered in order to
adjust existing correlations to fit real data.
Move Allows to re-arrange data points. Select the line(s) to transfer and click
on Move. Next, select the destination line(s) and click on Move again.
Subsequent line entries will be moved down to accommodate the
transferred line(s).
Plot Plots any calculated results and displays them on screen. Hard copies
of the screen display can be printed by selecting the Hardcopy
command button on the Plot screen.
Recall Allows to recall and existing PVTP file. The User will be prompted for
the directory and name of the file.
Report Calls up the reporting interface with a report that is specific to the active
window. This is generally found on windows that display the results of
calculations. It is then possible to choose to print this report. The report
is generated from a system report template.
Reset Resets the Match parameters in order to reinstate the original textbook
correlations.
Save Saves a current PVTP file. If this is a new data file, the User will be
prompted for a file name.
Summary Displays a summary screen of the input equipment parameters or
system units.
The following command buttons are used in the Plot Menu and Plot screens.
Clipboard Sends black and white or colour copies of the screen plot to the
Windows Clipboard where it may be retrieved by a word processing
program for inclusion in reports.
Colours Allows to define the screen display colours of r plot labels, scales, grids,
etc.
Finish Returns to the previous menu or screen.
PROSPER MANUAL
Hardcopy Generates black and white or colour print copies of the screen plot. It is
automatically sent to the device selected in \.
Labels Allows to label r plot. All plot labels are stored in memory and saved
when Output files are generated.
Replot Re-displays the original screen.
Scales Allows to re-define the minimum and maximum values for the X and Y
plot axes.

3 Quick Start Guide
This chapter provides the User with an example that shows the basic features of
PROSPER. Particular focus is given to:
- Model setup and input data
- Matching and quality check of the model
- Utilising the model to determine the well performance with changing
conditions, generate flowing gradients and Vertical Lift Performance curves
for GAP and a wide range of reservoir simulators
3.1 Example – Naturally Flowing Oil Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/oilwell.out
The main objectives of this example are to show:

• How to set up a PROSPER model for an oil well
• How to match the PVT model to lab data
• How to match the model to a well test
• How to perform calculation of well performance, gradient traverse and
vertical lift performance curves
• Export lift curves to GAP and third party software
3.1.1 Model Set Up

Begin by starting the program. From the PROSPER main menu, select File⏐New to
reinitialise the program input and output files. The ‘New’ menu item under File is only
available if a file has already been loaded.
2 - 33 CHAPTER 4 – QUICK START GUIDE
Figure 3.1:
Prosper main screen
The Prosper main screen is divided into 5 main sections:

• Options
• PVT Data
• Equipment Data
• IPR Data
• Calculation Summary
The first 4 sections are input data screens, whilst the last contains all the calculation
and design features.
Each of these sections is directly accessible from the PROSPER main screen by
double clicking on them, or from the menu toolbar, where their access is ordered
from left to right, top to bottom. This order reflects the recommended workflow to
follow to set up the model.
In the following we will use the menu toolbar
3.1.1.1 Options
To begin setting up the system options, select Options⏐Options or double-click on
the ‘SUMMARY DATA’ area and make the following selections:
• Fluid: Oil and Water

• PVT Method: Black Oil
• Separator: Single-Stage Separator
• Flow type: Tubing Flow
• Emulsions: No
• Well type: Producer
• Lift method: Naturally Flowing Well
• Predicting: Pressure and temperature (Offshore)
• Model: Rough approximation
• Calculation range: Full System

CHAPTER 3 – QUICK START GUIDE 3 - 33
• Display: Show calculating data

• Completion: Cased Hole
• Gravel pack: No
Then click Done to exit this screen.
This completes the main system setup and reinitialises the program. If the status
screen is being displayed, the main system areas (‘SUMMARY DATA’, ‘PVT DATA’,
‘IPR DATA’, ‘EQUIPMENT DATA’ and ‘CALCULATION SUMMARY’) can be now easily
accessed.
3.1.1.2 PVT Data

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate how to enter the PVT model and to
match the PVT correlations to real PVT data.
The steps we will follow are the following:

1. Enter PVT Black Oil model
2. Enter PVT match data
3. Match the PVT Black Oil correlations to the PVT match data entered and
choose the best correlation
The last step can be also used to quality check the input data.
1. Enter Black Oil model
In the following table there are the parameters characterising the Black Oil model for
this example:
Solution GOR 820 scf/STB

Oil Gravity 34°API
Gas Gravity 0.833
Water Salinity 150000 ppm
% H2S 0
% CO2 0
%N2 0
Â The solution GOR is the gas dissolved in the oil at the original bubble
point pressure. If the well also produces free gas, it should not be
included here.
PROSPER MANUAL
In order to enter the Black Oil model, access the PVT section by selecting PVT⎪Input
Data from the menu toolbar
Figure 3.2:
PVT input screen
2. Enter PVT match data
In the PVT main section click Match Data and enter the laboratory measured PVT
flash data. Up to 5 tables can be entered at different temperatures.
Enter the following match data:
Temperature 210 deg F

Bubble Point 3256 psig
Pressure 3256 psig
GOR 820 scf/STB
Oil FVF 1.491 RB/STB
Oil Viscosity 0.435 cP
In this very simple example we are entering only data referring to the bubble point,
but bear in mind that in each table data up to 10 values of pressure can be entered.

Figure 3.3:
PVT Match Data
Once entered the above data, click Done to return to the main PVT Data input
screen.
3. Match the PVT Black Oil correlations to the PVT match data entered and
choose the best correlation
The following step is to tune the black oil correlations in order to match the lab data
entered. In this way we make sure that the PVT model we are going to use
reproduces measured data.
To match the correlations to the laboratory measured data, from the main PVT input
data screen select Regression:
Figure 3.4:
Regression screen
Then Select Match All to run the regression calculation.

At this point the program performs a non-linear regression to adjust the correlations
to best fit the laboratory data by applying a multiplier (Parameter 1) and a shift
(Parameter 2) to each the correlations. Click OK when the regression is finished.
PROSPER MANUAL
To access the calculated match parameters select Parameters:
Figure 3.5:
Correlation Parameters
screen
This table reports the list of match parameters for all the PVT properties for each
correlation.
Please note that additional match parameters (Parameter 3 and 4) have been
introduced to allow the FVF to be independently tuned below (P1 and P2) and above
(P3 and P4) the bubble point.
The less correction a correlation requires to fit the measured data, the better it is.
In particular, the closer to 1 is Parameter 1, the better the correlation.
Note that the displayed standard deviation shows how well the matching process
converges: the higher the Standard Deviation, the worse the matching.
Inspecting the above reported table, Standing has for this example the best overall fit
for Pb, GOR and FVF whilst Beggs et al fits best for the oil viscosity. Therefore,
Standing will be selected to correlate Pb, GOR and FVF and Beggs et al for the oil
viscosity.
Click Done to exit screen.
Make sure that Standing and Beggs et al have been selected in the Correlations input
box in the main PVT panel:

Figure 3.6:
screen
To be noticed also the flashing green message showing that the

PVT model has been matched.
The matched data can be plotted by clicking Plot from the regression menu as in the
example below:
Figure 3.7:
Matched PVT Plot
All further calculations will be performed using the matched PVT data unless the
match parameters are subsequently reset from the Correlations menu
This completes the PVT input and matching process.
PROSPER MANUAL
3.1.1.3 Equipment Data

The next task is to define the downhole and surface equipment.
For this example, this is the completion to model and the Deviation Survey table:
Measured True Vertical

SSSV Depth Depth
1000 ft (feet) (feet)
Casing 8” 0 0
4300 4273
4600 4528
4900 4800
Tubing ID 11300 10350
4000 ft
3.958” 11400 10430
Casing 6”
11000 ft
MD
11400 ft
MD
The equipment to specify in PROSPER is the one that the fluid “sees” from the
bottomhole up to the wellhead. The bottomhole corresponds at the top of the
perforations and is the point at which the Vertical Lift Performance curves (VLP) and
the Inflow Performance Relationships (IPR) are referred.
In this case the equipment to be entered is from top to bottom:

• Tubing 3.958” from 0 ft MD to 1000 ft MD
• SSSV @ 1000 ft MD
• Tubing 3.958” from 1000 ft MD to 11000 ft MD
• Casing 6” from 11000 ft MD to 11400 ft MD
To enter the equipment data select System⎪Equipment from the main menu:
1 2
Figure 3.8:
Equipment data
screen
It is possible to enter the data screen by screen, or, more comfortably, go through
the entry screens automatically starting with the well deviation survey. To do so,
select first All, then Edit.
The first screen displayed is the Deviation Survey:
Figure 3.9:
Deviation Survey
While entering the deviation survey, PROSPER calculates automatically the

cumulative displacement and the angle of the well. It is also possible to plot the well
profile.
Once the deviation is entered, click on Done to go to the Surface Equipment screen:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 3.10:
Surface Equipment
This screen allows the User to describe the equipment of a surface pipeline. For this
example, leave blank and click on Cancel to go on to the Downhole Equipment
screen:
Figure 3.11:
Downhole Equipment
To select the equipment (Tubing, Casing, SSSV, etc.) click in the Type filed and
select from the drop-down menu.
As already pointed out previously, only the equipment in which the fluid flows must
be entered. Note that the Xmas tree elevation has been taken to be the same as the
deviation survey reference.
Descriptive information about the downhole equipment can be written in the label
fields as reminder.
Click Done to advance to the Geothermal Gradient screen and enter the following:

Measured Fluid
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 45
11400 210
Overall heat transfer coefficient : 8 BTU/hr/ft2/F
Figure 3.12:
Geothermal Gradient
screen
Then Done to go to the next screen, which reports the Average Heat Capacities:
Figure 3.13:
Average Heat Capacities
Click Done to accept the default value.
This completes the equipment input for the well.

It is possible to visualise the deviation and equipment entered by clicking on
Summary:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 3.14:
Equipment data
screen
And then Draw Downhole:
Figure 3.15:
Equipment data screen
This is a very useful tool to assess eventual mistyping.

Click Main to return to the PROSPER main screen (status screen).
3.1.1.4 IPR Data

The next task is to enter the Inflow Performance model.
To do that, select from the main menu System⎪Inflow performance.
The IPR input screen is then displayed:

Figure 3.16:
IPR input screen
In this screen the IPR model can be selected and some fundamental reservoir
parameters are entered.
Select the Darcy IPR method and enter the following in the IPR Select Model screen:
Mechanical / Geometrical Skin Enter skin by hand

Reservoir pressure 5000 psig (Average reservoir
pressure)
Reservoir temperature 210 deg F
Water Cut 0%
Total GOR 820 scf/STB
Relative Permeability No
Figure 3.17:
IPR input screen
The following section to access is the Input Data screen. The Input Data screen
contains all the parameters characterising the selected Inflow model and the
Geometrical Skin entry.
PROSPER MANUAL
Click on the Input Data button in the top right hand corner of the window, then enter
the following reservoir data:
Reservoir Permeability 50 md
Reservoir Thickness 200 feet
Drainage Area 500 acres
Dietz Shape Factor 31.6 (for a circular drainage area)
Wellbore Radius 0.354 feet
Figure 3.18:
IPR input screen
Then click of the Mech/Geom Skin tab and enter a Skin of 4.
Figure 3.19:
Mechanical/Geometric Skin
entry screen
Click Calculate to display the following IPR plot:

Figure 3.20:
Darcy IPR Plot
This completes the IPR definition.

The suggestion is always to calculate the IPR whenever something is changed in the
IPR section.
Return to the main menu by clicking Main.
3.1.2 Matching of the model to a test

The objective of this section is to show the User how to match the just built Prosper
model to well test data.
The matching process consists of two main steps:

• Matching of the VLP. The multiphase flow correlation will be tuned in
order to match a downhole pressure measurement
• Matching of the IPR. The IPR will be tuned so that the intersection
VLP/IPR will match the production rate as per well test
3.1.2.1 VLP Matching

The matching of the multiphase flow correlation will be carried out following these
steps:
1. Enter the well test data
2. Compare the multiphase flow correlations (QC) and select the best
correlation
3. Match the correlation to the test
PROSPER MANUAL
1. Enter the well test data

The matching of the well model to a well test is performed within the VLP/IPR
matching section. In order to access this section, from the main menu toolbar select
Matching⎪Matching⎪VLP/IPR (Quality Check):
Figure 3.21:
VLP/IPR (Quality Check)
screen
This screen contains a table that can host up to 1000 well tests.
Enter here the well test data, which for this example are:
THP THT Water Liquid Gauge Gauge GOR GOR

Cut Rate Depth Pressure Free
[psig] [deg F] [%] [STB/d] [ft] [psig] [scf/STB] [scf/STB]
930 134 15 7200 11000 3940 820 0
Figure 3.22:
screen
2. Compare the multiphase flow correlations (QC) and select the best
correlation
Before running the comparison of the correlations, it is possible to tune the
temperature prediction model (in this case Rough Approximation) to match the
temperature measurement of the test. To do that, select the test by clicking on its
row number:

Figure 3.23:
screen – test selection
Click on the row

number to select
the test
And then click on Estimate U value. The program will calculate the value of the
overall heat exchange coefficient that matches the well test temperature
measurement:
Figure 3.24:
Estimate U Value
results
Click Ok, then Done to go to the main panel. Then go to the Geothermal Gradient
screen in the Equipment Data area and enter the just determined U value:
Figure 3.25:
Geothermal Gradient
At this point it is possible to run the correlation comparison.

As done above, select the test and then select Correlation Comparison. The program
will first report the U value entered in the Geothermal Gradient, then OK and on the
right hand side select the correlation to compare.
In this case we will select: Hagedorn Brown, Fancher Brown, Petroleum Experts 2, Petroleum
Experts 4, and Duns and Ros Modified.
The two correlations Fancher Brown and Duns and Ros Modified are used only for
quality check purpose. In fact:
PROSPER MANUAL
- Fancher Brown is a no-slip correlation, and as such underestimates the

pressure drop along the completion. This represents the minimum limit for the
pressure gradient.
- Duns and Ros Modified, instead, in case of slug flow, overestimates the
pressure drop. This means that, if the flow regime is slug, this correlation
represents the maximum limit for the pressure gradient.
If the test data are consistent, the test point should be comprised within the
boundaries provided by these two correlations. If not, the data should be reviewed.
Further details on the flow correlations can be found in menu Help⎪Flow
Correlations.
Figure 3.26:
Tubing Correlation
Comparison
Then Calculate and Calculate again. The program will determine the pressure
gradient traverses for the selected correlations. Plot to visualise the gradients and
the well test:

Figure 3.27:
Gradient traverses plot
From the analysis of this plot two main considerations can be done:
- The well test measurement lies within the boundaries set by the two
correlations Fancher-Brown and Duns and Ros Modified. This means that the
test is ok
- Zooming the plot (draw a box around the desired area) it is possible to notice
that PE2 is the closest correlation
Result: the best correlation to use to match this test is Petroleum Experts 2.
3. Match the correlation to the test

Once chosen the best correlation, it is possible to adjust the correlation to best fit the
downhole pressure measurement.
The program does this using a non-linear regression technique which applies
multipliers to the gravity (Parameter 1) and friction (Parameter 2) components of the
pressure drop predicted by the multiphase flow correlation.
To carry out a VLP match, in the VLP/IPR Matching screen select Match VLP as
shown below:
Figure 3.28:
screen
PROSPER MANUAL
In the displayed Match screen select the correlations to match (in this case PE2)
from the list and click on match:
Figure 3.29:
Correlation matching
The program will regress in order to determine a set of match parameters that fit the
test. Click on Statistics to access the results of the regression:
Figure 3.30:
Statistics
Note on the match parameters: if the data is consistent, these two parameters
should be close to unity within ±10% of tolerance. If the difference is bigger, then the
test data used for the matching and the model should be reviewed.
Once matched a correlation, the two match parameters will be appended to the
correlation name to indicate that the correlation selected has been matched:

Figure 3.31:
Estimate U Value results
This completes the VLP matching process.
Click on Done⎪Done to go back to the VLP/IPR matching screen.
Â When more than one test data points are available for flow
correlation calibration, it is recommended to use the following
procedure:
• Use minimum number of test points (possibly one) to
calibrate the correlation.
• Check how well the calibrated model predicts the other test
points (those not used in calibration).
• This ensures reliability of the model in predictive mode.
3.1.2.2 IPR Matching

This step ensures that PROSPER model can reproduce the well test.
The IPR is tuned so that the intersection of VLP and IPR fit the well test rate
measurement.
To run the IPR matching click on VLP/IPR
Figure 3.32:
screen
PROSPER MANUAL
In the following screen select the just matched correlation and calculate the VLP:
Figure 3.33:
screen
PROSPER will compute the VLP curves for the match data (WHP, flow rate, water cut
etc.) using the matched VLP correlation.
PROSPER will use the selected VLP correlation (matched if

Â available) to calculate the flowing pressure at the intake node
depth. This is a convenient way to correct flowing pressures from
gauge depth to the sand face. The calculated flowing pressure
can be entered directly in a Vogel IPR if required.
Then click IPR to access the IPR calculation screen and click on Calculate.
The VLP and IPR lines intersect quite close to the measured data points:
Figure 3.34:
VLP/IPR Plot

We will now adjust the IPR to better match the test points.
• The available parameters for matching depend on the IPR model in use. For
the Darcy-IPR model, permeability, skin or reservoir pressure could be used.
• For this example, we will assume that the well P.I. has not changed - but we
do not have a recent reservoir pressure.
• We will match the IPR by adjusting the reservoir pressure.
In the plot menu toolbar select Finish to go back to the IPR screen and enter a
reservoir pressure of 4982 psig and water cut of 15%:
Figure 3.35:
VLP/IPR Plot
Click | Calculate to see a new plot. The error in bottomhole pressure is now very
low:
Figure 3.36:
VLP/IPR Plot
PROSPER MANUAL
The PROSPER well model is now matched from reservoir to sand face and surface to
sand face using entered low rate well test.
The model is now ready for calculations or validation against further tests.
The following example shows the validation of the model against a high
3.1.2.3 Checking the Model for High Rate Test
Before the model can be used for predictive runs, we will check how well it
reproduces the high rate test, without any matching.
To do so, go to the VLP/ IPR Matching Input data screen.
Enter the high rate test results as shown below in row 2:
THP THT Water Liquid Gauge Gauge GOR GOR

Cut Rate Depth Pressure Free
[psig] [deg F] [%] [STB/d] [ft] [psig] [scf/STB] [scf/STB]
290 157 15 12000 11000 3330 820 0
Go straight to the matching of the IPR:
• Click on VLP/IPR.
• Click on Calculate, with PE2 selected as correlation to compute the VLP
curves for both the test cases.
• Click on IPR to go to the IPR input screens. Do not alter any parameter here.
• Hit Calculate, to generate the IPR and VLP intersection plot with the test data
points.
This gives the following plot:
Figure 3.37:
VLP/IPR Plot

The plot displayed represents the matched VLPs and the IPR.
Â Note that the model is able to reproduce the high rate test also with
accuracy, even though this data has not been used for calibration.
It can now be used with confidence for predicting future production performance.
Click Main⎪Main to return to the PROSPER main screen.
3.1.3 Performing a System Analysis

Now that the PVT, VLP and IPR have been matched to measured data, we can
move onwards and use the model to perform the system analysis, that is to say,
determine the well performance given the reservoir and the flowing conditions (WHP,
Water Cut, GOR) using according to the principles of nodal analysis.
1. Performing a simple nodal analysis

To perform this calculation, select from the menu toolbar Calculation⎪System
(Ipr+Vlp) ⎪3 Variables.
For this example, we will run a System calculation given the following flowing
conditions:
First node
Water Cut GOR
pressure
[%] [scf/STB]
[psig]
250 15 820
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 3.38:
System Calculation screen
Other entries:
• Select Dukler Flannigan for the surface flow line correlation. In this case no
surface pipe is part of the model, so this entry has no effect
• Select Petroleum Experts 2 for the multiphase flow correlation (note the match
parameters have been appended to the correlation name)
• Select Bottom Node as ‘Solution Node’. This selects the bottomhole as
solution node
• Select Automatic Linear for the rate method. This divides the internal [0, AOF]
in 20 values linearly spaced
Click on Continue⎪Continue (for the moment we skip the Select Variables screen)
and then Calculate.
One the calculation is finished the results with the calculated IPR and VLP and the
solution are displayed:

Figure 3.39:
System Calculation
On the right hand side the solution rate and flowing pressures and temperatures are
reported. To plot the VLP/IPR, select Plot:
Figure 3.40:
System Plot
2. Running sensitivities
It is possible to determine the behaviour of the well with changing conditions. To
achieve that, sensitivities can be performed on a number of parameters like WC,
GOR, Reservoir Pressure, and so on.
For this example we will run sensitivities on Water Cut, Skin and Tubing/Pipe
diameter.
Ranges of these parameters:
Parameter Range
Water cut 0, 40, 80 %
Skin 0,2,4
Tubing /Pipe Diameter 3.958, 4.892
PROSPER MANUAL
To run sensitivities, go back to the Select Variables screen, select the variable in
each combo-box and enter the above reported ranges:
Figure 3.41:
Select Variables screen
Then Continue.
The program now asks between which nodes should the tubing size sensitivity be
run:
Figure 3.42:
Elect diameter
range
Select the Xmas tree as First Node and the bottom of the production tubing
(@11,000 ft) as Last Node with the combo boxes.
Click on Continue then Calculate to begin the system analysis calculation.
Once the calculations have finished, click Plot to take a look at the VLP and IPR
curves plotted for the range of sensitivity variables as follows:

Figure 3.43:
VLP/IPR System Plot
Click Finish and return to the system calculation screen.

The solutions points are accessible on the ‘CALCULATION OUTPUT screen in the
‘Solution’ area by selecting the concerned sensitivity variables.
It is possible to generate plots that show how the solution changes with changing
sensitivity parameters by using the Sensitivity plotting feature.
For example supposing that we want a plot of Liquid rate produced against Water
Cut parametric in the skin for a given value of the diameter, select Sensitivity from
the Calculation screen and in the plot manu toolbar select Variables and then choose
as requested:
Figure 3.44:
Variables selection in the
Sensitivity Plot
Then Done and the sensitivity plot is displayed:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 3.45:
Sensitivity Plot
These results show that for the 3.958" ID tubing a liquid production gain of around
1100-1200 STB/day is possible by removing the skin for various water cuts.
3.1.4 Calculating Gradient Traverses

Having generated the system solution, it is possible to generate a gradient plot at
any of the solution operating points to determine the flowing gradients and flow
regimes in the well bore.
This can be done in two ways: by clicking Sensitivity PvD on the System Calculation
screen or from the main menu by selecting Calculation ⏐ Gradient (Traverse).
To generate a gradient plot at one of the operating rate/pressure solution points,

select the solution for the desired conditions, for example:
Figure 3.46:
Sensitivity Plot

Then Continue and Calculate:
Figure 3.47:
Gradient calculation
This calculation will determine the pressure gradient along the wellbore for the
conditions corresponding to the solution point.
Selecting Plot the traverse is plotted:
Figure 3.48:
Gradient Plot
Click on Main then File | Save As and save the file as Oilwell.out.
PROSPER MANUAL
3.1.5 Generating VLP Curves for Simulators

To generate VLPs for an oil producer for a range of THP, WC and GOR, from the
menu toolbar select Calculation⎪VLP(Tubing Curves) ⎪3 Variables.
Figure 3.49:
VLP (3 variables)
In the first screen enter any value for Top Node Pressure, Water Cut and GOR: as
sensitivities will be run to generate the curves for a range of sensitivity parameters,
the values in the first screen will be overwritten by the sensitivity values entered.
Then Continue and enter the following sensitivity parameters:
Parameter Range
First Node Pressure 200, 600, 1000, 3000 psig
Water Cut 0, 40, 80 %
Gas Oil ratio 400, 820, 2000 scf/STB

Figure 3.50:
VLP (3 variables) Select
Variables screen
Then Continue and Calculate.

Once the curves have been calculated, you can plot and export them by selecting
Export Lift Curve. This feature allows to export the curves in several formats that can
be used by a wide selection of simulators:
Figure 3.51:
VLP (3 variables) Select
Variables screen
To export the curves to GAP or MBAL (.TPD format), select Petroleum Experts
GAP/MBAL, then click on Continue, enter a file name and click on Save to save the
lift curves as a .tpd file.
PROSPER MANUAL
4 Data Input - General
This section describes the PROSPER main menu and the input data required before
an analysis can be performed. Data should be entered by working through the
PROSPER menus following the logic order from left to right and top to bottom. The
following menus are described in this section:
• Main menu
• Options menu
4.1 PROSPER Main Menu

All PROSPER functions are listed as menu options. Simply select the required
menu and choose an item from the list displayed. This will activate an option or
display the relevant screen.
Problem solving with PROSPER is approached systematically by working from left to

right through the main menu. Calculation menus are activated only when the
necessary input data has been entered.
To start PROSPER, select the appropriate icon and press ↵ or double-click the
program icon. A screen similar to the following will appear:
Figure 4.1
Main Menu
The menu options across the top of the screen are the PROSPER main menu
options. Each is described below.
2 - 13 Chapter 4 - Data Input - General
4.1.1 File
The File menu is a management menu with commands that enables to open, save
or create new data files. It is possible to use this menu to define the default data
directory, printer set-ups options and hook in external DLLs. A facility for accessing
other Windows programs via PROSPER is also provided.
4.1.2Options
The Options menu is the starting point of PROSPER and the key to the program.
Use this menu to define the application and principal well features such as -
prediction method, artificial lift type and fluid type. The options selected are unique
to the current file and apply until changed by the user, or another file is recalled.
These options also determine the subsequent screens, menus and commands that
are displayed.
4.1.3PVT
Use the PVT menu to define well fluid properties and select fluid property
correlations. PVT correlations can be modified to match laboratory-measured data
using a non-linear regression technique. Alternatively, detailed PVT data may be
entered in tables.
4.1.4System
The System menu is used to define the well's downhole and surface equipment as
well as the reservoir inflow performance. When applicable, gas lift and ESP or HSP
equipment data for artificially lifted wells are entered from this menu.
4.1.5Matching
The Matching menu allows comparison of field data with calculated pressure drops
in well tubing and surface piping. All available correlations can be compared to
allow selection of the model that best suits the field conditions.
4.1.6Calculation
The Calculation menu provides with the relevant calculation options. Calculations
to determine pressure and temperature profiles, perform sensitivity analyses, make
gradient comparisons and generate lift curve tables are available in this menu.
4.1.7Design
ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet Pumps, Multiphase Pumps sizing as well as gas lift mandrel
placement and valve setting pressure calculations, coiled tubing and diluents
injection are available from the Design menu. Access to the databases that hold

Chapter 4 - Data Input - General 3 - 13
gas lift valves, ESP, HSP, PCP, Jet pumps (NEW!!!) equipment characteristics is
via the Design menu also.
4.1.8Output
The Output menu is used to generate reports, to export data and to plot data.
Report templates are provided and user templates can also be defined. The data
used can be input data, analysis data, results or plots. Reports can be saved in
various file formats (RTF, TXT and native) and can be displayed or sent to a printer.
Export data can be viewed on screen, sent to the Windows clipboard, sent to a
printer or saved in a file. Plots can be printed directly, saved to a report file or a
Windows metafile. Selected plots can also be sent to the clipboard where they can
be retrieved by other Windows-based programs.
4.1.9Wizard NEW!!!
This menu accesses the wizard area of PROSPER. This allows to Create/Edit and
Run wizards that allow the User to build and run models step-by-step guided
fashion.
4.1.10 Units
This menu is used to define the input and output units of measurement. A flexible
system of units is provided allowing to customise the internal units system.
4.1.11 Help
Provides on-line help for PROSPER. The User can get help on specific tasks, fields
or commands. Help is also given on the keyboard and miscellaneous Windows
commands.
4.2 Options Selection

The Options menu is used to define the characteristics of the well. The options
selected establish the input data required and the calculation options available.
The selections made apply to the current session. The data entry screens, input
fields and variables are limited to those relevant to the particular application. Input
options may be changed at any stage of the processing. New choices may require
other information to be supplied. Therefore the User is advised to ensure that all
relevant input is still valid for the new option selection. The System | Equipment |
Summary is a convenient way to check that the equipment description is correct for
new Options.
To access the Options menu, point to the menu name and click the mouse or press
ALT+O.
The following data entry screen will appear:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 4.2
System
Options
Summary
The entry screen is divided in two main sections - System options and User
information.
Under the System options section, define the well characteristics such as fluid type,
well completion, lift method, etc. These selections determine information that will
be required to enter later. The lower section of the screen comprises the header
information and comments that identify the well and will appear on the report and
screen plot titles.
Option Selection
To select an option, click on the arrow to the right of the required field. The list of
available choices will be displayed.

4.2.1Fluid Description
4.2.1.1 Fluid
• Oil and Water (Black Oil Model or Compositional)
• Dry and Wet Gas (Black Oil Model or Compositional)
Dry and Wet Gas is handled under the assumption that condensation
occurs at the separator. The liquid is put back into the gas as an
equivalent gas quantity. The pressure drop is therefore calculated on the
basis of a single-phase gas, unless water is present.
• Retrograde Condensate (Black Oil Model or Compositional)
This fluid type accounts for the condensate drop out in the tubing.
4.2.1.2 Method
• Black Oil
This option uses industry standard Black Oil models. Five correlations
are available for oil producers. For gas condensate systems an internally
developed model is used. These correlations can be adjusted to match
measured data using non-linear regression.
• Equation of State
Reservoir fluid is modelled by pseudo components having user-specified
properties. The two equation of state models Peng-Robinson and
Soave-Redlich-Kwong are available in PROSPER to predict PVT
properties.
User EOS DLLs can also be linked into PROSPER.
4.2.1.3 Equation of State Setup

This button can be used to access all the options related to the use of the Equation
of State:
• EoS Model (Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-Kwong)
• Optimisation Mode (None, Low and Medium)
• Volume Shift enable/disable
• Reference Pressure and Temperature
• Path to Surface and Recycle: Flash Straight to Stock Tank, Use
Separator Train, Use K values
PROSPER MANUAL
4.2.1.4 Separator
• Single Stage
This available for black oil option for following fluids:
• Oil and water
• Dry and Wet Gas
• Retrograde Condensate
• Two Stage
This option is available for Black oil model in case of Oil and Water fluid
type only.
Separator and tank properties are entered and recombined by PROSPER.
•Multi Stage (Compositional)

This option is available only for Equation of State and Retrograde
Condensate Black Oil model.
Up to 5 stages of separation can be modelled for compositional applications.
4.2.1.5 Emulsions
• No or Emulsion + Pump viscosity correction
Select Emulsion + Pump viscosity correction to allow input of Emulsion
viscosity in the PVT section. This option must be selected to turn on ESP
or HSP viscosity corrections.
4.2.1.6 Hydrates
• Disable Warning or Enable Warning
Select Enable Warning to allow flagging of hydrates formation in
calculation screens. To use this feature, go to the PVT section and enter
or import the hydrates formation table.
4.2.1.7 Water Viscosity

• Use Default Correlation or Use Pressure Corrected Correlation
When the default correlation is used, the water viscosity will be sensitive
to the water salinity and temperature. When the pressure corrected
correlation is used, the water viscosity will be sensitive to the water
salinity, temperature and pressure.
4.2.1.8 Water Vapour

• No Calculation or Calculate Condensed Water Vapour

This option is available for Dry and Wet Gas and Retrograde Condensate
fluid types with PVT Black Oil model. If ‘Calculate Condensed Water
Vapour’ is selected, the condensation of water vapour will be taken into
account when performing pressure drop calculation.
4.2.1.9 Viscosity model

By default the fluid is considered Newtonian. If desired, non-Newtonian effects can be modelled by
selecting Non-Newtonian and entering in the PVT section rheologic properties of the fluid.
4.2.2Well
4.2.2.1 Flow Type

• Tubing Flow
• Annular Flow
This option models production up the casing / tubing annulus.
• Tubing + Annular Flow
This option models production up the tubing and annulus space
simultaneously
4.2.2.2 Well Type

• Producer
• Injector
This is a generic injector well. The fluid to be injected can be specified by
the User
• Water Injector
Injection of single-phase water or gas is supported.
4.2.3Artificial Lift
4.2.3.1 Method
The following 8 lift method options are available when Oil is selected as a fluid type.
• None
No artificial Lift selected.
• Gas Lift
Three different approaches are provided. Annular gas lift is handled by
PROSPER. If the Flow Type is Annular Flow and a Gas Lift method is
selected, then PROSPER automatically switches to model gas injection
down the tubing, and production up the annulus.
PROSPER MANUAL
Options available: No Friction Loss in the Annulus, Friction Loss in the

Annulus, Safety Equipment.
• Electrical Submersible Pump
An ESP installation can be analysed or designed using this option.
• Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump
An HSP installation can be analysed or designed using this option.
• Progressive Cavity Pumps
A PCP installation can be analysed or designed using this option.
• Coiled Tubing Gas Lift
Coiled Tubing with gas lift can be analysed or designed using this option.
• Diluent Injection NEW!!!
Injection of a given rate of diluent in the tubing can be modelled
• Jet Pump NEW!!!
A Jet Pump installation can be analysed or designed using this option.
• Multiphase Pump NEW!!!
Framo multiphase pump can be analysed
4.2.3.2 Type
If Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are available.
• No Friction Loss In Annulus
It is the classic approach for the annulus gas gradient. The pressure
drop due to friction in the annulus is ignored and the gas gradient is
determined by the top casing pressure and the temperature profile.
• Friction Loss In Annulus
The pressure drop due to friction in the annulus is taken into account, but
the top casing pressure is assumed constant. If this option is selected
the tubing equipment screens will automatically change and require
tubing OD and casing ID data to be entered.
• Safety Equipment
Surface delivery lines, chokes, the gas lift injection string and safety
valves in the annulus are taken into account. Top casing pressures will
change with injection rate.
If Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump is the chosen method, then the following
types are available.
• Commingled Annular Supply

The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the annulus and returns to
surface, commingled with the produced fluid via the tubing.
• Commingled Tubing Supply
The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the tubing and returns to
surface, commingled with the produced fluid via the annulus.

• Closed Loop Supply

The power fluid for the turbine is supplied via the outer annulus and
returns to surface via the inner annulus. The reservoir fluid is produced
through the tubing. There is no commingling of produced and power
fluids.
If Progressive Cavity Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are
available.
• Sucker Rod Drive

The program will assume to have a surface drive head from which require
rods in order to move the rotor across the pump.
• Downhole motor drive
The program assumes to have a downhole motor instead of surface drive
motor.
If Coiled Tubing Gas Lift is the chosen method, then the following types are
available.
• No Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are neglected.
• Friction Loss in Coiled Tubing
Friction losses along the coiled tubing are accounted for.
If Diluent Injection is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
• Tubing Injection-Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production flows through
the annulus
• Annular Injection-Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production flows
through the tubing
If Jet Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
• Tubing Injection-Annular Production
The power fluid is injected in the tubing and the production flows through
the annulus
• Annular Injection-Tubing Production
The power fluid is injected in the annulus and the production flows
through the tubing
If Multiphase Pump is the chosen method, then the following types are available:
• Framo Pumps
PROSPER MANUAL
4.2.4Calculation Type
4.2.4.1 Predict
The program is capable of predicting either pressure only or pressure and
temperature changes simultaneously.
• Pressure Only
If this option is selected, the flowing temperature profile must be entered.
This calculation option is fast and provides accurate pressure profiles.
• Pressure and Temperature (On Land and Offshore)
This option will calculate both pressure and temperature profiles using
the method specified in Temperature Model.
4.2.4.2 Model
Three models for temperature calculations are available:
• Rough Approximation
Calculates the heat loss from the well to the surroundings using an
overall heat transfer coefficient, the temperature difference between the
fluids and the surrounding formation and the average heat capacity of
the well fluids. The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input
formation temperatures (e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth
points. A minimum of the surface and first node temperatures are
required. Temperatures entered should be the extrapolated static
temperatures, and should not be confused with the entry of measured
flowing temperatures required for the Predicting pressure only case.
The Rough Approximation temperature model requires calibration using

measured temperature data. It is not accurate in a predictive mode.
• Enthalpy Balance
This rigorous thermodynamic model considers heat transfer by
conduction, radiation, and forced and free convection. Heat transfer
coefficients are calculated using values held in a user-definable
database. The temperature prediction calculations are transient,
allowing sensitivities against flowing time to be run. This temperature
model requires considerably more input data and computation time for
either Predicting Pressure Only or the Rough Approximation
temperature model.
The production riser is properly taken into account. Therefore the

heat loss prediction between the seabed and wellhead will be
accurate. Due to increased computation times, we recommend that
this option be used only when temperature prediction rather than

pressure loss is the required result (for e.g. process calculations and
material selection).
The Enthalpy Balance temperature model is capable of accurate

flowing temperature prediction for a wide range of conditions.
The temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature
profiles in:
• long pipelines
• subsea wells
• predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict
wax/hydrate deposits.
• These models also account for Joule-Thompson Effects.
The temperature calculation must commence from a known condition.
This is usually the reservoir pressure and temperature. As a
consequence, calculating from a downstream node (unknown
temperature) to an upstream node (known temperature) is not
meaningful
• Improved Approximation
As the Enthalpy Balance model, this is also a full enthalpy balance
pressure and temperature prediction model, with the difference that
the term of the enthalpy balance concerning the heat exchange with
the outside (which includes free and forced convection, conduction
and radiation) is simplified by a heat loss term characterised by an
overall heat exchange coefficient.
For this reason data related to the completion hardware and thermal
properties are not necessary.
Like any enthalpy balance model, Joule-Thomson Effect is also
accounted for.
These characteristics make this model particularly useful when an
accurate calculation of temperature is sought for and only a few data
on the completion are available.
The geothermal gradient entry screen is used to input formation
temperatures (e.g. from logging runs) at measured depth points. A
temperature gradient in the sea can be entered for offshore
applications. A minimum of the surface and first node temperatures
are required. Temperatures entered should be the extrapolated static
temperatures, and should not be confused with the entry of measured
flowing temperatures required for the Predicting pressure only case.
The Improved Approximation temperature model requires calibration

using measured temperature data. It is not accurate in a predictive
mode.
PROSPER MANUAL
4.2.4.3 Calculation
• Full System
Calculations for pipelines, tubing and reservoir
• Pipeline Only
Calculations for pipelines only
4.2.4.4 Output
• Show calculating Data
• Hide calculating Data
Select Hide to speed up calculations by not updating calculation screen
displays. This will automatically be set to Hide when run from GAP
4.2.5Well Completion
4.2.5.1 Type
• Cased Hole or Open Hole
This selection determines the appropriate IPR Completion models to use.
4.2.5.2 Gravel Pack

• Yes or No
Gravel pack pressure drops will be calculated when Yes is selected.

4.2.6Reservoir
4.2.6.1 Type
• Single Branch or Multilateral Well
In the single branch option the IPR screen comes with various standard
inflow models from which the user selects one.
For the multi-lateral selection, the IPR screen requires detailed drawing
of the downhole completion.
4.2.6.2 Gas Coning

• Yes or No
Rate dependant GOR will be modelled and calculated when Yes is selected.
This option is only available for Single Branch type wells.
4.2.7 User Information

These fields are optional. The details entered here provide the User information
that identifies the well model in the screen plots and printed reports. The
Comments area is used to enter free format text describing the details of the
analysis. A Date stamp feature is provided to mark either the comment text or the
header data for future reference.
We recommend that comments be used to summarise any assumptions made in

the analysis. Whenever an existing model is modified, appending a summary of
changes and a date stamp will greatly assist current and future users working with
the file.
PROSPER MANUAL
5 PVT Data Input
5.2 Introduction
To predict pressure and temperature changes from the reservoir, along the well
bore and flow line tubular, it is necessary to accurately predict fluid properties as a
function of pressure and temperature. The User must enter data that fully
describes the fluid properties or enables the program to calculate them. There are
four possible approaches:
- Correlations: Where only basic PVT data is available, the program uses
traditional black oil correlations, such as Glaso, Beal, Petrosky etc. A unique black
oil model is available for condensates and details of this can be found later in this
guide as well as the PROSPER manual.
- Matching: Where both basic fluid data and some PVT laboratory measurements
are available, the program can modify the black oil correlations to best-fit the
measured data using a non-linear regression technique.
- Tables: Where detailed PVT laboratory data is provided, MBAL uses this data
instead of the calculated properties. This data is entered in table format (PVT
tables), and can be supplied either manually or imported from an outside source.
So called black oil tables can be generated from an EOS model and then be
imported and used in MBAL.
- Compositional: Where the full Equation of State description of the fluid is

available and all the PVT can be obtained from a Peng-Robinson or a Soave
Redlich Kwong description of the fluid phase behaviour.
Note with regards to the PVT definitions:
Use of Tables: Tables are usually generated using one fluid composition
which implies a single GOR for the fluid. This will therefore not provide the
right fluid description when we have injection of hydrocarbons in the
reservoir or when the reservoir pressure drops below the bubble/dew point.
Use of EOS: The basic equations of state are not predictive unless matched
to measured lab data. Care has to be taken in order to make sure that the
EOS has been matched and is applicable for the range of Pressures and
Temperatures to be investigated.
The program also allows fluid properties to be calculated and plotted for specified
pressure and temperature ranges. The PVT menu has three options - Report, Input
and Export. Select Report to inspect previously entered data, Export to save data
to a text file, or Input to set up a new problem or edit an existing one.
Recommended Steps
Only Limited PVT Data Available (Minimum required for correlations)

2 - 34 Chapter 5 - PVT Data Input
• Enter data as requested on PVT input data screen and select correlations
that are known to best fit the region or oil type.
Limited PVT Data and Laboratory Measured Data Available

• Enter the data requested in the PVT input data screen.
• Enter PVT laboratory data in the PVT ⏐ Match data menu. The
laboratory PVT data and the fluid properties entered on the data input
screen must be consistent. Flash Data must be used. Up to 5 tables of
laboratory measurements made at different temperatures may be
entered. Use the Tables buttons to switch between tables. Click OK to
return to the PVT input screen.
• At this point it is possible to Calculate PVT using a correlation and Plot
the calculated and match data to see how closely the non-optimised
correlation fits.
• Select Regression, then Match All. A non-linear regression will be
performed to best fit each correlation to the measured lab data. Once the
calculation is finished, select Parameters and identify the correlation that
best fits the measured data. This correlation should then be selected and
this modified correlation will be used in all further calculations of fluid
property data. The fit parameters are the multiplier and shift applied to
the correlation in order to fit the lab data. If the correlation were a perfect
fit to the match data, Parameter 1 would be set to 1.0 and Parameter 2
would be zero.
• In order to see how well the tuned correlations fit the data, on the
regression screen there is plot utility, which will plot the variable values
from the matched correlations, and the data entered simultaneously, to
allow the User to see how good the fit is. Select Plot to display both the
calculated and measured PVT data. Select the Variables option on the
plot menu bar to choose the fluid property data to display.
5.3 Black Oil - Oil and Water
5.3.1 Input Data

Select the PVT Input option from the main menu to display the following PVT Input
data screen:

Chapter 5 – PVT Data Input 3 - 34
Figure 5-1
PVT Input Screen
Enter the required data in the fields provided. Movement from one box to another
can be done using the TAB key. Next, select a Pb, Rs and Bo correlation and a
viscosity correlation to use then click OK.
Â Enter the oil solution GOR. This should not include free gas production.
For gas production in wells producing injection or gas cap gas the solution
GOR should still be entered. The balance of “free” gas production is
accounted for elsewhere.
Mole Percent CO2, N2 and H2S refers to the separator gas stream composition.
5.3.2 Emulsions
If Options | Emulsions is selected PROSPER allows selection of the emulsion
occurrence in the system from the PVT input dialogue. This tells PROSPER where
the viscosity corrections will take place during calculation
The Flowline Emulsion Data button opens the Emulsion Data entry screen.
Water cut can be entered at this point that will then be used to calculate the
emulsion viscosity in the PVT calculation section.
Refer to the section devoted to the Emulsions for more information.
PROSPER MANUAL
5.3.3 Tables
In PROSPER the PVT data can also be entered as tables by clicking Tables from
the main PVT input screen. Up to fifty separate tables may be entered, each at a
different temperature. The program will use the data from the tables in all further
calculations provided the Use Tables option has been selected on the input data
screen. This option should be used only when extensive table data is available for
a range of temperatures.
Figure 5-2
PVT Tables
Rather than entering the values by hand, PROSPER can read in tables of Black Oil
PVT properties. To do this, click the Import button from the Tables screen, and
PROSPER will prompt for the name of an ASCII file containing the PVT data.
Petroleum Experts’ PVT Package can be used to calculate and export Black Oil PVT
tables. An example of the PVT Table import file format is given in Appendix E.
Alternatively, data can be passed directly from Excel on a table-only basis using the
Clip button. The Clip button will paste the copied data from Excel into the selected
PVT table.
PROSPER interpolates the entered table data and if the entered data is
Â incomplete i.e., one table containing only a single row of values will result
in interpolation errors.

5.3.4 Match Data

Click the Match Data button and enter PVT laboratory measured data to match to
as shown on the example screen below:
Figure 5-3
PVT Match Data Screen
Since gas evolution in the tubing is a constant composition process, Flash data,
not differential liberation data should be used for matching. For each match data
table, enter the temperature and bubble point, then enter pressure versus gas oil
ratio, oil FVF and oil viscosity. Where data is incomplete or not available, leave the
field blank. Use the GOR and FVF at bubble point plus the viscosity if available.
Enter only the minimum number of points to ensure a good match.
Â Where only differential liberation PVT data is available, a PVT simulation

program can be used to calculate the flash properties using a model that
has been matched to the lab data.
Better results for sparse laboratory PVT data sets are usually obtained using
correlations matched to the available lab data rather than using a PVT table lookup.
PROSPER MANUAL
5.3.5 Regression
This option is used to perform the non-linear regression, which adjusts the
correlations to best-fit laboratory measured PVT data. The non-linear regression
matching technique can be used on up to five PVT match tables, each with a
different temperature. The following PVT properties can be used as match
variables:
Pb Bubble point pressure.
GOR Gas oil ratio versus pressure.
FVF Oil formation volume factor versus pressure.
Oil viscosity Oil viscosity versus pressure.
It is not necessary to match on all properties for all applications. In cases where
the PVT data is incomplete or of poor quality, better results can often be obtained
by matching on the best characterised parameters only. However, because bubble
point can be difficult to accurately predict from correlations, it is recommended that,
where possible, it is used as a match parameter. The minimum data required to
perform a regression match is the bubble point and GOR.
Â The form of the correlations for FVF is different above and below the bubble
point. If the FVF at bubble point is not available, the regression may not achieve
good results. When matching the oil FVF, always enter data at the bubble point.
Do not enter many match points only use the minimum number to define the
shape of the correlation curves. In most cases, only data at the bubble point is
required.
Figure 5-4
PVT Regression Screen
5.3.6 Match
From the Regression screen, individual correlations can be matched to selected
measured PVT data by:
• Selecting the correlations

• Selecting the fluid properties to match to
• Clicking Match

5.3.6.1 Match All

All correlations can be matched to all the fluid property data in one keystroke by
selecting the Match All command button.
5.3.6.2 Parameters
Having performed the matching process, the match parameters are displayed by
clicking the Parameters button. The non-linear regression technique applies a
multiplier - Parameter 1, and a shift - Parameter 2 to the correlations. The standard
deviation is also displayed, which represents the overall closeness of fit. The lower
the standard deviation, the better the fit. The best overall model is the one that has
Parameter 1 closest to unity.
5.3.6.3 Viewing the Match Parameters

The Parameters button displays the PVT correlations parameters screen. This
shows the match parameters and the standard deviation for each matched
correlation. Use these statistics to select the best correlation for the data set and
conditions pertaining to the application. A plot should be made (refer calculation
and plot sections) and a visual check of the fit quality performed before making the
final correlation selection. The match parameters can be reset i.e. returned to the
un-matched state by selecting the reset option. The following is an example of a
correlation parameters screen:
Figure 5-5
PVT Match
Parameters
PROSPER MANUAL
5.3.6.4 Matching FVF above Bubble Point

The standard correlations do not always accurately model the FVF above bubble
point (especially for heavy or waxy oils). Additional match parameters (Parameter
3 and 4) have been introduced to allow the FVF to be independently tuned below
(P1 and P2) and above (P3 and P4) the bubble point.
In all circumstances, always enter match data at the bubble point to ensure that no
discontinuities occur.
5.3.7 Calculations
In order to make a plot or listing of fluid property data, PROSPER must first calculate
the values over a specified range of temperatures and pressures. Using the
calculated data point’s plots of fluid properties versus temperature or pressure can
be generated. The following is an example of the PVT ⏐ Calculations screen. If the
correlations have been matched, then the fluid properties will be calculated using
the modified correlations.
Â The calculation procedure is optional and used only to generate fluid

property data for display and quality control purposes. During the
computation of a pressure traverse, PROSPER calculates fluid properties at
each pressure and temperature step or node as required by the
application.
5.3.7.1 Calculating PVT Data
Figure 5-6
PVT Calculation
Setup
To generate tables and plots of PVT data:

• Select Correlations (use the best matched one)
• Select Automatic generation of Data Points

• Enter the temperature range and number of steps

• Enter the pressure range and number of steps
• Click OK
• Click Calculate to compute PVT data for the entire range of pressures
and temperatures required by the modelling application. The following
calculation screen will be displayed:
Figure 5-7
PVT calculation
Results
The PVT section can be used as a convenient calculator by entering User selected
data points, then entering specific temperatures and pressures to calculate fluid
properties.
5.3.7.2 Displaying the Calculated Data on the screen

The calculated data is displayed on the screen as default. Options to choose the
calculated variables to be displayed are available by using Layout button (Figure
5-7). Selecting Layout displays the list of all calculated variables that can be
selected to customise viewing.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 5-8
PVT calculation Layout
5.3.7.3 Plotting the Calculated Data

The calculated data can be displayed on a plot. The variables, which are plotted,
are defined under the Variables option on the plot. After performing a PVT
calculation click Plot from the PVT calculation screen. Display the selected results
by following this procedure:
• Click Variables.
• Select Pressure for the X-axis.
• Select GOR for the Y-axis.
• Click OK to display a plot showing both the calculated values and the
measured values similar to the following:

Figure 5-9
PVT Results
Plot
Carefully examine the PVT plots for consistency with the match data. If necessary,
select a different correlation and repeat the PVT calculations until satisfactory
results have been obtained.
5.3.7.4 Saving PVT tables from Calculated Data

The calculated data can be saved in the form of .ptb files by the button provided at
top of the calculation output screen in Figure 5-7.
There is also the possibility of transferring the displayed calculation to the Tables by
pressing on the Tables button.
5.3.8 Saving the PVT Data

This option allows a PVT data set to be saved under a separate name. A dialogue
box will appear prompting to name the PVT file. The PVT extension is
automatically provided by the program. If this step is omitted, the program will
automatically save the (matched) PVT data in a .PVT file with the same name as
the input (.SIN) file.
5.3.9 Recalling a PVT File

This option allows a previously saved PVT data set to be recalled into the open file.
A dialogue box will appear prompting to select a PVT file. If this step is carried out
after recalling a .SIN file, this will overwrite the PVT data from the original file.
Â For multi-well projects, set up matched PVT models for each producing
area first. This will save time and reduce the potential for error by recalling
the relevant PVT data into each well file.
PROSPER MANUAL
5.3.10 Correlations
This option displays the match parameters and standard deviations for each
matched correlation. See section 5.2.4.4 for a more detailed explanation of this
5.3.11 Composition
In the PVT Input Data screen, click the Composition button, and PROSPER will use
the PVT properties (Oil Gravity, GOR) to estimate the composition of the reservoir
fluid. The estimated composition is used internally by PROSPER to calculate
thermodynamic properties needed in the choke and enthalpy balance temperature
models. The following is an example of an estimated Black Oil composition:
Figure 5-10
Estimated Composition
Click BI Coefficients and PROSPER will display the Binary Interaction coefficients to
be used in an EOS description of the fluid. An example BI Coefficients display is
shown below:

Figure 5-11
BI Coefficients for
Estimated
Composition
Estimation of reservoir fluid composition is available for Oil and Retrograde

Condensate fluids.
5.3.12 Non-Newtonian Fluid

PROSPER can model the effect of non-Newtonian fluids. The implementation of the
model is based on drilling fluid models developed by TotalFinaElf. A fluid whose
viscosity is not constant at all shear rates and does not behave like a Newtonian
fluid would fall into this category. This will enable foams in heavy oils to be
modelled more accurately. Most drilling fluids are non-Newtonian.
Figure 5-12
PVT input data
To enter the required non-Newtonian fluid viscosity data, select Rheological

Parameters from the PVT Input Data screen:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 5-13
Viscosity Modelling
(Information Required)
5.3.13 Emulsions
PROSPER can model the effect of Oil/Water emulsions on mixture viscosity for
Black Oil PVT systems. The behaviour of emulsions in producing well equipment is
not well understood. Emulsion PVT in PROSPER provides a means to assess
possible effects of increased emulsion viscosity by curve fitting experimentally
determined data. It must be emphasised that the method is empirical and does not
represent any rigorous model of emulsion behaviour.
In the laboratory, stable emulsions can be prepared from many crude oil / water
systems. Emulsion samples discovered in surface separation equipment do not
necessarily imply that emulsions are present in the well. Field experience shows
that the effect of emulsions is usually less than predicted by laboratory tests.
Emulsion PVT should be used with caution and only when it is certain that
emulsions are present and it is necessary to evaluate their effect on calculated
pressures.
To enable emulsion PVT in PROSPER, the Emulsion option must first be selected
on the Options screen. Emulsion viscosity will replace the mixture viscosity for
selected elements of the production system. Experimental or empirical emulsion
viscosity data can be entered and curve-fitted using non-linear regression. The
fitted curve is used to optionally replace the oil/water mixture viscosity in IPR, VLP
and pump calculations. When selected, emulsion viscosity for the User-entered
value of water cut will be substituted for the fluid mixture viscosity.
Drop down the Emulsion box and select from the following:

• No viscosity corrections
Turns off emulsion viscosity corrections
• Everywhere
Emulsion viscosity for IPR, VLP and pump if present
• Tubing and Pipe

Emulsion viscosity for casing, tubing and pump if present
• Pump only
Emulsion viscosity for pump only
• Pump and Above

Emulsion viscosity in pump and tubing above pump
• Tubing + Pipe (not pump)

Emulsion viscosity in tubing and pipe only
The selection of system elements affected by emulsion can be changed at a later
time
Â Even if No Emulsion Corrections has been selected on the PVT screen,

pump viscosity corrections will be applied whenever Options ⏐ Emulsions is
selected. Produced fluid viscosity, not emulsion viscosity, will then be used
for corrections.
To set up the emulsion model, select Emulsion Everywhere, (otherwise emulsion

viscosity will not be active for the PVT calculations) then click the Emulsion Data
button and the following screen will be displayed.
Figure 5-14
Emulsion Match Data
Entry
The screen is divided into 3 sections:

• Emulsion Data Experimental data for matching
PROSPER MANUAL
• Experimental Parameters Experimental base conditions

• Match Parameters Results of regression
The pressure and temperature that correspond to the experimental conditions are
entered in Experimental Parameters. This enables PROSPER to correct the
emulsion viscosity for temperature and pressure.
Â Emulsions Everywhere must be selected before plotting the emulsion

viscosity curve. The emulsion viscosity entered for zero water cut should
be compatible with the 100% oil viscosity at the experimental temperature
and pressure.
Emulsion viscosity is modelled as a function of water cut in 3 stages:

• Sharp increase at low water cut
• Plateau with a constant maximum viscosity for intermediate water cuts
• ‘Tail’ that declines to the viscosity of water after the plateau
The parameters Left and Right Water Cut for Maximum Viscosity define the
maximum plateau region. To calculate emulsion viscosity:
• Enter pairs of water cut and emulsion viscosity data points in the Emulsion
Data table.
• Enter the Experimental Parameters
• Click the Match button.
When the regression has stopped, click Plot to display the matched mixture
viscosity:
Figure 5-15
Emulsion
Viscosity Plot
Match data is plotted as crosses, whereas the calculated viscosity is shown as a

solid line.

When Emulsions Everywhere have been selected, the calculated Oil Viscosity in
the PVT section will be replaced by the emulsion viscosity for the value of Water
Cut entered.
5.3.14 Power Fluid Data

If one of the following Artificial Lift Methods have been selected: HSP (Hydraulic
Submersible Pump), Diluent Injection or Jet Pump, then additional details of the
power fluid must be supplied to estimate the fluid properties.
There are two choices for power fluid type:
• Water (not available for Diluent Injection)

• Other Fluid
If Water is selected, then the only other data required is the salinity of the power
fluid. The program will then estimate fluid properties using the normal water PVT
model.
If Other Fluid is selected, then tables of fluid properties need to be entered that
PROSPER will use for interpolation. The program will never extrapolate so please
ensure that the table data covers the expected ranges of pressures and
temperatures. Click the Properties button and the following screen will be
displayed.
Figure 5-16
Power Fluid Properties
Data Entry
PROSPER MANUAL
Tables of data for up to 10 temperatures may be entered. Please ensure that the
tables span the expected range of conditions that will be encountered.
The Generate feature allows to automatically calculate the tables using the
Â PVT model in the main screen.
If a PVT model is available for the power fluid, the suggestion is the
following:
1. Enter in the PVT main screen the fluid black oil properties
2. Use Generate to create the tables modelling the power fluid
3. Enter in the main screen the black oil parameters for the produced
fluid
5.3.15 Hydrates Formation table

If the Hydrates | Enable Warning option has been selected then a hydrate
pressure – temperature look-up table must be entered.
Click the | Hydrates button and the following entry screen will be displayed.

Figure 5-17
Hydrates Formation
Table Data Entry
Enter here the hydrate formation phase envelope conditions.

Up to one hundred data points may be entered. Please ensure that the table spans
within the expected range of conditions that will be encountered.
PROSPER MANUAL
5.4 Black Oil - Dry and Wet Gas

All the condensate drop out is assumed to occur at the separator. Free water
production in the tubing is considered. For pressure drop calculations, an
equivalent gas rate is used which allows for the condensate and water production
by ensuring that a mass balance is observed.
5.4.1 Input Data

When Dry and Wet Gas is selected as the PVT option, the following Input data
screen is displayed:
Figure 5-18
Dry and Wet Gas PVT
The bottom-right part of the screen will only appear when the option Calculate
Condensate Water Vapour is selected in the Options | Water Viscosity section.
If this option is selected, the effects of condensation of water vapour on the
pressure drop calculation in the tubing / pipeline will be taken into account.
This model applies to most gas wells. The condensate production is included in the
gas stream as an increase in density - the flow remains single-phase gas plus free
water if present. The separator temperature is assumed to be the same as the top
node temperature. If there is significant hydrocarbon liquid drop out in the tubing, a
retrograde condensate model should be used.
Â The Gray VLP correlation has an internal PVT routine that models the
effect of liquid dropout in the tubing. This overrides the Dry and Wet gas
PVT.
Â Produced gas is generally saturated with water at reservoir pressure and

temperature. Some water of condensation always drops out at the
separator. This water has a minimal effect on calculated bottom hole
pressures. The WGR considers free water production at the sandface.
Â Please refer to the PVT Matching Data in Section 5.2.3. Matching

operations are carried out as for oil PVT.
5.5 Black Oil - Retrograde Condensate

The PROSPER Retrograde condensate (Black Oil) model has been developed in
house by Petroleum Experts. This model predicts liquid drop out taking place in the
tubing. The reservoir gas gravity is determined using the principle of mass balance
for an equivalent density of the oil.
The black oil condensate model must not be matched as previously done for oils.
This is because the black oil model for condensate in PROSPER uses a
mathematical model and matching could throw the model out of bounds.
The equations used are given in Appendix B.
5.5.1 Input Data

When Retrograde Condensate (Black oil) PVT is selected the following input data
screen is displayed:
Figure 5-19
Black Oil Condensate
PVT
Enter the required data.
Note:
If tank GOR and tank gas gravity is unknown, they can be left at 0. The
unmeasured tank gas rate should be estimated using a suitable correlation and
added to the separator gas. For such cases, the total produced GOR should be
entered under separator GOR. Condensate gravity is at standard conditions.
Â If the separator pressure is above dew point, then there can be no liquid
production. When the dew point is unknown, set it to the reservoir
pressure. PROSPER handles conflicting input data by dropping the
separator pressure to atmospheric, and increasing the separator gas
gravity as required accounting for the liquid production indicated by the
Separator GOR. The mass balance is respected at all times.
PROSPER MANUAL
PROSPER uses produced CGR data for matching. To convert lab data in terms of
vaporised CGR to produced CGR, simply subtract the lab vaporised CGR data
values from the vaporised CGR at dew point. The following plot illustrates the
process:
Figure 5-20 Vaporised vs Produced CGR
Produced vs. Solution 100 Maximum vaporised CGR

90
CGR
80
CGR (bbl/MMscf)
70
60
50
40 Dew Point Pressure
30
20
10
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Pressure (psia)
Vapourised CGR Produced CGR
The black oil condensate model must not be matched as previously done
Â for oils. This is because the black oil model for condensate in PROSPER
uses a mathematical model and matching could throw the model out of
bounds.
Please review the condensate validation example A15 found in Appendix A

of the PROSPER User Guide.
5.5.2 Calculations
Fluid property data can be calculated for a specified range of temperatures and
pressures. If the correlations have been matched, then the matched correlations
will be used for the calculations. Plots of fluid properties versus temperature or
pressure can be generated.
Â The calculated PVT property values should be compared to constant

composition expansion (CCE) data, as this process best describes the
evolution of the fluid in the tubing.
Â As calculated pressures (e.g. VLP) approach the convergence pressure,

the solution calculations slow down. This PVT method is only applicable
below the convergence pressure.

5.6 Equation of State - All Fluids

This PVT option allows PROSPER to calculate the vapour fraction and fluid physical
properties using an equation of state (EOS) description for the reservoir fluid.
Peng-Robinson and Soave Redlich Kwong EOS models are available in PROSPER;
also User EOS PVT Modules can also be linked to PROSPER. The PVT calculation
method is identical for all reservoir fluid types (i.e. oil and water, condensate or
gas). The fluid type selected will affect the choice of IPR and VLP models as well
as the range of available sensitivity variables.
Equations of State were developed to give a mathematical relationship between

pressure, volume and temperature. They were originally put forward as a method of
interpreting the non-ideal nature of many pure substances. With time, this role has
been extended successfully to predicting the properties of simple and complex
mixtures.
The equations used in PROSPER are derived from Van der Waals Equation and in
common with it represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a
repulsive element:
P total = P repulsive - P attractive
The classic Van der Waals equation describes this relationship as
where ‘b’ represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and ‘a’ the
intermolecular attraction.
The two cubic Equations of State which are available in PROSPER are:
1) Peng-Robinson (PR)EoS:
and,
2) Soave-Redlich-Kwong(SRK)EoS:
All cubic Equations of State can be rewritten as a function of the compressibility

factor Z e.g. the Peng Robinsen equation becomes:
PROSPER MANUAL
and for SRK
where
and
and
The PVT calculation method is identical for all reservoir fluid types i.e., oil and
water, condensate or gas.
The choice of fluid type affects the choice of IPR and VLP models as well as the
range of available sensitivity variables.
A Note about using the EOS option

PROSPER can handle pressure drop calculations using EOS PVT in three distinct
ways:
• It can calculate fluid properties at each calculation step from the EOS
explicitly. This option eliminates any potential interpolation errors, as the
EOS is used to calculate fluid properties at the exact node pressure and
temperature. The additional computing overhead required by this method
increases calculation times
• If PVT tables have been generated, selecting the Use Generated Tables
option instructs PROSPER to look up and interpolate the tables. The tables
must be calculated over a sufficient number of points that cover the entire
range of pressures and temperatures to reduce interpolation errors. For
problems that require it, the Use Tables option allows an EOS fluid
description to be used without significantly increasing computation times
• PROSPER can interpolate from imported tables. This approach is
computationally much quicker, however, care must be exercised as there is
a potential for interpolation error
Â PROSPER will determine whether the reservoir fluid is an oil or a gas

condensate within the EOS PVT calculations. Since the VLP correlations
are approached differently depending on whether a gas or oil is being
produced, calculations will not proceed unless the fluid type detected by the
EOS agrees with that selected on the Options screen.

5.6.1 EOS Model Setup

The EOS fluid mode options must be consistent with the entered compositional
data for PROSPER to calculate.
Figure 5-21
EOS fluid selection
The EoS options can now be set up by selecting EoS Setup:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 5-22
EOS set-up options
The following main EOS options can be pre-set:

EoS Model
Select one of the available EoS equations: Peng-Robinson or Soave-Redlich-
Kwong
Optimisation Mode
Over the past few years, our PVT experts have been working on ways to speed up
the calculation of properties from an EOS model. Speed is one of the main issues
with fully compositional models and the options in this field will define the speed of
calculations.
The objective of this option is to speed up the calculations without penalising the
accuracy the results. The Medium mode is the fastest (up to 80 times)
Volume Shift
Option to enable/disable the use of Volume Shift in the EoS.
Â The use of Volume Shift is not recommended. As the volume shift

applies a correction to the volume which is always the same, no
matter the conditions, as the P,T conditions change along the well,
the Volume Shift can cause the EoS not respect the principle of

conservation of mass.
Path to Surface and Recycle

This Option specifies the path the fluid follows down to standard condition.
This is essential when calculating volumetric properties like FVF or GOR, which are
path dependent. The amount of gas and liquid resulting from the calculations will be
different depending on the path the fluid will take to standard conditions. These are
the available options:
• Flash Straight to Stock Tank
• Use Separator Train
• Use K values
The “Use K Values” option is an addition to the compositional modelling that
allows modelling the process based on K-values (equilibrium ratios). This
can allow process calculations from systems more complex than separation
to be represented as “Pseudo” separators and can be obtained from process
simulators.
To import the K values select Import KValues:
Figure 5-23
Importing K-Values
K-values can be generated in PVTP by performing a simple separator experiment,

and then exported. The procedure is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 5-24
PVTP separator
calculation
Once the calculations are complete, under the Analysis tab the Export K-Values
button can be used:
Figure 5-25
Exporting K-Values

Figure 5-26
Exporting K-Values from
PVTP
Now the program will allow the User to export a *.pks file that can be imported in
PROSPER containing all the information with regards to separator stages and K
values.
Figure 5-27
Importing K-Values in
PROSPER
PROSPER MANUAL
Â These options should reflect the EOS available for the fluid (from
PVTP for example) and the process (path) the fluid follows to standard
conditions (which will affect the volumes and quality of the resulting
fluid)
5.6.2 EOS PVT Input Data

A sample EOS PVT input screen is shown below:
Figure 5-28
Equation of
State PVT
The EOS fluid model is activated via the Options Summary screen where the
various EOS options can be selected. The Options can also be changed from the
EoS main screen by selecting Change.
This screen requires input of pseudo component concentrations and properties

(critical temperature, pressure and volume, acentric factor, molecular weight and
specific gravity). Up to 30 pseudo components can be entered. Entry of Critical
Volume, Volume Shift, Boiling Point Temperature and Parachor are optional.
Use of regressed critical volume data will improve the quality of calculated liquid
viscosities. Where critical volume data is unavailable, PROSPER uses a correlation
to estimate the values. The Parachor is used for surface tension calculation. Binary
interaction components are entered on a screen similar to that shown below by
clicking on the BI coeffs button from the EOS input screen.

Figure 5-29
Binary Interaction
Coefficients Input
After entering the interaction coefficients, click OK to return to the input screen.
Then click Generate to display a screen requesting the range of pressures and
temperatures and the number of pressure and temperature steps to calculate.
5.6.2.1 Importing Matched EoS

The EoS model can also be imported by using the Import…PRP feature.
The .PRP file contains all the information necessary to the EoS: EoS parameters,
BI Coefficients, Options, Separator train, etc., and can be generated using Petroleum
Experts PVTP.
5.6.3 Using the EoS

The fluid properties can be generated using the EoS in different ways:
• Calculated directly from the EoS
• Interpolate the properties from Tables generated by the EoS itself
• Interpolate the properties from Imported Tables
The first option is the most accurate, though the slowest.
Choose the desired option from the menu available in the left bottom of the EoS
window.
Performing CCE calculations

Calculate the PVT fluid properties using the EOS directly by clicking Generate.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 5-30
EOS Calculation Screen
Enter the range of temperatures and pressures and Calculate | Calculate.
Figure 5-31
Pressure and
temperature ranges
Figure 5-32
EOS
calculation
results
Display the results by clicking Plot

Figure 5-33
GOR vs. pressure
plot
Click the Properties button and the program will determine the equivalent black oil
properties by flashing the fluid to atmospheric (i.e. standard) conditions using the
separator scheme entered in the main screen.
Figure 5-34
Equivalent
Black Oil
Properties
Â Production rates entered in PROSPER when using EOS PVT assume the
produced fluid is flashed directly to atmosphere. E.g. for oil, enter the
production rate that results in the correct wellhead mass flow rate when the
oil gravity is the same as shown by the Properties calculation.
Generating the Phase Envelope

Once the PVT properties have been calculated, click OK to return to the input
screen. The phase envelope can be displayed by selecting the Phase Envelope
button. A sample phase envelope is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 5-35
EOS Phase
Envelope
PROSPER will automatically calculate the cricondentherm, cricondenbar and where

applicable, the critical point.
The EOS input screen allows pseudo component data to be imported directly from
data files such as those generated by Petroleum Experts' PVT package or other
programs. Simply click Import and select the appropriate file from the dialogue box.
Once fluid properties have been generated, they can be saved in a .PVT file by
clicking the Save button and entering a file name when prompted.
Â Before importing PVT data, first ensure that PROSPER is using the correct
units for pressure and temperature.
Â The EOS option in PROSPER is not intended to be used as a fully featured

PVT package. For maximum accuracy and computational efficiency, it is
recommended that compositional data be grouped and matched to lab
data using a program such as Petroleum Experts’ PVTP Package and the
resulting pseudo-component properties used in PROSPER. The accuracy
of well pressure loss calculations depends on the accuracy of density
predictions. Unless the EOS densities have been carefully matched to lab
data over a sufficient range of temperatures and pressures, VLP
calculations using EOS PVT will not be accurate.
Â The Gray VLP correlation’s internal PVT will over-ride the EOS PVT.

6 Equipment Data Input
This section describes the menu option used to define the well's hardware,
deviation survey and flowing temperature profile. The program requests only the
data required by the Options that have been selected.
The data required for temperature prediction depends on the temperature model
used. For the Rough Approximation and Improved Approximation, there is little
additional data required. For the rigorous Enthalpy Balance temperature model, it
is necessary to completely define the well environment, including all casing strings,
cement tops, formation lithology etc.
A Note about Depth References.
Â Depths in PROSPER for downhole and surface equipment are referenced

to zero on the deviation survey screen. Calculated pressures are then
referenced to the Xmas tree (if no surface equipment has been entered) or
Manifold (if surface equipment has been entered). Therefore, when
PROSPER well models are combined in a field-wide system model, the
depth references that were used in the individual PROSPER models are
not important. In the field model, however, the depth of each well's Top
Node must be known with respect to a common reference.
Â For subsea systems, any depth reference (e.g. sea level, drill floor, ground
level) can be used. If ground level is used, then a tied back well would
have a negative wellhead elevation. To minimise the potential for errors in
correcting the depths, it is recommended to use the same reference as
used for the deviation survey data.
6.1 Predicting Pressure Only

When predicting Pressure only, click System ⏐ Equipment to display the following
input screen:
2 - 30 Chapter 6 - Equipment Data Input
Figure 6-1
Equipment Input
To start data entry for a new application, click All ⏐ Edit. PROSPER will then
display all the relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been
entered, clicking the Summary command button will display a summary of the
current equipment. To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the
button beside the appropriate item. Data can be entered for the surface equipment
and then include or exclude it temporarily from any calculation by setting the
Disable Surface Equipment choice box at the bottom of the screen to Yes.
6.1.1 Deviation Survey

From the well deviation survey, select a few depth points that mark significant
changes in deviation. Enter pairs of data points for measured depth (MD) and the
corresponding true vertical depth (TVD). Up to 18 pairs of data points can be
entered.
The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate on data records
that have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s). All records can
be simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import button to
import data from a wide variety of sources.
When more than 18 points are available, the Filter allows a determined number of
points (up to 18) that best-fit the entered points (see figure below).
There is a Measured Depth to True Vertical Depth (and the reverse is true)
Â at the bottom.
If the user wishes to find the TVD at a given MD, just enter the MD value in
the relevant space and select Calculate. If the user wishes to find the MD
at a given TVD, just enter the TVD value in the relevant space and select
Calculate.

Chapter 6 - Equipment Data Input 3 - 30
Figure 6-2
Deviation Survey Input
In the Raw Data table (Figure 6.3) enter the data from the survey. It is possible to
copy the table by selecting the first row (click on the number 1) and Paste from the
Clipboard.
These are the additional buttons:
Calculate Angle Calculates the angle of deviation from the vertical

Reset Deletes the entered data
Filter Calculates a number of points which fit the deviation table
entered on the left. Check the fitting by hitting on Plot. If this is
not ok, change some parameters (like for example the
angle step)
Transfer Transfers the calculated points to the main Deviation Survey
screen
Once depths have been entered, plot the well profile by selecting Plot. A plot
similar to the one below will be displayed:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-3
Raw data table
Figure 6-4
Well Deviation Plot
The reference depth used by PROSPER for all calculations is zero in the
Â Deviation Survey table. The Deviation Survey table is interpolated to
determine the difference in TVD between any two well nodes. MD and
TVD data must be at least as deep as the bottomhole tubing depth;
PROSPER will not calculate beyond the last depth in the table.
Â Deviation survey data entry is required also for vertical wells - enter 0,0
for the surface reference and an MD the same as the TVD of the intake
node. The deviation survey has to start with 0 measured depth and 0
TVD. Due to this reason, the reference depth (where TVD = 0) has to be
at or above the wellhead.

Â For a sub-sea well (with or without pipeline), if the reference depth is

selected in such a way that it is above the wellhead (at the mean sea level
for instance), we can actually assume an imaginary vertical path in the
deviation survey table down to the wellhead. We do not need to include
the pipeline measured depth in the deviation survey. The deviation survey
describes the deviation of the downhole equipment only.
Â Horizontal wells with deviation angles greater than 90 degrees from

vertical can be entered. PROSPER will issue a warning that the TVD of
one node is less than the previous one, but well profile plots and
calculations will proceed as normal.
For Horizontal wells the deviation survey may be entered only up to the
Â heel of the well, as the well from the heel all the way up to the toe is a part
of the inflow description.
6.1.2 Surface Equipment

The Surface Equipment screen is used to enter surface flowline, choke and pipe
fitting data as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5
Surface Equipment
Input
TVD, Length Format
Fittings have been added to the surface equipment section of PROSPER to account
for the various pressure losses associated with pipe fittings throughout a given
system (Figure 6-6).
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-6
Surface Equipment
Input
TVD, Length Format
PROSPER defines surface equipment as the pipe work between the production
manifold and the upstream side of the wellhead choke. The production manifold is
regarded by PROSPER as presenting a constant backpressure, regardless of flow
rate. If systems analysis is to be performed relative to the wellhead, (i.e. gathering
system pressure losses are neglected) then no surface equipment input is required.
The surface equipment model can be described using the following 2 elements:
• Pipe
• Choke
The manifold is set as the first equipment type automatically by PROSPER. Surface
equipment geometry can be entered either as pairs of X, Y co-ordinates relative to
the manifold or the Xmas Tree, Reverse X, Y (Y co-ordinates deeper than the
reference depth are negative) or TVD of the upstream end and the length of the
pipe segment.
The difference in TVD between the ends of a pipe segment is used to calculate
gravity head losses. The internal diameter (ID), roughness and pipe length entered
determine the friction pressure loss. The flowing temperatures for each upstream
node must also be entered when calculation option Pressure only is selected.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several
identical wells being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow
line. The fluid velocity in the flowline is multiplied by the value entered increasing
the frictional pressure losses. For most applications it should be left at its default
value of 1.

Â As an example, the pressure drop in a flowline connected to 3 identical

wells could be modelled using a pipeline rate multiplier of 3. 2 parallel
flowlines having identical dimensions can be modelled by entering the
actual dimensions for one pipe and a pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is
also possible to vary the rate multiplier along the pipeline to simulate
varying sections of dual pipelines for example.
import data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 200 pipe segments can be
entered, enabling the user to model very long pipelines.
Figure 6-7
Surface Equipment Input
X,Y Co-ordinates Format
PROSPERS multi-phase choke pressure loss correlation accounts for both critical
and sub-critical flow. We would recommend the use of the ELF Choke correlation
that it similar to the Petroleum Experts’ method and is more robust in extreme
conditions.
Ensure that the length of each pipe segment is equal to or greater than the
Â difference in TVD between its ends.
The downhole and surface equipment entries must describe a continuous
system. The TVD and temperature of the upstream end of the last
pipeline segment should be equal to the Xmas tree TVD and temperature.
In X,Y co-ordinates, the Y co-ordinate of the last pipe segment must be
the same elevation as the wellhead TVD. (i.e. same magnitude, but
opposite sign)
To check that the surface equipment description is accurate, click Plot to display a
plot of the pipe elevation as follows:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-8
Surface Equipment Input
Pipe Elevation Plot
6.1.3 Downhole Equipment

The Downhole Equipment screen enables the downhole tubing string data to be
entered.
Figure 6-9
Downhole
Equipment Input
The Downhole Equipment screen will change automatically depending on the

options selected in the Options menu screen. For example, if Annular Flow has
been selected, the tubing screen will require Casing I.D. and Tubing O.D. to be
entered.
The tubing string can be modelled using the following element types:
• Tubing
• SSSV

• Restriction
• Casing
PROSPER automatically inserts the Xmas tree as the first downhole equipment
item. To describe the tubing string, work from the shallowest depth downwards,
entering the bottom depth of changes in tubing diameter, ID and roughness factor.
An SSSV is considered to have no length, and is modelled as a sharp-

Â edged orifice inserted between adjacent tubing string elements. A
restriction is handled identically to an SSSV. The pressure loss
calculations in PROSPER account for choking as sonic flow velocity is
approached.
Casing is treated the same as tubing for pressure drop calculations. Downhole
equipment details should be entered down to the producing interval being analysed.
The deepest depth entries for the tubing, deviation survey and temperature should
be consistent.
Â Below the uppermost producing perforation, the flow profile (as measured
by a production logging tool) depends on layer productivity etc. The
uppermost producing perforation is the deepest point in the well passing
100% of the production. Below this point, the calculated frictional pressure
gradient may be over-estimated in high rate wells having small I.D.
completions.
To select tubing string elements to build up the tubing string description, click on
the list box arrows to the right of the item fields and select the equipment from the
drop-down list. The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete operate
on data records that have been selected by clicking on their row number button(s).
All records can be simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use the Import
button to import data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 18 tubing string
elements can be input. For complex completions, simplify the data entry by
entering only the major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure drop.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to
intermittent sections of dual completion. The fluid velocity in the tubing is multiplied
by the value entered - thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses. For
standard single tubing completions it should be left at its default value of 1.
PROSPER MANUAL
6.1.4 Temperature Survey

This screen enables entry of the flowing temperature profile of the well. If no
bottom hole flowing pressure survey data is available, the static reservoir
temperature at the mid-point of perforations and the wellhead flowing temperature
can be used. A minimum of two depth / temperature points is required.
Figure 6-10
Temperature Survey
Â PROSPER interpolates temperatures from the survey data for depths within
the table limits, and uses linear extrapolation elsewhere. To eliminate
potential errors, ensure that a temperature is entered for the deepest node
depth. It is recommended that the maximum temperature survey depth,
deviation survey depth and intake node depths are all consistent.

6.1.5 Summary
Before leaving the System ⏐ Equipment screen, the accuracy of the equipment
description should be checked by making an equipment summary. Click Summary
to display the summary screen.
Figure 6-11
System Summary
Selecting the appropriate button from the Summary screen can draw a sketch of
the surface and downhole equipment. Select Draw Downhole to display a sketch
similar to the following:
Figure 6-12
Downhole Drawing
PROSPER MANUAL
6.2 Predicting Pressure and Temperature (Enthalpy

Balance)
To commence data entry for a new application, click All ⏐ Edit. PROSPER will then
display all the input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered, clicking
the Summary command button will display a summary of the current equipment.
To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click the button on the left of the
appropriate item.
Figure 6-13
Enthalpy Balance
Equipment Input

See Section 6.1.1 Deviation Survey.
6.2.2 Surface Environment

Surface Environment is required for the calculations of heat loss for surface flow
lines and well risers. Data must be entered according to the screens shown below
depending on whether prediction is being done offshore or on land.

Figure 6-14
Surface Environment Input
(Off Shore)
6.2.3 Drilling and Completion

This data is used to calculate the heat transfer coefficients down hole. If the
offshore option has been selected, the marine riser parameters must be entered in
this section. Entries must be from TOP to BOTTOM. Thus, the riser will be the first
entry.
The screen below shows an offshore well with a 30" OD riser run to a seabed depth
of 400 ft. The well also has a 7" OD liner run to 14000 ft with the liner top set at
11000 ft.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-15
Drilling and
Completion Input
The completion fluid Liquid and Gas properties can have a significant effect on the
heat loss through the annulus. If pressure is maintained on the annulus, the mud
weight used should be modified to reflect the actual annulus pressure at the packer
depth. If the well is being gas lifted, the program assumes that the annulus is full of
gas down to the injection point.
Â Ensure the Tubing OD is less than the Casing ID.
For complex completions fluids, select the appropriate Customised Options from
the main Drilling and Completions section. Completion fluid property data will be
entered via look-up table data. Figure 6-14 shows the data required when selecting
the Completion Fluid Gas Type | Customised option from the drilling and
completions section.

Figure 6-16
Customised
Completion Fluid
Lookup Table – data
entry
Five temperature dependent tables of properties can be entered. Please ensure

that the table will span the expected range of pressure- temperature conditions.
The program will not extrapolate outside the range of the input table. Use the
Import button to import data from a wide variety of sources.
6.2.4 Lithology
The program contains a database of thermal properties for various rock types
including Sandstone, Shale, Limestone, Dolomite, Halite and others. The thermal
properties database can be edited and added to as required. If detailed lithology
data is available it should be entered in the screen as shown below. If no data is
available, use shale from surface to total depth.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-17
Litho logy Input
The reservoir temperature and pressure should be entered for the production
reference depth. The formation temperature gradient is interpolated between the
reservoir and surface environment temperatures.
Â Thermal properties for buried pipelines are taken from the shallowest
formation type entered in the Lithology screen.

An example of the surface equipment screen is shown below:

Figure 6-18
Surface Equipment
Input
To calculate heat losses, additional data such as outside diameter, material type
and insulation (if used) are required to be input. The surface equipment model can
utilise the following equipment types:
• Line pipe
• Coated pipeline
• Flexible tubes
• User selected
• Choke
To allow for pipe bends, etc., enter an equivalent length/diameter. The choke
calculation handles both sub-critical and critical flow. The program will calculate the
temperature drop across the choke. Descriptive labels for each element can be
entered in the Label field if desired. Labels appear on reports and calculation
screens. Surface equipment geometry can be optionally entered as TVD of the
upstream end of the pipe segment and length or as X, Y (from the manifold or the
Xmas Tree) co-ordinate pairs. Refer to Section 6.1.2 above for more details.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to several
wells being connected to a production manifold via a common surface flow line.
The fluid velocity in the flowline is multiplied by the value entered - thereby
increasing the frictional pressure losses. For most applications it should be left at
its default value of 1. As an example, the pressure drop in a flowline connected to
3 identical wells could be modelled using a pipeline rate multiplier of 3. 2 parallel
flowlines having identical dimensions can be modelled by entering the actual
dimensions for one pipe and a pipeline rate multiplier of 0.5. It is also possible to
vary the rate multiplier along the pipeline to simulate varying sections of dual
pipelines for example.
PROSPER MANUAL
import data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 200 pipe segments can be
entered, enabling the user to model very long pipelines.
Pipe insulation (e.g. concrete, foam or bitumen) can be modelled. To define the
pipe insulation click the Enter button to display the following screen:
Figure 6-19
Pipe Insulation Input
Select the required insulation type from the drop-down list, then enter the thickness.
Enter the insulation beginning with the innermost layer. PROSPER uses the thermal
properties in its database to calculate the thermal conductivity of the composite
insulation. Click OK to return to the surface equipment screen. Different
insulations can be entered for each section of the flowline as required. The
calculated composite thermal conductivity is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
Pipes can be laid on the surface (burial depth = 0) or buried. The diagram below
shows the burial depth geometry.

Figure 6-20
Pipe Burial Depth
The burial depth is the distance between the soil surface and the bottom of the pipe
(including insulation, if present). The pipe is partially buried if the burial depth <
O.D. of the insulated pipe.
Â Ensure that the flowline pipe geometry is consistent with the pipe burial
depth. If necessary, insert another node and change the burial depth for
e.g. the riser.
Â The soil conductivity around buried surface pipes is taken from the
Thermal Properties database for the shallowest rock type entered in the
Litho logy screen. In previous PROSPER releases, the soil conductivity
was fixed at 3.5 W/m/K.

The downhole equipment section is used to describe the production tubing, SSSV
and restrictions. The following equipment items are available:
• Mild steel tubing

• Plastic coated tubing
• Stainless steel (either 13% or 25% chromium)
• SSSV
• Restrictions
The thermal properties database for downhole equipment elements can be edited
or added to if required. Pressure and temperature changes across subsurface
safety valves and restrictions (nipples) are correctly modelled. The following is an
example of a downhole equipment data input screen:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-21
Downhole
Equipment Input
For the Enthalpy Balance temperature model the casing dimensions and material
type are entered under Drilling and Completion, so the downhole equipment
description is required only for the tubing string.
To select tubing string elements to build up the tubing string description, click on
the list box arrows to the right of the item fields and make the appropriate selection
from the drop-down list. The editing buttons Cut, Copy, Paste, Insert and Delete
operate on data records that have been selected by clicking on their row number
button(s). All records can be simultaneously selected by clicking the All button. Use
the Import button to import data from a wide variety of sources. Up to 18 tubing
string elements can be input. For complex completions, simplify the data entry by
entering only the major elements that dominate the overall tubing pressure drop.
The Rate Multiplier column enables simulation of the pressure drop due to
intermittent sections of dual completions. The fluid velocity in the tubing is
multiplied by the value entered - thereby increasing the frictional pressure losses.
For standard single tubing completions it should be left at its default value of 1.

6.2.7 Databases
This optional feature is used to access the thermal properties databases for editing
or addition of user-defined materials. Select Databases and click Edit and the
following selection screen will be displayed:
Figure 6-22
Temperature Databases
Selection
Enter appropriate values for the Conductivity of cement and casing.
Depending on the selection, PROSPER expects input of thermal conductivity,

emissivity, specific heat capacity, specific gravity or density. An example of the
Insulation Types database screen is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-23
Insulation Properties Entry
Â Check that the units are correct prior to entering the thermal properties.
Edited values remain in memory and become part of a particular well model file
when the file is saved. To permanently save edited values or new user-defined
entries for use in other projects click the Save button to keep them in the database.
The Reset button is used to return all entries to their default values.
6.3 Rough Approximation

Equipment entry for the Rough Approximation temperature model varies little from
the Predicting Pressure Only option. Click on System ⏐ Equipment to display the
following input screen:

Figure 6-24
System Equipment Input
To start data entry for a new application, click All ⏐ Edit. PROSPER will then
display all the relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been
entered, clicking the Summary command button will display a schematic summary
of the current equipment.
To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button beside the
appropriate item. Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include
or exclude it temporarily from any calculation by using the Disable Surface
Equipment choice box at the bottom of the screen.

Enter data as per Section 6.1.1

Surface Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only except for the
requirement to enter the temperature of the pipe surroundings and an overall heat
transfer coefficient.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 6-25
Surface
Equipment Input
The heat transfer coefficient should not be confused with the pipe thermal
conductivity. The overall heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow
through the production tubing, annulus and insulation (if present) to the
surroundings. Heat transfer by forced and free convection, conduction and
radiation must all be accounted for in the value of the overall heat transfer
coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat transfer coefficient is referenced to the
pipe inside diameter. Please refer to Section 6.1.2 for more details.

The Downhole Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only. The casing
between the producing perforations and the tubing shoe is considered to be part of
the Downhole Equipment for the Rough Approximation temperature option.
Therefore the casing details should be entered in the Downhole Equipment. Please
refer to Section 6.1.3 for more details.

6.3.4 Geothermal Gradient

This is where the Rough Approximation temperature model differs most from the
Pressure Only case. PROSPER requires the formation temperature profile to be
entered on this screen:
Figure 6-26
Geothermal Gradient
Input
Â Enter static formation temperatures from e.g. extrapolation of

temperatures recorded on logging runs - NOT flowing well bore
temperatures.
As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient that describes
the resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and
conduction) from the well to its surroundings. The Enthalpy Balance temperature
model is a convenient way to determine average heat transfer coefficients. The
heat transfer area is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.
PROSPER MANUAL
6.3.5 Average Heat Capacities

To edit Average Heat Capacities, click its check box then click Edit to display the
following dialogue:
Figure 6-27
Average Heat Capacities
Enter values that correspond to average conditions in the well. Note that for oil,
and especially gas that Cp values are strong functions of both temperature and
pressure.
Â The default values will often give reasonable results in moderate GOR oil
wells. However, actual Cp values for oil and gas vary widely. Do not rely
on the defaults - obtain good estimates of Cp, or use the Enthalpy
Balance method where accurate temperature prediction is required.
6.4 Improved Approximation

Equipment entry for the Improved Approximation temperature model varies little
from the Rough Approximation option. Click on System ⏐ Equipment to display the
following input screen:

CHAPTER 6 - EQUIPMENT DATA INPUT 27 - 30
Figure 6-28
System Equipment Input
(Improved Approximation
Method)
To start data entry for a new application, click All ⏐ Edit. PROSPER will then display
all the relevant input screens in sequence. If data has already been entered,
clicking the Summary command button will display a summary of the current
equipment. To go back and edit one particular equipment item, click on the button
beside the appropriate item.
Data can be entered for the surface equipment and then include or exclude it
temporarily from any calculation by using the Disable Surface Equipment choice
box at the bottom of the Equipment Data screen.

Enter data as per Section 6.1.1

Surface Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only except for the
requirement to enter the temperature of the pipe surroundings and an overall heat
transfer coefficient.
JANUARY 2005 PROSPER6 MANUAL

Figure 6-29
Surface
Equipment Input
The heat transfer coefficient can be specified for each pipe segment and should not
be confused with the pipe thermal conductivity.
The heat transfer coefficient accounts for the heat flow through the production
tubing, annulus and insulation (if present) to the surroundings. Heat transfer by
forced and free convection, conduction and radiation must all be accounted for in
the value of the overall heat transfer coefficient. In PROSPER, the overall heat
transfer coefficient is referenced to the pipe inside diameter.

CHAPTER 6 - EQUIPMENT DATA INPUT 29 - 30

The Downhole Equipment is the same as for Predicting Pressure Only. The casing
between the producing perforations and the tubing shoe is considered to be part of
the Downhole Equipment for the Improved Approximation temperature option.
Therefore the casing details should be entered in the Downhole Equipment. Please
refer to Section 6.1.3 for more details.
6.4.4 Geothermal Gradient

PROSPER requires the formation temperature profile together with the heat transfer
coefficient to be entered on this screen:
Figure 6-30
Geothermal Gradient
Input
Â Enter static formation temperatures from e.g. extrapolation of

temperatures recorded on logging runs - NOT flowing well bore
temperatures.
As for surface equipment, enter an overall heat transfer coefficient that describes
the resistance to heat flow by all mechanisms (convection, radiation and
conduction) from the well to its surroundings. This value can vary throughout the
formation. The Enthalpy Balance temperature model is a convenient way to
determine average heat transfer coefficients. The heat transfer area is referenced
to the pipe inside diameter.
JANUARY 2005 PROSPER6 MANUAL

6.4.5 Sea Temperature Gradient

To edit Sea Temperature Gradient, click its check box then click Edit to display the
following dialogue:
Figure 6-31
Sea Temperature Gradient
Enter the data to describe to temperature gradient in the sea. Up to 20 points may
be entered. Use the Import button to retrieve the data from a wide variety of
sources

7 IPR Data Input
This section describes how PROSPER defines the reservoir inflow performance. The
following table lists the Inflow Performance options:
IPR Oil & Dry & Retrograde

Method Water Wet Gas Condensate
Back Pressure 9 9
C and n 9 9
Composite 9
Darcy 9
Dual Porosity 9 9 9
External Entry 9 9 9
Fetkovich 9
Forcheimer 9 9
Horizontal well - Bounded reservoir 9 9 9
Horizontal well - Const. Pres. upper 9
boundary
Horizontal well - dP friction 9 9 9
Horizontal well - transverse vertical 9 9 9
fractures
Hydraulically fractured 9 9 9
Jones 9 9 9
Multi-lateral 9 9 9
Multi-layer 9 9 9
Multi-layer - dP Loss 9 9 9
Multi-rate C and n 9 9
Multi-rate Fetkovich 9
Multi-rate Jones 9 9 9
Modified Isochronal IPR 9 9
Petroleum Experts 9 9
P.I. Entry 9
SkinAide 9 9 9
Thermally Induced Fracture 9
(injection only)
Transient 9
Vogel 9
7.1 IPR Single Well Data Entry

The data for inflow performance models is entered using a single master screen.
All the sub-screens relevant to a set of model choices are accessible through
clicking on buttons on the main screen and on a tabbed interface in a data input
screen. This means that data for different models are entered concurrently and can
be compared before selecting the Calculate option. The generic features of the
single well data entry screen are used in the multilateral interface (see Section 7.8)
for data entry to those network items with sufficiently large data structures (namely
tubing, completion and reservoir).
2 - 75 Chapter 7 - IPR Data Input
Click System ⏐ Inflow Performance in the main menu and the main data entry
screen will appear.
7.1.1 The Main Data Entry Screen

The screen consists of three parts.
1. Section Buttons. At the top right of the dialog screen are two buttons, labelled
Select Model and Input Data. These allow switching between screens that
control model selection and detailed data input. The former also contains data
pertaining to all models (such as reservoir pressure and temperature), and the
latter manages the data input specific to the chosen model. The selection
buttons have the same function in the multilateral data entry screens.
2. Action Buttons. To the left of the section buttons is a set of buttons that perform
various actions such as Calculate. Only the left-most group appears in the
multilateral data entry screens.
3. Model Selection Screen. The child screen is the area below the action and
section buttons and contains either the model selection or the data input
screens. The same occurs in the multilateral interface, although the actual
model selection and data input screens are different.
Figure 7-1
Main Data Entry
Screen
Section Buttons
As well as switching between the model selection and data input screens the
section buttons also indicate the validation status of the screens. The selection of
one screen or the other is shown by the indentation of the button for that screen
and the validity of the data is flagged by the colour. Green means that all the
required data are entered and within the numerical range for the units chosen;
where appropriate, extra consistency checks have also been carried out. Red
implies that either there is insufficient data entered or it is out of range/inconsistent.
In addition, if no models at all are selected the Select Model and Input Data
Petroleum Experts Ltd

Chapter 7 - IPR Data Input 3 - 75
buttons are marked invalid. Also, if not enough models are selected the Select
Model button is marked invalid (e.g. a reservoir but no skin model).
7.1.2 Action Buttons

Done
This button exits the screen after saving and validating all the data pertaining to the
chosen models. If the data are not valid an option of remaining in the IPR edit
screen and reviewing the validation errors that are listed in a validation error dialog
is provided. This also occurs after the validation in the Calculate, Transfer Data
and Save Results button commands. If the IPR section is exited with invalid data
left in the input then all calculation options using IPR data and models are disabled.
Cancel
This exits the screen and restores the data to its state at the start of the main edit
session.
Validate
Checks the data on the current child screen for validity. If the data are not valid, the
validation dialog will appear with diagnostic messages.
Reset
This replaces the data of the current child screen with the data that was current
when the screen was entered.
Help
This displays information relevant to the current child screen.
Calculate
Saves and validates all the data pertaining to the chosen models (e.g. Darcy
reservoir model and Enter Skin By Hand) then runs the correct calculation routine if
the data are valid. On successful completion of the calculation the results are
automatically plotted.
Plot
Will produce a plot screen appropriate to the current reservoir model (for example,
a Darcy plot) and plot the data from the last Calculate command.
Report
Enters the PROSPER Reporting System. The report produced will depend on the
current model choices. A fuller description of the reporting is found in Chapter 12.
Export
Can export current data (input and results) to the printer, a file, the clipboard or the
screen. It thus forms another method of reporting and is described more fully in
Chapter 13.
Transfer Data
PROSPER MANUAL
Saves and validates all the current data before opening a standard ‘File Save As’
dialog that provides an opportunity to save the data to file in MBAL input format
(.MIP).
If PROSPER has been opened from a session in GAP then the data are
Â posted to GAP instead. The transfer button does not prompt for creation
of a .MIP file.
Save Results
This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. On a successful
validation options to either over-write the current file or to save the PROSPER file
using ‘File Save As’ options are provided.
GAP
This option is only enabled when PROSPER is run from GAP. It shuts down the IPR
screen and minimises PROSPER, thus bringing GAP to the forefront.
Note that the ‘Save and Validate’ sequence carried out by several of the
Â action button commands does not actually save to file but transfers data
from the context of the IPR data screen to the PROSPER data structure
in memory. Hence, files should regularly be saved to avoid losing work
due to power failures or crashes.
7.1.3 Model Selection Screen

An example of the model selection screen for the ‘Oil and Water’ fluid choice can
be seen in the screen dump of the main data screen (Figure 7.1).
This part of the IPR input screen controls the choice of almost all the tabbed dialogs
that will be seen in the subsequent data input screen.
There are four major selections done in this screen. These are:
• Selection of Reservoir Inflow Model

o For each fluid various single well IPR models available are listed and the
User makes a selection.
• Selection of mechanical/geometrical skin

o The User has the option of entering the skin by hand or using one of the
analytical models to model the completion skin.
• Selection of deviation / partial penetration skin

o There are two skin models and these become available if an analytical
skin model of mechanical / geometric skin calculation has been used.
• Reservoir input
o The User also specifies the pressure, temperature, producing GOR and
water cut at this screen.
• Relative permeability.

o This option can be set to Yes or No in case of oils. If set to Yes, the User
has the option of defining a set of relative permeability curves, which will
be used to change productivity of the system with changing water cut.
The gravel pack selection and the type of completion (cased or open hole)
Â are chosen from the main Options screen (in the PROSPER main menu)
but some reservoir models have internal gravel pack data entries instead.
In case gas coning option has been selected in main options, for oils the
Â coning button is displayed to allow the activation of a dialog screen in
which parameters for the calculation of rate-dependent GOR's can be
entered
If the fluid is a gas or a condensate the format of the screen is very similar; only the
reservoir and other model input selections vary for example, in gas systems, we
have CGR and WGR instead of GOR and WC.
The choice of reservoir models governs which subsidiary models (principally skin)
is enabled. Thus, horizontal well models do not require a deviation skin data entry
and some of the more complex reservoir models (e.g. multi-layer with dP friction
loss) contain their own skin and gravel pack models.
7.1.4 Data Input Screen

The data input screen contains a set of data entry tabbed dialogs that become
available depending on the selected IPR model.
Only one dialog is displayed at any one time, corresponding to the tab
Â selected as shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2
Data Input Screen
The tabs are labelled as follows:
PROSPER MANUAL
• Reservoir Model
• Mech/Geom Skin
• Dev/PP Skin
• Gravel Pack
• Relative Perm
Â The tabs are coloured according to the validity of the data on the
corresponding dialogs.
• If the tab is green, then the data are valid for the current system
set-up.
• If it is red, then the data are invalid or empty.
• If the tab is grey, then this tab is not applicable to the current
reservoir model (or model selection) and so is inaccessible.
Â The various screens as shown in the Figure 7-2, accessible by the bottom
tabs comprise the dialog screens, where the input parameters for the
selection are entered. In the area below the Section and Action buttons. In
the case of the model selection screen it is mainly occupied with ways of
choosing models, namely three list boxes, a drop-down list box and a
push button.
For example Figure 7.2 shows a Darcy reservoir model dialog encapsulated in the
data input screen contained in the main entry screen.
• The Reservoir Model tab is marked invalid (due to the unlikely reservoir thickness of
–1 feet).
• The Dev/PP Skin tab and relative permeability tabs are marked disabled. In this
case it is because the ‘Enter Skin By Hand’ option is selected which is assumed to
contain the deviation and partial penetration information. In the latter case relative
permeability is simply not selected (see Figure 7.1, showing the model selection
screen).
Notes on Data Validation:
Â On each of the IPR Input screens there is a validate button. Pressing this
button invokes a checking routine which flags for the any invalid entries.
Notes on Data Entry in IPR section

In all the IPR input screens, for various options, the data may be required to be
entered in one of the following ways:
• Entering a value against a blank field as seen in all the entries of the Figure
7-2.
• Pressing a push button, which takes us further into another screen, where
actual data required is entered as indicated against Dietz calculator on
Figure 7-2.
• Using a drop-down list.
Â Some models require data entered for multiple layers (e.g. multi-layer and
multi-layer with dP friction loss) and/or multiple completion zones (e.g.
horizontal well with dP friction loss and Wong-Clifford deviation/partial
penetration skin model).
In dialogs with grid entry it is also possible to select, copy, cut and paste
blocks of the table, using mouse drag operations and the buttons provided
on the screen. As the data in a table are typically interdependent some
consistency validation checks are carried out in addition to the range
validation.
7.2 IPR Models for Oil Wells

The IPR model chosen depends upon the available data and the type of inflow
sensitivities to be performed. Some of the main highlights are
Â There are twenty inflow options, including the multi-lateral method

described in Section 7.8, are available.
The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be

entered for all inflow performance models, except for multi-rate models.
From the Multi-rate models the average reservoir pressure can be back
calculated.
If test data is available it can be entered and plotted against the calculated
inflow.
Well skin can be either directly entered or calculated using the Locke,
Macleod or Karakas and Tariq methods for a mechanical/geometrical
skin, and the Cinco/Martin-Bronz or Wong-Clifford methods for a
deviation/partial penetration skin.
Relative permeability curves are optionally used together with fluid

viscosities (from PVT) to calculate the total fluid mobility for a given water
cut. The calculated IPR can be matched to measured data and used to
calculate IPR pressures for any rate and water cut. Relative permeability
can be applied to all oil IPR models in PROSPER.
Frictional pressure losses between multiple producing zones are

accounted for in the Horizontal Well - friction dP and Multi layer - friction
dP. A network algorithm determines the production from each zone while
accounting for flowing pressure losses to find the total well production.
These models can be combined with gravel pack and relative permeability
models if the option is enabled (the former in the Options screen from the
PROSPER main menu and the latter from the IPR main data entry screen).
PROSPER MANUAL
Once a specific model is chosen and data entered for it, after which an IPR can be
calculated using the Calculate button. The following sections list various inflow
models that are available for oil wells.

7.2.1 P.I. Entry

A straight-line inflow model is used above the bubble point based on the equation
shown below. The Vogel empirical solution is used below the bubble point, the test
point being the rate calculated using the following equation at bottom hole pressure
equal to bubble point.
The User input productivity index (PI) is used to calculate the IPR. P.I. Entry
replaces the Straight-line IPR in older releases of PROSPER.
Q = J ( Pr − Pb )
7.2.2 Vogel
The program uses the straight-line inflow relationship above the bubble point and
the Vogel empirical solution below the bubble point. A single flowing bottom hole
pressure and surface test rate is used to calculate the IPR, below the bubble point.
From this IPR the rate and bubble point pressure are used to evaluate the PI for the
straight-line part of the inflow above the bubble point.
When calculating IPR sensitivities for reservoir pressure, PROSPER retains the
correct well productivity. Otherwise, changing the reservoir pressure changes the
Vogel well productivity.
2
Q Pwf ⎛ Pwf ⎞
= 1 − 0.2 − 0.8⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
Qmax Pr ⎝ Pr ⎠
7.2.3 Composite
This is an extension of the Vogel inflow solution (Petrobras method) that accounts
for water cut.
Vogel essentially decreases the inflow below bubble point because of gas
formation. However, if the water cut is higher the inflow potential will increase and
approach a straight-line IPR due to single-phase flow. The composite model
captures this by using the following formulation.
Q
J=
⎧ P ⎛ ⎛ Pwf ⎞
2
⎞⎫⎪
⎪
Fo ⎨ Pr − Pb + b ⎜1 − 0.2
Pwf
− 0.8⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎟ + F {P − P }
1 .8 ⎜ Pr ⎝ Pr ⎠ ⎟⎬ w r wf
⎪⎩ ⎝ ⎠⎪⎭
A test flow rate, flowing bottomhole pressure and water cut are required to be
entered.
PROSPER MANUAL
7.2.4 Darcy
The program uses the Darcy inflow equation above the bubble point and the Vogel
solution below the bubble point. Required input is:
• Reservoir permeability (total permeability at the prevailing water cut and GOR)
• Reservoir thickness (thickness of producing reservoir rock)
• Drainage area
• Well bore radius
• Dietz shape factor (to account for the shape of the drainage area)
7.2.5 Fetkovich
The Fetkovich equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which
allows for two phase flow below the bubble point. The Fetkovich equation can be
expressed as:
Q = J ( Pr − Pb ) + J ' ( Pr − Pwf )
2 2
Enter the same inputs as for the Darcy example plus the relative permeability for
oil. Skin can be entered either by hand or calculated using Locke's, Macleod's or
the Karakas and Tariq method.
7.2.6 Multi-rate Fetkovich

This method uses a non-linear regression to fit the Fetkovich model for up to 10
test points. The model is expressed as:
Q = C (( Pr2 − Pwf2 ) / 1000) n
The fit values of C and n are posted on the IPR plot. If the reservoir pressure is not
available, the program will calculate it. For producing wells, enter a reservoir
pressure lower than the measured flowing bottomhole pressures. The program will
dismiss the reservoir pressure that has been entered and calculate it. For injection
wells, input a reservoir pressure higher than the test pressures entered. The
program will then calculate the reservoir pressure.
7.2.7 Jones
The Jones equation for oil is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows
for both Darcy and non-Darcy pressure drops. The Jones equation can be
expressed in the form:
( Pr − Pwf ) = aQ 2 + bQ
Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or can be determined
from a multi-rate test. The same data as for the Darcy model plus the perforated
interval is required. Skin can be directly entered or calculated using the available
methods.
7.2.8 Multi-rate Jones

This method uses a non-linear regression to fit for up to 10 test points for the Jones
model.
i.e. ( Pr − Pwf ) = aQ 2 + bQ
If reservoir pressure is to be calculated see Multi-rate Fetkovich above.
7.2.9 Transient
This IPR method takes into account the change of deliverability with time. This
method can be particularly important for tight reservoirs. Both the Darcy and Jones
equations assume that the well has reached pseudo-steady state flow conditions.
In tight reservoirs, the transient equation can be used to determine the inflow
performance as a function of flowing time. Once the flowing time is long enough for
pseudo-steady state flow to develop within the drainage radius, the Darcy inflow
model is then used. Enter the same data as the Darcy example plus:
• Porosity (Enter the reservoir porosity)

• Time (Time in days, must be greater than 0.5 days)
The transient IPR equation is:
162.6 qo µ o Bo ⎛ ⎛ ko t ⎞ ⎞
Pr − Pwf = ⎜ Log ⎜ 2 ⎟ − 3.23 + 0.87 S ⎟
ko h ⎝ ⎝ φµ o Ct rw ⎠ ⎠
Time is the flowing time since the last reservoir pressure equalisation up to the time
of the analysis. If the flowing time exceeds TpSSS , the deliverability is evaluated
using TpSSS , which is equivalent to using the pseudo-steady state Darcy model.
7.2.10 Hydraulically Fractured Well

The hydraulically fractured well inflow model can be used to run sensitivities on
hydraulic fracture designs. The model is transient and is particularly useful in
determining the transient deliverability of a well after stimulation.
Â Gravel packs can be combined with the hydraulically fractured well IPR to
model Frac-Packed wells
Required data input is:
• Reservoir permeability (Total permeability)

• Formation thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock)
PROSPER MANUAL
• Drainage area
• Dietz shape factor (Depends on the shape of the drainage area)
• Time (Inflow is transient in early time)
• Fracture height
• Fracture half length
• Dimensionless fracture conductivity
7.2.11 Horizontal Well - No Flow Boundaries

This steady-state inflow model is based on the work of Kuchuk and Goode. It
assumes that the horizontal well is draining a closed rectangular drainage volume
that is bounded by sealing surfaces. The well can be placed anywhere within the
drainage region. The pressure drop along the well bore itself is not taken into
account. This model may not be suitable for long horizontal sections drilled in high
productivity reservoirs. Horizontal well - friction dP IPR should be used in such
cases. Enter:
Â The definitions of symbols for various parameters to PROSPER horizontal

well model are as per this manual and not necessarily on basis of the
reference paper.
• Reservoir permeability (Total permeability at prevailing water cut)

• Reservoir thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock h)
• Horizontal anisotropy (Ratio of Ky/Kx where Kx is permeability in the
direction of the horizontal well and Ky is the
permeability perpendicular to the horizontal well)
• Vertical anisotropy (Ratio of Kz/Ky where Kz is the vertical
permeability)
• Length of well (Horizontal section L)
• Length of drainage area (Reservoir dimension parallel to well Lx)
• Width of drainage area (Reservoir dimension perpendicular to well Ly)
• Distance from length edge to centre of well (Xw)
• Distance from width edge to centre of well (Yw)
• Distance from bottom of reservoir to centre of well (Zw)
A sketch outlining the main geometric parameters is shown below:

Figure 7-3
Horizontal Well Geometry
7.2.12 Horizontal Well - Constant Pressure Upper

Boundary
The reservoir geometry is the same as for the No Flow Boundaries case, except for
a constant pressure upper boundary. The pressure drop along the well bore itself
is not taken into account. This model requires the same input data as the
Horizontal Well - Bounded Reservoir model above. The plots below compares
PROSPER calculated IPR values with those obtained by Kuchuk and Goode for a
well in the centre of a 4000’ by 4000’ square reservoir.
PROSPER Horizontal Well IPR

Figure 7-4 vs Fine Grid Simulation
Horizontal Well P.I. vs. 35
Well Length Anisotropy
30 h = 50'
0.01 zw = 25'
rw = 0.25'
kh = 50 md
25 0.1 vis = 1 cp
1.0
P.I. (BOPD/psi)
20
Simulator - Lines
PROSPER - Symbols
15
4000'
10
4000'
0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
L1/2/Lx
PROSPER MANUAL
7.2.13 Multi-Layer Inflow

The multi-layer inflow model allows up to 50 discrete reservoir layers to be entered
as shown in the following example input screen:
Figure 7-5
Multi-Layer IPR Input
Each layer can have different reservoir pressures, inflow models and fluid
properties. The oil gravity, GOR and water cut may be entered for each layer. The
produced fluid properties in the well bore are determined from the summation of the
individual layer contributions. The summation accounts for cross flow between
layers having different pressures. Each layer can be gravel packed if desired. Both
Injectors and Producers can be modelled. For cases where the zones are
separated by significant depth or friction pressure losses are significant, the Multi-
layer - dP Loss network IPR model should be used.
Â If PVT matching has been used in the PVT section, it is assumed that it
was performed on the commingled layer fluids. The fit parameters
generated will be applied to all PVT calculations for all layers in
determining the combined inflow performance.
To use the Multi-Layer IPR, enter the reservoir temperature then click Input Data to
enter the tab-controlled screen, and then click on the Reservoir Model tab button.
For each layer, select the inflow model from: Darcy, Multi-rate Jones, or PI Entry
methods then enter the layer PVT properties, average pressures, thickness and
skins. For each layer, click the Layer Data button and enter the information
required by the inflow model.
Â To facilitate rapid comparison of flow rates using different completion

options, select a Null IPR type for a layer i.e., from the Layer Model drop-
down dialogue box select the blank (no text) option. This effectively turns
the layer off. To return it to production, re-select the original IPR type, and
the layer parameters etc. will be re-instated when the IPR is re-calculated.

Â The Multi-Layer IPR solves the combined contribution from each

producing layer at the intake node. This effectively places each layer at
the same depth. The reservoir pressure entered for each layer should
therefore be referenced to the intake node depth.
7.2.14 External Entry

This option allows an externally generated IPR data set to be imported or directly
entered. Up to five tables can be entered to allow sensitivities to be calculated on
any arbitrary set of variables. For example, IPRs for a range of reservoir pressures
calculated by a simulator could be input using this option.
An example of an external entry IPR input screen is shown below:
Figure 7-6
External Entry
IPR
External IPR tables can also be imported from ASCII files. The file format is given
in Appendix E of the PROSPER User Guide.
7.2.15 Horizontal well - dP Friction

To adequately model horizontal well inflow in high permeability reservoirs, it is
necessary to account for pressure loss along the horizontal section. PROSPER
divides the horizontal section into 20 sections and a network algorithm solves for
zone production and well bore pressure. Pressure loss between zones is
accounted for. The Horizontal well - dP Friction input screen is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 7-7
Horizontal well - dP
Friction
The reservoir parameters entered in the upper section of the screen determine the
overall well productivity using the selected model. The zone parameters are used
by the network algorithm to re-scale the overall productivity on a zone-by-zone
basis. A description of the input parameters follows:
Reservoir Parameters
• Horizontal Well Model (Model used for overall well productivity)
• Reservoir permeability (Total permeability at prevailing water cut)
• Reservoir thickness (Thickness of producing reservoir rock h)
• Well bore radius (Radius of open hole rw)
• Horizontal anisotropy (Ratio of Ky/Kx where Kx is permeability in the
direction of the horizontal well and Ky is the
permeability perpendicular to the horizontal well)
• Vertical anisotropy (Ratio of Kz/Ky where Kz is the vertical
permeability)
• Length of well (Horizontal section L)
• Length of drainage area (Reservoir dimension parallel to well Lx)
• Width of drainage area (Reservoir dimension perpendicular to well Ly)
• Distance from length edge to centre of well (Xw)
• Distance from width edge to centre of well (Yw)
• Distance from bottom of reservoir to centre of well (Zw)
The horizontal well models available are:

Kuckuk and Goode (bounded and constant pressure boundary)
Babu & Odeh
Goode / Wilkinson partial completion (bounded and constant pressure boundary)
The reservoir parameters are entered as for the original infinite conductivity (no
pressure loss) horizontal well model.
Â Geometric definitions vary between published horizontal well inflow

models. Ensure that geometric parameters entered in PROSPER are
consistent with the above definitions. Refer to the Horizontal Well IPR
sketch for details.
Zone Parameters
Data for up to 20 zones can be entered. The required inputs are as follows:
• Zone Type (Blank, Perforated or Open Hole)

• Skin method (Enter by Hand, or Karakas & Tariq for perforated
zones)
• Gravel Pack (Yes or No)
• Zone Length (Length of zone along the well)
• Zone Permeability (Average permeability at the prevailing water cut)
• Flowing Radius (Internal radius of the completion tubing)
• Zone Roughness (Roughness for zone friction calculation)
These parameters describe the local permeability and the flow path along the well
bore. Click the Zone Data button to enter details such as skin and perforation
parameters. If the Skin Method is Enter by Hand, the skin and open hole radius are
required. If Karakas & Tariq is selected, then enter the perforation details as in
Section 7.4.1 and PROSPER will estimate the zone skin. If the zone is to be gravel
packed, this data is entered under Zone Data.
Â To allow comparison of the IPR with and without friction losses, setting the
zone roughness to zero turns off the friction pressure drop calculation
entirely rather than calculating friction for a smooth pipe
Coning Calculations in Horizontal wells

The Ben Dikken and Chaperon correlations prediction of critical coning rates for
gas, water or gas and water have been implemented. From the Horizontal well - dP
Friction data entry screen click Coning to display the Coning Calculations screen:
Figure 7-8
Horizontal well -
Coning Calculations
Enter a production rate and porosity then select the required coning calculation
method. Click Calculate to find the critical rate and time to breakthrough for the
rate entered. The pressure along the well bore for the specified rate is calculated
and displayed by clicking Plot.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 7-9
Horizontal well - dP
Friction Loss Plot
The production contribution from each zone can be displayed as:
Rate per Unit Length

Percentage production
Cumulative percentage production
An example of a rate per unit length plot is shown below:
Figure 7-10
Horizontal well -
Rate
per Unit Length
Â The Horizontal Well - friction dP IPR models the pressure at the heel of the
well as a function of pressure. The intake node is therefore the heel of the
well. The heel should be the last node entered in System ⏐ Equipment
and Deviation Survey tables - it is not necessary to enter details of the
horizontal producing section except in the IPR.

7.2.16 Multi-Layer - dP Loss

This IPR is for modelling multi-layer reservoirs where friction pressure losses are
significant. PROSPER iterates until the production from each zone and the well
pressures converge at the solution rate. The effect of pressure drop between
zones and cross flow is accounted for. An example of a Multi-Layer - dP Loss input
screen is shown below:
Figure 7-11
Multi-Layer Well-
friction Dp
This screen allows for the entry of up to 49 layers. To enter PVT, IPR data
(permeability, test rates etc. depending on the IPR model selected) and layer skin,
click the appropriate button to display the input screen. The depth entered for TOP
is the depth for which the IPR is to be evaluated. This is normally the same as the
deepest depth entered in System ⏐ Equipment, but it can be set to surface or other
value.
The input data required are:
• Layer Type (Either Blank, Perforated or Open Hole)

• Measured Depth (Measured depth of the bottom of layer n)
• True Vertical Depth (TVD of the bottom of layer n)
• Layer Pressure (Pressure at top of layer n)
• Layer Flowing Radius (Well radius for calculating inter layer pressure drops)
• Layer IPR Model (Select from Darcy, Multi-rate Jones, P.I. Entry)
• Layer Skin Model (Enter by Hand or Karakas & Tariq)
• Layer Gravel Pack (Yes or No)
• Layer PVT Data (GOR, Oil and Gas Gravity plus Water Cut)
• Layer Parameters (Relevant parameters for the selected IPR model)
• Layer Skin (Relevant parameters for the selected IPR model)
The IPR at surface can be calculated by entering the surface elevation for TOP
depth and a blank zone from surface to the shallowest producing zone. Use blank
zones with appropriate reduced I.D. to simulate the effect of sliding sleeves and
PROSPER MANUAL
flow controls in a multi-zone completion. Click Calculate and the IPR for each layer
and the summation will be calculated and displayed on a plot as follows:
Figure 7-12
Multi-Layer Well-
friction dP
To list the layer production in detail, click Results and scroll through the layer
results one by one. An example results screen is shown below:
Figure 7-13
Multi-Layer Well- friction dP
Results
Scroll from the selection menu to view the results for each of the layers.
Gravel pack and well skin etc. can be seen by scrolling to the right of the results
table. Negative layer production rates indicate cross-flow into the layer.
Â If a zero roughness is entered, then inter-layer pressure drops are not

computed. The layer pressures are then equivalent to a potential referred
to the depth of the TOP layer. The calculations are then equivalent to the
simpler Multi-Layer IPR without dP model.
Â The multilayer option is now available for dry gas and gas condensate
model

7.2.17 SkinAide
The Elf inflow and skin calculation method is incorporated in PROSPER. API
perforation characteristics can be used to estimate perforation damage given
casing and formation properties. A detailed description of SkinAide is given in
Section 7.7.
7.2.18 Dual Porosity

This model is useful for naturally fractured reservoirs where the matrix (formation)
porosity is greater than the fracture porosity and the matrix permeability is much
smaller than the fracture permeability, but not negligible. It requires the entry of the
following parameters: fracture permeability, reservoir thickness, drainage area,
well-bore radius, porosity, time, storativity ratio and interporosity coefficient. The
latter two parameters are defined as follows:
1. Storativity ratio, ω = φf cf / ( φf cf + φm cm)

where φf is the fracture porosity, cf is the fracture compressibility, φm is the matrix
porosity and cm is the matrix compressibility.
2. Interporosity, λ = α km rew^2 /kf

where α is a shape factor (see Warren, J.E. and Root, P.J.: "The Behaviour of
Naturally Fractured Reservoirs.", SPE 426, SPEJ (Sept. 1963), 245-255.), km is
matrix permeability, rew^2 is effective well radius squared and kf is fracture
permeability.
7.2.19 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical

Fractures
The horizontal well with transverse vertical fractures is based on a model proposed
by T.M. Herge and Leif Larsen in the SPE paper 28845. The model is based on a
relationship between the effective wellbore radius, fracture conductivity, fracture
size, wellbore radius and number of fractures; the correlation also calculates the
distance between fractures.
Once the effective wellbore radius is determined the model calculates the well
productivity the same way the horizontal well with no-flow-boundaries is calculated.
This is for use with wells that are stimulated with one or more transverse vertical
fractures. It is assumed that the fractures are circular, the well goes through their
centre and they are evenly spaced. If there is one fracture it is in the middle of the
well. The data to be entered are the same as those for a horizontal well, along with
the fracture half-length and its dimensionless conductivity.
PROSPER MANUAL
7.2.20 Thermally Induced Fracture Model
7.2.20.1 Overview
The algorithm follows the framework outlined in: SPE 30777, Thermally Induced
Fractures: A Field-Proven Analytical Model. SPE Reservoir Evaluation & Engineering,
February 1998. J-L. Detienne, Max Creusot, Nicolas Kessler, Bernard Sahuquet
and J-L. Bergerot. Information was also assembled from SPE 7964 (radial
reservoir temperature profile) and SPE 11332 (coefficient for thermo-elastic stress
equation). Note that the temperature profile derivation uses the same basis as the
work of de Lauwerier referred to in SPE 30777.
SPE 7964: Analytical Definition of the Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient, A. B.

Zolotukhin.
SPE 11332: The Effect of Thermo-elastic Stresses on Injection Well Fracturing, T.K.
Perkins and J.A. Gonzalez.
This model is concerned with the thermo-mechanical effects induced by injecting

cold water into a hot reservoir. The method first tests whether a calculated Pwf
rises above the reservoir stress around the well bore. If this occurs then a fracture
is assumed to propagate and the Pwf at the fracture tip is equated to the reservoir
stress (i.e. equilibrium) by iterating on the fracture length. The fracture’s effect is
incorporated in a skin term, and two stress effects are considered; a thermo-elastic
one (varies with injection temperature) and a poro-elastic one (varies with Pwf). The
stress at the wellbore is calculated by adding these effects to the initial reservoir
stress. The Pwf is calculated using varying fluid and geometric properties (inner and
outer radii) and a Darcy-like model in three circular zones. The first (inner) is water
that is still cool, the second is water that has warmed up, and the third (outer) is the
original reservoir.
The IPR calculated by this model consists, therefore, of two different zones with a
break-point where the fracturing occurs. See the following figure.

Figure 7-14
Thermally Induced
Fracture IPR
The model is not valid for uncontrolled hydraulic fracturing where the fracture length
may be several hundred feet. The fracture should not extend beyond the so-called
cooled injection zone, the extent of which is calculated using the temperature profile
referred to above.
7.2.20.2 Data Entry

The Thermally Induced Fracture model reservoir data screen is split into two tabbed
screens, one handling 'Injecitivity Index' parameters, and one handling 'Thermo-
mechanical' parameters. Also, it is required to enter the injected fluid temperature
in the model selection screen.
PVT parameter
Injected Fluid Temperature
Injectivity Index Parameters

Reservoir permeability (Total permeability)
Formation thickness (Thickness of producing formations)
Drainage area
DIETZ shape factor (Depends on the shape of the drainage area).
Wellbore radius
Porosity (Enter the reservoir porosity)
Time (Time in days, must be greater than 0.5 days)
Mean Historical Injection Rate
Thermo-mechanical Parameters
Initial Reservoir Stress
Sweep Efficiency
Injected Fluid Specific Heat Capacity
Overall Reservoir Conductivity
Overall Reservoir Specific Heat Capacity
Overall Reservoir Density
PROSPER MANUAL
Top and Bottom Surroundings Conductivity
Top and Bottom Surroundings Specific Heat Capacity
Top and Bottom Surroundings Density
Reservoir Thermal Expansion (thermo-elastic correlating coefficient, relates
temperature perturbation to stress perturbation)
Biot's Constant (poro-elastic correlating coefficient, relates pressure perturbation to
stress perturbation)
Poisson's Ratio
Reservoir Young's Modulus
7.2.21 Using Relative Permeabilities in PROSPER

For oil wells, the effects of changing relative permeability on the IPR can be taken
into account. From the model selection screen, select a suitable IPR method then
enter the reservoir temperature and pressure. If relative permeability effects are
not to be considered then select No. To use relative permeability, select Yes.
If use relative permeability is selected, the PI will be corrected by multiplying the

ratio of the liquid mobilities. The liquid mobility is dependent on the water cut. Given
the relative permeability curves, they can be used together with fluid viscosity (PVT)
to calculate the total fluid mobility at different water cut.
The test water cut and the test reservoir pressure are used to determine the phase
saturations and viscosity at the original PI. With the use of relative permeability
curves, the liquid mobility at the test (reference point) can be calculated from:
K rw K ro
M test = +
µw µo
The water saturation can always be estimated based on the relative permeability
curve and the water cut entered. At a particular reservoir pressure and water cut,
the mobility (M) can be calculated.
The corrected productivity index will be:
M
PI = PI test ×
M test
This value of corrected PI will be used to generate the IPR.
The possible reduction in liquid mobility due to any increase in the gas saturation is
not accounted for in this option. Hence, If use relative permeability is selected,
there is a further option to consider Vogel correction for GOR using the Standing
Method (Reference: K. E. Brown & H. Dale Beggs “ The technology of artificial lift
methods” – Volume 1). The Vogel correction takes into account the effect of
increasing gas saturation on the well PI. It requires the entry of a test GOR value.
The GOR entered is taken as the total produced GOR. Based on the PVT, then this
used to calculate a free gas saturation Sg.

The Sw is calculated on basis of test water cut and test reservoir pressure. So is
calculated from
So = 1 − Sw − S g
Once the phase saturation and viscosities are known the PI is estimated from total
liquid mobility ratios as indicated above.
When relative permeability is set to ‘No’ the oil and water mobility values are
calculated on basis of the assumption that the free gas down hole is zero. The oil
saturation is calculated as:
So = 1 − Sw
Based on these phase saturations, the PI correction is made.
After selecting the relative permeability option, we then go to the ‘Relative

Permeability’ tabbed dialog in the data input screen. The child screen is shown in
the following figure.
Figure 7-15
Relative Permeability Data
Input
Â For Inflow Models like Darcy with a relative permeability correction, enter a
water cut during test equal to 0, if the permeability entered in the reservoir
input data is true single phase permeability of the rock.
Enter the residual saturation, endpoint relative permeability and Corey exponent for
both oil and water. A Corey exponent of 1.0 defines straight-line relative
permeability curves. Values greater than 1 give a concave upwards curve i.e.
delayed water breakthrough. Corey exponents less than 1 define a concave
downwards relative permeability curve i.e. early water breakthrough.
Matching measured and calculated IPR pressures establishes the well productivity
for the prevailing water cut. Click on Plot to bring up the following plot in the
standard plot window.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 7-16
Relative
Permeability
Curves Display
To enter lab relative permeability, click Test Data to display the following screen:
Figure 7-17
Relative Permeability
Test Data Input
Enter the test data and click OK to display the plot again. If necessary, adjust the
values of Corey exponents for oil and water until PROSPER's calculated relative
permeability curves fit the measured data points.
Having entered and verified the relative permeability data, click Finish to quit the
plot. Next, enter the necessary data for the particular IPR method selected and
click on Calculate to calculate and display a plot of the system IPR. The program
automatically calculates the well Absolute Open Flow Potential (AOF).

Figure 7-18
Example IPR
Plot
To compare measured test pressures and calculated IPR pressures, click Test data
and enter rates and sandface pressures as on the following screen:
Figure 7-19
IPR - Test Data Entry
When relative permeability is being used, water cuts for both the test data and that
used to calculate the IPR curve are required. The water cut during test value will be
carried over from the relative permeability input screen. The water cut for calculation
value can be subsequently changed to evaluate the effect on the calculated IPR.
PROSPER MANUAL
7.2.22 Coning Calculation

In addition to the coning model implemented for the Horizontal Well with dP Friction
Loss model, a gas coning option can be chosen from the Options screen in the main
menu. This applies to all oil IPR models. It modifies the solution GOR by
multiplying it by a weighting factor greater than 1, which is a positive function of the
liquid rate. The output is a total, or produced, GOR. The model implemented was
originally developed for high permeability reservoirs (see Urbanczyk, C.H, and
Wattenbarger, R.A., "Optimization of Well Rates under Gas Coning Conditions.",
SPE Advanced Technology Series, Vol. 2, No. 2, April 1994).
The following data are required to calculate the total GOR from a rate:
• Reservoir permeability
• Perforation height (vertical distance from perforation top to bottom)
• Vertical anisotropy
• Vertical distance from perforation top to gas-oil contact
• Three correlating parameters: F1, F3 and an exponent
If the gas coning is enabled then a Coning button appears on the model selection
dialog screen. Clicking on this brings up a dialog that allows the correlating
parameters to be tuned. There is an automatic matching facility, which calculates
F3 from the other data and a (rate, GOR) coordinate. Also, the GOR can be
calculated from different rates whilst in this screen in order to verify the parameters.
Â It is recommended that this model be calibrated against measure rate

versus produced GOR data before using it as a predictive tool.
7.3 IPR for Gas and Retrograde Condensate

Sixteen inflow options are available, including a multi-lateral inflow model. The
choice depends upon the information available and the type of sensitivities that will
be done. If multi-rate test data is available, the modelled IPR can be matched to
the measured data.
As for oil, Gas inflow models are divided between design and production
applications. Calculated IPR models can be used to estimate productivity for
different completion options. Other models are available for estimating productivity
from measured flowing pressures.
The average reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature must be entered for all
inflow performance models, however both the Multi-rate C and n and Multi-rate
Jones models can be used to calculate the reservoir pressure from production test
data.
7.3.1 Jones
The Jones equation for gas is a modified form of the Darcy equation, which allows
for both laminar and non-Darcy flow pressure drops. The Jones equation can be
expressed in the form:
( Pr2 − Pwf2 ) = aQ2 + bQ
Where "a" and "b" are calculated from reservoir properties or can be determined
from a multi-rate test. Required data entry is:

• Drainage area
• Wellbore radius
The Jones IPR model is discouraged to use with high reservoir pressures
Â as the assumption of the model is to keep 1 / µ Z constant at pressures
>2400psig.
7.3.2 Forcheimer
The Forcheimer equation expresses the inflow performance in terms of a laminar
and a non-Darcy pressure drop coefficient expressed as:
( Pr2 − Pwf2 ) = aQ2 + bQ
For "a" enter the laminar pressure drop as drawdown/unit production and for “b” the
non-Darcy in drawdown2/(unit production)2.
The Forcheimer equation appears identical to the Jones equation and here the “a”
7.3.3 Back Pressure

In this form of the back pressure equation, C is determined from the reservoir
pressure and reservoir properties. Required input data are:

• Drainage area
• Wellbore radius (Open hole radius)
• Exponent n (Between 0.5 and 1)
7.3.4 C and n
This is the common form of the back pressure equation:
Q = C ( Pr2 − Pwf2 ) n
PROSPER MANUAL
C and n can be determined from a plot of: Q versus (Pr2-Pwf2) on log-log paper. n
is the inverse of the slope and varies between 1 for Darcy flow to 0.5 for completely
non-Darcy flow. This option allows direct entry of C and n.
7.3.5 Multi-rate C and n

Up to 10 test points can be entered and they will be fitted to the C and n back
pressure equation for gas. The fit values of C and n are posted on the IPR plot and
listed in the IPR report. The program will automatically calculate the reservoir
pressure if it is not available.
Â It is advised to enter more than one test point. Using a single data point
can generate a non-representative IPR profile.
7.3.6 Multi-rate Jones

Up to 10 test points can be entered and they will be fitted to the Jones equation for
gas expressed as:
( Pr2 − Pwf2 ) = aQ2 + bQ
The fit values of a and b are posted on the IPR plot and listed in the IPR report.
The multi-rate Jones IPR is a convenient way to determine a and b from well tests.
These values can be entered in the Forcheimer IPR for calculating IPR sensitivities.
The program will automatically calculate the reservoir pressure if it is not available.
For producing wells, input a reservoir pressure lower than the measured pressures.
The program will dismiss the reservoir pressure entered and calculate one. For
injection wells, input a reservoir pressure higher than one of the pressures entered.
The program will calculate the reservoir pressure.
Note for injection wells. If flow test data for a producer has been fitted, the
Â well will have the correct IPR if it is then converted to an injector.
7.3.7 External Entry

Refer to External Entry for Oil in Section 7.2.14.
7.3.8 Petroleum Experts

The Petroleum Experts inflow option uses a multi-phase pseudo pressure function to
model the reduction in well productivity resulting from increasing liquid saturation in
condensate wells. It assumes that no condensate banking occurs and that all the
condensate that drops out is produced. Transient effects on P.I. are accounted for.

Figure 7-20
Petroleum Experts IPR
The following data is required to be entered:

• Reservoir permeability(Either total, or effective permeability at connate water
saturation)
• Drainage area
• Wellbore radius (Open hole well radius)
• Perforated interval
• Porosity (Average over producing section)
• Time (Refer to Transient IPR for Oil - Section 7.2.9)
• Connate water saturation (Used in relative permeability calcs. - see below)
• Permeability entered (Either total or effective at Swc)
• Non-Darcy coefficient (Enter by hand or PROSPER can calculate it)
The non-Darcy coefficient can be entered from a well test where available or
calculated using a correlation.
The following diagram illustrates how PROSPER treats total and effective
permeability in the Petroleum Experts IPR model:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 7-21 PetroleumExperts IPR

Petroleum Experts Relative Permeability Method
Relative Permeabilities Krl
1
0.9 Krg' Krg when effective permeability is entered
Relative Permeability
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5 Krg when total permeability is entered
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1 Slc
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Liquid Saturation
The mass flow rate of each phase is directly proportional to its mobility (k/µ), Kr’s
can be determined using PVT and the surface production rates. This technique is
used to determine the reduction in productivity as a function of the produced liquid
ratios. The derivation of the technique and details of the equations used are given
in Appendix C.
7.3.9 Hydraulically Fractured Well

Please refer to Hydraulically Fractured Wells in Section 7.2.10. Additional input data
for gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow
factor and either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.
7.3.10 Horizontal Well - No-Flow Boundaries

Please refer to Horizontal Wells in Section 7.2.11. Additional input data for gas and
condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow factor and
either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.
7.3.11 Multi-layer Inflow

The multi-layer inflow model allows up to 5 discrete reservoir layers to be entered
each with different reservoir pressures, inflow models and fluid properties. Each
layer can be gravel packed if desired. Both Injectors and Producers can be
modelled.
The gas gravity, CGR and WGR must be entered for each layer. The produced
fluid in the well bore is equivalent to the summation of the individual layer
contributions. Refer to Multi-layer Inflow for Oil for more details in Section 7.2.13.
7.3.12 Horizontal Well - dP Friction

Refer to Horizontal Well - dP Friction for Oil. For Gas, PROSPER uses the Petroleum Experts
IPR method for steady-state flow. The Reservoir porosity and connate water

saturation are required to be input in addition to the parameters described in the Oil
IPR section 7.2.15.
7.3.13 Dual Porosity

Please refer to Dual Porosity in the IPR for Oil section 7.2.18. Additional input data
for gas and condensate applications are connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow
factor and either relative permeability to gas or total permeability.
7.3.14 Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical

Fractures
Please refer to Horizontal Well with Transverse Vertical Fractures in the IPR for Oil
section 7.2.19. Additional input data for gas and condensate applications are
connate water saturation, a non-Darcy flow factor and either relative permeability to
gas or total permeability.
7.3.15 Modified Isochronal Inflow Model NEW!!!

A type of deliverability test conducted in gas wells to generate a stabilized gas
deliverability curve (IPR). This test overcomes the limitation of the isochronal test,
which requires long shut-in times to reach the average reservoir pressure.
In the modified isochronal test, the shut-in periods are of equal duration, as are the
flowing periods. The final shut-in pressure before the beginning of the new flow is
used as an approximation of the average reservoir pressure. The same procedure
is typically repeated four times. A stabilized point (pseudosteady state) is usually
obtained at the end of the test.
Modified isochronal tests are commonly used in gas wells, because they require
less time and money to produce results comparable to the isochronal test. This
IPR model is based on standard Back Pressure Model
(
Qg = C Pres − Pwf
2
)
2 n
when n = 1 C=
0 ⋅ 703kh
(
µ g TZ log e 0⋅606
rw
re
)
The flow at any selected rate should be continued long enough for the reservoir to
approach steady-state (stabilized) conditions. The time to reach stabilized
conditions is called the readjustment time. For wells with wide well spacing (large
drainage radius values), low permeabilities, or high gas compressibility’s (low
reservoir pressures), large readjustment times can be expected. In cases where the
readjustment time exceeds the duration of each test, the test data can be corrected
to isochronal conditions and then to stabilized conditions as described below.
When a well is tested from an initial steady state shut-in condition, the increase in
drainage radius with time is not dependent upon the rate. Therefore, separate flow
tests conducted for the same length of time will reach the same drainage radius.
PROSPER MANUAL
When a well is not shut-in between tests until steady state is reached, successive
tests will indicate values of (P2res – P2wf) which are too large because of the
increasing drainage radius. For the general case, a table of correction factors to be
applied to (P2res – P2wf) to obtain an isochronal performance curve from
conventional performance data can be calculated as follows:
Flow Correlation Factors
where
Point 1: None
Ptj = dimensionless pressure change
Q2 Pt1
Point 2 :
Q1 Pt1 + (Q2 − Q1 ) Pt 2 t d = dimensionless time
Q3 Pt1 t j = time at the beginning of the jth test

Point 3 :
Q1 Pt1 + (Q2 − Q1) Pt 2 + (Q3 − Q2 ) Pt 3 t t = time at the end of the jth test
Q4 Pt1
Point 4 :
Q1 Pt1 + (Q2 − Q1) Pt 2 + (Q3 − Q2 ) Pt 3 + (Q4 − Q3) Pt 4
Ptj = 1 ⋅1513 log10 (td ) + 0 ⋅ 40453

0 ⋅ 00633(tt − t j ) Pres K g
td =
φ (1 − S wc ) µ g rw 2
The back pressure equation coefficients ‘C’ and 'n' are obtained by non-linear
regression using the isochronally corrected data. 'n', the reciprocal of the slope of
this line, is constrained to a value between 0.5 and 1.
Although 'n' is constant, the coefficient 'C' is not the same at stabilized flow
conditions as it is at isochronal conditions. It is calculated using the same technique
as before, regressing on ‘C’ and keeping ‘n’ constant, after adjusting the isochronal
(P2res - P2wf) values to stabilized conditions using a variation of the following
equation.
1
⎡ ⎛ re ⎞ ⎤
n
⎢ 2 log10 ⎜⎜ 0 ⋅ 60 ⎟⎟ ⎥
( Pres − Pwf ) stab
2 2
=⎢ ⎝ rw ⎠ ⎥
⎢ log10 (0 ⋅ 25t d )iso ⎥
(P
res
2
− Pwf
2
)
iso
⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦
The time to stabilisation is calculated as follows:
0 ⋅1πre φ (1 − S wc ) µ g
2
t stab =
4 ⋅ 39e −6 Pres K rg
7.4 Skin Models

PROSPER divides the total skin into two parts. These are:
• Mechanical / Geometric Skin.

• Deviation / Partial Penetration
The skin values could be either:
• Entered by Hand
• Calculated Using Models.
7.4.1 Mechanical/Geometrical Skin

Enter Skin by Hand
If a reliable skin value is available from transient well testing, then this value should
be directly entered by selecting the "Enter by hand" option.
Â It is assumed that this value will contain deviation and partial penetration
information.
In case the entered skin is only mechanical skin, there is an option of

enabling the Wong and Clifford model for deviation and partial penetration
in the input screen for the skin itself.
Skin Evaluation using Models

PROSPER provides 3 methods of estimating a mechanical/geometrical skin factor
using input parameters such as perforation geometry, depth of damage etc.
The skin estimation models provided in PROSPER are those of:
• Locke
• McLeod
• Karakas and Tariq
The required input parameters are often difficult to accurately define, therefore the
absolute value of the calculated skin often cannot be precisely predicted. The
power of these techniques is their ability to assess the relative importance of
completion options on the overall value of well skin.
The Elf SkinAide inflow method can also be used to estimate skin pressure drops
for cased- and open-hole completions with and without gravel packs.
PROSPER can also be used to estimate the value of the skin pressure drop across
the completion and the proportion of the total pressure drop attributable to the
various completion elements.
Karakas and Tariq have been found to give good results in many field applications.
The following input data are required:
• Reservoir permeability (Effective permeability at connate water saturation)

• Perforation diameter (Entry hole diameter)
• Shots per foot
• Perforation length (Effective perf. length in formation)
PROSPER MANUAL
• Damaged zone thickness (Thickness of invasion)

• Damaged zone permeability (Permeability in invaded zone)
• Crushed zone thickness (Crushing associated with perforation)
• Crushed zone permeability (Reduced permeability near perf. tunnel)
• Shot phasing
• Vertical permeability
• Wellbore radius (Enter the open hole radius, not casing I.D.)
An example of the input data for the Karakas and Tariq method is shown below:
Figure 7-22
Karakas and
Tariq Skin Input
A sketch outlining the main geometric variables is shown in Figure 7-23.

Figure 7-23
Perforation Geometry
Terms
Enter the requested data and, having entered some reservoir model data, press
Calculate to display an IPR plot. The plot shows the pressure drop resulting from
the total skin as well a breakdown of the individual factors contributing to the total
skin as per the following example. The individual factors to be plotted can be
chosen from the Variables menu option of the plot window.
Figure 7-24
IPR Plot
This plot is useful to assess the efficiency of a particular perforating program by

allowing the User to instantly assess the completion pressure loss resulting from
different perforation options. For gravel packed wells, the value of skin posted on
PROSPER MANUAL
the plot does not include the gravel pack skin. Click Results on the IPR plot screen
to display the breakdown of dP's resulting from each completion element.
Enhancement to the skin modelling options in PROSPER is the ability to apply the
API RP43 to determine the actual length and diameter of perforations (Figure 7-25).
Figure 7-25
API RP43 calculation
Figure 7-26
API RP43 calculation data
Â Note on Skin:
Locke's technique is valid for shots per foot of 1,2,4,6,8,10,12,and 16.

7.4.2 Deviation/Partial Penetration Skin

Two models of this type are provided in PROSPER :
• Cinco/Martin-Bronz
• Wong-Clifford
The first requires the following data:

• Deviation angle of well
• Partial penetration fraction
• Formation vertical permeability
The second can compute a skin for multiple completions and requires the following
data entered:
1. Reservoir parameters:
• Formation vertical thickness
• Well-bore radius
• Drainage area
• Dietz shape factor
• Formation vertical permeability ratio
• Local vertical permeability ratio
• Horizontal distance from well to reservoir edge
• Depth of top of reservoir
2. Completion parameters – the following for each completion:

• Completion start measured depth
• Completion end measured depth
• Completion start true depth
• Completion end true depth
7.5 Gravel Packed Completions

PROSPER models gravel packed completions as a concentric cylinder having a User
specified permeability connected to the well bore via perforations of specified
diameter. By sensitising on perforation spacing and diameter, the effect of
pressure drop due to flow concentration on well performance can be investigated.
Likewise, the effect of varying gravel length (i.e. the thickness of gravel between
the OD of the screen and the ID of the original open hole) on skin can be
evaluated. A sample gravel pack data input screen for a cased hole is shown
below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 7-27
Gravel Pack
IPR Input
The following data input is required:

• Gravel pack permeability (Enter the in-site permeability for the gravel)
• Perforation diameter (Diameter of perforation tunnel)
• Shots per foot
• Gravel pack length (Distance from the screen O.D. to the sandface)
• Perforation interval (This affects the flow velocity in the perforations only)
• Perforation efficiency (Proportion of perforations that are open and effective)
NEW!!! On the right side of the screen a table shows typical permeability data for different
types of gravels.
The pressure drop across a gravel pack is computed using a summation of a Darcy and a
non-Darcy component. For a cased oil well, the pressure drop due to the gravel pack
(dPgravel) is calculated:
dPgravel = AQ2 + BQ
Where:
A = The non-Darcy term,
Q = The total liquid rate and
B = The Darcy term
Intermediate calculations are required prior to computing the dPgravel value and consider
the following variables:
Kg = Gravel Pack Permeability
β = 1.47E7/Kg^0.55
PerfDi = Perforation Diameter
SPF = Shots per ft
PRFINT = Perforation Interval
AOTF = Area Open To Flow = π(PerfDi/12)2SPF*PRFINT
µo = Oil Viscosity in cp
Bo = oil FVF
ρo = Oil Density
L = Gravel pack length

The Darcy (B-term) and the non-Darcy (A-term) are calculated
A-Term = 9.08E-13* β *Bo2* ρo *L/12/AOTF2

B-term = µo *Bo*L/12/(1.127E-3*Kg*AOTF).
This dP may then be transformed into skin using an appropriate relationship.

The main geometric parameters are shown on the following sketch:
Figure 7-28
Gravel Pack Geometry
Sketch
Skin can be calculated using one of the methods described in Section 7.3 or
directly entered. Note that partial completion skin is included in the total well skin,
and is not affected by adjusting the gravel pack completion parameters. The total
well skin as measured by a well test prior to gravel packing should be entered.
Click Calculate when finished entering data and an IPR plot similar to that below will
be presented (the plotting of the individual dP components can be chosen from the
Variables menu in the plot window):
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 7-29
Gravel Pack
IPR Plot
The contribution of the gravel pack to the total skin pressure drop can be readily
seen on the IPR plot. The value of skin posted on the IPR plot does not include the
gravel pack skin. Click Results on the IPR plot screen to display the breakdown of
dP's resulting from each completion element. Sensitivities can be calculated on
factors such as gravel pack thickness, shots per foot etc. to evaluate the
effectiveness of gravel pack designs. Gravel packed completions are also available
in the Multi-layer IPR model.
The PROSPER gravel pack model allows for non-Darcy (i.e. dP proportional to rate
squared) effects within the gravel pack and the resulting rate dependent skin. Lift
curves for gravel packed wells generated using PROSPER can be calculated from
the sandface, through the completion, and back to the production manifold. This
more correctly models the IPR as compared to simply imposing an additional skin
to allow for the gravel pack pressure loss as is done in many reservoir simulators.
Gravel packs can be combined with the Hydraulically Fractured Well IPR to
Â model ‘Frac-Pack’ completions.
A summary of the main IPR equations is given in Appendix C.
7.6 Injection Wells

Irrespective of the inflow model used, Injection well IPR calculations are
complicated by a number of factors as compared to producers:
• Injected fluid temperature at the sandface is a function of surface
temperature, injection rate history and well configuration.
• Relative permeability to injected fluid is required.
• Injectivity changes with time as the fluid bank is pushed back away from the
well.
• Fracturing (mechanical or thermally induced) often occurs.

Adequate results for injection well IPR can be obtained by reducing the reservoir
temperature on the IPR input screen to near the estimated sandface injection
temperature. The Enthalpy Balance temperature model can be used to estimate
injected fluid temperatures. PROSPER uses the reservoir pressure and temperature
to estimate fluid PVT properties in IPR calculations.
Most of the IPR pressure drop occurs near to the well. With this in mind, use an
effective permeability appropriate to the given conditions. For empirical inflow
models such as Vogel and Multi-Rate methods, the effect of cold injection fluid
viscosity is accounted for in the pressure points. Changing the reservoir
temperature will have no effect in these cases.
7.7 SkinAide
The SkinAide inflow method has been developed by Elf Aquamarine and
acknowledgement is given for its inclusion in PROSPER. The following description is
based on information provided by Elf.
7.7.1 SkinAide Theoretical Background

Consider the case of a partially penetrating, deviated well, cased and perforated
and equipped with a gravel pack. The total pressure drop around such a well
corresponds to the pressure difference between:
- an equipotential surface at the external limit of the reservoir drainage area,
and
- another equipotential surface corresponding to the screen.
This total pressure drop is due to a number of features. Moving downstream from
the external limit of the drainage area towards the well:
- the position of the producing interval with respect to the reservoir geometry
(due to partial penetration and deviation).
- the damaged zone.
- interference between the different perforations.
- the crushed zone surrounding the perforation tunnels.
- gravel in the perforation tunnels.
- gravel in the annulus between the screen and the casing.
Pressure drops between equipotential surfaces can be added to one another, and
the conceptual model corresponds to an attempt to simplify the problem by finding
equipotential surfaces.
7.7.1.1 Position of the producing interval with respect

to reservoir geometry
The pressure drop due to the position of the producing interval with respect to the
reservoir geometry can be considered to be independent of the pressure drop
PROSPER MANUAL
surrounding the well completion in so far as one can imagine an equipotential
cylindrical surface with, say, a 2 m radius, separating the two regions.
Figure 7-30
SkinAide Equipotential
Surfaces
This pressure drop is calculated in SkinAide using a reservoir engineering

correlation.
7.7.1.2 Interference between perforations and the

damaged zone
Moving downstream, the next feature encountered is the interference between
perforations and the damaged zone. If the perforation tunnel emerges from the
damaged zone, the damaged zone has much less influence than if the perforation
remains entirely within the damaged zone.
Figure 7-31
SkinAide Perforation
Interference
The pressure drop due to interference between perforations and the damaged zone
is calculated using the Karakas and Tariq correlation.
7.7.1.3 The Crushed Zone

The downstream limit of the previous feature is the crushed zone. The outside
surface of the crushed zone, and the inner surface of the perforation tunnel are
both assumed to be equipotentials. As a result flow in both the crushed-only and
the crushed-and-damaged zones is radial.
Figure 7-32
SkinAide Crushed Zone

Pressure drops in the crushed zone can be calculated analytically.
PROSPER MANUAL
7.7.1.4 Perforation tunnel which penetrates the

formation
The next feature downstream is flow in that part of the perforation tunnel which
penetrates the formation. We use the flux into the tunnel previously calculated for
radial flow in the crushed zone to calculate the flow profile along the tunnel :
Figure 7-33
within the Formation
This situation can be solved analytically.
7.7.1.5 Perforation tunnel through the casing and

cement
Moving yet further downstream, two equipotentials can be drawn, one at the
external surface of the cement, the other on the inside of the casing:
Figure 7-34
Tunnel in Casing and
Cement
This linear flow can be solved analytically.
7.7.1.6 Annulus between Casing and Screen

The last feature is the region between the equipotential at the opening of the
perforation tunnel in the casing, and the screen.
Figure 7-35
Casing / Screen Annulus
An approximate analytical solution has been found for flow in this region.

7.7.1.7 Hemispherical Flow Model

The conventional linear perforation model assumes that the surface of the
perforation tunnel is an equipotential surface. This assumption breaks down when
permeability of gravel in the tunnel becomes sufficiently low. When permeability in
the tunnel becomes sufficiently small, flow in the reservoir approaches
hemispherical flow towards the perforation mouth.
Figure 7-36
SkinAide Hemispherical
Flow
Flow takes place

- in the reservoir beyond the crushed and the damaged zones
- in the damaged zone
- in the crushed-and-damaged zone
- in the perforation tunnel itself.
Analytical solutions to hemispherical flow have been developed to represent this
model, which can be considered to be an upper bound to the conventional linear
perforation model.
7.7.2 Using SkinAide

When the SkinAide IPR model is selected, the following IPR Input screen is
presented:
Figure 7-37
SkinAide Model
Options
Select the required options for the Flow and Skin models plus Perforation Data.
The options are listed below:
PROSPER MANUAL
7.7.2.1 Flow Model

• Steady State - corresponds to a constant flux at the outer reservoir boundary.
The inflow at the external boundary is equal to the well flow rate. This boundary
condition corresponds to pressure maintenance by natural (aquifer influx, gas
cap drive) or artificial (gas or water injection). The steady state productivity
equation is:
2πkh
PI steadystate =
⎧ ⎛r ⎞ 1 ⎫
µB⎨ Ln⎜ e ⎟ − + S ⎬
⎩ ⎝ rw ⎠ 2 ⎭
• Semi Steady State - corresponds to no-flow at the outer reservoir boundary. This
boundary condition corresponds to reservoir depletion with no pressure
maintenance. The radial flow Productivity Index equation for semi-steady state
is:
2πkh
PI steadystate =
⎧ ⎛r ⎞ 3 ⎫
µB⎨ Ln⎜ e ⎟ − + S ⎬
⎩ ⎝ rw ⎠ 4 ⎭
These equations differ only in the constant 3/4 vs. 1/2 for steady state flow. These
radial flow equations can be generalised for other drainage geometries.
Â Pe, the static reservoir pressure is the average pressure in the well
drainage area, not the pressure at the external boundary. Pe is used
in the Productivity Index equation:
PI = Q / ( Pe − Pwf )
The reservoir pressure should be entered at the same reference

datum as the intake node depth.
7.7.2.2 Skin Model

• Linear Flow - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming that flow is
predominantly linear towards the well. This is the normal situation for a well
completed across most of the reservoir.
• Hemispherical Flow - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming a hemispherical
flow geometry. This situation occurs for single perforations or wells having
extreme partial completion effects.
• Flow Giving Minimum dP - Skin pressure drop is calculated assuming flow is
always along the path of lowest resistance. (i.e. between linear and
hemispherical flow)
PROSPER MANUAL
7.7.2.3 Perforation Data

• In-Situ Geometry Entered - The dimension of the actual perforations in the
reservoir are entered.
• API Test Data Edition 4 - API perforation gun data are entered and SkinAide
estimates the downhole perforation geometry.
• API Test Data Edition 5 - API perforation gun data are entered and SkinAide
estimates the downhole perforation geometry. This option utilises more recently
defined gun test specifications.
Having selected the required options, SkinAide requires data entry in the following
categories:
• Geometry (Reservoir dimensions)

• Petrophysics (Reservoir permeability etc.)
• Damaged Zone (Damaged zone properties)
• Cased Hole (casing dimensions)
• Crushed Zone (Crushed zone properties)
• Perforations (Gun and perforation geometry)
• Gravel Pack (Only for Gravel Packed wells)
The data required can vary according to the options selected. Click each data entry
button in turn and enter the data as follows:
7.7.2.4 Geometry
• Reservoir Thickness - Enter the thickness normal to the bedding plane in dipping
reservoirs. When thin shales are distributed throughout a heterogeneous
reservoir, use the net sand thickness.
Figure 7-38
SkinAide Reservoir
Thickness
• Completed Interval - Enter the perforated interval as measured along the

wellbore.

Figure 7-39
SkinAide
Completion Geometry
• Distance to Top of Completion - This parameter affects partial completion skin and
is measured along the wellbore. If gross sand thickness is used for reservoir
thickness, enter the actual distance to the top perforation (dimension h1 in the
above sketch). When using net sand, restrict the distance to net sand intervals.
• Drainage Area - Area drained by the subject well
• Dietz Shape Factor - Allows for drainage area shape and well placement.
Figure 7-40
SkinAide Drilled
Hole Diameter
• Hole Diameter - Open hole drilled diameter. Use bit size or calliper measured
size where applicable. Perforation length, damage depth are measured beyond
the hole diameter.
• Deviation - Average angle between the well axis and vertical.
Figure 7-41
SkinAide Deviation
Angle
PROSPER MANUAL
7.7.2.5 Petrophysics
• Horizontal Permeability - Reservoir permeability measured parallel to the cap rock
(along the bedding plane).
Figure 7-42
SkinAide
Horizontal Permeability
• Vertical Permeability - Reservoir permeability measured perpendicular to the

horizontal permeability in the vicinity of the completed interval. Used to
determine anisotropy ratio near the perforations. Values can be taken from core
analysis.
• Vertical Permeability for Geometrical Skin - Reservoir permeability for the bulk
reservoir measured perpendicular to the horizontal permeability. Determines
the anisotropy ratio between the completed interval and the remainder of the
reservoir.
• Porosity - Used in the high velocity flow coefficient correlation:
β = ak bφ c
Where:
k Reservoir horizontal permeability
φ Reservoir porosity
a,b,c Constants
Correlations are used to estimate the values used in the high velocity flow equation.
Field specific correlations can be prepared from well test analysis.
• Turbulence coefficient a - multiplier for the overall turbulence coefficient.
Dimensions are reciprocal distance.
• Permeability exponent b - Permeability raised to this power.
Default is -1.33.
Note, the exponent value entered corresponds to permeability in millidarcies
regardless of the current unit set.
• Porosity exponent c - Porosity raised to this power. Default is 0.0. Note the
exponent value assumes the porosity is a fraction, regardless of the current unit
set.
High velocity flow pressure drops arise from acceleration and deceleration of
reservoir fluids as they pass through pore throats as in the following diagram:
Figure 7-43
SkinAide Non-Darcy
Flow Pressure Loss
Mechanism

7.7.2.6 Damaged Zone

The damaged zone is modelled as an annulus surrounding the wellbore in which
permeability and porosity have been impaired during the drilling and completion
process. The depth of damage is measured beyond the drilled hole.
In anisotropic reservoirs, formation damage is deeper in the low permeability direction than
the high permeability. An elliptic damaged zone forms in such cases. SkinAide assumes a
circular damaged zone irrespective of reservoir anisotropy.
Figure 7-44
SkinAide Damaged
Zone Geometry
• Damaged Zone Thickness - Since damaged zone skin is controlled by the ratio of
perforation tunnel length to damaged zone depth, enter a damage zone depth
that respects this relationship.
• Damaged Zone Permeability - Determines the ratio of damaged zone to reservoir
permeability. Estimating the true value is not straightforward, however, the
undamaged reservoir permeability could be used as a starting point.
• Damaged Zone Porosity - Porosity to be used in the high velocity flow coefficient
correlation.
7.7.2.7 Cased Hole

The casing dimensions are used to correct the API perforation length for field
conditions. The casing I.D. is calculated from the O.D. and casing weight.
• External Casing Diameter - Enter nominal casing diameter opposite the completed
interval.
• Casing Weight - Enter nominal casing weight per unit length opposite the
completed interval.
7.7.2.8 Crushed Zone

Shaped charge perforating creates a cavity filled by charge debris and surrounded
by a zone of reservoir rock that has been altered by the high pressure / high
temperature jet. Charge debris is removed by perforation washing or
underbalanced perforating - the crushed zone remains. SkinAide recognises
separate properties for the crushed zone in the undisturbed reservoir and damaged
zone.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 7-45
SkinAide
Perforation Geometry
Most of the high velocity flow pressure loss occurs in the crushed zone and is
added to the loss in the reservoir. Note that if a zero crushed zone thickness is
entered, no high flow velocity pressure drops are calculated.
• Crushed Zone Thickness - Thickness of perforation altered zone. The default

value is 0.5 inches.
• Crushed Zone Permeability - Reduced permeability for crushed zone within the
virgin reservoir.
• Crushed Zone Porosity - Porosity in the crushed zone for estimation of high
pressure flow losses.
• Crushed + Damaged Zone Permeability - Permeability for the crushed zone within
the damaged zone.
• Crushed + Damaged Zone Porosity - Porosity for the crushed zone within the
damaged zone.
Permeability in the crushed and damaged zone is introduced by the ratio:
Rcrushed and damaged = Crushed and damaged zone (horizontal) permeability /
undisturbed formation (horizontal) permeability.
The same anisotropy ratio opposite the completion interval as applies to the
undisturbed formation is used for the crushed and damaged zone permeability. It is
suggested that the crushed and damaged zone permeability ratio should be the
product:
Rcrushed and damaged = Rdamaged·Rcrushed only.
Where the ratio for the damaged zone:
Rdamaged = damaged (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed formation
(horizontal) permeability
and the crushed-only zone:
Rcrushed only = only crushed zone (horizontal) permeability / undisturbed
formation (horizontal) permeability.
Figure 7-46
SkinAide Perforation +
Damage Geometry

7.7.2.9 Perforations
The perforation data input depends on the option selected. If In-Situ Geometry is
selected, the actual perforation sizes are required. Alternatively, API test data can
be entered for a particular gun, and SkinAide will estimate the perforation geometry
considering completion and reservoir variables such as compressive strength and
casing size.
Common Perforation Parameters

• Perforation Efficiency - The number of producing perforations is the product of
perforation efficiency, shot density and the length of the completed interval.
Perforation efficiency is used to account for ineffective perforations such as
those shot into shaly beds. If gross sand is used to define reservoir geometry,
the maximum perforation efficiency should be the ratio of net/gross reservoir
sand. If net sand is used, the perforation efficiency does not need to be further
modified.
•
Figure 7-47
SkinAide
Perforation Efficiency
• Shot Density - Nominal shots per foot for the selected perforating gun.
• Gun Phasing - Angle between two adjacent perforating charges. Affects
interference between perforation tunnels.
Figure 7-48
SkinAide Angle
Between Vertical
Plane
and Perforations
• Angle Between Vertical Plane and Perforations - For anisotropic reservoirs, the
angle between the perforation tunnels and the direction of maximum
permeability influences productivity. When 0° or 180° guns are selected,
perforations are all aligned with the low side of the hole. For other gun
phasings, SkinAide assumes an angle of 45°.
PROSPER MANUAL
In-Situ Geometry Entered

• Tunnel Length - Length of effective perforation in the reservoir formation i.e.
beyond the cement sheath.
Figure 7-49
Tunnel Geometry
• Tunnel Diameter - Diameter of effective perforation in the reservoir formation.

• Cavity Entrance Diameter - Not active - use Tunnel Diameter. SkinAide presently
uses a cylindrical model for perforations. Future versions will allow a cone-
shaped perforation geometry.
• Cavity Tip Diameter - Not active - use Tunnel Diameter. SkinAide presently uses a
cylindrical model for perforations. Future versions will allow a cone-shaped
perforation geometry.
API Test Data

The correction from test data to In-Situ conditions is influenced by the API test series
selected. The form of data input is identical for both options.
• API RP 43/2 Total Target Penetration - Length of perforation in Berea sandstone
target. If RP 43/2 data is unavailable, use 2/3 of API RP43/1 cement target
TTP.
• API RP 43/1 Entry Hole Diameter - Entry hole diameter for steel / cement target
test. Note that the steel quality changes between Editions 4 and 5 of the API
test specifications. Ensure the relevant data is entered.
Figure 7-50
SkinAide Gun
Diameter
and Stand-off
• Gun diameter - Gun diameter is used to correct API perforation test results for
stand-off.
• Reservoir Uniaxial Compressive Strength - Compressive strength is used to
calculate in-situ perforation dimensions. Typical values of reservoir uniaxial
compressive strength are given in the following table:

Lithology Reservoir Uniaxial

Compressive Strength
(psi) (bar)
Loose sand 150 10
Sand which crumbles by hand 750 50
Sandstone from which sand grains can be 1500 100
peeled by hand
Well cemented sandstone 3750 250
Well cemented limestone 3750 250
• Rock Density - Enter apparent In-Situ rock density as measured by a density log,
not the density of the minerals (e.g. Quartz) that comprise the formation grains.
• Casing Elastic Limit - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation
dimensions. The elastic limit in thousands of psi corresponds to the pipe steel
quality. e.g. N80 casing has an elastic limit stress of 80,000 psi.
• Reservoir Stress - Used for correction of API data to In-situ perforation
dimensions. Stress is assumed to be Isotropic. Generally the minimum
effective stress (frac gradient) is suitable.
Gravel Packs in SkinAide

When the Gravel Pack option has been selected, additional data entry is required to
describe the pack geometry and properties. Separate gravel properties can be
entered for the annular gravel pack and the sand in the perforation tunnels. This
allows mixing of formation and pack sand to be simulated.
Figure 7-51
SkinAide Gravel
Pack Geometry
• Screen Outside Diameter - The space between the screen O.D. and the drilled
hole diameter is occupied by gravel.
• Annulus Gravel Permeability - Permeability of gravel in the space between the
screen and the open hole. Gravel size is specified in terms of mesh size. e.g.
20/40 mesh gravel will pass a sieve with 1/20 inch holes, but not pass a 1/40
inch sieve. Average laboratory measured permeability values for various gravel
sizes are given in the following table:
PROSPER MANUAL
Gravel Mesh Lab

Permeability
Type (Darcies)
Ottawa Sand 12/20 500
20/40 150
30/50 90
40/60 60
50/70 30
Carbolite 20/40 350
16/20 500
Isopac 20/40 110
• Annulus Gravel Porosity - Used in calculation of high velocity flow coefficient in

the gravel pack.
• Tunnel Gravel Permeability - Used to reduce the permeability of sand in the
perforation tunnels due to mixing of formation and gravel pack sand.
• Tunnel Gravel Porosity - Used to reduce the porosity of sand in the perforation
tunnels.
The inflow and skin pressure drop are computed by clicking the Calculate button
once all the relevant input data have been entered and Plot to display the results.
To evaluate the contribution of individual completion components in the inflow
performance, click Variables and select the parameters to display as in the
following screen example:
Figure 7-52
SkinAide IPR Variable
Selection
Select the required variables by clicking their check boxes. Click Done to display
the results:

Figure 7-53
SkinAide IPR dP
Skin Plot
Skin Components
The conceptual models used to calculate the total skin factor include :
- a contribution due to the position of the producing interval with respect to reservoir
geometry, called geometric skin Sgeometric
- contributions due to pressure losses close to the actual wellbore, beginning with
the pressure loss due to the damaged zone and ending with pressure loss in the
casing/screen annulus for gravel packed wells. This contribution to the total skin is
called the completion skin Scompletion.
The total skin is the sum of the two components
Stotal =Sgeometric + Scompletion
The contribution Scompletion to the total skin is particularly convenient when using
reservoir engineering equations. However Scompletion does not necessarily reflect the
quality of the completion itself. Indeed, imagine two wells with identical completions,
producing reservoirs with identical properties, the thickness of one reservoir is
double that of the other:
Figure 7-54
SkinAide Completion
Skin
Scompletion = a k h DPcompletion / ( Q m B )
Since DPcompletion is identical but reservoir thickness h differs by a factor 2, applying
the above relation leads to values of Scompletion, which differ, by a factor 2.
PROSPER MANUAL
Mechanical skins are defined so as to reflect the quality of well completion. In the
formula for mechanical skins, the vertical reservoir thickness h is replaced by the
length of the producing interval (measured along the wellbore) hp :
Smechanical = a k hp DPskin / ( Q m B )
where, for oil wells,
SI US French
a depends on units 2π 7.07 10-3 0.0536
k permeability m2 mD mD
hp length of the completed interval m ft m
DPskin DPreal well - DPidealized well Pa psi bar
Q flowrate (standard conditions) m3/s bpd m3/d
m viscosity (reservoir conditions) Pa.s cP cP
B fluid formation volume factor v/v v/v v/v
Total and mechanical skins are related by the simple formula :
Smechanical / hp = Scompletion / h
7.8 Multi-Lateral Interface
7.8.1 Network Interface
7.8.1.1 Motivation
Multilateral wells are different than single wells because they have a variable
structure. Both the number of branches and the way that they are connected is
variable. Hence, a flexible network data structure is appropriate for modelling these
wells. Furthermore, to provide a consistency with other Petroleum Experts products the
interface has the same look and feel as the one in GAP.
7.8.1.2 Interface Overview

The multilateral data entry screen is accessed by choosing System | Inflow
Performance from the PROSPER main menu, as with the single well IPR. However,
before that the multilateral option must be chosen in the Options screen, also
accessed from the main menu. The main screen is depicted in Figure 7.55.
The User interface consists of a framework window that contains several child
windows, as well as the menu and toolbar from which commands are issued. The
child windows include the network windows that contain the system network
drawing, the navigator window that can assist in the viewing of large networks and
up to three visualisation windows, which can show the multilateral network drawn to
scale from three orthogonal points of view.

Menu bar and tool bar Visualisation windows
System Navigator
Figure 7-55: The Multi-lateral Interface Main Window
Four main components of the interface are identified, as indicated on the diagram
above, which are described in more detail in the following sections:
1. Network window – the window on which the system network is drawn.
2. Navigator window – contains a full schematic that can be used to help

navigation about large systems.
3. Menu bar and toolbar. The menu bar is used for issuing commands to
PROSPER and the interface; it contains an abridged set of commands compared
to a normal application framework window because it is a subsidiary window of
the main programme. The toolbar contains menu accelerators, icons for
selecting and manipulating network nodes and links, and icons for zooming or
un-zooming on the network window.
4. Visualisation screen – up to three windows showing front, side and top views of
the multilateral network.
7.8.1.2.1 Network Window

The network window is the main window on which the multilateral network is
displayed and manipulated. More than one network window can be displayed at
PROSPER MANUAL
one time; this means that different views of the same system are available
simultaneously, which can be of help in editing large networks.
The system window is used to draw, edit, and view the system. The network nodes
are represented by coloured icons. The different actions that can be performed on
this window are obtained by clicking the right hand mouse button within the area of
the system window, which brings up a menu. Alternatively, the same set of actions
can be performed using the toolbar or the menu, which are described below.
Addition of Network Nodes and Links

To add an item to the system, activate the required network item type from the
toolbar or by using the right hand mouse button menu. The cursor will change to
indicate that a network item selection has been made. Click on the screen at the
point to insert the element. A network node will be created and an icon to
represent it. A label dialog will appear prompting for a name. If the element is not
labelled, a default label is provided which can be edited later using the icon right
hand mouse button menu.
Only the four left most items in the toolbar (tie-point, junction, completion and
tank/reservoir) are nodes: links, the fifth item, are added differently by dragging
between two nodes. Depending on a set of connection rules, the connection will be
made or not and the correct type of link will be chosen. For example, reservoirs
can only be attached to completions and the type of link is logical; in other cases
the link is a piece of tubing. These rules are reviewed in the description of toolbar
items. The network is hierarchical and arrows drawn on the links indicate the
direction of the connections (which is normally the same direction as increasing
vertical depth). Each icon is given a characteristic colour, depending on the
network item it represents. The colours and items are: red (tie-point), green
(junction), yellow (completion), blue (reservoir) and pink (tubing).
Zoom/Un-zoom
To zoom or un-zoom, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the
right hand mouse menu, as described above. To zoom in on an area, hold the left
hand mouse button while sweeping the mouse cursor over the area of interest.
Alternatively, click once at a point in the system, and the programme will zoom or
un-zoom on that point using a fixed scaling factor (which may be adjusted using the
Preferences dialog in the Preferences menu).
To revert to a full system view at any time, double-click the left hand mouse button
at any point in the window (except on an icon). The view will re-scale to show the
whole of the system.
Mask/Unmask
To mask or unmask, first select the appropriate icon from the toolbar or from the
right hand mouse menu, as described above. To mask a node, click on it with
mask selected; to unmask it click on it with unmask selected. Masking removes a
node from the calculation without removing it and its associated data from the
network (which deleting does). Masking is useful for simulating the effect of
removing or adding in completions. Note that masking a branch will have the effect
of masking those below it in the hierarchy.

Moving Items
Select the move option from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. To
move a single item, place the mouse cursor above it and hold down the left mouse
button while dragging the mouse cursor to the desired new location. To move a
group, select an area as with the zoom option and then hold down the left mouse
button with the mouse cursor in the window before dragging the whole group to a
new location. Items stay selected after a group move but can be de-selected using
the select option.
Deletion of Items
Select the delete icon from the toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu. Groups
of items may be deleted by group-selecting them as above, but with the delete
option chosen. NB: deletion of a node deletes the data associated with it so this option
should be used with caution. To delete a pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.
Selection of Items
To select an item or items, first choose the select icon (black arrow) from the
toolbar or from the right hand mouse menu, the selected item will change colour.
Group selections can be achieved by first selecting the select icon then drag the left
hand mouse button over the area of interest. The select option is a toggle, so it can
select or de-select items. Group selections can be used to turn off the selection
actioned by a group move.
Editing of Items
If a network item carries data it has an icon associated with it and can be edited by
double clicking on it provided that none of zoom/un-zoom, move, delete or select is
chosen. Editing of network item data is covered in the section on Data Entry.
Right Hand Mouse Button Actions

Utility menus will appear when the right hand mouse button is clicked anywhere in
the system view. The normal menu appears when the button is clicked over an
empty space. It contains the commands to add and manipulate network items as
well as commands to bring up dialog screens to change fonts and icon sizes. If it is
clicked over a network icon, a shorter menu will appear with a number of network
item specific functions, such as the ability to change the icon size and label, and
delete and select.
Panning
To move the view around the system, move the cursor close to the edge of the
view in the direction the system will be moved. The cursor will change to an arrow.
Clicking the left hand mouse button will move the system view by a fixed amount
depending on the current scaling factor. To pan quickly, hold the mouse button
down and, after a short time, the pan action will 'auto-repeat'.
Popup Status Information

If no toolbar (or equivalent menu item) is chosen as the mouse is moved over the
network icons, a small window will appear and show basic status information for the
node in question. The pop-up status window allows the validity status of a network
item to be checked without entering the data entry screen. This is optional: to
PROSPER MANUAL
switch this function off go to the Preferences screen. To ‘select nothing’, toggle the
currently selected toolbar or menu items, or choose the blank option from the drop-
down list box in the toolbar.
Changing Icon Sizes / System Fonts

These functions are also available from the right hand mouse menu. See the
section on menu details for more information.
Other Window Actions

Minimise: Click this button to minimise the window in the multilateral main
window.
Maximise: Click this button to maximise the window to fill the multilateral
main window.
Close: Click this button to remove the window from the workspace.
System menu: This contains various functions allowing the window to be

maximised, minimised, moved, etc.
7.8.1.2.2 The Navigator Window

This window can be used to aid in navigation about a large system. It will always
consist of a system schematic that is independent of any zooming on a system
window. In addition to the network, it contains a tracking rectangle that encloses the
portion of the system currently under view in the system window.
The tracking rectangle has two functions. If the focus is currently on a network
window, this rectangle surrounds the area of the network that that views is
displaying. Alternatively, the rectangle may be used to create new views of the
network if the navigator window is currently in focus. When the mouse is moved
over the rectangle, the cursor changes to allow resizing of the rectangle. In this
way, the navigator window facilitates creating views in areas of interest. Double-
clicking the left hand mouse button in the area will create a new system view
displaying the selected area, although resized to preserve a sensible aspect ratio.
Right Hand Mouse Button Menu

Clicking the right hand mouse button within the navigator window will produce a
utility menu. This contains the following functions:
Navigator On Top: By default, the navigator is always on top of all system views.
This can be changed by selecting this item from the menu.
Hide Window: The navigator can be hidden using this option and, once removed,
will not appear in subsequent sessions until reopened from the Window menu. The
navigator can also be hidden by clicking on the cross button at the top right hand
corner of the window or by using the Window menu option.
New Window: Another way of producing a new view (see above).
Icon Sizes: Invokes the Icon Sizes dialog (see below).

7.8.1.2.3 Toolbar Details

The toolbar is located below the main menu at the top of the main window. It
consists of a row of icons (described below) which act as accelerators to the menu
functions accessed from the Tools menu or most of those called from the right hand
mouse button in the network window.
The functions of the various buttons are described below. A quick description can
be gained for a given button by holding the mouse cursor over the button for a
moment. A small yellow box with a short description will appear.
Network Item Set-up

The functionality of the network items buttons is duplicated in the drop-down list: a
selection from this list will cause the appropriate button on the toolbar to be shown
as depressed. When a network item button is selected, the cursor, when over a
system window, will be drawn to represent the current selection. Click once on the
system window to cause a new node of the required type to be created at the
chosen point. A label dialog will appear to allowing the node to be labelled; leaving
the label blank results in default node naming. This can be edited later by clicking
the right hand mouse button on the icon created.
Connections between nodes are created by choosing the ‘Link’ button and holding
down the mouse left hand button whilst dragging between the nodes. There is a
connection hierarchy, which is represented by the branching of a parent branch into
one or more child branches, in the same way that the multilateral well branches out
physically. Indicate the direction of the hierarchy for junction-completion or
completion-completion connections by the order in which they are joined up.
Tie-point. This is the node for which the IPR is solved and is located at
the top of the system (in vertical depth and hierarchically). Hence, the
tie-point can only be a start point.
Junction. The main purpose of the junction is to be a branching node. It
can only have one link into it (from a tie-point, completion or other
junction) but any number coming out.
Completion. This contains both tubing and completion information. It is
attached below a tie-point, junction or another completion. It can only
have one link into it and branches out to either a junction or another
completion. It can also be logically attached (no direction implied) to any
number of reservoirs (but at least one).
Tank/reservoir. This represents a reservoir source and is logically
attached to any number of completions (but at least one).
Link. Connecting to a junction, the link becomes a tubing node and
contains data. Going into a completion, the tubing information is in the
completion and the link is ‘blank’ only indicating the hierarchical
relationship between the nodes it connects with an arrow. Finally, when
connecting a completion and a reservoir, the link is logical and not
hierarchical. Note that re-doing a link between two nodes will delete it.
PROSPER MANUAL
7.8.1.2.4 Network Manipulation

Zoom in/out. When 'zoom in/out' is selected, a zoom can be achieved
either by clicking the mouse on the system window, which will zoom
in/out a fixed amount and set the centre of the view to the position
clicked. If ‘zoom in’ is selected, sweeping an area with the mouse will
zoom in on the area selected. The aspect ratio will be retained when an
area zoom is performed.
Mask/Unmask an item. After masking is selected specific items can be
removed from the network for calculation purposes without deleting
them. This is particularly useful for seeing the effect of removing a
completion item.
Delete a node. After this is selected, the node may be deleted by clicking
on the item in the system window. The icon automatically becomes
unselected following a deletion to prevent accidental deletion of further
nodes. To delete a pure (non data-carrying) link re-do it.
Move a node. After this is selected, a node may be moved by clicking on
the item in the system window and then, with the mouse button
depressed, dragging the item to the new position. A group of nodes may
also be selected and moved.
Select a node. After this is pressed, a node may be selected/de-selected
by clicking on the item in the system window. The item will reverse its
colour to indicate selection/de-selection.
7.8.1.2.5 Menu Details

Finish
Done – exits the screen but validates the multilateral structure and data first. If the
structure is not valid a warning message appears providing the opportunity to
remain in the multilateral screen. One can exit the data screen, however, the data
are marked invalid.
Cancel – leaves the multilateral screen, restoring the network to its state at the start
of the edit session.
Tools
These are equivalent to items to the right of, and indeed inside, the drop-down list
box in the tool bar and have been explained above.
Analyse
This menu contains options to plot and report the IPR results in a similar way to
those in the Single Well IPR. The multi-lateral is treated as one reservoir model
option, such as the multi-layer with dP friction loss. There is also a Calculate
option, which brings up the dialog in the following figure.

Figure 7-56
Multi-lateral
Calculation Dialog
The Calculate screen gives the option of calculating one IPR point or a curve. In
the former case pressure can be calculated from a rate or rate from a pressure. In
the latter case, pressure is calculated for a range of rates up to the AOF, as with
other IPR calculations. From this screen it is possible to specify the number of IPR
points (maximum 20) and the minimum pressure to calculate to. These are to help
speed up calculations if appropriate. Results of the points for curve calculation will
be reported at the bottom section of the screen. Also, having a bearing on
calculation speed is the switch between infinite and finite conductivity modes of
calculation. In the latter case the pressure drop in the tubing is taken into account.
Before carrying out the calculation, the network structure is validated and any
errors are reported in the white list box in the middle section of the screen. If the
structure is not valid the calculation is not carried out. The Details button is used to
display pressure and rate-related parameters with respect to the measured and
vertical tubing depths of each branch.
During a calculation, diagnostic information is reported to the list box. Also, a
Cancel button is placed above the Calculate button to allow stopping the
calculation. The buttons to the left of the list box perform the functions in the
Analyse menu, except Help, which brings up this section. The push button Done
exits the screen.
Visualise
These items are dealt with in the section on visualisation screens.
Preferences
PROSPER MANUAL
The preferences dialog is gained from the Preferences item of the frame window
menu. It allows customisation of a set of User-interface variables for subsequent
PROSPER sessions. The following options are available:
• Enable Flyover Status Information. If this is checked then a status box appear
as the mouse is moved over the network item icons.
• Auto-repeat delay when panning. When panning, the left-hand mouse button
may be held down to ‘auto-repeat’ the action. The value given in this field
represents the time (in ms) before the auto-repeat action starts from when the
mouse button is clicked.
• Fraction of screen to pan per click. This represents the ‘resolution’ of panning.
• Zoom/un-zoom factor. A single click in a system window while the zoom or un-
zoom icons are active results in a fixed scaling to be applied to the view, while
the centre of the view is changed to the position in which the mouse was
clicked. The value entered in this field is the fixed scaling factor, and as such
should be greater than one.
• Background. The background bitmap that is displayed on the background of the

main window (by default this is a PE logo with contact information) may be
changed. Select the required bitmap by pressing the button to the right of the
field. The bitmap will only be loaded after shut down and restarting the
multilateral main screen.
Output
Printer Setup - to set up the printer if not already done.
Print - prints the current child window as a hard-copy, metafile or to the clipboard,
whether a network window or a visualisation screen.
Window Menu
• New Window. This creates a new system view. The new view is zoomed out to
include all the components.
• Close All. Shuts down all system windows in the application.
• Cascade. This reorganises the system windows into a ‘cascade’.
• Tile. Tiles the system windows.
• Toggle toolbar display. This will remove the toolbar if it is currently displayed,
and vice-versa. If the toolbar is not displayed, toolbar commands can be
accessed via the right hand mouse button on the system view window.
• Toggle navigator display. Displays or hides the navigator window.
Below this is a list of currently active system windows. The current focus window
may be changed by clicking on one.
Help
Brings up this information on the network interface.
Other Items
Apart from the preferences it is possible to change other aspects of the User
interface: namely font and icon sizes.
Network Fonts
Fonts used in the network drawing may be changed. To do this, select the Fonts
option from the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button click in the
system window. This will bring up a font selection dialog. Select the required font
and style and press OK. The new font will be applied to all network drawings and
also to labels in the visualisation windows.
Icon Sizes
The sizes of the icons used to represent the network nodes can be changed. Select
the Icon Sizes option from the menu obtained following a right hand mouse button
click in the system window. The following dialog will appear:
Figure 7-57
Icon Size Dialog
The dialog consists of a slider with a data entry field, which contains the current
icon size (this defaults to 50 out of an arbitrary 0 – 100 range for a new file).
Change the icon size by adjusting the slider or entering a new size in the entry field.
Check the ‘Automatic Update’ box to update the system window with the new size
as the slider is moved.
When the new icon size is entered, click on This View or All Views. In the latter
case the change will be applied to all network windows. In the former case, only the
currently active network view will be changed. The new icon size will not be saved;
i.e. all changes will be lost when the current file is exited.
7.8.1.2.6 Visualisation Screens

These screens supply three 2-D views (front, side and top) of the 3-D multilateral
object. The salient visual objects (tie-points, junctions, tubing, completions and
reservoirs) are drawn symbolically but they are spaced to scale. The screens are
updated whenever a network item is edited and has a valid data set and whenever
an item is deleted or becomes invalid. The visualisation objects are given the same
colour as their equivalent network objects (e.g. blue for reservoirs), and are
identified by the same labels as in the network structure.
The geometry used is left-handed Cartesian. It is assumed that the positive x axis
is along the direction of zero azimuth, positive y is at 90 degrees and positive z is in
the direction of increasing depth. The front view shows the (x, z) plane, where y is
increasing going into the screen and consequently positive z corresponds to
moving down the screen and positive x corresponds to moving to the right. The
side view shows the (y, z) plane, where x increases coming out of the screen, z
PROSPER MANUAL
increases going down the screen and y increases going to the right. The top view
shows the (y, x) plane where z is increasing going into the screen, x increases
going down the screen and y increases going to the right.
The screens are brought up using the Visualise menu. One of the three views
(front, side and top) or all of them can be activated using the appropriate menu
command. If all the views are shown then they are tiled with any active network
windows. The title bar of each view window shows the extent of the network for the
plane in question. The co-ordinates are shown with respect to the start of a
(hypothetical) straight tubing, which enters the tie-point in the direction of zero
azimuth and has measured and vertical depths equivalent to those of the tie-points.
In a similar way to the network window one can pan across a visualisation window
by moving the mouse cursor close to one of the window edges and clicking on the
left button when the panning cursor appears. The fraction of the screen traversed
and the auto-repeat delay are controlled by the same options as in the network
window (chosen from the Preferences dialog).
Right-hand Mouse Button Menu

Using the right hand mouse button on a view screen one can choose to display the
co-ordinates of any of the visual objects. The displayed coordinates can be written
over one another, it is sometimes better to view them separately. By default, the
reservoir depths are displayed at the start of a session. The next group of functions
from this menu contains zoom, un-zoom and restore. The latter option resets the
scale factor and the view origins (which can be moved by panning) to the default
values. The zoom factor is the same as that used for the network window and is
set in the Preferences dialog. Finally, the way the picture is drawn can be altered.
Normally, the zooming not only changes the extent of the drawing seen but also
magnifies the objects (network items and text) drawn. Switch off the magnify mode
if zooming into a cluttered area as this will allow more objects to fit in. Also, the
network drawing is normally scaled to fit the window, irrespective of the relative
extents to the two axes. Choosing the ‘draw to scale’ option stretches the drawing
in the direction with the greater physical extent (so it no longer fits in the window).
7.8.2 Data Entry
7.8.2.1 Overview
The data associated with any network item is accessed by double-clicking on its
icon when none of the network manipulation options (zoom/un-zoom, delete, move
and select) have been chosen. This brings up a screen with editable data fields in
it.
Apart from the tie-point and junction data screens, the main data entry screen for
each node is similar to that of the single well main data entry screen (see Section
7.1). However, the reservoir data input child screen does not have any tab buttons
in it. The main data screens differ from the single well case in the action buttons:
only the left-most group - Done, Cancel, Reset, Validate and Help - are available.
Their function is the same as in the single well case. Hence, the differences

between the single well IPR data entry and the similar multilateral ones lie in the
model selection and data input child screens.
Given the hierarchical nature of the network, editing a parent branch causes the
starting points (e.g. depths) of child branches to be initialised. Those data fields
that are initialised from outside a particular network item are set read-only (coloured
cyan) when the screen to edit that net item is brought up. Hence, in order to edit a
net item and fill it with valid data it is normally necessary to have edited the parent
branch first. However, it is not a requirement to edit the network in hierarchical
order as any child net item can be filled with invalid data and saved before editing
its parent.
Another difference from the single well IPR is that in each screen, on the right hand
side, there is a list box containing a drawing of the network where the data carrying
nodes are sorted hierarchically, by type or alphabetically according to a right-hand
mouse button menu selection. By clicking on the line corresponding to a node the
given screen is closed and the screen belonging to the node clicked on is opened.
7.8.2.2 Tie-point and Junction Data

The tie-point data consist of a measured and vertical depth, with an implied azimuth
of 0°. The junction data are the same but are read-only. A junction must always be
hierarchically below another network item, so its data are entered automatically
from its parent. As mentioned earlier a junction mainly forms a branching point.
7.8.2.3 Tubing Data

Model Selection Screen
The model selection screen for tubing has options to select horizontal and vertical
correlations, choke models, flow types (tubing or annular), correlation thresholds,
and a well-bore radius. None of the options affect the general format of the data
input screen but the flow type affects the details of the equipment tabbed dialog in
the data input screen.
Data Input Screen

There are two tabbed dialogs in this data input screen, which allow the entry of a
deviation survey and equipment descriptions. These dialogs contain tables very
similar to the ones encountered by selecting System | Equipment from the
PROSPER main menu and then the Deviation Survey and Downhole Equipment
push buttons. In the case of the deviation survey there is an additional azimuth
entry.
7.8.2.4 Completion Data

The completion data screen represents tubing and a completion. Hence, it is a
superset of the tubing data screen and is the same except for one extra tabbed
dialog in the data input screen, for completion data. This dialog has fields in it
similar to the single well IPR Wong-Clifford model for describing a deviated
PROSPER MANUAL
completion (completion zone start and end measured and true depths) as well as a
field for entering a local (mechanical/geometric) skin value. There is a drop-down
list box in the fifth column, which allows the skin to be calculated using the Karakas
& Tariq method. The selection of ‘Karakas and Tariq’ enables the push button in
the last column, which brings up an appropriate data entry screen when clicked
upon with the mouse left button. On entering valid data and exiting that screen with
Done the skin value is calculated and entered in the skin data column.
7.8.2.5 Reservoir Data

Model Selection Screen
The model selection screen contains a model selection list box for selecting a
Darcy-like reservoir model as well as several data entry fields for entering PVT and
geometrical data used by all the models.
Data Input Screen

The data input screens contain a single sub-dialog pertaining to the model chosen.
These are similar to the equivalent models in the single well case.
Consistency Validation
Beyond the consistency enforced by the validation of individual network items as
they are edited and the automatic entry of some child branch data from parents,
there are other checks carried out on a complete structure whose nodes are
individually valid:
• There must be no more than one tie-point in a network; other loose items are
ignored.
• The top node must be a tie-point.
• All branches must end in a completion; completions must be attached to at least
one reservoir.
• Reservoirs should not overlap in depth (in the current model they are assumed
to be layers).
7.8.3 Example of How to Set Up a Simple System
7.8.3.1 Introduction
The purpose of this exercise is to enter some geometrical data for the simple
multilateral in the following ‘back of an envelope’ sketch (Figure 7.58) and then
visualise it using the Visualise menu. It is assumed that the fluid selected is ‘Oil
and Water’ and the units system is oilfield units. We will also show the procedure
for running a calculation, to which purpose some default PVT and geometric data
should be entered in the reservoir screens. The multilateral has two branches, with
one branch having an azimuth of 170° with respect to the other. The zig-zag lines
indicate completions and the areas between the horizontal straight-lines are
layers/reservoirs. Note that one tubing branch contains two completions and goes
through two reservoirs. This will be modelled as one completion node and logically

attached to two reservoirs. The point at (12000, 10000) feet will serve as a tie-
point.
(0, 0) = (measured depth, vertical depth)
(12000, 10000)
10000 feet (12100, 10020)
(12200, 10020)
Kh = 100 mD
(12400, 10100)
10100 feet
Azimuth = 170 deg.

Azimuth = 0 deg.
10200 feet
(13000, 10210) (13000, 10220)
Kh = 50 mD
(14000, 10220)
(14000, 10280)
10300 feet
Figure 7-58 Sketch of a Multi-lateral Network
7.8.3.2 Place the Nodes in the Network Window

The nodes needed are one tie-point (as always), a junction (to model the
branching), two completions (although there are three zones, the data for two will
be contained in one node), and two reservoirs. Each node can be selected from
one of the following:
1. Using the Tools | Add Item option in the frame window menu.
2. Clicking on the appropriate icon in the toolbar.
3. Selecting the required option from the drop-down list box in the toolbar.
4. Using the right hand mouse button menu.
Once the appropriate node addition option has been selected, click somewhere in
the blank network window to create an icon. Allow the programme to attach a
default label to the node by not entering one. Do this for all the required nodes
listed above.
PROSPER MANUAL
7.8.3.3 Connect the Nodes

Before doing the connections, space the nodes and arrange them in height order
with the tie-point at the top, followed by the junction, followed by the completions
and put the reservoirs at the bottom. Keep the completions and reservoirs at the
same horizontal level with C1 and R1 on the left. Now select the link option and
drag the mouse cursor (with the left button down) between the following icons in
order to make the connections: TP1-J1, J1-C1, J1-C2, C1-R1, C2-R1 and C2-R2.
Note that between the tie-point and the junction a tubing icon is drawn to indicate
that this link contains tubing data. The order of the connections J1-C1 and J2-C2
are important for the reverse would imply that the completions were above the
junction hierarchically.
7.8.3.4 Enter the Data

To enter data, double-click on an icon to bring up a screen.
Tie-point (TP1)
Enter 12000 feet and 10000 feet for measured and vertical depth respectively and
then click on Done.
Tubing (T1)
Make sure that ‘Flow Type’ is ‘Tubing Flow’ on the model selection screen and a
suitable value (0.354 ft) is entered for well-bore radius. Then leave the model
selection screen with its other defaults and enter the data input screen using the
button Input Data in the top right hand corner. In the ‘Deviation’ tabbed dialog enter
the three numbers:
12100 10020 0
in the white boxes in row 2. Now enter the ‘Equipment’ tabbed dialog by clicking
on that tab. In row 1 choose ‘Tubing’ from the drop-down list box and then enter
the four numbers:
12100 0.7 0.0006 1
in the white boxes in row 1. Click on Done to finish.
Junction (J1)
The co-ordinates (12100, 10020) should already be entered in the junction net item.
Completions (C1 and C2)

The model selection screens should be as with T1 except a Dietz shape factor
should be entered (e.g. 31.6). The other screens should have their white spaces
filled as follows. In the equipment screens the first row drop-down list box should
always be set to ‘Tubing’.
C1 Deviation
13000 10210 170 (row 2)
14000 10280 170 (row 3)

C1 Equipment
14000 0.7 0.0006 1 (row 1)
C1 Completion Info.
13000 14000 10210 10280 1 (row 1)
C2 Deviation
12400 10100 0 (row 2)
13000 10220 0 (row 3)
14000 10220 0 (row 4)
C2 Equipment
14000 0.7 0.0006 1 (row 1)
C2 Completion Info.
12200 12400 10020 10100 1 (row 1)
13000 14000 10220 10220 1 (row 2)
Reservoirs (R1 and R2)

For both reservoirs select ‘Darcy’ as the model. The edit fields for entry of the data
for this model should appear on clicking on Input Data. In order to agree with the
specifications of the sketch enter the following data:
R1
Reservoir Top Depth: 10200 feet
Reservoir Permeability: 50 md
Reservoir Thickness: 100 feet
R2
Reservoir Top Depth: 10000 feet
Reservoir Permeability: 100 md
The other fields in the model selection and data input screens (for both reservoirs)
should be entered with some reasonable numbers. For example: pressure (5000),
temperature (200), salinity (150000), water cut (15), GOR (800), gas gravity (0.9),
oil gravity (30), vertical permeability (10) and drainage area (500).
7.8.3.5 Visualise / Calculate

Choosing Visualise |Front should show a picture similar to the one in the sketch in
Figure 7-55. Also, providing the data has been entered correctly, the network
structure should be valid; this can be verified by going to the screen brought up by
the Analyse| Calculate menu command and choosing one of the calculations. Note
that this exercise is not meant to represent a real case but only a reasonable set of
data that the programme can process.
PROSPER MANUAL
8 Artificial Lift Data Input
This section describes how to enter the description of artificial lift equipment in a
well for calculating a systems analysis. The Design section describes how to
select suitable gas lift, ESP, HSP, PCP and jet pump equipment for new or existing
wells.
8.1 Gas Lift Input Data

This option is available only when Gas Lift has been selected as the lift method in
the Options menu. To analyse an existing gas lifted well, the equipment details
must be entered in the Gas Lift Data section that becomes viewable after selecting
gas lift from Options. To design a new gas lift installation, skip the System ⏐
Gaslift data menu and go directly to Design ⏐ Gaslift Design (New Well). Note
that the gas lift design section has been revised to give users greater flexibility in
choice of design methods.
The required input depends on the choice of casing pressure calculation method.
These are the options available that can be selected in the general options:
• No Friction Loss in Annuls

No flowing pressure losses occur in the annulus. A static gas
gradient in the casing is assumed. This model should be used for the
majority of gas lift installations.
• Friction Loss in Annuls

The friction pressure drop in the casing is calculated. Input of both
tubing O.D. and casing I.D. is required to define the annulus
geometry.
• Safety Equipment
Friction pressure losses are calculated in the surface piping,
tubing/casing annulus and an annular safety valve where fitted.
To analyse an existing installation, the gas lift details that need to be entered will
depend upon the particular gas lift method that has been selected.
Firstly select the gas lift system type on the Options menu, and then enter the well
data by selecting Gaslift data on the System menu. Enter the required lift gas
composition data and select one of three gas lift methods available. The methods
currently available are:
2 - 16 Chapter 8 - Artificial Lift Data Input
8.1.1 Fixed Depth of Injection

When this method is selected, only the depth of injection will be asked for.
Â The program assumes that the casing pressure is sufficient to inject lift
gas at the specified depth to achieve the GLR injection target.
The GLR injected can be subsequently overwritten with entered calculation

sensitivity variables. If the GLR injected is unknown, leave it set to zero. The GLR
to inject is set using Sensitivity variables GLR injected or Injection gas rate in the
Calculation section.
Figure 8-1
Gas Lift Data Input
Fixed Depth of Injection
8.1.2 Optimum Depth of Injection

When this method is selected enter the maximum depth of injection, the dP across
the gas lift valve and the top casing pressure and PROSPER will iterate to calculate
the optimum injection depth for changing well conditions.
Figure 8-2
Gas Lift Data Input
Optimum Depth of
Injection
For the Gas lifted (safety equipment) option, the compressor discharge pressure is
requested instead of the casing pressure.

Chapter 8 - Artificial Lift Data Input 3 - 16
Â Use Optimum Depth of Injection to evaluate the potential increase in

production due to gas lift without the need to perform a detailed design
and spacing the unloading valves.
8.1.3 Valve Depth Specified

Enter the measured depth of the gas lift valves. The program automatically
calculates which valve opens for particular liquid and gas injection rates.
Figure 8-3
Gas Lift Data Input
Valve Depth Specified
If a gas lift design has already been done, or the mandrel depths have been
entered for a Gaslift QuickLook Calculation, the valve details can be copied
across using the Transfer button.
Â The Casing pressure entered should be the available injection system

pressure for the current operating conditions If calculating sensitivities for
a new casing pressure operated design, always subtract the dP to close
valves for each unloading valve above the operating valve from the
design casing pressure.
PROSPER MANUAL
8.1.4 Gas Lift (Safety Equipment)

For the Gas Lifted (safety equipment) option, the annular safety valve pressure
losses are calculated using the valve depth and ‘bean diameter’ entered on the
System ⏐ Gaslift Data screen as follows:
Figure 8-4
Gas Lift (Safety
Equipment) Input
The safety equipment data can be entered by accessing the Safety Equipment
button in this screen.
The details of the surface injection system are used to calculate the casing head
pressure as a function of gas injection rate and compressor output pressure.
Frictional losses in the annulus are taken into account when calculating the casing
pressure at each gas lift valve depth. The safety valve pressure loss is clearly seen
on the following gradient plot:
Figure 8-5
Gas Lift (Safety
Equipment)
Pressure Traverse

8.1.5 Gas Lift (Allow injection in Pipe Line above

wellhead)
This option implemented allows to model gas injection in a pipeline. To enable this
option, select Pipeline Only in the Options Summary and Gas Lift in the Artificial Lift
method.
To specify the position of the gas lift valve, in the surface equipment data select this
feature in the equipment type combo box, as shown below:
Figure 8-6
Gas Lift (pipe line) Input
And in the Gas Lift Data enter the properties of the gas and the GLR injected:
Figure 8-7
Gas Lift (pipe line) Input
PROSPER MANUAL
8.2 ESP Input Data

If Electrical Submersible Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the
Options screen, then Electric Submersible Pumps. will be active on the System
input menu. If a new ESP design is being performed, the equipment has not yet
been sized, so skip the ESP Input section entirely and move directly to Design on
the main PROSPER tool bar. For analysis and optimisation of an existing ESP
installation, enter the data on the ESP input data screen as requested:
Figure 8-8
ESP Input Data
The Pump wear factor is used to account for deviation from the manufacturer's
published performance curves due to wear etc.
Â For example, entering 0.05 causes the program to scale the pump head
curves down by 5% (i.e. head is 95% of the database value).
Entering 0 causes the program to use the database curves directly.
A negative number can be entered to simulate a particular pump that

performs better than the database curve.
When a downhole gas separator is run, the GOR of the oil above the separator will
be lower than the produced oil GOR. Depending on the completion, the separated
gas is produced up the annulus or a separate tubing string. Both casing I.D. and
tubing O.D. are required to be input on the System ⏐ Equipment ⏐ Downhole
Equipment.

8.2.1 Pump Database

To access the pump database select Design⎪Database from the main menu.
Use the Pump, Motor and Cable tab buttons to select from a database of equipment
characteristics. A typical database screen for pumps is shown below:
Figure 8-9
ESP Pumps
Database
Motors are grouped by series. Select the series clicking on the name of the pump,
and then choose Amend to enter the pump record.
In the Power Options it is possible to find all the motor configurations available. An
example ESP motor database screen is shown below:
Figure 8-10
ESP Motors
Database
PROSPER MANUAL
Different types of cable may also be chosen to model varying requirements at

surface. An example ESP cable database screen is shown below:
Figure 8-11
ESP Cables
Database
Further details on this database can be found in the chapter dedicated to the ESP
design section.
Â Disclaimer
Every effort is made to ensure that the sample pump and motor
coefficients supplied with PROSPER are current. However, it is the User’s
responsibility to ensure they are both accurate and up-to-date. For critical
design work, always contact the equipment supplier for the latest
performance data.

8.3 HSP Input Data

If Hydraulic Drive Downhole Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the
Options screen, then Hydraulic Submersible Pumps will be active on the System
input menu. If a new HPS design is being done, the equipment has not yet been
sized, so skip the HSP Input section entirely and select Design from the main
PROSPER tool bar. For analysis and optimisation of an existing HSP installation,
enter the data on the HSP input data screen as requested:
Figure 8-12
HSP Input Data
The Pump wear factor is defined as in the ESP pumps, as seen in the previous
section.
Turbine speed is assumed to be the same as the Pump speed. The % Power Fluid
of Reservoir Fluid defines what fraction of the total produced liquids the power fluid
represents.
Â A figure of 100% means that the amount of power fluid used to drive the
turbine is the same as the amount of produced reservoir fluids.
8.3.1 Pump Database

Use the Pump and Turbine tab buttons to select from a database of equipment
characteristics. A typical database screen for pumps is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 8-13
HSP Pumps
Database
An example HSP turbine database screen is shown below:
Figure 8-14
HSP Turbines
Database
Note that for the turbine different configurations are available (as seen previously in
the ESP motor database); to access then select the turbine and choose Amend.
Further details of database maintenance methods are given in HSP Design section.
Â Disclaimer
Every effort is made to ensure that the sample pump and turbine
performance data.

8.4 Progressive Cavity Pumps

If the PCP option has been selected as the well lift method on the Options screen,
then the progressive cavity Pump option will be active on the System input menu.
If a new PCP design is being done, the equipment has not yet been sized, so skip
the PCP Input section entirely and select Design from the main PROSPER menu.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing PCP installation, enter the data on the
PCP input data screen as requested:
Figure 8.15
PCP Input Data
In order to select the correspondent pump and rods, the pump database must be
set up first. The section devoted to the PCP design will describe how to enter the
correspondent pump and rods database.
PROSPER MANUAL
8.5 Coiled Tubing Gas Lift

This option is available only when Gas Lift with coil tubing is selected as the lift
method in the Options menu.
To analyse an existing installation, enter the data in the Coiled Tubing Data section,
as shown below:
Figure 8.16
Coiled Tubing
Data
Two lift methods are available: Specified Injection Depth and Optimum Injection
Depth. Please refer to the Gas Lift section above for further details.
8.6 Diluent Injection

This technology is used to enhance the production of heavy, viscous crude oil, in
some cases making previously not producible hydrocarbon reserves economically
recoverable.
With diluent injection, the light hydrocarbon diluent reduces crude viscosity and
improves its flow characteristics.
When Diluent injection is selected as Artificial Lift Method, Diluent Injection is active
in the System menu.
The only input data required are injection rate and depth:
Figure 8.17
Diluent Injection
Data

8.7 Jet Pumps

If Jet Pump has been selected as the well lift method on the Options screen, then
Jet Pumps will be active on the System input menu. If a new Jet Pump design is
being done, the equipment has not yet been sized, so skip the Jet Pump Input
section entirely and select Design from the main PROSPER tool bar.
For analysis and optimisation of an existing Jet Pump installation, enter the data on
the input data screen as requested:
Figure 8.18
Jet Pump Input

Data
In this section the User has to select the Pump and enter specify its position and
maximum size along with injection rate and pressure.
The loss coefficients are also required. These coefficients are a measure of the
energy loss due to the friction in the above quoted sections of the pump.
The coefficients are provided by the Jet Pump manufacturers.
8.7.1 Pump Database

A typical database screen for pumps is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 8-19
Jet Pumps Database
To access the database record for each pump, select it and choose Amend.
Further details of database maintenance methods are given in Jet Pump Design
section.
Â Disclaimer
performance data.

8.8 Multiphase Pumps

When Multiphase Pump (FRAMO Pumps) has been selected as the well lift method
on the Options screen, to perform the analysis and optimisation of an existing
FRAMO Pump installation, enter the data on the input data screen as requested:
Figure 8.20
Framo Data
The Pump Wear Factor is defined in the same way as in the ESP pumps. Please
refer to that section for details.
Other input data are the power available, the pump configuration (single pump or
pumps in parallel) and the pump model.
8.8.1 Pump Database

A typical database screen for pumps is shown below:
Figure 8-21
FRAMO Pumps
Database
PROSPER MANUAL
To access the database record for each pump, select it and choose Amend.
Further details of database maintenance methods are given in Jet Pump Design
section.
Â Disclaimer
performance data.

9 Matching Menu
The PROSPER Matching menu is mainly used for the following objectives:
- Input data and model quality control

- Fine adjustment of the model parameters to enable well models to reproduce
observed data
- In case of artificial lift, system diagnostics and troubleshooting
A properly matched model is a pre-requisite for accurate performance prediction.
Â The Quality Control exercises like Correlation comparison are based on

what is possible according to the principles of fundamental physics.
The Matching menu offers the following calculation options:
VLP / IPR Matching

This option enables the User to tune the well bore multiphase flow correlations to fit
measured downhole pressures and rates. Up to 1000 well tests can be stored and
used for matching purposes.
Once the VLP is matched, the IPR can be adjusted to match observed rates and
pressures also.
Gradient Matching
Existing correlations can be modified using non-linear regression to best fit a
gradient survey. Comparison of the fit parameters will identify which correlation
required the least adjustment to match the measured data.
Â This should be used only if for a given rate more than one measurement is
available along the production string.
Pipeline Matching
The program uses actual wellhead and manifold pressures together with
temperature data points to match surface pressure drop correlations. Separate
screens allow the match parameters to be viewed and the best match selected.
Correlation Comparison
This is the primary step in quality control of measured well test data.
This option allows pressure gradient plots to be generated with different
correlations to be compared with measured gradient survey data. The comparison
enables the User to:
- Understand if the measurements “make sense”, that is to say, violate or not
the principles of physics
- Select the flow correlation that best fits the experimental measurement
Correlation Comparison is a fundamental step in the quality check of the model.
2 - 26 Chapter 9 - Matching Menu
QuickLook
This feature is active only if an artificial lift method (Gas Lift, ESP or HSP) is
selected.
It allows calculation of the pressure gradient in an artificially lifted well for a quick
check of lift performance.
For gas lifted wells, valve opening and closing pressures are calculated to permit
troubleshooting gas lift installations.
For ESP and HSP wells, the performance of the ESP and HSP can be checked.
The tubing and pipeline match parameters can be inspected reset or entered by
hand using this menu option. This capability is useful for troubleshooting, or to
input match parameters determined previously.
Correlation Thresholds
This option allows the User to specify a threshold angle for both tubing and pipeline
correlations at which the program will automatically change to another (specified)
correlation. This option will enable vertical risers in sub sea completions to be
modelled more accurately.
Â VLP Matching is not available for Enthalpy Balance temperature model

applications. For Enthalpy Balance applications requiring VLP matching,
use the Predicting Pressure Only, or the Rough/Improved Approximation
temperature model, to perform the correlation matching. Once the
matching operation has been completed, return to System and re-activate
the Enthalpy Balance option. The VLP match parameters will be carried
over.
9.1 A Note on VLP Correlation Applications

Fancher Brown is a no-slip hold-up correlation that is provided for use as a quality
control. It gives the lowest possible value of VLP since it neglects gas/liquid slip it
should always predict a pressure, which is less than the measured value. Even if it
gives a good match to the measured down hole pressures, Fancher Brown should
not be used for quantitative work. Measured data falling to the left of Fancher
Brown on the correlation comparison plot indicates a problem with fluid density (i.e.
PVT) or field pressure data. This is thus essentially, a correlation for quality
control purposes.
For oil wells, Hagedorn Brown performs well for slug flow at moderate to high
production rates but well loading is poorly predicted. Hagedorn Brown should not
be used for condensates and whenever mist flow is the main flow regime.
Hagedorn Brown under predicts VLP at low rates and should not be used for
predicting minimum stable rates.

Chapter 9 - Matching Menu 3 - 26
Duns and Ros Modified usually performs well in mist flow cases and should be
used in high GOR oil and condensate wells. It tends to over-predict VLP in oil
wells. Despite this, the minimum stable rate indicated by the minimum of the VLP
curve is often a good estimate.
Duns and Ros Original is the original published method, without the
enhancements applied in the primary Duns and Ros correlation. The primary Duns
and Ros correlation in PROSPER has been enhanced and optimised for use with
condensates.
Petroleum Experts correlation combines the best features of existing correlations. It

uses the Gould et al flow map and the Hagedorn Brown correlation in slug flow, and
Duns and Ros for mist flow. In the transition regime, a combination of slug and
mist results is used.
Petroleum Experts 2 includes the features of the PE correlation plus original work on
predicting low-rate VLPs and well stability.
Petroleum Experts 3 includes the features of the PE2 correlation plus original work for
viscous, volatile and foamy oils.
Petroleum Experts 4 is an advanced mechanistic model for any angled wells (including
downhill flow) suitable for any fluid (including Retrograde Condensate).
Orkiszewski correlation often gives a good match to measured data. However, its
formulation includes a discontinuity in its calculation method. The discontinuity can
cause instability during the pressure matching process; therefore we do not
encourage its use.
Beggs and Brill is primarily a pipeline correlation. It generally over-predicts

pressure drops in vertical and deviated wells.
Gray correlation gives good results in gas wells for condensate ratios up to around
50 bbl/MMscf and high produced water ratios. Gray contains its own internal PVT
model which over-rides PROSPERs normal PVT calculations.
Hydro 3P (internal) is a mechanistic model and considers three phase flow.
Â For very high liquid dropout wells, use a Retrograde Condensate PVT and
the Duns and Ros correlation.
Â There is no universal rule for selecting the best flow correlation for a given
application. It is recommended that the Correlation Comparison always be
carried out. By inspecting the predicted flow regimes and pressure
results, the User can select the correlation that best models the physical
situation.
Further details can be found in the PROSPER Help menu, under Help⎪Flow
Correlations. References about multiphase flow are reported in Appendix B.
PROSPER MANUAL
9.2 VLP/IPR Match and Quality Check

This feature enables the User to adjust the multiphase flow correlations to match
flowing bottom hole pressure surveys or production logging runs.
Up to 1000 pressure tests can be stored and used for matching. VLP/IPR Match
allows data to be matched over a range of rates as well as depths.
Â The Gas Oil Ratio is the solution GOR. If the reservoir is under-saturated,
there is no free gas production at the sand face and the GOR free should
be set to zero.
The Gas Oil Ratio can also be entered as Total GOR (Solution + Free
GOR). In this case the GOR Free can be entered as nil. The program will
determine how much gas is in solution and how much in the free phase
according to the PVT.
Figure 9-1
VLP/IPR
Match Input
Â If the temperature prediction method is ‘Rough Approximation’, the User

can now use the ‘Estimate U value’ button to estimate the overall heat
transfer coefficient for the selected well test. The procedure is:
• Click on the button to the left of the well test data that we wish to
estimate the overall heat transfer coefficient.
• Click on the ‘Estimate U value’ button
• PROSPER will estimate the overall heat transfer coefficient that
matches the wellhead temperature of the well test.
• The User can then go to the Geothermal Gradient section to
change the overall heat transfer coefficient value.
Â The User can now use the ‘Correlation Comparison’ button to transfer the
selected well test data to the correlation comparison section. The
procedure is:
• Click on the button to the left of the well test data that we wish to

perform correlation comparison on.

• Click on the ‘Correlation Comparison’ button
• PROSPER will bring us to the correlation comparison screen and at
the same time, populate the correlation comparison screen with the
selected well test data.
9.2.1 VLP Matching

The required input data are:
Flowing pressure for test rate entered.

Tubing Head Pressure
Flowing temperature at test rate. Usually has only a minor effect.
Tubing Head Temperature
Test water cut.
Water Cut
Enter either Oil or Liquid rates as selected.
Rate
Depth of measured pressure data point.
Gauge Depth
Measured pressure at test flow rate.
Gauge Pressure
Solution GOR of Oil
GOR
Free gas production from a gas cap or injection breakthrough. The
GOR Free
measured total GOR during the test (including the tank gas) must equal
GOR + GOR Free.
Rate of lift gas injection (gas lifted wells only).
Gaslift Gas Rate
Depth of operating valve (gas lifted wells only) .A good bottom hole
Injection Depth
pressure match will not be obtained if an incorrect injection depth is used.
The Match Point Comment field is provided to allow the optional entry of notes to
identify the match data set. Examples would be test date, source of pressure data,
comments on test quality etc.
This input screen has a number of features to simplify data manipulation. The
selection buttons on the left hand side are used to select data points for further
editing. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the required buttons to select multiple
points. Copy copies the selected points into memory and onto the Windows
clipboard. Click the selection button of the desired destination and click Paste to
copy the data to the new location. Insert shifts the data down to make room for new
entries. The Delete button deletes the selected records. Data from this table can
be copied to or from the Windows clipboard. Therefore, test data can be read in
from a Windows based spreadsheet by first copying it to the clipboard, and then
pasting it directly into the table.
Bad or inconsistent data points occasionally prevent the program obtaining a good
match. The Disable button causes a selected data record to be ignored in the
matching process. Disabled records are dimmed in the VLP matching screen.
Disabled points can be re-included in the matching process by first selecting the
point and clicking on Enable. By sequentially disabling suspect data points,
potentially inaccurate test points can be identified and eliminated from the match.
To compute the VLP match, click Match VLP to display the VLP matching screen.
Select the correlations to match or just click All to match all correlations. An
example screen is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 9-2
VLP Matching Screen
Click the Statistics button to examine the match parameters as shown on the
example screen below:
Figure 9-3
VLP Match Statistics
If necessary, match parameters can be edited or directly entered on this screen.

This should be done with extreme caution and only if previous work on similar wells
has yielded consistent match parameters or to apply match parameters for the
same well in a different PROSPER application.
PROSPER uses a non-linear regression to tune the VLP correlations to best match
the measured data. It does this by calculating a pressure traverse using a
correlation and determining the error between measured and calculated pressures.
The gravity and friction terms of the pressure loss equations are then adjusted and
the process repeated until the measured and calculated results agree within 1 psi,
or 50 iterations have been completed.
Notes on Matching Parameters

Parameter 1 is the multiplier for the gravity term in the pressure drop
Â correlation
Parameter 2 is the multiplier for the friction term.
If all the data are consistent, these two parameters should be within a ±10%
tolerance from the unity.
If PROSPER has to adjust Parameter 1 by more than +-10%, then there is
probably an inconsistency between the fluid density predicted by the PVT
model and the field data (rates/pressures).
If PROSPER has to adjust Parameter 2 by more than +-10%, then probably
the value of the roughness entered in the equipment is incorrect.
In cases the PVT has been correctly matched, the greatest source of uncertainty in
the VLP calculation for oil wells is usually the hold-up correlation. PROSPER will
attempt to make a gravity component (Parameter 1) match by adjusting the hold-up
correlation. If a match is not obtained with a Parameter 1 more than 5% away from
1.0, the density is adjusted. For single phase applications, no hold-up correction is
possible, so any significant deviation from 1.0 for Parameter 1 indicates a PVT
problem.
If Parameter 2 requires a large correction, then it is likely that the equipment

description is in error, or the flow rates are incorrect. As the effect of a shift in the
friction component on the overall pressure loss is less than for the gravity term, a
larger range in the value of Parameter 2 is expected.
Once the matching process is complete, the match parameters will be shown
alongside each of the correlations that have been matched. Use the standard
deviations and the magnitude of corrections made to both parameters to aid the
selection of matched correlation.
Use the Correlation Comparison option of the Matching menu to compare the
optimised (matched) correlations with measured test data. To ensure that the
process has been successful, check that the matched VLP traverses plot close to
the measured pressure data points.
Â PROSPER VLP matching provides a logically consistent means to adjust flow

correlations to reproduce field measured pressures. Combined with IPR
matching, PROSPER provides the means to create a robust well model that
is capable of reproducing observed pressures and rates. This is a
necessary condition for making accurate performance predictions and
optimisation studies.
PROSPER MANUAL
9.2.2 IPR Matching

This feature allows the User to check the consistency of the flowing bottom hole
pressure data used in the VLP match and to adjust the IPR, if required, to match
measured data. Inconsistencies in test data resulting from e.g. changing reservoir
pressures can be easily identified. Clicking VLP/IPR from the VLP/IPR Matching
screen will display the following VLP Matching – Adjust IPR screen:
Figure 9-4
Adjust IPR
Select the desired correlation and then click Calculate, and PROSPER will calculate
the VLP for a range of rates and pressure at the sand face for each of the active
test points that have been entered on the VLP Matching screen. Once this
calculation is completed, click IPR and the IPR input screens will be presented. For
the first pass, accept the unmatched IPR data and display plot. The VLP and test
data will all be plotted on the same diagram as follows:
Figure 9-5
VLP/IPR Plot
The errors between calculated and measured data are shown on the side of the
plot. If the test points are not consistent with the IPR model, the skin, reservoir

pressure etc. can be adjusted until a match is obtained. Inconsistent test data
points will be easily identified on this plot. Clicking Main returns to the Adjust IPR
screen. Matching both the VLP and IPR to actual test data ensures that the
PROSPER well model is capable of accurately reproducing the currently known
producing conditions.
Â An IPR is required when automatic rate calculation is used for VLP or

system calculations. IPR data must be present before commencing a
VLP/IPR Match.
9.3 Gradient Matching

This facility enables to modify the existing correlations to fit to a measured pressure
gradient survey. It can also be used, as a quality control to identify which
correlation required the least adjustment to obtain a fit. From the Matching menu,
select Gradient (traverse) matching. The following screen will appear:
Figure 9-6
Gradient (traverse)
Matching Input
The first node pressure is entered in the Input Parameters section - do not include it
in the Match Data table. The Transfer button copies the measured gradient data to
Correlation comparison. The same guidelines for GOR apply as for VLP/IPR
Matching. Enter the required data and click Calculate. The following will be
displayed:
Figure 9-7
Gradient (traverse)
Matching Calculation
PROSPER MANUAL
Select the correlations to be matched by clicking on them, and then click Match to
start the matching routine. Parameter 1 is the correction factor applied to the
gravity component of pressure drop whilst Parameter 2 is the factor applied to the
frictional element of pressure drop. The match algorithm continues until the
standard error is less than 1 psi, or 30 iterations have been performed. The
adjusted correlation and measured pressures can be visually compared by clicking
Plot. A graph similar to the following is displayed:
Figure 9-8
Gradient (traverse)
Matching Plot
The match points appear as blue squares in the figure reported above.
The calculated pressure gradient can be inspected by clicking View. Click the
Statistics button to display the match parameters. Use the statistics and knowledge
of well conditions and correlation performance to guide the choice of VLP
correlation. Once a correlation has been matched, the match parameters are
appended to the correlation name for all subsequent operations. Should it be
necessary to adjust or clear the match parameters, click the Reset button for a
particular correlation, or use the Reset All button to reset all correlations to their un-
matched state.
Â Best results are usually obtained by using VLP matching. Gradient

matching should only be used for specialised artificial lift applications and
where many pressure Vs depth data points are available.
9.4 Surface Pipe Matching

This option is used to match measured data with the calculated pressure drop from
the wellhead to the manifold. This option is useful only if surface equipment has
been entered in System ⏐ Equipment. Select Surface pipe matching from the
Matching menu to display the following input screen:

Figure 9-9
Surface Pipe
Matching Input
Â The User can now use the ‘Correlation Comparison’ button to transfer the
selected pipeline test data to the pipeline correlation comparison section.
The procedure is:
• Click on the button to the left of the pipeline test data that we wish
to perform correlation comparison on.
• Click on the ‘Correlation Comparison’ button
• PROSPER will bring us to the pipeline correlation comparison
screen and at the same time, populate the correlation comparison
screen with the selected pipeline test data.
Enter measured manifold and tubing head pressures for a range of rates and click
Match to enter the calculation screen. Select the correlations to match in the same
manner as for Gradient matching. All editing and calculation controls operate as
described under Gradient matching. Once the matching is complete, click OK to
return to the main menu.
Â If the system description has no elevation difference between the wellhead

and manifold, there can be no gravitational component of the correlated
pressure drop. Therefore, Parameter 1 cannot be optimised, so it remains
at the default value of 1.0 for such cases.
9.5 Correlation Comparison

This module allows a pressure gradient (traverse) to be calculated at a specified
surface rate using any of the standard correlations. Actual measured pressures
can be input and plotted on the same graph for comparison with the pressure
calculated from the correlations. The correlations may be modified or unmodified.
Click Matching ⏐ Correlation comparison to display the following data entry screen:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 9-10
Input
Â Note that in Correlation comparison, the first node is the wellhead only if
there is no surface equipment or it has been disabled.
Enter the surface flowing conditions at which to compare the correlated gradients.
Select a surface equipment correlation then click on the required downhole
correlations to select a number of them from the list.
Ensure that the rate type is correct for the specific application.
Â The value of GOR should reflect the current solution GOR and at no time
should exceed the initial solution GOR.
The GOR Free variable is used to model the effect of free gas production
from a gas cap or injection gas breakthrough. Leave GOR Free set to
zero if there is no free gas production.
The sum of GOR and GOR Free should equal the producing GOR.
Pressure data from a gradient survey can be entered versus depth in the measured
data boxes. The Transfer button copies the measured depths and pressures to the
Gradient match section.
For gas lifted wells, both the injection depth and gas lift injection rate are
Â required to be input.
Note that the producing GOR should not include the lift gas injection.
When the input data is complete, click on Calculate to display the calculations
screen, then press the Calculate button to compute the pressure gradient in tabular
form as shown below:

Figure 9-11
Correlation
Comparison
Calculations
The results of individual correlations can be examined sequentially by clicking the

arrows beside the Correlation field.
For all the correlation selected for calculations, use the scroll thumb below the
results box to access the results of calculations.
PROSPER displays the following parameters as a function of depth:

• Temperature, Pressure.
• Total Pressure Gradient, Static gradient, Friction Gradient.
• Flow regime, Liquid Hold up, Water Hold up, cumulative hold ups.
• Slip Liquid Velocity, Superficial Liquid Velocity, Slip Gas Velocity, Superficial
Gas Velocity, Slip Water Velocity, Superficial Water Velocity.
• Mixture Density, Gas density, Oil density, Water density.
• Frictional Pressure Loss, Gravity Pressure Loss
• Pipe Diameter, Angle of the tubing From Vertical, calculation Node Length
• Liquid Viscosity, Gas Viscosity, water viscosity, oil viscosity, Gas-Liquid IFT,
Gas-Water IFT, Gas-Oil IFT, Oil-Water IFT
• C Factor and the max size of sand grain that can be transported
• Cumulative volumes of phases till that depth.
A visual comparison of all selected correlations and the test data is easily made by
clicking on the Plot button. The plot can be output or saved using the standard
features of PROSPER and Windows. An example comparison plot is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 9-12
Correlation
Comparison
Plot
This plot is a useful quality check on the PVT and field production data. The
Fancher Brown correlation does not allow for gas/liquid slippage, therefore it should
always predict a pressure that is less than the measured value. Measured data
falling to the left of Fancher Brown on the gradient comparison plot indicates a
problem with fluid density (i.e. PVT) or the field data (pressure or rate). The use of
the gradient comparison plot is recommended to help identify flow regimes and
assess input data quality.
9.6 QuickLook for Gas Lift

The QuickLook option is based on the principle of calculating well pressure
traverses in opposite directions beginning from known conditions at the surface and
sand face. If the assumptions regarding well conditions (e.g. gas injection rates
and depth, water cuts, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses would
overlay.
Troubleshooting a gas lifted well is performed by considering a range of

assumptions, until a consistent calculation model can be obtained. By varying
artificial lift and production parameters in turn, the experienced User can determine
if the well is behaving as designed, or identify potential reasons to explain the
deviation from design conditions.
9.6.1 Input
The gas lift QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook
from the Matching menu displays the following screen:

Figure 9-13
Gas lift QuickLook Input
The surface measurements section contains two columns for data input.
Â For analysing a particular well at a particular flowing condition, enter data

in the Minimum column only.
For unstable wells, enter the minimum and maximum conditions to be

considered. The program will calculate using average values.
If unloading valve details have been entered, their opening and closing pressures
will be shown on the plot also.
The parameters required to be entered are:
Tubing head pressure Enter expected flowing pressure for the well.
Tubing head temperature Used only for comparison purposes.
Liquid rate Enter current flow rate.
Water cut Enter current value.
Total gas rate Enter total gas production through the separator - including the lift gas
contained in the produced well stream.
Gas injection rate Enter current injection rate.
Casing head pressure Enter current surface gas injection pressure.
Orifice diameter Enter diameter of orifice where gas is entering the string. This diameter is
used to estimate the pressure drop between casing and tubing at the
injection depth. For wells having multiple injecting orifices at the same
depth, enter an equivalent area.
Injection depth Enter expected depth of injection.
Vertical flow correlation Select the most appropriate correlation for the application. Use a matched
correlation where available.
Dome Pressure Correction When set to Yes, the improved high-pressure dome pressure temperature
above 1200 psi method is used.
PROSPER MANUAL
To compare measured and calculated pressures to those calculated by the

QuickLook, click Downhole, and enter the pressure survey data in the following
screen:
Figure 9-14
QuickLook Downhole
Measurements
The purpose of this section is to check that all the data is consistent. The static
gradient can also be displayed on the plot by entering two static pressure
measurement points. Downhole measurement entry is optional.
Â If a static pressure is entered on the downhole measurement screen, this

will be used to calculate the sand face pressure from the IPR.
For PROSPER to determine which gas lift valves should be open and closed for the
current producing conditions, the valve depths and characteristics must first be
entered. Click Valves from the QuickLook screen to display the following:

Figure 9-15
QuickLook
Valve Data
The valve type (casing or tubing sensitive), setting depth, port size, R-value and
dome pressure at 60 °F are required to calculate whether valves are open or
closed. Opening pressure etc. fields will be blank until a QuickLook calculation has
been performed. Entering the valve data for the QuickLook is optional.
As an alternative to entering them by hand, gas lift valve characteristics can be

transferred from other sections of PROSPER. Click the Transfer button on the
Valves data entry screen, and the User will be prompted to select the source of
valve data. Select either From Gas lift valves, or From Gas lift design to pick up the
depths that have been previously entered in Equipment ⏐ Gaslift. After Transferring
the valve depths, select the valve type for each depth. To manually investigate the
effects of changing R-values and dome pressures, these values may be edited or
entered by hand.
9.6.2 Performing the QuickLook Calculation

Once the required (diagnostic) and optional (Downhole & Valves) data have been
entered, click Calculate to display the calculation screen and Calculate again to
begin the computation of the gradients. PROSPER begins by calculating from the
top down, and then repeats the calculation from the sand face up.
Select between the up pass and down pass using the buttons located beside the
Case box as in the following example:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 9-16
QuickLook Diagnostic
Calculations
In the Results box, the program displays the theoretical dP across the injecting
valve together with the casing pressure theoretically required to balance the flowing
tubing pressure at the injection depth plus the dP across the orifice.
Click Plot to display the two computed gradients plus the valve opening and closing
pressures on the same graph:
Figure 9-17
QuickLook
Diagnostic
Plot
This plot enables the User to see at a glance which valves should be open or
closed, and how changes in operating pressures would impact on the valves. The
results box displays the following computed values:

Flowing BHP From the IPR at the current flow rate.

Static BHP Reservoir pressure input.
Tubing pressure at valve Fluid side pressure at injection depth.
Casing pressure at valve Gas side pressure at injection depth.
Temperature at valve Interpolated for Predicting pressure only option. Can also be
calculated using the Rough Approximation temperature option.
GOR Calculated from production and injection rates and PVT.
GOR Free Calculated from production and injection rates and PVT.
dP across valve Pressure loss resulting from injection through the valve orifice.
Theoretical casing pressure Pressure at surface back calculated from the tubing pressure at
injection depth plus the dP across the operating valve less the gas
pressure traverse back to surface.
Producing draw down Difference in static and flowing sand face pressures.
Equivalent P.I. When flowing above bubble point, the production rate divided by
the producing draw down.
Critical flow rate Injection rate required for sonic velocity through the orifice.
% Critical flow rate Actual injection rate as a fraction of the critical rate.
9.7 QuickLook for ESP

The ESP QuickLook principle is identical to that for gas lift wells, i.e. pressure
traverses are calculated from top to bottom and vice-versa. If the assumptions
regarding well and ESP conditions (e.g. pump frequency, wear factor, water cuts,
wellhead pressure, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses will overlay.
In addition, an energy balance is performed across the electrical system allowing
surface voltage and power to be calculated and compared to measured data.
Historically, ESP wells have been difficult to diagnose (particularly with limited down
hole pressure data) because of uncertainties below (IPR), across (pump head) and
above (tubing hydraulics) the pump. Using the ESP QuickLook, conditions in each
of these areas can be analysed separately.
9.7.1 Input
The ESP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook from
the Matching menu displays the following screen:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 9-18
ESP Quicklook
Input
Select the required pump, motor and cable from the buttons at the top of the
screen.
Enter well test parameters as follows:

Tubing head pressure
Liquid rate
Water Cut
Produced GOR (solution GOR plus free gas)
Static Bottom Hole Pressure (reservoir
pressure)
Enter measured data as follows:

Surface current, voltage and (Self-explanatory)
power
Downhole pressure data Enter gauge data if available, usually pump intake and pump
discharge pressures
Enter ESP related parameters as follows:

Pump depth (Self-explanatory)
Operating frequency (Self-explanatory)
Length of cable Used to calculate surface voltage. Normally the same as the pump depth,
but could be much longer for sub sea ESP wells.
Gas separation Enter the percentage of free gas at the pump intake that is separated and
efficiency flows up the annulus.
Number of stages (Self-explanatory)
Pump wear factor Enter the fraction that represents degradation of pump head. Zero is no
wear, one indicates no head will be developed. This can be used to model
pumps stages that are worn due to sand or scale production or any other
factor that downgrades pump performance.
Enter correlation Select the most appropriate flow correlation for the application. Use a

matched correlation where available

Click Calculate to display the calculation screen and Calculate again to begin the
computation of the pressure traverses.
Â Note that PROSPER always calculates from the bottom up for ESP
systems since, in order to find the tubing GOR above the pump, conditions
at the pump intake where gas separation takes place must be known. The
calculation of the downward pressure traverse from the entered tubing
head pressure is therefore iterative.
Figure 9-19
Calculation
Output Screen
Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures, down hole average rate across the pump (RB/day), free gas
fraction at the pump intake and electrical parameters:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 9-20
ESP Output
Plot
If the well bore, inflow and ESP assumptions are all correct, the two pressure
traverses will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and discharge
pressures and surface voltages should coincide.
The following guidelines may be useful in diagnosing ESP wells:
Â The pump discharge pressure is the “tie” point for the system. First match
the pump discharge pressure (if available) from the top down traverse.
The pump discharge pressure depends only on the weight and frictional
resistance to the flow rate through the tubing to surface.
Next match the pump intake pressure from the top down traverse. If the
calculated and measured pressure differential (head) across the pump is
different, then the assumptions of pump wear, fluid density (water cut) and
pump frequency should be examined.
The top down traverse will now give the resulting bottom hole flowing
pressure. This should be compared with the bottom up calculation and will
indicate any discrepancy with the inflow performance module
assumptions.
9.8 QuickLook for HSP

The HSP QuickLook principle is identical to that for ESP wells, i.e. pressure
traverses are calculated from top to bottom and vice-versa. If the assumptions
regarding well and HSP conditions (e.g. pump and turbine speed, wear factor,
water cuts, wellhead pressure, IPR etc.) are correct, the two calculated traverses
will overlay.

9.8.1 Input
The HSP QuickLook is accessed from the Matching menu. Clicking QuickLook from
the Matching menu displays the following screen:
Figure 9-21
HSP Quicklook
Input
Select the required pump and turbine from the buttons at the top of the screen.
Enter well test parameters as follows:

Tubing head pressure
Liquid rate
Water Cut
Produced GOR (solution GOR plus free gas)
Static Bottom Hole Pressure (reservoir pressure)
Enter measured data as follows:

Downhole pressure data Enter gauge data if available, usually pump intake and pump
discharge pressures
Enter HSP related parameters as follows:

Pump depth (Self-explanatory)
Pump Speed (Self-explanatory)
% of Total Production For Power This defines what fraction of the total produced liquids the
Fluid power fluid represents.
Number of Pump stages (Self-explanatory)
Pump wear factor Enter the fraction that represents degradation of pump head.
Zero is no wear, one indicates no head will be developed.
Number of Turbine Stages (Self-explanatory)
Enter correlation Select the most appropriate flow correlation for the specific
application. Use a matched correlation where available
PROSPER MANUAL

Click Calculate to display the calculation screen and Calculate again to begin the
computation of the pressure traverses. Note that PROSPER always calculates from
the bottom up for HSP systems since, in order to find the tubing GOR above the
pump, conditions at the pump intake where fluid mixing takes place must be known.
The calculation of the downward pressure traverse from the entered tubing head
pressure is therefore iterative.
Figure 9-22
Calculation
Output Screen
Click Plot to display the pressure traverses and the calculated pump intake and
discharge pressures, down hole average rate across the pump (RB/day) and pump
and turbine parameters:

Figure 9-23
HSP Output
Plot
If the well bore, inflow and pump and turbine assumptions are all correct, the two
pressure traverses will overlay and the measured and calculated intake and
discharge pressures and surface voltages should coincide.
The following guidelines may be useful in diagnosing HSP wells:
Â The pump discharge pressure is the “tie” point for the system. First match
the pump discharge pressure (if available) from the top down traverse.
The pump discharge pressure depends only on the weight and frictional
resistance to the flow rate through the tubing to surface.
Next match the pump intake pressure from the top down traverse. If the
calculated and measured pressure differential (head) across the pump is
different, then the assumptions of pump wear, fluid density (water cut) and
pump speed should be examined.
The top down traverse will now give the resulting bottom hole flowing
pressure. This should be compared with the bottom up calculation and will
indicate any discrepancy with the inflow performance module
assumptions.
9.9 Vertical Pipe Parameters

This option allows the match parameters for the tubing pressure drop correlations
to be accessed. They can be reset to their un-matched values, or new values
entered directly.
PROSPER MANUAL
9.10 Surface Flow line Parameters

This option allows the match parameters for the surface piping pressure drop
correlations to be accessed. They can be reset to their un-matched values, or new
values entered directly.
9.11 Correlation Thresholds

This option allows the User to specify alternative correlations to use for tubing or
pipeline when the angle (from the vertical for tubing and from the horizontal for
pipelines) exceeds a User-specified threshold value. This option is useful for
modelling the riser for a long sub sea tieback or for a highly deviated surface
pipeline. Enter the appropriate angles and correlations. Select Yes to the question
Use Threshold Angle to enable the feature. When enabled, the calculation screens
will indicate that this option is active.
Figure 9-24
Correlation Threshold Input
Screen

10 Calculation Menu
This chapter describes all the calculation methods available in PROSPER and how
to calculate system production rates, run sensitivity analyses, generate lift curve
tables etc. The available calculation types are:
Inflow (IPR)
This option calculates the IPR, that is to say, the relationship between tubing intake
rate and the bottomhole flowing pressure (BHFP). The Inflow calculation allows to
quickly run sensitivities without the need to calculate the system solution rate. This
is especially convenient for e.g. frac program design, gravel pack design,
perforation programming.
System (Ipr+Vlp)
This option will calculate both the tubing outflow (VLP) and tubing inflow (IPR)
curves and determine the system operating rate and bottom hole flowing pressure.
It also allows to perform sensitivity analyses with a wide range of variables.
Sensitivity plots can easily be generated.
Two options are available: 3 variables (for naturally flowing wells) and 4 variables
(for artificially lifted wells NEW!!!).
Gradient (Traverse)
This option enables you to generate gradient plots. If the correlations have been
matched, the gradients will be generated using the tuned correlations.
VLP (Tubing curves)

This option enables the generation of VLP curves that can be exported for use in
various commercial reservoir simulators and Petroleum Experts' MBAL and GAP
programs.
Two options are available: 3 variables (for naturally flowing wells) and 4 variables
(for artificially lifted wells).
Choke Performance
This is a convenient choke calculator for flow rates, pressure drop or choke
settings.
Generate for GAP

Allows to automatically calculate well performance data for gas lifted or naturally
flowing wells for use in Petroleum Experts’ GAP production system network modelling
program.
Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure:

This option allows to calculate flowing bottom hole pressure from the wellhead
pressure. This method is only available when using the Pressure and Temperature
and Rough Approximation options.
When the Enthalpy Balance temperature model is being used, different

Â calculation menus are presented. The calculation menus for predicting
pressure only and the rough or improved approximation temperature
model are virtually identical. The selection of lift method and IPR model
2 - 46 Chapter 10 - Calculation Menu
also affects the available sensitivity variables and specialised calculations.
10.1 Calculation Options for Predicting Pressure Only or

Rough/Improved Approximation Temperature Cases
10.1.1 Inflow (IPR)

This calculation type enables the User to determine the IPR as the reservoir and
fluid parameters change.
To select this calculation type, choose Calculation ⏐ Inflow (IPR) from the main
menu toolbar.
Figure 10-1
Inflow (IPR) calculation
A few data on the fluid quality are required, along with the selection of the rate
range for which to run the calculation.
As far as the rate method is concerned, select one of the following:

• Automatic Linear
The program works out the AOF for various sensitivity variables entered and
for each AOF creates 20 evenly spaced rates for sand face pressures
calculations.
• Automatic Geometric
As for Automatic Linear, it works out the AOF for various sensitivity variables
entered and for each AOF creates 20 geometrically spaced rates for sand
face pressures calculations.
Â Use this option when evaluating minimum stable flow rates.
• User selected
Petroleum Experts
Chapter 10 - Calculation Menu 10-3
You can either enter a table of up to 20 rates directly, or PROSPER will

Generate them for you. Click Generate from the User Selected rate entry
screen and the following screen will be presented:
Figure 10-2
User selected rates
Generation
Enter values for the first and last rates in the table plus the number of entries
required. Depending on the selection of Linear or Geometric spacing, PROSPER
will calculate the required rate table.
Use the Try button for the preview of the entered range and Done to confirm.
Â User selected rates can be useful when using the AOF is inappropriate for
the range of sensitivity variables to be considered.
Click OK, then if a sensitivity analysis is to be performed, enter values for up to 3

sensitivity variables as on the following screen example:
Figure 10-3
IPR Sensitivity
Variables
PROSPER User Guide

The range of Inflow variables available depend on the particular IPR model entered
in System ⏐ Inflow performance.
For each of the selected variables enter the values by hand, or click Generate to
have PROSPER calculate a range of values as follows. The Generate feature is
exactly the same as the one for the Rate Method entry.
Leaving the sensitivity variable screen empty will run the calculation with the
default parameters entered in the main IPR section.
The Combinations button can be used to enter particular scenarios to calculate.

Refer to Sensitivity Combinations in the section related to System Calculation
(10.1.2) for more details.
Once set up the Inflow sensitivity variables, click OK ⏐ Calculate to calculate the
IPR pressures. Click Plot to display a screen similar to the following:
Figure 10-4
IPR Calculation Results
Â On this plot by pressing on the VARIABLES option on the menu bar, you
can get a display of all the variables that have been calculated during IPR
calculations, like skin, dP skin etc. These can be plotted as well.
Petroleum Experts
10.1.2 System (Ipr + Vlp)

This calculation type enables the User to determine the production of a well and the
flowing parameters (like BHP, ∆P, etc.) as the reservoir and fluid parameters
change, according the principles of nodal analysis.
To enter the System Calculation area select Calculation⎪System (Ipr+Vlp) from the
menu toolbar.
Figure 10-5
System Calculation Setup
The first input screen requires the Top Node Pressure and the data concerning the
fluid quality (e.g. WC and GOR) and allows to select correlations for surface and
downhole equipment as well as select a rate method.
The Top Node represents the downstream end of the system, hence it is:
Â - The manifold if surface equipment is included in the system
- The wellhead if no surface equipment is included in the system
The Solution Node represents the point at which the nodal analysis is
Â performed. Three options are available:
- Bottom Node. It is the bottomhole, that is, the deepest point in the
downhole equipment
- Top Node. See definition in the previous note
- Well Head. It is the Xmas Tree, that is, the upper point of the
downhole equipment.
According to the last two definitions, if no surface equipment is included,
PROSPER User Guide

Top Node and Well Head represent the same point.
As far as the Rate Method is concerned, refer to the previous section (10.1.1) for
details.
Â The Solution Rate reported is given by the VLP and IPR curves
intersection. These curves are interpolated between the selected
calculation rates and so the result may change according to the rate
values used.
It is important that an appropriate rates range and distribution is selected

according to each case in order to avoid significant interpolation errors.
Â An IPR is required for both Automatic rate methods. For wells having very
high AOFs (e.g. horizontal wells) the well rate is determined mainly by the
tubing size. Manual rate selection may give better results in such cases.
10.1.2.1 Left - Hand Intersection for VLP/IPR curves
Normally VLP/IPR intersections that occur when the tubing pressures are declining
(on the LHS) are considered to represent unstable flow and are usually ignored.
When Gas Coning occurs, however the GOR is changing constantly for different
rates and it is possible to have two solutions and for the LHS intersection to
represent stable flow. This option allows to consider or not the left-hand
intersection.
Figure 10-6
Left hand intersection
Petroleum Experts
10.1.2.2 Sensitivity Variables Screen

Once entered the main input data, select Continue to access the sensitivity
variables screen.
This is organized exactly in the same way as in the Inflow calculation, hence refer
to Section 10.1.1 for details on the use of this entry screen.
In IPM 5 two types of System calculation are available: 3 variables

Â and 4 variables (NEW!!!), depending on the number of sensitivity
variables the User wants to perform the analysis.
Only the sensitivity variables relevant to the chosen system will be available. For
example, if a well is gas lifted you will be given the option of gas injection rate as a
variable. This option will not be available if the well is naturally flowing.
Â Tubing diameter sensitivity is only available under Variable 3.
Figure 10-7
Diameter selection
When tubing diameter is entered as a sensitivity variable, selecting Continue

displays a screen where the User can input the range of nodes over which the
sensitivity is calculated:
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-8
Diameter Variable Range
Normally tubing diameter should not be varied in the casing below the tubing shoe.
This option is also useful for determining e.g. the effect of increasing tubing size
above a safety valve while keeping the diameter of the rest of the tubing string
diameter constant.
10.1.2.3 Generating Sensitivity Values

For the Generate feature refer to Section 10.1.1.
10.1.2.4 Sensitivity Combinations Screen

Refer to Section 10.1.1 for details on this feature.
The Combinations option allows the User to enter specific combinations of field
data (or hypothetical cases) then allow the program to calculate the unknowns. An
example of a Combinations screen is shown below:
Figure 10-9
Sensitivity Combinations
Input
Â If no liquid rates are entered, the program uses the current list of rates
(either internally calculated or User input) and calculates the solution for
the combination of sensitivity variables for each of up to 10 cases.
If liquid rates are entered in the Combinations screen, these take

precedence. The program will then find the VLP and IPR pressures for
each combination of sensitivity variables.
Note that a solution rate is not computed in this case.
Petroleum Experts
Once sensitivity values have been entered in either the Combinations or Variables
screen, click Continue to display the calculation screen. Sensitivity values
temporarily overwrite variable values that have been entered on other screens. For
example: Pressure at first node, water cut.
10.1.2.5 Calculation Screen

Click Calculate to start the system solution calculations. A calculation screen
example is shown below:
Figure 10-10
Calculation System
On the right hand side there are the results of the system calculation: solution
rates, FBHP, WHP, WHT, etc.
On the left hand side, instead, there are the calculated parameters related to VLP
and IPR. Scroll to the right to read the results.
In the Variables area it is possible to scroll the different cases or the values of the
sensitivity variables for which the calculation were performed.
Details of Solutions
To examine the solution in more detail, click the Solution Details button. Individual
solution points can be viewed by clicking on the arrow buttons located beside each
sensitivity variable. Outflow or Inflow solutions can be viewed as shown in the
following sample screen:
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-11
Calculation
System Solution
Details
In the case of wells with ESP, HSP, PCP or Jet Pump, the solution details contain
all the results related to the pump.
Plotting Results
The results can be plotted by clicking Plot. The System plot will appear as follows:
Figure 10-12
System Solution Plot
The system plot summarises all the calculations. Each VLP and IPR curve is
identified by up to 3 numbers posted beside them. The variable names and the
corresponding number labels are shown in the panel to the right of the plot. In the
above example, Curve 1,0,0 is for 4500 psig reservoir pressure, 0 % water cut and
4 STB/day/psi productivity index.
Petroleum Experts
To plot the solution rates and pressures versus the selected variables, click
Sensitivity and a sensitivity plot will be displayed. To select sensitivity variables to
plot, click Variables and make your selection on the following screen, for example:
Figure 10-13
System Sensitivity
Variables
The Sensitivity screen allows you to choose X- and Y-axis variables. Click OK to
view the Sensitivity plot. The program automatically plots the sensitivity values of
the X-axis variable. If variable Combinations have been used, the sensitivity cases
will be automatically plotted.
Figure 10-14
System Sensitivity Plot
The pressure gradient for any particular solution rate can be calculated by clicking
Sens PvD (Sensitivity Pressure vs. Depth).
Performing Gradient Calculations for a Given Solution

For each of the solutions calculated it is possible to determine the correspondent
gradient. To do so, in the System Calculation screen select Sensitivity – PvD:
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-15
Sens PvD Setup
Select the desired case by scrolling on the variables, and then Continue and
Calculate to generate the gradient. The results are displayed on the following
screen example:
Figure 10-16
Sens PvD Results
Click Plot to display the Gradient vs. TVD or Measured Depth:
Petroleum Experts
Figure 10-17
Sens PvD Plot
Click Variables on the plot screen to select which variables to plot.
Figure 10-18
Plot Variables Selection
By clicking the Extended button, a greater range of plot variables can be accessed.
Virtually any combination of computed results can be plotted against each other.
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-19
Extended Plot Variables
Return to the standard choice of plot variables by clicking the Original button.
The plots are held in memory until overwritten by a new set of calculations. Plots
can also be displayed or output by selecting Plot from the main menu. The Units
menu can be used to change the display units if required.
Special Note for ESP, HSP, PCP and Jet Pump Applications
When calculating a System solution for a pump equipped well, in the Solution Point
screen lists details of the pump solution such as pump intake pressure etc. (See
example pump solution in the screen below)
Figure 10-20
ESP Solution Point
Clicking Pump Plot on the pump solution screen displays the sensitivity solutions
plotted over the pump characteristic curves (this is available only for ESP and
Petroleum Experts
HSP). As shown by the example screen below, the effects of the sensitivity
variables on the pump operating point can be readily evaluated.
Figure 10-21
ESP Solution Plot
This plot is a powerful tool for evaluating how an ESP design can accommodate
future changes of well conditions.
Â All pump (both ESP & HSP) designs should be validated by calculating
sensitivities and ensuring that efficient operation at the design rate can be
achieved over the entire range of expected well and pump efficiency
conditions.
For pump (both ESP & HSP) equipped wells, the Sens. PvD gradient calculation
shows the pressure increase across the pump. An example gradient plot is shown
below:
Figure 10-22
ESP Sens. PvD Plot
PROSPER User Guide

10.1.3 Gradient (Traverse)

The Calculation ⏐ Gradient (traverse) feature allows the User to calculate flowing
pressure gradient curves at a specified flow rate for varying reservoir and fluid
conditions.
These curves can be compared with published pressure traverse curves or actual
well data. Pressure traverses can also computed for combinations of sensitivity
variables. The effect of changing tubing sizes, SSSV I.D. etc. can be evaluated
visually by plotting the gradient results.
To commence the Gradient calculation, click Calculation ⏐ Gradient (traverse) from

the main menu and the following screen will be displayed:
Figure 10-23
Gradient Traverse Input
Enter the required data, mostly the same as the one requested by System
calculation, plus the first and the last node for the calculation, which will determine
the section of completion for which to run the gradient calculation.
Then select Continue to access the Sensitivity Variables (or Combinations) screen.
Refer to previous sections for the description of this area.
Selecting Continue again will access the calculation screen. In this screen the User
can select the flow correlations for the downhole and the slug method:
Petroleum Experts
Figure 10-24
Gradient Traverse
Calculation
Click Calculate to compute flowing gradients for all the sensitivity cases. Once the
calculations have been completed, the results tables can be inspected by clicking
the respective variable arrows until the desired variable combination is visible.
Â Important
The Gradient calculation results report very useful parameters
concerning details on the ∆P calculation, PVT data, mass flow
rates and in the case of pipeline gradients, characteristic
parameters of slugs, etc.
A plot of the gradient results similar to that below can be displayed by then clicking
the Plot button:
Figure 10-25
Gradient Traverse
Plot
Gradients can be plotted for the well and flow line separately or combined on the
one plot. Details on the plotting features are available in Section 10.1.1.
PROSPER User Guide
10.1.3.1 Gradient (Traverse)-Modified Turner Equation
The Turner Equation is used to study the continuous removal of liquid from gas
wells.
This equation is used to determine the minimum velocity of the producing fluid
necessary to drag away the droplets of liquid. The original formulation of the
equation is the following:
Figure 10-26
Classical Turner Equation
Original Turner
1
σ 4 (ρ l − ρ g )
Equation 1 4
Vt = 20.4 1
ρg 2
σ - Surface Tension (dynes/cm)

ρl - Liquid Density (lbm/ft 3 )
ρg - Gas Density (lbm/ft 3 )
This formulation has been found to be not necessarily reliable.

The original Turner Constant was 20.4. Using the Petroleum Experts 4 mechanistic
model it has been found that 2.04 gives much more reliable results in a wide range
of examples.
This constant can be however changed by the User by selecting System⎪Solids
from the main menu, or the Options button and the Liquid Loading tab screen within
any calculation screen.
Figure 10-27
Gradient traverse
Petroleum Experts
Results of the calculation of the Turner velocity are reported in the Gradient
calculation results table, as reported in the figure above.
10.1.3.2 Erosional Velocity Calculation for Sand Laden

Fluids
When gradient traverse calculations are performed the program will estimate the
correspondent value of erosional velocity.
Erosion can be caused by the repeated impact of solid particles on tubing and
pipelines. To avoid this we attempt to estimate the velocity at which erosion will
occur.
Normal practise is to use equation of API 14 E. This can be unreliable especially for
clean production where the limiting value of C (125) can be too restrictive. In
practice, values of 1000 for C have been recorded in pipes where no erosion has
been detected.
C
Figure 10-28
Ve =
Classical
equation of
ρm
Erosional
Velocity Ve - Fluid Erosion Velocity (ft/sec)
C - Empirical constant (C-Factor)

ρ m - Mixture Density (lbm/ft3 )
A Conoco paper (An Alternative to API14E Erosional Velocity Limits for Sand
Laden Fluids) challenges API14E on the basis that it can be very conservative for
clean service and is not applicable for conditions where corrosion or sand are
present. It proposes a simple alternative approach that has been verified by a
comparison with several multi-phase flow loop tests that cover a broad range of
liquid-gas ratios and sand concentrations. Values of S for different components are
proposed in the paper
PROSPER User Guide

D ρm
Ve = S
Figure 10-29
New erosional
velocity W
calculations
S - S Factor (depends on pipe geometry)
D - Pipe Diameter (mm)
ρ m - Mixture Density (Kg/m 3)
W - Sand Production (Kg/day)
The constants C and S for the two formulations can be customised by selecting
System⎪Solids and tab button Erosional Velocity or the Options button in any
calculation screen.
PROSPER calculates the erosional velocity for solid-free fluid using the API-14E
method and the entered “C” value. If the sand production rate has been specified,
PROSPER will calculate the erosional velocity using both the API-14E and Conoco
methods and will then compare the results and will use the computed lower-value
of erosional velocity. To review the computed erosional velocity values using the
Conoco method set the value of “C” sufficiently high until the values do not change
for changing values of “C”.
After gradient calculations are performed, scroll right on the results screen to view
the erosional velocity values.
Figure 10-30
Gradient traverse
Erosional
Velocity and
C Factor
Petroleum Experts
Â In PROSPER, the C value is calculated and displayed and it is the

responsibility of the User to work out whether for this C value, erosion will
occur or not depending upon the expected operating conditions.
10.1.3.3 Maximum Grain Diameter

This calculation determines the maximum size of sand grain that can be dragged
away by the producing fluid.
This model has been internally developed by BP and is based on Smith M. “A
models for Predicting Solids Transport in Near Horizontal Multi-Phase Oil and Gas
Pipelines” - XFE report 08/02/1993.
The calculated Maximum Grain Diameter is reported in the results table at each
calculation step.
10.1.3.4 Pigging
This calculation can be used to describe the pigging characteristics of the flow in
pipelines.
Assuming 100% removal efficiency of a sphere and that all the liquid removed by
the sphere is in the form of a continuous slug, the pigged slug volume can be
estimated by integrating the difference between the liquid hold-up and the no-slip
hold-up in the pipeline. Also the time to produce the slug can be calculated from
5 ⋅ 614 ∗ VL
Tpr =
⎛ VSL ⎞
A⎜⎜1 - ⎟⎟VSG
⎝ V SL + VSG ⎠
These are the additional results reported in the Gradient Traverse results table:
• Pigged Slug Length
• Pigged Slug Volume
• Time to Produce Pigged Slug Length
• Time for Pigged Slug to reach Outlet
Pigging Efficiency can be entered by User.
10.1.3.5 Options
The parameters affecting the calculation of the maximum grain size, erosional
velocity, liquid loading (Turner velocity) and pigging, can be accessed in any
Calculation screen by means of Options button.
This screen can also be accessed from the main menu toolbar by selecting
System⎪Solids.
PROSPER User Guide

10.1.4 VLP (Tubing Curves)
An important PROSPER application is generating tubing lift curves for use in

reservoir and total system simulators.
Two options of calculation are available:
- VLP curves – 3 Variables. The lift curves can be generated for a set of 3
sensitivity variables. The option is used for naturally flowing wells.
- VLP curves – 4 Variables. The lift curves can be generated for a set of 4
sensitivity variables. The option is used for artificially lifted wells.
10.1.4.1 VLP (Tubing) Curves – 3 Variables

To generate lift curves for naturally flowing wells select Calculation ⏐ VLP (tubing
curves) ⏐ 3 Variables from the menu toolbar.
The input screen entry are similar to the ones required by System calculation (refer
to the correspondent section for reference). The values of Top Node Pressure,
Water Cut and GOR entered in this screen will be neglected if these variables will
be selected as sensitivity parameters.
Figure 10-31
VLP Calculation Setup
When User Selected rates are used, you can enter rates in terms of Liquid, Oil or
Gas. The results will be given in terms of the specified rate type, but depending on
the type of well, PROSPER will first convert the rates to equivalent oil or gas to
Petroleum Experts
calculate the VLP pressure. This feature can be used when preparing lift curves for
high GOR oil wells. Remember when using gas rates, that increasing the water cut
will also increase the liquid production rate. Extreme VLP pressures can easily
result.
Click Continue to access the Select Variables screen and set up the required
sensitivity variables.
To generate lift curves for simulator (like Eclipse) for an oil well, the VLP is
generally calculated for the following sensitivity variables:
• Variable 1: Pressure at first node
• Variable 2: Water cut
• Variable 3: Gas Oil Ratio
An example calculation variables screen for generating lift curves is shown below:
Figure 10-32
VLP Sensitivity Variables
Select the variables required by your external application and enter a list of values
for each. Click Continue to access the calculation screen, then select Calculate to
generate the lift curves. An example lift curve calculation screen is shown below:
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-33
VLP Calculation
Results
The calculated VLP results can now be exported to a number of external

application programs. Once the calculations have been completed, click Plot to
visually check the results and Export Lift Curves to access the export selection
screen.
Petroleum Experts
Currently, PROSPER supports the following export formats:
Figure 10-34
VLP Export Options
(3 Variables)
• Schlumberger - ECLIPSE .ECL

• Welldrill - SIMCO 3 .SIM
• ExxonMobil - Pegasus .MOB
• SSI – COMP4 .CP4
• FranLab – FRAGOR .FRA
• SSI – COMP3 .CP4
• LandMark - VIP .VIP
• Roxar - MORE .MOR
• Petroleum Experts – GAP/MBAL .TPD
• Shell - MORES .MRS
• FranLab - ATHOS .ATH
• BP Amoco - GCOMP .GCM
• Chevron Texaco-CHEARS .CHE
• ExxonMobil-EMPOWER .Hyd
• Franlab-SCORE .SCO
PROSPER appends the export file with a suffix corresponding to the selected file
format as shown in the table above. Depending on the export format selected, the
PROSPER User Guide
User will be prompted for a file name and additional data such as table number,
flow table I.D. etc. Refer to the simulator documentation for further details.
Â Simulators have varying requirements for VLP sensitivity variables.

If the correct variables have not been selected for calculation,
PROSPER may not be able to correctly export the VLP file. Pay
particular attention to GLR and GORs.
To model artificially lifted wells, reservoir simulators require 4

variable lift curves. Refer to the following section for details.
10.1.4.2 VLP (Tubing) Curves - 4 Variables
To model artificially lifted wells, an additional sensitivity variable is required. This

option allows calculation of four variable sensitivities (provided the total number of
sensitivity combinations is less than 10,000) and export of lift curves for gas lifted
and ESP, HSP, etc. equipped wells. Set up, calculation and export of 4 variable
tubing curves follows the same procedures as described above (Section 10.1.6.1)
for regular tubing curves.
An example of a 4 variable VLP calculation for a gas lifted well is shown on the
following screen:
Petroleum Experts
Figure 10-35
4 Variable VLP Calculation
Setup
A Note on Preparing Lift Curves

Because of the large number of calculations that must be performed, preparing lift
curves can be a time consuming process, so it is important to obtain good results at
the first attempt. Due to the extreme range of flowing conditions that must be
covered by the lift curve tables, problems with the computations are occasionally
encountered. The following discussion covers some of the points that should be
addressed when planning a lift curve calculation run.
• Finding a VLP correlation that performs well for the entire range of rates that
must be spanned by the lift curves can be difficult. Some correlations handle
slug flow (e.g. Hagedorn Brown) but fail in the mist flow regime e.g. after
injection gas breakthrough. Care must be exercised in selecting correlations to
ensure that the wells are properly represented over the most important range of
flow rates to be modelled in the simulation.
• Problems can occur for extremes of water cut and GOR. e.g. if the oil
production rate is fixed, the liquid production rate becomes very high as the
water cut approaches 100%. To maintain lift in a high water cut well, a specific
GLR is required. If injection gas is expressed in terms of GOR injected, the
required GOR approaches infinity as the water cut approaches 100%. A huge
range of GOR injected is therefore required to model the well. The use of liquid
rates and injection GLRs in oil well lift curve tables is recommended to avoid
such problems.
PROSPER User Guide

• Depending on the particular simulator used, it is not possible to pass the

variable names or units between programs. Users are reminded to ensure that
the sensitivity variables and output units used in PROSPER are consistent with
those expected by the simulator. In particular, gas units (MMscf Vs Mscf), gas
lift (GLR Vs Gas Lift Injection Rate) and rates (Oil Vs Liquid) should be checked.
• PVT correlations should only be used within the range of temperature and
pressure for which they were derived. Occasionally, combinations of tubing
curve variables require an excessive VLP pressure to pass the specified rate,
and the PVT correlation may fail. Occasionally, PROSPER may halt rather than
continuing the calculation with a fictitious result. You may have to revise the
range of variables or select a different PVT correlation in such cases. Beware of
chokes and restrictions in the equipment description that may result in
excessive calculated pressure drops. If using externally generated PVT tables,
they must span the entire calculation range. Make sure that GOR is constant
above bubble point, and the FVF is decreasing.
• Provided you enter the rates by hand, it is not necessary to enter an IPR to
calculate VLP tables. PROSPER needs the IPR to find the calculation rates if an
Automatic rate method has been selected. Automatic rate selection is not
available for 4 Variable VLP calculations.
• Oil well lift curves can now be calculated in terms of gas rates for specialised
applications. Make sure that the liquid rates that result from your choice of
GOR, water cut etc. does not result in impossible liquid rates. Be especially
careful when there are chokes and restrictions in the system.
A Note on preparing lift curves for ESP equipped wells

There are 2 options available for generating ESP lift curves:
• Tubing Curves (standard)

• Lift curves for simulators
The standard option prompts you to enter the bottom hole pressure. PROSPER
calculates from the deepest node to the pump. The pump head for the given
frequency, water cut etc. are calculated to find the pump discharge pressure.
PROSPER then determines the PVT of the oil above the pump after accounting for
possible gas separation and calculates the pressure traverse above the pump to
find the top node arrival pressure for each required production rate point.
Simulators require tables of rates and BHPs ordered by THP. The Lift curves for
simulators option allows input of Top Node pressure, water cut, operating frequency
etc. PROSPER iterates to find the pressure at the deepest node (VLP) for the given
the top node pressure. In both cases, the VLP is the bottom hole pressure for the
specified producing conditions.
Â VLP lift curves for simulators or Petroleum Experts’ applications (GAP and
MBAL) can be batch generated for groups of wells by PROSPER
from GAP. Refer to the GAP documentation for details.
Petroleum Experts
10.1.5 Choke Performance

This is a general purpose choke performance calculator. Only PVT data input is
required to calculate flow rates given the choke size and pressures, choke setting
to achieve a specified flow rate etc. To access the choke performance calculator,
click Calculation ⏐ Choke Performance and the following selection screen may be
displayed (depending on the Choke Method selected):
Figure 10-36
Choke Performance
Calculator
Calculation Options
Select your required calculation option from the following:
• Predict Mass Flow Rate
PROSPER determines the flow rate for specified choke opening and inlet
and outlet pressures
• Predict Pressure Drop
PROSPER calculates the pressure drop across a specified choke opening
for a given flow rate and inlet pressure
• Predict Choke Valve Setting
PROSPER finds the choke size for a specified rate and inlet an outlet
pressures.
Choke Method
Select a choke calculation method from the following options:
• Petroleum Experts
This is an in-house developed choke model based on Perkin’s work (SPE
206333).
• HYDRO
There are 3 distinct methods for modelling specific choke equipment.
Until performance testing is completed and documentation issued, these
choke methods should not be used.
PROSPER User Guide

• ELF
A model based on Perkin’s (SPE 206333) approach along with discharge
coefficients determined by the author (Stephane Rastoin of ELF
Aquitaine at TUALP). This is also the recommended method used to
calculate pressure drops down hole for SSSVs and restrictions. It should
be used for the majority of applications.
Enter the following data:

• GOR This value overrides the GOR entered on the PVT data
screen.
• Water Cut
• Inlet Pressure Pressure upstream of the choke
• Inlet Temperature Upstream temperature
• Outlet Pressure Downstream pressure
• Outlet Temperature Downstream temperature
• Choke setting Orifice size
Click Calculate, and PROSPER will calculate the liquid and mass flow rates Similar
screens are used to enter data for the dP and Choke Setting prediction options.
For critical flow conditions, it may take some time for the calculation to converge.
Selecting the choke model in PROSPER

Â To select the choke model to be used to model chokes, SSSVs and
Restrictions, access the Surface Equipment screen and select from
the drop-down menu Choke Method the desired model
10.1.6 Generate for GAP

This option is used to calculate well performance curves for Petroleum Experts Limited's
General Allocation Program (GAP).
PROSPER can be run from within GAP in a batch mode for generating performance
curves for groups of wells or independently of GAP by selecting this option.
PROSPER will automatically calculate solutions for gas lifted or naturally flowing
wells. If the solutions are then saved in a .OUT file, GAP can pick up the data
required to calculate performance curves at a later time. For more information,
refer to the GAP documentation.
Petroleum Experts
10.2 Calculation Menu – Rough Approximation Cases

Only
10.2.1 Bottom Hole Pressure from Wellhead Pressure

This option allows to calculate flowing bottom hole pressure from the wellhead
pressure. This method is only available when using the Rough Approximation
option.
Input data required are gas, water and oil rate information as well as wellhead
temperature and pressure.
This information can be in one of several formats (e.g. Liquid rate, WC and GOR,
etc.) and the correct format for your data can be selected at the top of the
appropriate columns. If the data type in a particular column is changed while there
is data already in that particular column, then the data will be converted to the new
type.
In the case of gas lifted wells the gas lift gas rate is required and in the case of ESP
lifted wells the pump frequency must be entered.
Figure 10-37
BHP from WHP
The table is quite large allowing to start off with up to 16000 rows of data which is
automatically expandable up to 32000 rows. The data can be scrolled with the
scrollbar at the right hand side of the screen.
Appropriate vertical lift and surface pipe correlations can be selected at the bottom
of the screen.
Selecting the import button allows you to bring in data from an outside source.
Table data can be saved to file using the export button and plots using either time
or the log of time can also be viewed and exported using the plot feature. Within the
PROSPER User Guide

plot screen data can be enabled or disabled point by point or in a block manner by
using the right-click mouse button.
Figure 10-38
BHP from WHP plot
Data can be ordered with relation to time by using the sort button. This will also
remove any blank rows between data in the table.
10.2.1.1 References
SPE PAPER 22870

Modelling of Well bore Heat Losses in Directional Wells Under Changing Injection
Conditions
K Chu and S Thakur, Amoco Production Co.
Petroleum Experts
10.3 Calculation Menu - Enthalpy Balance Temperature

Model Only
The Predicting Pressure and Temperature analysis option can be used to generate
temperature and pressure profiles in producing wells.
This rigorous thermodynamic model considers heat transfer by conduction,

radiation, forced and free convection. Heat transfer coefficients are calculated
using thermodynamic data held in a User-definable database. The temperature
prediction calculations are transient, allowing sensitivities against flowing time to be
run for both wells and pipelines. This temperature model requires considerably
more input data and computation time for either Predicting Pressure Only or the
Rough or Improved Approximation temperature model. Enthalpy Balance should
be applied only when the desired result is the temperature. The additional
computational effort cannot be justified for pressure loss calculations.
Both pressure and temperature losses across chokes and restrictions are
accounted for. A theoretical outline of the Enthalpy Balance model is given in
Appendix C.
Temperature prediction is useful for generating temperature profiles in:
• pipelines
• sub sea wells
• predicting temperature/pressure profiles to help predict wax/hydrate
deposits.
• accounting for Joule-Thompson effects
PROSPER 's Enthalpy Balance temperature model is one of the most accurate
temperature prediction methods available.
Â The Enthalpy Balance temperature calculation must commence from a

known condition. This is usually the reservoir pressure and temperature.
As a consequence, calculating from a downstream node (unknown
temperature) to an upstream node (known temperature) is not meaningful.
For injectors, calculations commence from the known wellhead pressure
and temperature.
To reflect the range of calculations possible when using the Enthalpy Balance
temperature model, the following options are available in the Calculation menu:
PROSPER User Guide

Constrained System (IPR + VLP)

PROSPER calculates the actual production conditions for a known wellhead
pressure. The sand-face conditions are taken as per the IPR.
Constrained VLP (Tubing Curves)

PROSPER calculates the flowing tubing curves for a known sand face flowing
temperature and a wellhead pressure.
UnConstrained System (IPR + VLP)

PROSPER calculates the bottomhole pressure and wellhead (or top node) pressure
and temperature for specified production rates.
UnConstrained VLP (Tubing Curves)

PROSPER calculates the surface pressure and temperature for a specified rate and
bottom hole pressure.
UnConstrained Gradient (Traverse)

Calculates the temperature and pressure profile downstream of a specified
pressure and temperature for a given rate.
Compares the pressure traverses calculated with different multiphase flow
correlations.
Match Parameters
Allows entry of match parameters for surface flow lines and well tubing.
Â The Match parameters that may be entered into an Enthalpy balance

model need to have been generated in a rough/ improved approximation
model.
10.3.1 Constrained System

This calculation is used to calculate the production rate required, given the reservoir
pressure and temperature to deliver the constrained pressure (entered by the User)
at surface.
To access this calculation type, select Calculation ⏐ Constrained System (IPR +
VLP) from the menu toolbar.
Â The input is:

• Well head/ first node pressure.
• Water Cut
• Total GOR
• Time since start of production
The output is:
• Well head temperature
Petroleum Experts
• Production Rate
• Sand-face pressure.
The calculation is an iterative one and the inlet conditions are changed till
an acceptable top node condition is achieved.
The IPR input in the System menu is used to determine the flowing bottomhole
conditions. An example Constrained System input screen is shown below:
Figure 10-39
Constrained System Input
Enter the Constrained (Top) Node Pressure, Water Cut and Time Since Production
Started. Select suitable Surface Equipment and Vertical Lift correlations.
As for all the calculation types, clicking on Continue displays the Select Variables
screen.
Once entered the sensitivity parameters ranges, select Continue to access the
Calculation Output screen:
Figure 10-40
Constrained
System
Calculation
Click Calculate to start the calculations. The results can be inspected by clicking
the Solution button as shown below.
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-41
Constrained
System Solution
Screen
To display sensitivity plots select Sensitivity, whilst to calculate the flowing gradient
for any particular solution click on Sensitivity PvD.
10.3.2 Constrained VLP

This calculation is used to calculate the tubing Curves, given the reservoir pressure
and temperature to deliver the constrained pressure (entered by the User) at
surface.
To access this calculation type, select Calculation ⏐ Constrained VLP (Tubing
Curves) from the menu toolbar.
Â The input is:

• Well head/ first node pressure.
• Bottom-hole / Entry fluid temperature
• Water cut
• Total GOR
• Rate values for calculation
The output is:
• Sand-face pressure.
The calculation is an iterative one and the inlet conditions are changed till
an acceptable top node condition is achieved.
Petroleum Experts
The IPR input in the System menu can be used to determine the flowing bottom
hole conditions or the User may enter a selection of rates. An example input screen
is shown below:
Figure 10-42
Constrained VLP Input
Select suitable VLP and surface equipment correlations, enter the water cut, the
time since production started and a range of production rates. Click Continue to
enter the Select Variables screen and then to display the calculation screen.
Figure 10-43
Constrained
VLP Calculation
Screen
Click on Plot to view a graphical representation of the calculation as shown below

PROSPER User Guide
Figure 10-44
Constrained
VLP Plot
The calculated VLP results can now be exported to a number of external

application programs. Once the calculations have been completed, click Plot to
visually check the results and Generate Lift Curve File to access the export
selection screen.
The list of format PROSPER supports is reported in the section 10.1.6.
10.3.3 Unconstrained System

This calculation is used to calculate the Pressure and Temperature at a
downstream node for a range of specified rates.
To access this calculation type select Calculation ⏐ Unconstrained System (IPR +
VLP) from the menu toolbar.
Â The input is:

• Water cut
• Total GOR
The output is:
• Well head pressure and temperature
• Sand-face pressure and temperature
The IPR input in the System menu is used to determine the flowing bottom hole
pressure. An example Unconstrained System input screen is shown below:
Petroleum Experts
Figure 10-45
Unconstrained System
Input
Select the flow correlations and the rate method and then click on Continue to enter
the sensitivity variables and then again Continue to display the calculation screen.
Click Calculate to start the calculations.
Figure 10-46
Unconstrained
System
Calculation
Screen
When calculation finishes, the results can be plotted by clicking the Plot button:
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-47
Unconstrained
System Plot
10.3.4 Unconstrained VLP (tubing curves)

This calculations type is used to calculate the downstream node Pressure and
Temperature for specified rates and upstream pressures and a given temperature.
To access the calculation select Calculation ⏐ Unconstrained VLP (tubing curves).
Â The input is:

• Water cut
• Total GOR
• Rate values for calculation
• Well bottom-hole pressure (First node for this calculation)
• Well fluid inlet temperature
The output is:
• Well head pressures
As the rates and pressures are directly entered, the IPR does not enter into the
calculation. An example Unconstrained VLP input screen is shown below:
Petroleum Experts
Figure 10-48
Unconstrained VLP Input
Select correlations for surface equipment and VLP, the calculation nodes and a
table of rates. Note that calculating temperature from top to bottom has no
meaning for the Enthalpy Balance model. Click Continue to enter your sensitivity
variables and Continue again to display the calculation screen. The pressure at
first node can be varied as a sensitivity variable.
Click Calculate to begin calculating the downstream pressure and temperature.
Figure 10-49
Unconstrained
VLP Calculation
Screen
The results of wellhead pressure vs. rate can be plotted by clicking the Plot button:
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-50
Unconstrained
VLP Plot
As the surface pressures and temperatures are calculated by PROSPER, the lift
curves cannot be readily ordered by top node pressure as required for simulators.
A data Export facility has therefore not been included for this option.
10.3.5 Unconstrained Gradient

This calculation type can be used to calculate pressure and temperature profiles
versus depth for a specified rate.
To access this calculation select Calculation ⏐ Unconstrained Gradient (traverse).
Â The input is:

• Water cut
• Total GOR
• Fluid entry pressure
• Fluid entry temperature
• Rate value for calculation
The output is:
• Pressure and temperature profile along the flow path.
The rate is directly input, and the IPR is not used in the calculations. The solution
must commence from a known upstream temperature. First node pressure and
temperature plus the sensitivity variables are input as for an Unconstrained VLP
calculation. An example of Unconstrained Gradient (traverse) input screen is
shown below:
Petroleum Experts
Figure 10-51
Unconstrained Gradient
Input
Click Continue to access the sensitivity variables input screen, then again Continue
to display the gradient calculation screen. Click Calculate to calculate pressure and
temperature traverses for all combinations of sensitivity variables. An example
gradient calculation screen is shown below:
Figure 10-52
Unconstrained
Gradient Results
The calculated heat transfer coefficients, average annulus temperature and casing
inside temperatures can be inspected by scrolling to the right in the results screen.
Click Plot to display a plot of temperature and pressure versus depth similar to that
shown below:
PROSPER User Guide

Figure 10-53
Unconstrained Gradient Plot
If time since production started has been selected as a sensitivity variable, this plot
can be used to determine how long a well will take to reach a specified well head
temperature. The effect of insulation on high heat loss sections such as risers can
also be readily investigated. Click Variables ⏐ Extended to access a wide range of
computed results. The plot of heat transfer coefficient Vs depth as shown below
can be useful in understanding heat flow in a well:
Figure 10-54
Heat Transfer Coefficient Plot
Note the high values of heat transfer coefficient in the casing and riser. Note that in
this example, the heat flow from the casing is small since the temperature
difference between the fluid and formation is minimal.
10.3.6 Correlation Comparison

This calculation type is the same as the Tubing Correlation Comparison seen in the
previous chapter with the difference that the first node pressure and temperature
are replaced by the upstream pressure and temperature, in agreement with what
described in section 10.3.5:
Petroleum Experts
Figure 10-55
Click on Continue and Calculate to perform the comparison, the Plot to view the
gradients:
Figure 10-56
10.3.7 Correlation Parameters

For the Enthalpy Balance temperature model, Calculation | Match parameters is
used only to display the correlation parameters that have been previously
determined in the Pressure Only or Rough Approximation matching procedure.
To use the multiphase flow correlation match parameters from a predicting
pressure only case, you can simply enter the parameters by hand, or pick them up
PROSPER User Guide

from the output file of a relevant Pressure Only case. The match parameters can
be applied to an Enthalpy Balance case by carrying out the following steps:
• Open the *.OUT file for a Pressure Only case that contains the required
matched correlations.
• Open the *.SIN file for your pressure and temperature prediction application
• Perform the pressure and temperature analysis
• Save a .OUT file for the pressure and temperature prediction application.
This file will now contain the matched correlations.
Petroleum Experts
11 Design Menu
This chapter is
The Design Menu enables the User to perform various artificial lift designs.
From this menu the User can access the design modules for the following artificial lift
technologies:
• Gas Lift
• Electrical Submersible Pump
• Hydraulic Pump
• Progressive Cavity Pump
• Coiled Tubing GasLift
• Jet Pump
The design menu is active only if an artificial lift method has been selected
Â in the main Options screen.
The design option will correspond to the artificial lift method selection in
the main Option screen.
Artificial lift design is not enabled when the Enthalpy Balance temperature
model is in use.
From the Design menu the Database containing all the information about gas lift
valves, ESP pumps, motors, cables, etc. is accessible. A dedicated section is
reported at the end of the chapter.
In the following sections each of the design options are illustrated.
11.1 Gas Lift Design

The gas lift design can be used to design and optimise the design of gas lifted wells.
The program will determine the spacing and size of unloading valves and calculate
the valve test rack setting pressures.
Designs can also be performed for existing wells having mandrels installed at fixed
depths.
Design performance can be evaluated using the Gas Lift QuickLook (as seen in
Chapter 9) or calculating system sensitivities.
Menu Options
If gas lift was selected as a lift method in the Options menu the following additional
options will be available in the Design⎪Gaslift menu:
• New Well
2 -59 Chapter 11 - Design Menu
• Existing Mandrels
• Gas Lift Adjustments
The gas lift design section of the program can be used to determine the optimum gas
lift equipment for a given well. PROSPER calculates the maximum production rate
possible, the corresponding optimum gas lift rate, the valve spacing and size to
unload the well and the test rack setting pressure for each valve for surface
calibration.
Designs can also be prepared for wells having mandrels already set at fixed depths.
Before the User can proceed ahead with artificial lift design, PVT, downhole
equipment and IPR information must be input.
11.1.1 New Well

Selecting Design⎪Gas Lift⎪New well from the Design menu will display the Gas Lift
Design input screen:
Figure 11-1
Gas Lift Design (new well)
In this screen it is possible to enter the input data for the gas lift design task.
The input data screen is divided into several areas. The Input parameters panel is
used to enter the design operating conditions. The other panels allow the User to
enter the design options for a given application.
11.1.1.1 Setting Up the Design Problem

Setting the artificial lift design problems is defining the various parameters in Figure
11-1. These are described below:
Design Rate Method

Chapter 11 - Design Menu 3 - 59
• Entered By User
Use this option when designing for a given production rate and gas lift gas
injection rate or when modelling the performance of an existing installation. If
Check Conformance with IPR is selected, the program will modify the rate and
the gas injection rate, if necessary, to honour the IPR.
If a maximum production calculation has been previously done, the lift gas and
design production rates can be User Entered. The design rate can be entered
either in terms of liquid or oil production only. The design lift gas injection is
entered as the Maximum gas available.
• Calculated from Maximum production
PROSPER will find the maximum possible oil production rate by determining both
the optimum gas injection rate and depth. This is achieved by calculating the oil
production for a given GLR injected and increasing the GLR until the optimum is
found.
• Calculated from Maximum revenue
Using User-entered economic parameters for oil and sales gas revenue,
produced water processing and lift gas cost, the program will find the gas lift
design that maximises total revenue (oil and gas revenue less water and
injection gas processing costs). The same search procedure as for Maximum
production is carried out using the cost function in place of the oil production
rate.
Â For both Maximum production and Maximum revenue design methods, a

maximum liquid rate is required to be input. This allows the User to honour
production constraints imposed by surface facilities or off take targets.
Input Parameters
Having set up the calculation options, enter values for the following variables on the
Input Parameters panel:
Maximum gas available

• Set to the maximum gas available at normal operating pressure for
maximum rate or revenue methods.
• For Entered by User designs, set to the actual injection for the design
production rate.
Maximum gas during unloading

• Enter the maximum gas available at the unloading pressure for
unloading the shallowest valve.
Flowing top node pressure

• If surface equipment has been entered, this is the manifold pressure
• Otherwise, enter the flowing wellhead pressure.
PROSPER MANUAL
Unloading top node pressure

• Enter a lower unloading pressure if e.g. the separator is bypassed
during unloading
• Otherwise leave set the same as flowing top node pressure.
Operating injection pressure

• Available gas injection system pressure available at the casing head.
This is not the final operating injection pressure.
• If the Safety equipment option has been selected, pressure losses
along surface pipes are computed also.
Kick off injection pressure

• Leave set to normal injection system pressure unless an auxiliary
source of high pressure kicks off gas is available.
• This pressure is used to space the first unloading valve. If a sufficiently
high pressure is entered, then no unloading valves will be needed.
Desired dP across valve

• User selected design pressure loss across valve orifice to ensure well
and gas injection system pressure stability. Usually in the order of 100-
200 psi.
Maximum Depth of Injection

• Constrains the maximum injection depth to be shallower than the
production packer.
Water cut
• Design producing water cut.
Minimum Spacing
• Sets the minimum spacing between valves. Use 200 - 400 ft normally.
Static gradient of load fluid

• Density of fluid to be balanced by casing pressure during unloading.
Minimum transfer dP
• Only active when Ignoring IPR for Unloading has been selected. If
set to zero, unloading valve trims will be sized to inject sufficient gas to
lower the unloading tubing pressure to the transfer pressure at the
valve depth.
• Increasing the value of Minimum transfer dP will lower the unloading
GLR injected and reduce trim sizes.
Referring to the sketch (Figure 11.2) below, the transfer pressure is:
(Pmin) = Ppd - (Ppd - Pid) * % minimum transfer dP /100

Increasing the injection GLR shifts the tubing gradient during unloading closer
to the objective gradient line (i.e. to the left). The unloading valve trim is sized
for the GLR corresponding to the required transfer pressure. Values of 5 to
25% are commonly used.
Figure 11-2
Minimum Transfer dP
Â Unloading valve trim sizing depends on whether or not the IPR is used
to determine well flow rates while unloading. Existing Users should
review this section carefully.
Maximum port size

• Depends on valve series selected. PROSPER will select multiple orifice
valves for high gas injection rates if the design injection cannot be
passed by one valve of Maximum port size.
Safety For Closure Of Last Unloading Valve

• Extra dP to ensure that the last unloading valve before the orifice is
closed
Valve Type
• Casing sensitive valves
o Enter the minimum casing pressure drop to close valves.
• Tubing sensitive valves
o Enter the percentage difference in Pcasing - Pwh to close valves.
• Proportional response valves
PROSPER MANUAL
o PROSPER determines the closing pressure as part of the design

calculations.
Valve Settings (Casing pressure operated valves only)

For casing pressure operated valves, there are 3 options for setting valve dome
pressures:
• Pvc = Gas Pressure
PROSPER in this case sets valve dome pressures to balance the casing
pressure at depth. Unloading valves will close when the casing pressure
drops below this value. A small value of Casing Pressure to Close Valves will
ensure that the unloading valves will remain shut.
This design method ensures maximum injection depth and hence maximises
production rates.
• All Valves Pvo = Gas Pressure

Dome pressures are set so that valves open with the design casing pressure
at depth. The casing pressure must be reduced by at least R(Pvo - Pt) to close
valves for this option. PROSPER designs using the maximum of dP to close
valves or the calculated closing pressure drop. This method reduces the
available injection pressure and will result in lower production rates.
Â This is the recommended design setting when designing new wells.
• First Valve Pvo = Gas Pressure

The first valve dome pressure is set to open on the design casing pressure at
depth. Subsequent valves are set to close on design casing pressure. This
method gives additional safety for the opening of the first unloading valve without
sacrificing available pressure for the deeper unloading valves.
• Pmin - Pmax
Enter fraction of TEF
Injection Point
Before the gas lift design is performed, the User can decide if the operating valve is
a gas lift valve or an orifice.
Dome Pressure Correction above 1200 psi

There are two equations for dome pressure temperature correction for dome
pressures above 1200 psi.
• No
PROSPER will use the standard API temperature correction method for all
pressures. This method is known to be inaccurate at high pressures. The
option is provided for convenience in comparing results from hand
calculations etc.

• Yes
The API method is used below 1200 psi, and an improved algorithm is used above
1200 psi. This is the default and recommended option.
Check Rate Conformance with IPR

When selected, PROSPER will re-calculate the system solution rate at each step in
the design process to ensure that the design rate can be met. This prevents for
example, a design being done for an unrealistic Enter by User rate.
Â For speed in comparing designs, this option can be set to No. However,
the User must be aware that the design rate may not be able to be met by
the well.
Vertical Lift Correlation

Select the most appropriate correlation for your application. Matched VLP
correlations should be used when available.
Surface Pipe Correlation

Select the most appropriate correlation for your application. Surface pipes (when
entered in surface equipment) form part of the gas lift system in PROSPER and are
accounted for when calculating unloading pressures and flowing pressure losses.
This can be important for sub-sea systems where the flow line head can be
significant.
Using IPR for Unloading

• Yes
This is the recommended PROSPER unloading valve trim sizing method.
Unloading valves are sized to achieve a minimum flowing gradient above the
valve assuming that the load fluid is being produced. The IPR is used to
calculate the well production rates during unloading. Minimum transfer dP (as
explained under inputs below and Figure 11-2) is ignored for this option.
• No
This is the standard hand-calculation method. Unloading valve trims are
sized to achieve the GLR required to lower the tubing pressure to the transfer
pressure. The GLR is based on the full design production rate - the actual
production rate during unloading is not calculated. This results in the
selection of larger valve trims. Minimum transfer dP is used to increase the
transfer pressure, thereby reducing the unloading gas requirement and valve
trim size.
Orifice Sizing On
Two options are available:
• Calculated dP at Orifice
• Min dP Across Orifice
PROSPER MANUAL
11.1.1.2 Gas Lift Valve Selection

Once the design problem has been set, the next stage is to tell PROSPER the kind of
valves that will be picked up from database for design.
On the right-hand side of the input Gas Lift Design input screen there is a navigator
window that allows selecting the type of valves to use in the design from an internal
database.
Â Please refer to the end of this chapter for an illustration of how to

access and edit the database for the gas lift valves
11.1.1.3 Performing the Design (New Well)

Once the input data has been defined and the valves type selected, click Continue to
access the Gas Lift design screen. The following example is for casing sensitive
valves:
Figure 11-3
Gas Lift Design (New Well)
Calculation
Â A screen similar to that above will be displayed if design for Maximum

Rate or Maximum Revenue has been selected.
If the design rate is Entered by User, the upper (Rate calculation) part
of the screen is not displayed.

Displaying the Well Performance Curves / Finding Design Rate (New Well)
The first step is to find the design production rate.
• Click Get Rate. PROSPER will calculate the Gas Lift Performance
Curve and determine the optimum Gas Lift injection rate and maximum
oil production rate.
Â The Get Rate process calculates oil production as a function of gas

injected.
When the calculations have finished, the results can be displayed in the form of a
well performance curve by clicking Plot. A graph similar to the following will appear:
Figure 11-4
Well
Performance
Curve
The target design rate and GLR injected can be read off the performance curve plot.
The design rate is:
• The maximum oil production shown in the Performance curve plot, provided
that the available gas injection and liquid production rate limits have not been
exceeded.
• In case the maximum gas available is exceeded by the highest oil rate on the
plot, the oil rate corresponding to maximum available gas is taken as design
rate.
• PROSPER will design for the maximum oil production rate entered in the main
input screen, if it exceeds the rate calculated from the performance curve.
Â The performance curves can span several flow regimes. Discontinuities

in some flow correlations may cause occasional curve fitting problems.
In such cases, a correlation such as Hagedorn Brown may give better
results.
Calculating Valve Spacing
PROSPER MANUAL
To perform the valve spacing, click Design.
• The program will then determine the depth of the operating valve and the
spacing for the unloading valves. Depending on the design settings, this will
usually take more than one pass.
• On the first pass, the injection and unloading valve depths are determined
assuming no casing pressure drop to close valves.
• Having determined the number of valves to use, the operating valve depth is
revised to reflect the new operating casing pressure.
• The spacing procedure is repeated using the revised operating casing
pressure until the number of unloading valves and their setting depths no
longer change.
Â When Check Rate Conformance with IPR is set to Yes, PROSPER re-
calculates the solution rate and reduces the design rate if necessary.
The final design production and Gas Lift injection rates are displayed on
the design gradient plot.
Displaying the Position of the Unloading Valves

To display the position of the unloading valves and the final design condition, click
Plot. A plot similar to the following will be displayed:
Figure 11-5
Gradient with
Valve Depths
The plot shows the tubing and casing pressure gradients for the design rate plus the
position of the operating and unloading valves. The unloading fluid gradients are
plotted also. The design data box lists the Actual production and injection rates
together with the operating surface casing pressure.

Calculating the Valve Test Rack Setting Pressures

To display the valve details click Results and the table with the results will be
displayed.
Figure 11-6
Valve Design
Results
Click on Calculate to calculate the Dome Pressure and the TestRack Opening
Pressure (valve setting pressure at 60°C).
Â The valve depths, tubing pressure, unloading gas injection rate and trim
sizes are shown in the left screen panel.
Â Valve types are identified as Valve for unloading valves or Orifice for the
last mandrel if the injection point is selected as orifice. No opening or
dome pressure calculations are made for the orifice.
The design parameters such as valve depth, opening and closing pressures, orifice
size etc. are displayed in the table. Use the scroll thumb below the table to scroll
right to see items e.g. R-value, not visible in the display window.
Â Once a design has been completed, its performance should be checked

over the range of expected well conditions. Transfer the gas lift design
and valve setting details into Equipment ⏐ Gas Lift, then use Calculation ⏐
System to compute sensitivities. Alternatively, Matching ⏐ Quicklook can
be used to evaluate a design.
PROSPER MANUAL
11.1.2 Existing Mandrels Design

This option enables the User to design gas lifted artificial lift systems for existing
installations.
To perform the fixed mandrel depth design, click Design ⏐ Gas lift design | Existing
mandrels. The following input screen will be displayed:
Figure 11-7
Fixed Mandrel Depth
Design
This screen is similar to the Gas lift design (New well) screen, except that the
variables relating to spacing the valves have been removed.
11.1.2.1 Setting Up the Design Problem

Setting the artificial lift design problems is defining the various fields in the figure
above reported.
Please refer to the previous section for the description of the entry fields.
Â
For this design type options for the choice of the first valve can be selected:
First Valve Choice

• Completion Fluid to Surface
Unloading valves will be placed assuming that completion fluid fills up the entire
well and thus must be unloaded from the entire well.
Â This is the most conservative unloading requirement and is the default

option.
• Completion Fluid Level Calculated

PROSPER estimates the standing liquid level from the reservoir pressure and
static pressure gradient. Any mandrels that are above this depth will be set with
“Dummy valves”.
Â This approach can save valves for low pressure reservoirs. The User
must be certain that work over fluids can leak off to balance the
reservoir pressure
• Minimum Squeeze PI Method (ELF)

This method can be used when the well productivity is sufficient to ensure that
completion fluids can be squeezed into the formation during unloading. An
unloading tubing gradient is calculated by taking the static reservoir pressure
and increasing the injected GLR, until the gradient arrives at the design top
node pressure. Unloading valves are spaced by comparing this tubing gradient
with the available casing pressure at depth.
Â This method can be used when the well productivity is sufficient to

ensure that completion fluids can be squeezed into the formation
during unloading.
11.1.2.2 Defining the Depths of Existing Mandrels

After setting up the input for the design problems, next, click Mandrels and enter the
measured depths of the existing gas lift mandrels as in the example shown below.
Â Enter the depth of all mandrels in the well, including those fitted with
dummy valves.
PROSPER will select the best depths for the operating and unloading valves
from this list.
When more mandrels are available than needed for the current design,
PROSPER will automatically set dummies at the intermediate depths.
The valve type initially entered is unimportant.
PROSPER will overwrite the valve type when it performs the design.
This table is effectively a list of the potential valve depths and can be used to
prepare designs for new wells where equipment limitations determine the available
mandrel depths.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 11-8
Fixed Mandrel Depth
Details
If entries are made in the Casing Pressure drop or Max. Gas Injected fields
Â on the mandrel depth screen shown in the figure above, these values will
overwrite the values entered on the main design screen.
Leave these fields blank to design using the same values of pressure drop
or gas injection for each unloading valve.
Â The mandrel depths can be picked up from either Matching ⏐ QuickLook or

Equipment ⏐ Gas Lift using the Transfer button, or entered by hand. The
usual PROSPER editing facilities are available for manipulating the table
entries.
11.1.2.3 Gas Lift Valve Selection

Having entered the mandrel depths, select a valve series using the navigator window
on the right, as for the Gas Lift Design (New well) case. This will define the set / type
of valves that will be used for design.

11.1.2.4 Performing the Design (Existing Mandrels)

Click Continue to access the gas lift design calculation screen.
If a calculated rate design method has been selected, a screen similar to the
following will be displayed:
Figure 11-9
Fixed Mandrel Depth
Design
Displaying the Well Performance Curves / Finding Design Rate (Existing)

Click Get Rate, and the program will calculate the Gas Lift Performance Curve and
determine the optimum gas injection rate and production rate for the well given the
available injection gas rate and pressure limits.
Performing the Design

To run the design, click on Design.
• The design rate calculation begins by selecting a GLR Injected and a low
production rate.
• A pressure traverse is calculated from the THP downwards using the gas
lifted GLR until the casing pressure equals the tubing pressure less the
Desired dP across valves.
• A check is then made to find the next shallowest mandrel. The traverse is
calculated from the next shallowest injection mandrel depth down to the sand
face using the non-Gas Lifted fluid gradient.
• The IPR and VLP pressures are compared.
• The rate is increased and the calculation repeated until an intersection with
the IPR (rate solution) is found.
• The injection GLR is increased until the optimum production rate is found.
PROSPER MANUAL
• This procedure ensures that the available mandrel depths are honoured at
every calculation step.
Once the calculations have stopped, click Plot to make a plot of the production rate
Vs gas injected. It is similar to that of a new well design.
Calculating Mandrels with Valves / Displaying their Position

The design is performed for the target rate by clicking Design. Once the calculation
has finished, the design can be checked graphically by clicking the Plot button to
display a plot similar to the following:
Figure 11-10
Gas Lift Design
Plot
The Design proceeds as follows:

• The annulus pressure gradient plot begins at the design casing pressure and
traverses down to the first valve.
• It is then shifted back as the casing pressure is lowered to close the unloading
valve. The annulus traverse is recalculated from surface with the reduced
pressure and continues down to the next valve and so on until the operating
valve depth is reached.
• PROSPER will optionally check the design rate for conformance with the IPR
and reduce the design rate if necessary.
• The design gradient plot shows the Actual design production and Gas Lift
injection rates together with the injection pressure at surface while injecting at
the orifice.

Calculating the Valve Test Rack Setting Pressures (Existing)

To display the valve setting calculations, click Results from the Design screen. Click
Calculate, and PROSPER will determine the dome pressures and test rack setting
pressure for the selected valves as in the following example:
Figure 11-11
Gas Lift Valve
Calculations
Click Calculate to determine the Dome and the TestRack Opening pressure will be
updated for the new valve series.
• To access parameters such as the transfer pressure and port size, click on
the scroll arrow at the bottom of the Input parameters panel.
Â To perform sensitivity calculations for the current design, the valve depths
must be transferred to Equipment ⏐ Gas Lift before making calculations.
Based on flowing tubing pressures PROSPER determines the injection
point during production.
11.1.2.5 Valve Spacing

Valve spacing is not affected by the choice of unloading method, but the trim size
selection depends on whether the well IPR is used for calculating the unloading rate
or not.
The following discussion refers to casing sensitive valves.
• For the design rate and GLR injected, a pressure traverse is calculated from
the top node (including the flow line, if present) downwards using the gas
lifted flowing gradient.
• The injection depth is the depth at which the flowing tubing pressure equals
the casing pressure gradient less the design dP loss across the orifice or the
Maximum Injection Depth (packer depth), whichever is the shallower. This
PROSPER MANUAL
step establishes the flowing tubing pressure gradient to be used for valve
spacing.
• The shallowest unloading valve is placed at the depth that balances the tubing
load fluid pressure with the casing pressure (less a 50 psi safety margin) at
that depth.
• Further unloading valves are placed by traversing down between the load fluid
pressure gradient and gas lifted tubing pressure gradient (calculated for the
design gas lifted production rate) lines.
• Valves are placed ever deeper until the inter-valve spacing equals the pre-set
minimum, or the maximum injection depth has been reached.
• Once the first pass design is complete, PROSPER re-calculates the flowing
gradient tubing using the current operating valve depth. For casing sensitive
valves, the valve depths are re-calculated to allow for the casing pressure
drop to close valves. The process is repeated until the valve depths no longer
change.
When Check Rate Conformance with IPR is set to Yes, the solution rate is checked
to ensure that it can be achieved. PROSPER reduces the design rate if necessary and
repeats the spacing exercise.
11.1.2.6 A Note on Designing with Tubing Sensitive

Valves
Tubing sensitive valves operate with a constant casing pressure and rely on
increasing tubing pressure as the well unloads to close the unloading valve and
transfer injection to lower valves.
• To prepare a design for tubing sensitive valves, the required input is the same as for Casing
Sensitive valves except that instead of entering the casing pressure drop to close valves, the
percentage Pcasing - Pwh to close valves is r
•
11.1.2.7 Spacing Procedure for Tubing Sensitive Valves

The injection point is found as for casing sensitive valves by finding the intersection
of the minimum tubing gradient line and the casing pressure gradient (less a 50 psi
safety margin).
The first unloading valve is spaced as for the casing sensitive case.
Intermediate unloading valves are spaced by traversing down using the load fluid
gradient from the transfer pressure to intersect the casing pressure gradient for the
operating injection pressure. The transfer pressure (tubing pressure at which the
unloading valve closes) is calculated using the value of % Pcasing -Pwh as follows:
• The surface pressure corresponding to the specified % difference between the
operating tubing and casing pressures is calculated.
• A straight line is extended from this point to intersect the tubing pressure at the
injection point. The valve transfer pressure is defined at any depth by this line.

• A small value of % difference results in transfer pressures close to the flowing

tubing gradient. While this results in a design with few unloading valves, any
small increase in flowing tubing pressure may cause unloading valves to re-open.
• A larger value of % Pcasing -Pwh will increase the transfer pressure further away
from the flowing tubing gradient. This provides a greater safety margin against
multi-point injection, but requires the unloading valves to be spaced more closely.
Selecting transfer pressures using only the % Pcasing - Pwh straight line can result
in shallow valves having a too conservative transfer pressure and the deeper valves
may transfer too close to the tubing gradient line. PROSPER adjusts the design
transfer pressures so that valves are spaced efficiently while at the same time
ensuring a good safety margin against multipoint injection.
Figure 11-12
Valve Spacing - Tubing
Sensitive Valves
Â Having performed a design, it is recommended that the Matching ⏐

Quicklook and Design ⏐ Gas Lift Diagnostic sections be used to check
your design and examine the effect of varying design and producing
conditions.
11.1.2.8 A Note on Proportional Valves

Merla proportional valves are a hybrid of tubing- and casing- sensitive
characteristics. A design procedure and valve characteristics for the most common
proportional valves is currently under field testing.
PROSPER MANUAL
11.1.3 Gas Lift Adjustments

The existing Gaslift Design sections allow the User to select and size gas lift
equipment for specified design conditions. Gaslift Adjustments provides additional
calculations for testing gas lift designs under operating conditions. Surface casing
pressures when re-starting production are presented in addition to input parameters
needed for setting up automatic well controllers.
To set up a Gaslift Adjustments calculation, enter the following items:
Figure 11-13
Gas Lift Adjustments
These are the required input data:

- Downstream Pressure Constraint
Surface pressure the well must flow against
- Kick off Casing Head Pressure
Absolute maximum available casing injection pressure
- Lift Gas Network Normal Pressure
Normal operating pressure of injection gas system
- Safety Margin For Lift Gas Control
Control pressure drop across gas injection choke
- Maximum CHP Under Normal Operation
Injection pressure available downstream of control choke. Difference of network
and control pressures.
- Min CP decrease to Close Last Unloading Valve
Specified pressure drop to close deepest unloading valve
- Lift Gas Temperature
Temperature of injected gas at the casing head
- Target Liquid Production Rate
Design production rate for Gaslift adjustments calculations.
- Water Cut
Design water cut for Gaslift adjustments calculations

- Production (Total) GOR

Solution and free gas production (does not include injection gas)
- Vertical Flow Correlation
Select appropriate correlation. Matched correlations should be used where
available.
- Dome Pressure Correction (above 1200 psig)
When Yes is selected, an improved dome pressure correction is used. The API
temperature correction is always used below 1200 psi.
Once the input data entry is complete, the User has to make sure that the
correspondent valves are transferred. Select Valves and then Transfer to transfer the
valve info from Gas Lift Design or from QuickLook:
Figure 11-14
Transferring valves from
quick look
Figure 11-15
Valves from QuickLook
Once the gaslift equipment details are entered the flowing gradient or static gradient
can be estimated:
PROSPER MANUAL
Flowing
Calculations are made for flowing conditions at the User-entered target production
rate. PROSPER calculates well performance curves for gas injection at each mandrel
depth. Production rates and pressures at surface and mandrel depth are
determined. Annulus volume and bottoms up times are also calculated. The flowing
gradient for the operating condition can be plotted with opening and closing
pressures for each unloading valve displayed.
Figure 11-16
Flowing calculations
Figure 11-17
Static
Calculations are made for shut-in conditions. The static tubing gradient is
determined using the liquid density calculated for the producing water cut. When the
reservoir pressure cannot support a full liquid column, a gas gradient is used back to
surface.

Figure 11-18
11.2 Electrical Submersible Pump Design

The Design ⏐ Electrical Submersible Pump section allows the User to design an ESP
installation.
The design is performed in two steps:

1. Determine the required pump head to achieve a specified production rate
2. Select a suitable combination of pump, motor and cable for the application.
ESP data entered in the System ⏐ Electrical Submersible Pumps input menu is not
utilised by the ESP design section. The design results will overwrite this section.
In the main ESP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 11-19
ESP Design Screen Input
The parameters are self-explanatory, except for the four parameters:

• Gas Separator Efficiency
It represents the efficiency of separation of gas in case there is free
gas and a downhole separator is installed
• Motor Power Safety Margin
This factor adds a safety margin to the power strictly necessary
to lift the design rate. For example, if the safety margin is 10%,
the pump power requirement will be increased of 10%
• Pump Wear Factor
This factor takes in account of the deterioration of the pump
performance. A wear factor of 0.1 will scale the original head as
per performance curve of 10%
•Gas DeRating Model
It allows selecting a User DeRating model. The DeRating model
can be implemented by means of custom dlls.
Designing an ESP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the second part is
where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
The following description assumes that input of the well details and PVT data have
already been correctly completed and that where applicable, pressure drop
correlations have been matched to field data.

11.2.1 ESP Calculate

This section determines the head required to be supplied by the pump to achieve a
specified production rate.
From the main ESP Design screen select Calculate:
Figure 11-20
ESP Pump Duty
Calculation
Clicking on Calculate the program calculates the pump duty necessary to achieve
the design production rate. PROSPER will display the pump duty solution, as shown
in the figure above.
• PROSPER uses the IPR from System ⏐ Inflow Performance to calculate the
flowing pressure at the sand face and the specified VLP correlation to find the
pump intake pressure for the design production rate.
• The program then works down from the specified top node pressure to arrive
at the required pump discharge pressure.
• The difference between the intake and discharge pressures represents the
required pump head.
• PROSPER compresses the liquid and gas as the pressure increases across
the pump, so the volumetric rate will be less at the discharge than at the pump
inlet.
• The mass flow rate and the required head are used to determine the pump
fluid power requirement.
Emulsions
Â If Emulsions have been selected on the Options screen, viscosity
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no ESP
viscosity corrections will be applied. If an Emulsion PVT model has been
built in the PVT section, then the emulsion viscosity can be optionally used
in the ESP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
emulsion behaviour in oilfield systems analysis is poorly understood. The
PROSPER MANUAL
emulsion PVT model provides the means to apply empirical corrections

and should be used with caution.
Â If an inlet gas separator is to be used, enter the separator efficiency before

carrying out the calculation. The program allows the percentage of free
gas set by the separator efficiency to be produced up the annulus, and the
remainder to be compressed through the pump. Hence, the PVT
properties of the well fluids can be different below and above the pump.
11.2.1.1 Checking Suitability of Separator Efficiency
Â To check that the separator efficiency chosen in the input is acceptable for
the design case, the Dunbar Criteria may be used as showed below.
Click Sensitivity to display the intake pressure and intake GLR plotted over a range
of gas separator efficiency curves. Check that the design operating point lies above
the empirical limit represented by the Dunbar Factor line.
Figure 11-21
ESP GLR Sensitivity
11.2.2 ESP Design (Pump, Motor and Cable Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the ESP
design screen.
The next step is to select the pump, motor and cable capable to provide the
calculated duty.
To do so, select Design: the program will display a pump design screen similar to
that shown below:

Figure 11-22
ESP Design Selection
In the Select drop-down boxes, PROSPER lists the equipment in its database that is
capable of meeting the design requirements.
Select Pump
PROSPER presents pumps that can meet the following criteria:
• Inlet rate within range

• Discharge rate within range
• Head developed at design well rate is near pump's maximum efficiency point
• Pump O.D. < User input maximum.
The User must select a pump from those listed.
Select Motor
Once a pump has been selected, the pump efficiency is known; the motor power
requirement can now be calculated.
Proceed to the motor drop-down box and select a motor from those listed.
PROSPER lists pumps and motors on the basis of diameter and

Â performance characteristics.
It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the pump selected is

coherent with the information provided by the manufacturer
It is the User's responsibility to ensure that the motor selected is

physically compatible with the pump and that the most economical
combination of operating voltage and current is chosen.
Select Cable
Once the motor power and voltage option have been determined, a suitable cable
must be selected.
PROSPER displays those cables capable of passing the required current.
PROSPER MANUAL
11.2.2.1 Checking the Pump Design

Click Plot to display the design operating point on the pump performance curve as
shown below:
Figure 11-23
ESP Design
Plot
Â Normally, the first pass design will have an operating point fairly close to
the selected pump's optimum efficiency. However, as well conditions
change with time, this may not be the best design for the life of the
installation
• Different combinations of pump and motor can be quickly experimented with

in the ESP design section until an optimum design is obtained.
• A report can be generated which gives details of the pump selection and
design conditions
• The robustness of the first pass design must then be checked over the range
of expected well operating conditions by running sensitivities in the
Calculation menu
• PROSPER allows sensitivities to be run on both well performance and pump
parameters such as pump setting depth and operating frequency.
The ESP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run
life.
Viscosity corrections, where applicable, will be considered in choice of available

pumps and the number of stages required.

11.3 Hydraulic Pump Design

The Design ⏐ Hydraulic Pump section allows the User to design a HSP installation.

(reservoir fluid + power fluid)
2. Select a suitable combination of pump and turbine for the application
HSP data entered in System⎪Hydraulic Submersible Pumps is not utilised by the

HSP design section and will be overwritten by the design.
In the main HSP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
Figure 11-24
HSP Design Screen Input
The parameters are self-explanatory, except for the three parameters:

• % Power Fluid of Reservoir Fluid
This factor represents the ratio (in %) between the power fluid
and the produced reservoir fluid. A value of 100% means that
the rate of power fluid is equal to the rate of produced reservoir
fluid
• Pump Wear Factor
This factor takes in account of the deterioration of the pump
performance. A wear factor of 0.1 will scale the original head as
per performance curve of 10%
• Gas DeRating Model
PROSPER MANUAL
It allows selecting a User DeRating model. The DeRating model

can be implemented by means of custom dlls.
The design of an HSP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
The following description assumes that input of the well details and PVT data have
11.3.1 HSP Calculate

From the main HSP Design screen select Calculate:
Figure 11-25
HSP Pump Duty
Calculation
required pump head.
inlet.

• The mass flow rate and the required head are used to determine the pump
fluid power requirement.
For certain configurations the produced and power fluids can be commingled above
the pump. Hence, the PVT properties of the well fluids can be different below and
Emulsions
corrections are applied to pump capacity and head. Otherwise, no HSP
in the HSP calculations and elsewhere. As mentioned in the PVT section,
above the pump.
11.3.2 HSP Design (Pump and Turbine Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the ESP
design screen.
calculated duty.
that shown below:
Figure 11-26
HSP Design Selection
PROSPER MANUAL
Select Pump
PROSPER presents pumps that can meet the following criteria:
• Pump Speed within range

• Discharge rate within range
• Head developed at design well rate is near pump's maximum efficiency point
• Pump and O.D. < User input maximum
The User must select a pump from those listed.
Select Turbine
Once a pump has been selected, the pump efficiency is known, so the turbine power
requirement can now be calculated.
Proceed to the turbine drop down box and select a turbine from those listed.




11.3.2.1 Checking the Pump/Turbine Design

Click Pump and Turbine Plot to display the design operating point on the pump
performance curve as shown below:
Figure 11-27
HSP Performance
curve
• Normally, the first pass design will have an operating point fairly close to the
selected pump's optimum efficiency. However, as well conditions change with
time, this may not be the best design for the life of the installation.
• Different combinations of pump and turbine can be quickly experimented with
in the HSP design section until an optimum design is obtained.
• A report can be generated which gives details of the pump selection and
design conditions.
Important Note
Â The robustness of the first pass design must then be checked over the
range of expected well operating conditions by running sensitivities in the
System Calculation menu.
To access the System Calculation, select the System button within

the HSP design section.
This is a specialized form of the calculation that ensures that the
power generated by the turbine is equal to the power required by the
pump. This is achieved by varying the power fluid injected until this
requirement is met. The calculation is therefore somewhat slower
than the normal system calculation.
The HSP system design process is completed by iterating between the Calculation
and Design sections, until the final design is optimised over the projected pump run
life.
Viscosity corrections, where applicable, will be considered in choice of available

pumps and the number of stages required.
PROSPER MANUAL
11.4 Progressive Cavity Pump Design

The Design⎪Progressive Cavity Pump section allows the User to design a PCP
installation.

2. Select a suitable combination of pump and turbine for the application
PCP data entered in System⎪Hydraulic Submersible Pumps is not utilised by the

PCP design section and will be overwritten by the design.
In the main PCP Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
Figure 11-28
PCP Design Screen Input
This is the case of PCP with Sucker Rod. If the PCP is driven by a Downhole Motor,
the data to input are similar to the ones seen in the ESP.
All the parameters are self-explanatory on the basis of the previous sections.
The design of an HSP installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases. One is
The following description assumes that inputs of the well details and PVT data have

11.4.1 PCP Calculate

From the main PCP Design screen select Calculate:
Figure 11-29
PCP Pump Duty
Calculation
required pump head.
inlet.
Emulsions
PROSPER MANUAL
11.4.2 PCP Design (Pump and Rod Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the PCP
design screen.
calculated duty.
that shown below:
Figure 11-30
PCP Design Selection
In the case of motor driven PCP, motor and cable will have to be selected.



As seen for ESP and HSP installations, the PCP design should be checked by
performing sensitivities in System Calculation, in order to verify the design against
the expected change of conditions along the life of the well.

11.5 Coiled Tubing GasLift Design

The Design⎪Coiled Tubing GasLift section allows the User to perform a design of
gas lift using coiled tubing.
Before performing the design, data concerning the gas lift gas and the coiled tubing
equipment should be entered in the Coiled Tubing Data screen, accessible from the
System menu:
Figure 11-31
Coiled Tubing
Data
Then select Design⎪Coiled Tubing GasLift:
Figure 11-32
Coiled Tubing
Design
The input data and the options to enter in this screen are exactly the same as for the
normal Gas Lift Design (design for a User Entered Rate, or for Maximum Production,
etc).
Please refer to section 11.1 for a detailed explanation.
To perform the Design, select Continue. This will access a screen similar to the Gas
Lift Design:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 11-33
Coiled Tubing
Design
In the case of the figure above, select Get Rate to calculate the Gas Lift Performance
Curve and then Design to perform the design.
The program will determine the maximum injection depth, the rate produced and the
gas to inject.
The Plot feature allows visualising the design:
Figure 11-34
Coiled Tubing
Design Plot

11.6 Jet Pump Design NEW!!!

The Design ⏐ Jet Pump section allows the User to design a Jet Pump installation.

2. Select a suitable pump for the application
Jet Pump data entered in System⎪Jet Pumps is not utilised by the design section
and will be overwritten by the design.
In the main Jet Pump Design screen the design parameters can be entered:
Figure 11-35
HSP Design Screen Input
The input data are self-explanatory.

As far as the loss coefficient are concerned, these coefficients are a measure of
the energy loss due to the friction in the above quoted sections of the pump.
The coefficients are provided by the Jet Pump manufacturers.
The design of a Jet Pump installation using PROSPER is divided into two phases.
One is where the head and power requirement calculations are made and the
second part is where on basis of the calculations, the equipment is selected.
The following description assumes that inputs of the well details and PVT data have
PROSPER MANUAL
11.6.1 Jet Pump Calculate

From the main Jet Pump Design screen select Calculate:
Figure 11-36
Jet Pump Duty Calculation
required pump head.
inlet.
• According to the Surface Fluid (the Power Fluid) Injection Rate and Injection
Pressure, the program will determine R (ratio between the areas of the nozzle
and of the throat), the diameter of the throat and the diameter of the nozzle

Emulsions
11.6.2 Jet Pump Design (Pump Selection)

Having determined the required pump duty, click on Done to go back to the Jet
Pump design screen.
The next step is to select the pump suitable to provide the calculated duty.
that shown below:
Figure 11-37
Jet Pump Design
Selection
Select a pump from the database whose Actual performance (in green in the figure
above) is close to the Desired performance.
PROSPER lists pumps on the basis of diameter and performance

Â characteristics.
PROSPER MANUAL

As seen for ESP, HSP and PCP installations, the Jet Pump design should be
checked by performing sensitivities in System Calculation, in order to verify the
design against the expected change of conditions along the life of the well.
11.7 Artificial Lift Database

The Artificial Lift Database contains all the information concerning the artificial lift
equipment used in PROSPER.
This is the content of the Database:

• Gas Lift Valves
• ESP pumps, motors, cables
• HSP pumps and turbines
• PCP pumps, sucker rods, motors, cables
• Jet pumps
• MultiPhase pumps
In the following sections there is a description of the information stored in the
Artificial Lift Database and how to update with new data.
To access the database select Design⎪Database.

The Options tab screen collect information on the location of the database and its
version:
Figure 11-38
Artificial Lift Database -
Options

An initial database is distributed along with the software.
EQUIPMENT DATABASE DISCLAIMER

Â Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases
supplied are correct.
However, it is the User’s responsibility to ensure they are both
accurate and up-to-date.
For critical design work, always refer to your equipment supplier for
the latest performance data.
To improve the quality of the Artificial Lift Database, Petroleum
Experts is more than happy to accept the contribution of Users who
have updated data
11.7.1 Gas Lift Valve Database

To perform a Gas Lift design, PROSPER must have appropriate valve data loaded in
its database. To enter and maintain the valve data that PROSPER requires for Gas
Lift design, the Gas Lift tab button in the Database:
Figure 11-39
Gas Lift Valve Database
The database is completely editable: it is possible to Add, Amend or Delete any

record.
It is also possible to Export the database to different locations (file, spreadsheets,
etc.) or create an Import file.
The last option allows to create back-ups of the database in format .GLD, which can
be recalled by PROSPER to restore the database using the Import button.
11.7.1.1 Adding a New Valve

To add a new record select Add and enter the required information:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 11-40
Gas Lift Valve Database -
Add Record
Â The sample gas lift valve database is provided to allow the User to
run the examples. Before designing for field installation, the User
must first ensure that the database contains current and accurate
valve characteristics.
11.7.2 ESP Database

The ESP Database contains the performance curves of pumps and motors and the
characteristics of the cables.
11.7.2.1 Pump Database

Select the tab screen ESP in the Database to access the ESP database:
Figure 11-41
ESP Pumps
Database

The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.

record.
Selecting a pump and then Plot, the performance curve of the pump is plotted:
Figure 11-42
ESP Pump
Head
Click Variables to select between Head, Horsepower and Efficiency for plotting.
11.7.2.1.1 Adding a New Pump

To add a new pump select Add and enter the required information:
Figure 11-43
ESP Pumps
Database
PROSPER MANUAL
Next step is to enter the performance data for head and power as per manufacturer’s
performance curves and fit them to a polynomial. To do so, select Head Coefficients
and HP Coefficients and enter the data:
Figure 11-44
ESP Pumps
Database –
Enter Head
Then Fit to regress and calculate the polynomial coefficients, then Done to go back
to the previous panel. The coefficients have been transferred:
Figure 11-45
ESP Pumps
Database
The HP coefficients can be calculated in the same way.
Â To prevent errors, it is recommended that a plot be made and

checked against published curves whenever new data is entered or
alterations are made to existing entries.

11.7.2.2 Motor Database

To access the Motors section select the tab screen Motors:
Figure 11-46
ESP Motors
Database
Motor characteristics are entered in form of polynomials fitted to performance data.

Coefficients are required for Nameplate Amps, RPM, and Efficiency and Power
factor. Available horsepower and Power options are entered by clicking the relevant
Edit button.
Â As plotted, motor speed curves may exceed synchronous speed at low %

power values. This is a characteristic of the polynomial fitting technique
used. The accuracy of motor (and pump) performance curve fits is
optimised in the usable efficiency range.
An example of a motor efficiency plot is shown below:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 11-47
Motor Efficiency
Plot
11.7.2.2.1 Adding a New Motor

To add a new motor select Add and enter the required info in the Motor Data:
Figure 11-48
ESP Motors
Database
Enter the data and fit the polynomials by selecting the buttons NamePlate AMPS,
Speed, Efficiency and Power Factor. Use Fit to determine the polynomial
coefficients.
On the right hand side of the screen above (Power Options) enter the different
Power, Voltage and Current the motor is compatible with.

11.7.2.3 Cables Database

To access the Cables section select the tab screen Cables:
Figure 11-49
ESP Motors
Database
11.7.2.3.1 Adding a New Cable

Only a few data about the electric characteristic of the cable are required.
Select Add to add a new cable:
Figure 11-50
ESP Motors
Database
Every effort is made to ensure that the sample equipment databases

Â supplied are correct.
11.7.3 HSP Database

The HSP Database contains the performance curves of pumps and turbines.
PROSPER MANUAL
11.7.3.1 Pumps Database

Select the tab screen HSP in the Database to access the HSP database:
Figure 11-51
HSP Pumps
Database
The performance curves are provided in the form of coefficients for a polynomial
equation fitted to actual performance data.

record.
Clicking on Plot displays the Pump performance curve:

Figure 11-52
HSP Pump
Performance
Curve

To add a new pump or a turbine, the steps to follow are exactly the same seen for
ESP pumps. Please refer to the previous section for the details.
11.7.3.2 Turbines Database

Select the Turbines tab button to display the Turbines Database:
Figure 11-53
HSP Pumps
Database
PROSPER MANUAL
The performance data are provided as polynomials fitted to performance data.
11.7.3.2.1 Adding a New Turbine

To add a new pump or a turbine, select Add and enter the required data:
Figure 11-54
HSP Turbine
Database
The Turbine performance is entered by selecting Add in the Turbine Settings area.
The steps to enter the performance data and fit them to a polynomial are the same
as seen in the ESP section. Refer to that section for details.

11.7.4 PCP Database

The PCP Database contains data concerning the performance of pumps and the
characteristics of sucker rods, motors and cables.


Select the tab screen PCP in the Database to access the PCP database:
Figure 11-55
PCP Pumps
Database
In the database parameters concerning the pump configuration are stored.

record.
Clicking on Plot displays the Pump performance curve:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 11-56
HSP Pump
Performance
Curve

To add a new pump select Add and enter the required data as per manufacturer’s
specs:
Figure 11-57
PCP Pumps
Database

11.7.4.2 Sucker Rods Database

Select the Sucker Rods tab button to display the correspondent database:
Figure 11-58
PCP Sucker
Rods Database
11.7.4.2.1 Adding a New Sucker Rod

To add a new sucker rod select Add and enter the required data:
Figure 11-59
PCP Sucker
Rods
Database
As far as motor and cables are concerned, please refer to the ESP section (11.7.2)
for details.
PROSPER MANUAL

11.7.5 Jet Pumps Database NEW!!!

The Jet Pumps Database contains the characteristics of the pumps.

Select the tab screen Jet in the Database to access the Jet Pump database:
Figure 11-60
Jet Pumps
Database

record.

specs (nozzle and throat sizes, minimum and maximum rates, etc.):

Figure 11-61
Jet Pumps
Database

11.7.6 MultiPhase Pumps Database NEW!!!

The MultiPhase Database contains the characteristics of the FRAMO Pumps.

Select the tab screen MultiPhase in the Database to access the FRAMO Pumps
database:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 11-62
FRAMO Pumps
Database

record.
Clicking on Plot, the performance curves of the pump are displayed:
Figure 11-63
FRAMO Pump
Performance
Curve


specs (nozzle and throat sizes, minimum and maximum rates, etc.):
Figure 11-64
FRAMO Pumps
Database

PROSPER MANUAL
12 Output
The Output menu is used to report, export and plot input data entered into PROSPER
and the results generated by the various calculation options in the program:
• Report
This option generates reports about input data and results
• Export
This option transfers input data and results to different locations (printer,
spreadsheets, screen, etc.)
• Plot
This option generates plots for input data and results
These functions are available also in any of the input/output screens of the program.
2 - 21 Chapter 12 - Output
12.1 Report
The Report option is used to prepare reports and plots from a current analysis. This
section describes how to use the reporting system with the templates provided with
the system and how to customise these templates.
12.1.1 Setting Up the Reporting System

The set up of the reporting system begins with defining the default locations where
the reports will be created. To define the directories, select File⎪Preferences:
Figure 12-1
Preferences Screen for
Report Directories Setup
In the File tab screen initialise the data relevant to the reporting system. Enter the
“Location Of Report Output Files”. This is the default directory where reports printed
to file are to be placed. Also enter the “Location Of User-Created Reports”. This is
the path to a directory where User-defined report templates are to be stored.
12.1.2 Reports
The reporting interface gives the User complete control over how the reports are
formatted and what information is utilised to make up the report. This is facilitated by
the use of report templates, which can be edited to suit the specific requirements. It
is possible to choose to use the default report templates provided with the system or
to choose to create slightly different versions of these reports. The selected
templates can then be used to generate the actual reports, which can be sent to a
variety of places (printer, file or screen). The report templates are displayed in a
hierarchy and all templates which have been selected (by double-clicking on it) show
an X in the check-box beside the template name.

Chapter 12 - Output 3 - 21
To access the Reports area, select Output⎪Reports form the menu toolbar.
There are two modes for the editing of report templates: System and User. System
mode does not allow the User to change any template whereas User mode allows
creating new User-defined templates from scratch or based on an already existing
system report template and also allows editing an existing User-defined report
template. Selecting User mode also makes the User Reports section of the template
hierarchy visible. The User Reports hierarchy contains all report templates which
have been tagged as being a derivation of a system report template as well as any
free standing User-defined templates.
Figure 12 -2
PROSPER Reports Main
Window
The reporting main window consists of four main parts: The command segment at
the top of the dialogue containing the buttons, the report selection hierarchy, the
output device selection group and the template type selection group. The output
device group is only used when printing from selected report templates.
The available commands are:
OK Print the selected reports to the selected output device and terminate the dialogue
Cancel Terminate the dialogue
Help Bring up the on-line help window
Setup Select a printer
User Switches between System and User edit mode, This shows or hides the User
PROSPER MANUAL
Reports section of the report hierarchy and enables or disables the Create and Edit
buttons. If in User mode this button shows the text ‘System’ and vice-versa.
View View a previously saved native format file on-screen. This brings up a file selection
box for choosing the appropriate report and passes this file name to the Report
Executor
Print Print the selected reports to the selected output device
Create Create a new user report (only visible in User edit mode)
Edit Edit an existing user report template or create a new template from a system
template (only visible in User edit mode)
Group Allows the grouping of report templates references and the storing of the group
information in a file for later recall. This allows batch printing of reports for any
analysis
The available output types are:
Printer Sent the report to the current printer

Screen The reports are displayed on-screen in a report executor window
Native File The reports are saved as .FR files in the output reports directory
RTF File The reports are saved as .RTF files in the output reports directory
Text File The reports are saved as tab delimited text files for easy spreadsheet import
The native (.FR) file format can only be read by the reporting system whereas the
RTF format can be read by many Windows word processing applications. When
printing to file the User will be presented with the following dialogue:
Figure 12 -3
File naming
window
The default directory will be set to the default output directory but this can be altered
using the Select Directory button. This can then be applied to all output files by using
Change All. If it is necessary to change the output directory of one of the files, this
can be achieved by using the Browse button (button that shown on the right side of
the filename box) associated with each report. The filenames can themselves be
edited in the text box, which contains them.
For any given report in the system hierarchy the User can choose to view or print a
report using either the system report template provided or a User-defined report
template based on that system report template (or at least that position in the

hierarchy) or it is possible to choose a report grouping which can be made up from a

combination of User and system reports. Choose between these options using the
report template type selection group at the bottom right of the main window. If the
User report template option for any hierarchy position is selected and there are
multiple User-defined report templates for that position, then a dialogue appears
which allows selecting the desired template.
Figure 12-4
User-Defined Report
Template Selection
Dialogue
Double clicking on any of the report templates (or selecting and pressing Ok) will
cause it to become the User-defined report template for that hierarchy position for
the current reports session. The default choice is the topmost user defined report
template. It is possible to stop a User-defined report template from being associated
with that hierarchy position by selecting it and then pressing Delete. This does not
actually delete the report template (it can still be seen within the User Reports
section of the hierarchy).
If a report grouping is selected, then a similar dialogue appears and the User can
select the appropriate group file. After selecting a file all the reports referenced in the
group will appear ‘checked’ in the hierarchy and then it is possible to press print for
all of these reports to be sent to the selected output device.
Template Editor Commands

The template editor works on the principle of moveable fields or groups of fields
where the inputs to these fields can be any value from PROSPER. Headers and
footers can be defined, which can be shown on each page, have fields which have a
value which is the result of a calculation or even have groups of fields which are
displayed only if a condition is met.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure 12-5
Template
Editor Window
Data fields from PROSPER are added using the F2 key, selecting the data items
required and then pressing Ok when finished. The selected data items will then
appear as fields, one by one, as the left mouse button is clicked. The fields can be
roughly positioned in this way. The User is not limited to one pass at adding data
items to the report template. More items can be added at any time in the same
manner.
Once a field has been added to the report template the User can edit some of the
properties of the text which will be shown in the field and assign a group number to
the field by double clicking the left mouse button on it and the font properties can be
changed by double clicking the right mouse button on it. Other properties, such as
whether the field has a box around it, etc., can be changed through the menu
options, a full description of which are given below.

Figure 12-6
Selection of data items
The template editor commands can be selected by using the menu, toolbar or
keyboard shortcuts. Help can be obtained on any menu item by highlighting the
menu item and then pressing the F1 key or by consulting the index of help topics
under the help menu.
File Menu
This menu contains commands for saving the current report template file and
specifying the report template parameters.
Save:
Use this selection to save the current report template to the current file name. If a file
is not yet specified, the form editor will prompt for a file name. If a file extension is
not provided, the editor automatically appends an .FP extension to the report file. If a
file with the same name already exists on the disk, the form editor will save the
previous file with a backup extension (.RE).
Save As:
This selection is similar to Save File. In addition, it allows saving the report template
to a new file name.
PROSPER MANUAL
Report Parameters:
This option allows setting certain report parameters. Firstly, it allows specifying the
name of the report. The margin for the printed page can be set. It is possible to
instruct the report executor to print trial records for adjusting forms such as labels
and invoices and set the default date format for input. The date format that specified
here will be enforced for parameter input during the report execution session, and
any date constant used in expressions.
Report Filter:
This option allows entering a filter criterion for the report. Each data record will be
tested with the expression provided here. A record is selected only if this expression
evaluates to a TRUE value. For example, if the expression was sales->amount>100,
then only the records with the sales amount more than 100 will be selected.
Printer Setup:
This option allows selecting a printer from a list of installed printers and invoking a
printer specific dialogue box for the selected printer. Select the parameters from a
set of printer specific options. These options include page size, page orientation,
resolution, etc. The printer options selected here determine the width and height of
the report.
Exit:
Use this function to exit from the form editor session. If the current file is modified, a
prompt will ask to save the modifications.
Edit Menu:
This menu contains commands to edit the report objects. One or more report objects
must be selected before using this option.
Cut:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard. The copied items are deleted from the form.
Copy:
Use this option to copy the current item or all the items in the current selection to the
clipboard.
Paste:
Use this option to paste the items from the clipboard to the current form.
Position Text:
Use this option to position the text within the item boundaries. The text can be
justified on the left, right, top, or bottom edges or it can be centred horizontally or
vertically. This option is valid for the label and field type items only.
Item Outlines:
Use this option to specify the item boundaries (left, right, top, and bottom) to draw for
one or more selected items. The colour and width of the boundary lines can be
specified too.

Item Background:
Use this option to set the background colour or pattern for one or more selected
items.
Centre Horizontally:
This option is used to centre horizontally one or more selected items. When more
than one item is selected, the form editor first centres the selection rectangle and
then moves the selected items such that the position of the selected items relative to
the selection rectangle does not change.
Delete Item:
Use this option to delete one or more currently selected items. If the current section
is being deleted, the program asks for confirmation before the deletion. All items
within the section are also deleted.
Fonts:
Use this function to change the font and colour for the text for one or more selected
objects. This option is valid for the field and label type objects only.
When selecting this option, the form editor shows the font and colour selection
dialogue box. The current font and colours are pre-selected in the dialogue box. Use
this dialogue box to specify the selections.
Snap to Grid:
This option allows turning on or off the invisible grid on the form. When the grid is
turned on and an item is moved, it automatically aligns to the closest grid location.
This option also allows setting the grid width.
Report Size:
The following options shrink or elongate the report in the horizontal or vertical
direction by the amount equal to the width or the height of the selection rectangle.
Expand Horizontally
Use this option to create horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. If a new item between the
items A and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create the desired
space between these two items and place the new item in the newly created space.
To move the items B and C toward right, create a selection rectangle after the item A
and select this option. The width of the selection rectangle specifies the movement of
the items B and C toward right (noted that the selection rectangle does not need to
include all items to be moved). All items toward the right of the selection rectangle
and with the vertical placement between the vertical spaces spanned by the
selection rectangle are moved.
Expand Vertically
Use this option to create additional vertical space by moving the items downward.
For example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. If a new item
between items A and B is to be inserted, it is possible to use this function to create
the desired space between these two items and place the new item in the newly
created space. To move items B and C downward, create a selection rectangle
PROSPER MANUAL
below the item A and select this option. The height of the selection rectangle
specifies the downward movement of items B and C (noted that the selection
rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items below the
selection rectangle are moved.
This option also expands (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.
Compress Horizontally
Use this option to delete extra horizontal space by moving items horizontally. For
example, consider three items, A, B, and C placed horizontally. The User can use
this function to bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C
toward left, create a selection rectangle after the item A and select this option. The
width of the selection rectangle specifies the movement of items B and C toward left
(noted that the selection rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved).
All items toward the right of the selection rectangle and with the vertical placement
between the vertical spaces spanned by the selection rectangle are moved.
Compress Vertically
Use this option to delete vertical space by moving the items upward. For example,
consider three items, A, B, and C placed vertically. It is possible to use this function
to bring items B and C closer to the item A. To move items B and C upward, create a
selection rectangle below the item A and select this option. The height of the
selection rectangle specifies the upward movement of items B and C (noted that the
selection rectangle does not need to include all items to be moved). All items below
the selection rectangle are moved.
This option also shrinks (vertically) the current section by the height of the selection
rectangle.
Field Menu:
This menu contains options to insert, modify, delete and maintain fields.
Insert New Fields:

Data Field: This option is used to paste a new data field to the report template. This
option will display a list of data files and data fields to choose from. When selecting a
field, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the
field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can be
changed using the Edit Current Field Option.
Calculation Field: This option is used to paste a calculation field to the report
template. This option will prompt for the name of the field, and the field expression.
The field expression can contain any number of valid operators, functions, system
fields, dialogue fields, and data fields. The field type is determined by the result of
the execution of the field.
After entering the field expression, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle.
Use the mouse to position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The
current field attributes can be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.
System Field: This option is used to paste a system field to the report template. This
option will display a list of system fields (date, time, page, etc.) to choose from.
When selecting a field, the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the

mouse to position the field rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field
attributes can be changed using the Edit Current Field Option.
Dialogue Field: This option is used to paste a dialogue field to the report template.
A dialogue field must have been created using the Edit Dialogue Field Table before
using this option. The dialogue fields are used to prompt the User for data during the
report execution session.
The option will display a list of dialogue fields to choose from. When selecting a field,
the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the field
rectangle and click any mouse button. The current field attributes can be changed
using the Edit Current Field Option.
Edit Current Field: This option is used to edit the field attributes for the current field.
This option is available only when a 'field' type object is selected.
Edit Field Expression: This option is used to edit the field expression for the current
calculation field. This option is available only when a 'calculation field' type object is
selected (see Insert Calculation Field). The option shows the existing calculation
expression and allows making any modifications.
Edit Dialogue Field Table:

Create: This option is used to create a new dialogue field. Once a dialogue field is
created, it can be inserted in the report by using the Insert Dialogue Field selection.
A dialogue field is used to prompt the User for data during report execution. For
example, it can allow the User to set the begin and end dates for the report. A
dialogue field can be used in the field expressions and can be inserted in the report
template for information purposes. A dialogue field in the report filter can be used to
reject records not meeting a specific User criterion.
Modify: This option is used to modify the User prompt, width and prompt order of a
dialogue field. The prompt order determines the order at which the dialogue fields
are presented to the User for data input.
Delete: This option is used to delete a dialogue field from the dialogue field table.
The User cannot delete a dialogue field that is being currently used in the report.
Section Menu:
This menu contains commands to insert, edit and delete report sections.
New: This option is used to create a new section. A section is identified by the
section banner and the separation line at the bottom of a section. There are three
basic types of sections. A header section displays the data that remain constant or
changes only when a sort field changes. The detail section displays the transaction
record fields. A footer section is used to display totals and summary information.
ReportEase allows up to 9 header and footer sections. A higher numbered header
section is allowed only when all the lower numbered headers are already selected.
Similarly, a footer section is allowed only when the corresponding header section is
already selected.
PROSPER MANUAL
Edit Current: This option is used to modify the properties of the currently selected
section. For the 'detail' section, the User can specify the number of records to print
across the page. This option can be used to print multiple address labels across the
page.
Sort Field: This option is used to specify a sort field for a header section. A sort field
is used to sort the data records.
Break Field: This option is used to specify a break field for a header section. The
break field is used to determine a sort break. Typically, the break field would be the
same as the sort field. However the break field can be specified differently from the
sort field. A calculation expression can also be specified for a break field.
Filter: This option is used to enter a filter criterion to print a section. Normally, every
section included in the report template is printed in its appropriate sequence.
However, if the User wishes to print a section depending upon a condition, he can
enter this condition expression using this option. The expression must evaluate to a
logical value (TRUE or FALSE). During the report execution, the section will be
printed only if the expression evaluates to a TRUE value.
Line: This menu contains commands to create and edit a line object:
Create a Line: Use this option to draw a line. When selecting this option, the form
editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the rectangle and
click any mouse key. The line will be drawn within the position rectangle. The line
size can be changed using the sizing tabs.
Edit Current Line: Use this option to edit the angle, colour, and thickness of a 'line' type
object.
Label: This menu contains commands to create and edit a label object:
Create a Label: Use this option to create a new label. When selecting this option,
the form editor displays a positioning rectangle. Use the mouse to position the
rectangle and click any mouse key. The 'label' object will be created within the
positioning rectangle. By default, the form editor inserts the text 'label' in the label
item. The label text can be edited in the editing window.
Edit Current Label: A label text can be edited by simply selecting the desired label
item and clicking on the edit window.
As the User inserts or deletes the text, the length of the label text changes. Normally,
the form editor will automatically adjust the item box boundaries to completely
enclose the new text. However, this automatic size adjustment ceases if the User
manually resizes the item boundary by pulling on the sizing tab. This feature can be
used to enclose the text in an item box larger than the default size.
Picture: This menu contains picture import functions:
Import Picture from Clipboard

Use this command to copy a picture bitmap from the clipboard.

When selecting this option, the form editor creates a positioning rectangle equal to
the dimensions of the picture. Use the mouse to position the picture rectangle and
click any mouse key. The picture will be placed within the position rectangle. The
picture size can be changed using the sizing tabs.
Import Picture from Disk File

Use this command to read in a picture bitmap from a disk file.
When selecting this option, the form editor creates a positioning rectangle equal to
the dimensions of the picture. Use the mouse to position the picture rectangle and
click any mouse key. The picture will be placed within the position rectangle. The
picture size can be changed using the sizing tabs.
Arrange:
This menu contains commands to align size and space a set of selected objects:
Alignment At:
Horizontal Top Edge:

Use this option to horizontally align the top edge of the selected items to the top
edge of the leftmost item in the selection.
Horizontal Bottom Edge:

Use this option to horizontally align the bottom edge of the selected items to the
bottom edge of the leftmost item in the selection.
Horizontal Centre Line:

Use this option to align the horizontal centre line (imaginary) of the selected items to
the centre line of the leftmost item in the selection.
Vertical Left Edge:

Use this option to vertically align the left edge of the selected items to the left edge of
the topmost item in the selection.
Vertical Right Edge:

Use this option to vertically align the right edge of the selected items to the right
edge of the topmost item in the selection.
Vertical Centre Line:

Use this option to align the vertical centre line (imaginary) of the selected items to
the centre line of the topmost item in the selection.
Even Spacing:
Horizontally:
Use this option to place the selected items horizontally at an equal distance from
each other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two
leftmost items.
Vertically:
PROSPER MANUAL
Use this option to place the selected items vertically at an equal distance from each
other. The inter-item distance is equal to the distance between the first two topmost
items.
Even Sizing:
Width:
Use this option to change the width of the selected items to the width of the topmost
item.
Height:
Use this option to change the height of the selected items to the width of the leftmost
item.
Undo Previous Arrangement Command:

Use this function to undo the previous arrangement command.
Report Executor Commands:

The report executor allows viewing reports that have been generated and saved to a
native format file. It is invoked by using the View option from the reporting main
window and selecting a file from the file selection box. The file selection box will point
to the default data directory and will have the filter extension set to the correct file
type (.FR).
Figure 12-7
File Selector

Figure 12-8
Report
Executor
The options available on this window are:
Jump: Go to a particular page in the document.

Print: Send the document to the defined printer.
Preview: Look at the page layout of the document.
Save: Save the document to a file (native and RTF).
Exit: Quit the current window.
PROSPER MANUAL
12.2 Export
An export can be made either directly from the individual sections of the program, or
from the Output | Export menu option. This section describes how to customise
exports.
12.2.1 Export Setup

Use the main menu Output | Export option to export data from a current analysis, or
from a previously saved .OUT file. When clicking Export a series of screens leads
the User through the process of selecting the data required for the export. To include
a section of data, click the check box to the left of a particular item and, depending
on the selection, further input screens will be presented. This process ensures that
only relevant sections are exported. A sample export dialogue box is shown below:
Figure 12-9
Report Setup Dialogue
After entering the choices, Click Done to return to the main export dialogue box. The
User must then select a destination for the export data. Clicking Print initiates
generation of the data and sends it to the selected destination. Setup accesses a
screen for selecting fonts, margins etc. as in the Plot menu (Section 12.1). The font
selections made for export data are independent of the plotting fonts.
Exported data can be sent to the following locations:

• Printer - the primary printer as set up under Windows.
• File - Creates an ASCII data file and saves it. Clicking Print displays a
dialogue box that requests a file name and destination. Enter a suitable file
name (PROSPER automatically appends a .PRN extension) and click OK to
save the file. The Fixed Format option saves a file in a printer ready format that
can be imported into a DOS based word processor. Use the Tab Delimited
format to save a file suitable for importing directly into a spreadsheet such as
EXCEL.

• Clipboard - Clicking Print after selecting this option copies the exported data
onto the Windows clipboard. From the Clipboard, the User can view, edit and
paste the data directly into another Windows application. e.g. a word
processing program.
• Screen - Clicking Print after selecting this option allows viewing the
exported data on the screen. Scroll through the data using the scrolling
thumbs or arrows. When finished viewing, click OK to return to the main
menu.
Once a .PRN file has been saved, further copies of the exported data can be made
using a word processor from outside PROSPER. To ensure that printed exports are
correctly formatted, only non-Proportional fonts can be selected for export data. The
fonts on the export setup screen are independent of those selected on the plot setup
screen.
Â PROSPER’s default font selection will give good results on most

printers. Choose another font if there are problems printing reports.
Calculation and Export Data Layout

Screen and hardcopy exports can be customised to display only the required
variables. For complex calculations, this can save printing large amounts of
irrelevant data and detailed reports can still be produced when required. To use the
Layout feature, firstly complete a set of calculations. The following example is for PVT
calculations.
Click the Layout button on the calculation results screen and select the variables to
display from the layout screen:
Figure 12-10
Calculation Layout
Show All and Hide All buttons are used to make changes to the entire list of
variables. Individual variables can be selected or de-selected by clicking them
PROSPER MANUAL
directly. When clicking OK, only the selected variables will be displayed on the
calculation screen.
In addition to the calculation results screens, Layout also controls the variables
displayed in Output ⎮ Export (to file, clipboard, and printer).
12.3 Plot
A plot can be made either directly from individual parts of the program, or from the
Output | Plot menu option. This section describes how to customise plots for both the
screen and hard copy. From the Plot Output main Window select the plot to view by
highlighting it in the list of available plots and then press the Plot button or simply
double-clicking on the appropriate plot
Figure 12-11
Plot Output Setup
Zooming
Plots can be zoomed simply by placing the mouse pointer (which changes to a pair
of cross hairs over the active plot area) at the corner of the region to enlarge, and
then dragging until the area of interest is enclosed by the zoom box. Release the
mouse button and the outlined area will be zoomed to fill the entire plot area.

12.3.1 Plot Command Summary

Finish
Returns to the previous menu. Use Finish to close a plot.
Scales
PROSPER normally picks appropriate scales to display the data. Use Scales to enter
custom upper and lower limits for both X- and Y- scales. To display round numbers
on the intermediate grid lines, ensure that the span of the upper and lower plot limits
fits evenly with the number of plot blocks set in the Options menu.
Replot
Re-plots the graph using the original scales. Use this option to un-zoom a plot.
Output
Selects the output options menu. Plots can be output to the Windows clipboard, a
Windows metafile or a hard copy device in colour, grey scale or monochrome
formats. Plots can then be pasted directly from the clipboard into other Windows
applications such as a word processor. Windows metafiles can be saved and read
by a variety of applications. If hard copy is selected, the following hard copy options
screen will appear:
Figure 12-12
Hard Copy Options
Select the desired plot options and click Print to output the plot. Depending on the
actual hard copy device connected, the User may need to experiment with font styles
and sizes. Note that some fonts cannot be rotated, and are unsuitable as a Vertical
font. If Y-axis labels are being plotted horizontally, try a different font selection.
Return to the plot menu by clicking OK.
Colours
PROSPER MANUAL
This option enables to customise the colour of any item on the plot. Note that laser
printers and monochrome monitors will often produce better results if colour plotting
is disabled. A sample colour customising screen is shown below:
Figure 12-13
Change Colours
Options
The Options button enables to customise the overall appearance of the plot screen
and select font type and size etc. A sample options screen is shown below:
Figure 12-14
Plot Options
Some plots include a results box on the screen. If the default position of the box
interferes with the plot, it can be moved by holding down the Shift key and using the
mouse to drag it to another location. The fonts selected on the Plot options screen
apply only to plots. The export data fonts are set up on a separate screen.
Variables
Use this button to select variables for plotting. The variables available change
according to the type of calculations that have been completed and the particular plot
type that has been selected. Where applicable, extended plot variables can be
selected.
Test Data

Clicking Test data displays a screen in which the User can enter up to 10 measured
data pairs. Once the test data has been entered, it can be displayed together with
the calculated data when the plot is re-drawn. If the current .OUT file is subsequently
saved, the test data will also be saved and will appear on subsequent plots.
Help
Accesses the on-line Help system. See Section 14 for more details of the Help
system.
PROSPER MANUAL
13 Units
This chapter describes the system of units. The built in flexibility of the units
system enables the User to select any variable and define the unit of measurement
to be used. This feature allows to modify the units system so that it corresponds to
data reports supplied by a service company or customise the units system to suit
the User’s own personal preferences.
PROSPER always works internally in Field units. To facilitate data entry and output
display in any units system, PROSPER accepts data in the specified Input units and
converts it to Oilfield units for calculation. The results (in Field units) are converted
back to the specified Output unit set if necessary. By making selections from the
different categories, it is possible to work in the preferred units and save the results
in the units required by company policy.
Figure 13-1
PROSPER Units System
The changes made to the units system are retained in the program memory and
apply to all files opened during the current processing session. The program allows
to create a custom units system.
13.1 Units Summary

To access the units system, select Units⎪Units form the menu toolbar. This will
display the Units Summary screen:
2-5 Chapter 13 - Units
Figure 13-2
Units Summary
The Units Summary screen is contains the list of parameters and their unit’s
options:
Unit’s selection
Select the units for the input and output of the variables
Validation
Used to set up the error checking limits for each selected input variable.
Click on the Details buttons to the right of each variable name in order to view the
details of each particular variable.
13.1.1 Unit Systems

The User can change the unit’s system form tool bar menu
Figure 13-3
Units Summary
The following default Units Systems are provided:

• Oilfield Units
• Norwegian S.I.

Chapter 13 - Units
3-5
• Canadian S.I.
• German S.I.
• French S.I.
• Latin S.I.
Customised unit systems can be created and saved under new names. Different
units can be selected for both input and output.
13.1.2 Changing Unit Systems for some variables

For each variable, if the mouse points to the unit and right click, the unit system can
be changed; this option is available at screen for any input variable.
Figure 13-4
Units system
13.1.3 Changing the Units

The Input and Output units for each variable on the list can be changed.
To change or customise the default Units System:
• Scroll through the measurement variables list until the unit item to modify
is visible on the screen.
• Select the unit category (Input and/or Output) to modify.
• Select the unit field corresponding to the measurement item and click on
the arrow to its right to display the list of unit options.
• Select the preferred measurement unit.
To save changes, click Save. A prompt will be displayed to enter a name for the
new Units System. This new system can now be recalled and applied to any file.
Custom unit sets can be erased by clicking the Delete button, then selecting the
unwanted units system. The ability to have separate input and output unit systems
PROSPER USER GUIDE

4-5 Chapter 13 - Units
allows the User to work with familiar units and to create reports or export data in
any required unit system. PROSPER calculates them internally in Oilfield Units. To
validate unit conversion factors, click the button located to the right of the particular
variable and the multiplier and shift used for unit conversion will be displayed.
Clicking Report ⏐ Print will create a summary report of conversion factors in use.
If some particular units have been modified during the course of a PROSPER
session, the changes will be written into the .SIN file when the input data are saved.
Irrespective of the current units system settings, recalling a previously saved .SIN
file will cause PROSPER to revert to the units saved in the recalled .SIN file. To
permanently impose a new set of units on the recalled file, open a custom units file
(or use one of the internal unit sets) and then save the .SIN file. The new unit’s
settings will be used whenever the .SIN file is loaded.
13.1.4 Validation Limits

To reduce the possibility of entering incorrect data, PROSPER checks that input
data falls within predetermined validation limits. For most purposes, the default
validation limits are adequate. For particular applications, the User can change the
validation limits if required by entering new values directly from the units definition
screen.
Find the required variable by scrolling through the list, and then enter required
changes in the low and high validation limit boxes. Enter the custom validation
limits in the units currently in use. To permanently attach the new validation limits
to a custom units system, click Save before leaving the validation screen by clicking
OK.

Chapter 13 - Units
5-5
13.2 Units Details

The purpose of the Units Details screen allows adjustment of the precision of data
display for both input and output to be adjusted individually for each unit type. To
set display precision, select Units Detailed. Scroll though the available units until
the required one is shown in the Current box as shown in the following example:
Figure 13-5
Units Detailed
Input and Output units can be selected from this screen. Validation limits can be
entered for the selected units. The Options panel enables to set the number of
decimal places to display for each unit type.
13.3 Units Reset

Use this option to quickly reset the units system back to default values. To specify
what Units defaults are please go to the Units Tab in the Preferences screen (File |
Preferences).
PROSPER USER GUIDE

14 Wizard
The presence of Wizards is one of the new features of PROSPER.
This feature allows the User to set up models and perform certain tasks following a
pre-defined sequence.
The use of Wizards is of particular benefit to inexperienced Users, as it allows to
easily set up a model based on active wizard examples by advancing through the
input screens in the correct sequence and asking at any step the User for the
required information. In this way the User will familiarize with Prosper windows as
well as with the essential steps required to set up, match and use the models.
14.1 Running the Wizard

A few wizard examples are available when installing PROSPER. These examples
are step-by-step guides to build typical models, like naturally flowing wells, ESP,
etc.
In order to run wizard examples follow first of all select Wizard from the main menu
toolbar:
Figure 14-1
Wizard main window
Then select the desired Wizard and click on Run to run it.
All that the User has to do is to follow the instructions that time to time are
displayed and complete the input screens with the required data.
14.2 Creating/Editing a Wizard

From the main Wizards window it is possible to access a series of functions that
allow the User to create his own wizard or edit an already existing one.
To modify an existing wizard select Edit. This will access the wizard script window:
2-3 Chapter 14 - Wizard
Figure 14-2
Script window
To create a new wizard select instead New. This will display an empty script
window.
The script consists of a series of VB commands using OpenServer strings to set the
values of the input parameters, perform calculations, and retrieve results.
Please refer to the OpenServer User Guides for further details about the basic
OpenServer functions.
On the top part of the script window there is the Commands list window, which
provides immediate access to all the OpenServer variables. This window allows
selecting the desired variable and getting a copy of it, which can be pasted in the
script window below.
14.2.1 Notes of OS strings

A class of OpenServer strings - the so-called menu commands - allow displaying
each of the input screens. The structure of these commands is in general:
DoCmd(“PROSPER.MENU.<tag>”)
If <tag> is for example Options, the command will display the main PROSPER
options.
To display a plot, instead, the command is:

Chapter 14 - Wizard 3-3
DoCmd(“PROSPER.PLOT.<number>”)
If <number> is 1, for example, the command will display the IPR plot.
14.2.2 Wizards examples

As above mentioned, a few Wizards are available along with the software. These
examples lead step-by-step the User through the screens in order to build typical
models.
The example scripts can also be used by experienced Users as templates to build
their own scripts.
Recommendation
Petroleum Experts recommends to set up the models according to the worked
examples shown in the Appendix A. This will allow the User to have a better
understanding of the physics that is behind the software and the importance of the
matching process.
PROSPER USER GUIDE

15 Help
PROSPER has an on-line Help facility which enables the User to get information
quickly about a menu option, input field or function command. This facility enables
to display instructions for completing a particular task or input field without exiting
from the current screen. The help windows offer a list of topics which not only
include definitions and functions specific to PROSPER, but details on using some
features of Windows as well.
To use the PROSPER on-line help system, the help file must be located in the same
directory as the program. If the User is new to Windows, information on using the
Help system can be made available when selecting the Help option in the
PROSPER main menu and choosing 'Using Help'. This will display a help screen
from which the information required can be selected from a list of topics.
The Help facility has function buttons located at the top of the windows, which can
be used to navigate within the help system. If a particular feature is not currently
available, the button associated with that function is dimmed. Information on
specific help topics may lead to other related topics. Some words in the Help
windows are marked with a solid underline and appear in colour (green) if the User
uses a colour screen.
These words are called jump terms and can be used to move around Help more
quickly. When clicking a jump term, Help will move directly to the topic associated
with the underlined word(s).
15.1 Finding Information in Help

There are three ways of finding the information needed:
15.1.1 Use the Search feature in Help

This facility is useful for finding specific information about using the keyboard. For
example, the keys used for text selection. Type in the phrase "text selection" and
search the system for the phrase or select the topic from the list displayed.
15.1.2 Use the Help Index

This option is useful for viewing specific sections listed in the Help index. Go to the
topic or command of interest and select the item required.
2-3 Chapter 15 - HelpCHAPTER 15 - HELP
15.1.3 Context Sensitive Help

This feature can be used while working to give information about a particular menu
option.
15.2 Accessing Help

To get information quickly about a specific menu option or entry field in PROSPER,
the following methods will display the help facility:
15.2.1 Help Through the Menu

From the menu bar in PROSPER, click on Help (or ALT H) and select Index. From
the list of help topics, select the topics to see by pointing to the specific item.
15.2.2 Getting Help Using the Mouse

• Press SHIFT+F1
The pointer will change to a question mark.
• Choose the menu command or option.
or
• Click the Menu command or option, and holding the mouse button down
press F1.
15.2.3 Getting Help Using the Keyboard

Press the ALT key plus the first letter of the menu name, option and press F1.
15.2.4 To Minimise Help

If using the mouse, click the minimise button in the upper-right corner of the help
window. If using the keyboard, press ALT SPACEBAR N. This procedure will close
the help window, but keep the help icon on the Windows desktop.
15.3 What’s New

Click Help ⏐ What’s New to display information about new features in the program
release in use.

Chapter 15 - Help 3-3
15.4 Worked Examples

Click Help ⏐ Worked Examples to access online the worked examples documented
in Appendix A of this manual
15.5 Flow Correlations

Click Help ⏐ Flow Correlations to access a detailed generalised discussion about
the history and reasons behind flow correlations and issues that relate to their use
in PROSPER.
15.6 Help About PROSPER

Click Help ⏐ About PROSPER and the following screen will be displayed:
Figure 15-1
Help About PROSPER
If the User need to contact Petroleum Experts about a problem with the program, please
have the version number and creation date shown on this screen available should it
be required.
PROSPER USER GUIDE

Appendix A Worked
Examples
A1 Example 1 - Gas Lift Design
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/gaslift.out
The main objectives of this example are to:

• Modify the oilwell.out example file (File: ~/samples/PROSPER/oilwell.out)
outlined in the Chapter 3 Quick Start Guide
• Find the maximum production rate achievable using gas lift.
• Determine the optimum lift gas injection rate and depth.
• Design the operating and unloading valves.

• Setup the gas lift design parameters.
• Calculate the design production and gas injection rates.
• Space out the valves.
• Determine the valve trim sizes and dome pressures.
• Calculate production sensitivities using the gaslift design.
The design assumes that the reservoir pressure will drop to 4000 psig and that the
water cut will rise to 80%.
This example will guide you through opening the existing OILWELL.OUT file,
changing the calculation options and reservoir conditions, performing the design and
finally saving the file under a new name.
A1.1 Model Set Up

To perform the gas lift design, firstly open OILWELL.OUT
• Select the Options menu.

• Change the lift method to Gas lifted (no friction loss in annulus)
• Click on Done to get back to the main PROSPER screen
2 - 172 Appendix A - Worked Examples
Figure A1.1
Setting gas lift options
A1.2 Edit IPR Model

The next step is to modify the inflow to model future conditions requiring gas lift.
• Select the System Menu and click Inflow performance (the IPR screen
can also be activated by double clicking in the IPR section of the PROSPER
interface)
• Change the reservoir pressure to 4000 psig. Click on Calculate | Finish |
Done to exit
• Click System ⏐ Gas lift data and enter the following data:
Variable Value
Gas lift gas gravity 0.8
H2S 0
CO2 0
N2 0
GLR Injected 0
For performing a gas lift design, the gas lift method and GLR injected can be ignored
at this stage.
• Click Done and leave the gas injection depth set to zero (Figure A.2)

Appendix A - Worked Examples 3 - 172
Figure A1.2
Gas lift input
A1.3 Setting up the Gas Lift Design Parameters

Entering the gas lift design parameters (Figure A.3):
• From the main PROSPER menu select Design | Gas Lift | New Well
• Select Valve type Casing sensitive
• Enter Casing pressure drop per valve 50 psi
• Select Design rate method Calculated from maximum
production
• Select Dome press. corr. above 1200 psi to Yes
• Set the Maximum liquid rate to 15,000 STB/day
• Select Valve Settings All valve PVo= Gas pressure
• Select Vertical Lift Correlation Petroleum Experts 2
• Select Surface pipe Correlation Dukler Flannigan
• Select Using IPR for Unloading Yes
Enter the gas lift design input data (Figure A.3):
• Maximum gas available 5 MMscf/d

• Maximum gas while unloading 5 MMscf/d
• Flowing top node pressure 200 psig
• Unloading top node pressure 200 psig
• Operating injection pressure 1500 psig
• Kick off injection pressure 1500 psig
• Desired dP across valve 200 psi
• Maximum depth of injection 11000 ft
• Water cut 80 %
• Minimum valve spacing 300 ft
• Static gradient of load fluid 0.46
• Minimum transfer dP 25 %
• Maximum port size 32 (set by valve series selection)
• Safety for closure of last unloading valve 0 psig
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A1.3
Gas lift design input
Determine the maximum gas lifted design production rate as follows:
• Click Continue | Get Rate (Figure A.4)
Figure A1.4
Gas lift design - calculated
rate
• Click Plot to display the performance curve.

Figure A1.5
Gas lift Well Performance
Curve
The program has found that around 1460 STB/d of oil could be produced with 5.0
MMscf/d of lift gas injected at the optimum depth of injection. Click on Finish to exit
the plot.
Next, determine the position of the Unloading and Operating valves:
• Click Design - the program will iterate on the design depths

• Click Plot (to display the valve depths)
Figure A1.6
Gas lift design gradient
plot
Note down the ‘Actual Gas Injection rate’, ‘Actual Injection pressure’ and ‘Actual
Liquid rate’ from the graph. Having determined the number of valves and their
depths, the next task is to calculate the valve test rack setting pressures as follows:
• Click Results to display valve depths and pressures
PROSPER MANUAL
• Click Calculate to display the opening and closing pressures together with
the test rack setting pressures.
Figure A1.7
Gas lift design valve
details
The number of valves required to pass the design lift gas rate is shown at the left of
the screen. Click on the scroll arrows to see the selected port sizes, gas injection
rates, etc. Click Report to generate a hard-copy of the gas lift design then click
Main to return to the main screen.
A1.4 Calculating Sensitivities

To run sensitivities on the design for e.g. different reservoir pressures, water cuts,
etc. the gas lift design must be transferred to the System ⏐ Gas Lift equipment as
per the following procedure:
• Return to the main menu
• Click System ⏐ Gaslift Data and select Valve Depths Specified as the
gas lift method (Figure A1.8)
Casing Pressure 1500psig

dP Across Valve 250psig
• Click Transfer ⏐ From Gaslift Design ⏐ OK. The design valve depths will
appear as per Figure A1.8

Figure A1.8
System Gas lift data valve
depths
• Click Done to return to the main menu.
PROSPER now has the valve depths and surface injection pressure, but since GLR
Injected is still set to zero, no gas is being injected in the calculations. The rate of lift
gas injection will be set using a sensitivity variable.
To calculate sensitivities, click Calculation ⏐ System (Ipr + Vlp) 3 Variables then

select the following:
• Top node pressure 200 psig
• Water cut 80 percent
• Surface equipment correlation Dukler Flannigan
• Vertical lift correlation Petroleum Experts 2
• Rate method Automatic – Linear
Figure A1.9
System calculation
• Click | Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables (Figure

A1.10):
For variable 1
− Select Gaslift gas injection rate
PROSPER MANUAL
(Enter the ‘Actual Injection rate that you have noted down
earlier)
For variable 2
− Select Water Cut
Enter 80%, 90%
For variable 3
− Select Reservoir Pressure
Enter 4000, 3500.
Figure A1.10
Sensitivity variables
• Click Continue | Calculate to calculate system sensitivities.

When the calculations have stopped, Click Solution Details to examine the solution
for 80% water cut and 4000 psi reservoir pressure. Check that the system solution
rate is compatible with the ‘Actual Liquid rate’ that you have noted down earlier.
Click through the solutions and check the solution for 90% water cut and 3500 psi
reservoir pressure. This design is still capable of injection at the deepest (orifice

valve) and the production rate is around 400 BOPD. The sensitivity calculations
show that the design is suitable for the expected future producing conditions.
A2 Example 2 - Well and Flow line Modelling

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/flowline.out

• Model a flowline using PROSPER.
• Apply the Rough Approximation temperature model.
• Examine the effect of the flowline on production rate sensitivities.
To set up this problem, open GASLIFT.OUT and make the following changes:
Options Menu
Predict Pressure and Temperature on land
Temperature Model Rough Approximation
Click System | Equipment (tubing etc) | Surface Equipment, input the following
data:
Pipe Length 8-mile

Pipe I.D. 6-in
Temperature of Surroundings 600F
Overall HTC 7 BTU/h/ft2/0F
NOTE: Change the Pipe Length units to miles by right clicking on the pipe length
units
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A2.1:
Surface equipment Input
Click Done | Summary | Draw Surface and check the equipment data has been
correctly entered (Figure A2.2).
Figure A2.2
Surface equipment
schematic
Gaslift Data
Return to the main menu and click System ⏐ Gaslift Data. Select Fixed Depth of
Injection as the gas lift method, click Continue and enter an injection depth of 7535
ft. The injection gas gravity (S.G) should remain at 0.8.
Â When we use FIXED DEPTH OF INJECTION in PROSPER, this

option assumes that it is possible to unload the well down to the
operating valve and that sufficient casing pressure is available to
inject gas at the specified depth.

Click Done and return to the Main menu.
A2.1 Calculating the System Solution

To find the well flow rate, click Calculation ⏐ System (Ipr + Vlp) 3 Variables.
Select the following:
• Top node pressure 100 psig

• Surface equipment correlation Dukler Flannigan
• Vertical lift correlation Petroleum Experts 2
• Rate method User selected
• Rate type Liquid rates
Use the Generate feature to enter the calculation rates (Figure A2.3). Click
Generate and enter 100 and 15,000 STB/day for the minimum and maximum rates.
Enter 20 for number of rates and use Geometric spacing to propagate the table.
Click Done and PROSPER will fill in the rates table.
Figure A2.3
User selected rate values
Click Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables:
For variable 1
− Select Gaslift gas injection rate
Enter 1,2,3,4,5,6
For variable 2
PROSPER MANUAL
− Clear any existing entries by Pressing “ Reset”

For variable 3
− Clear any existing entries by Pressing “ Reset”
Click | Continue, and | Calculate to start the calculations.
• The long flow line will slow the calculations, so please be patient.
Once the calculation has stopped, click Sensitivity ⏐ Variables and select Oil Rate.
Click Done to display the following plot:
Figure A2.4
System Sensitivity
Note that the production rate is relatively insensitive to the volume of lift gas injection
and that the optimum injection rate has decreased from the optimum found in
Example 1 to around 4 MMscf/day. Click Finish and return to the Calculation ⏐
System menu.
A2.2 Plotting the Temperature Profile

Click Sensitivity PvD and use the scroll arrows to select the solution rate for 4
MMscf/day. Select the Manifold as First node and the Casing at 11400 ft as the
last node. Click Continue ⏐ Calculate to compute the gradient at the solution flow
rate. The pressure profiles for the flowline and tubing can be displayed on the same
or separate plots. Click Plot ⏐ Variables and select Length (surface & down hole)
on the Y-Axis and Pressure and Temperature on the X-axis, then click Done to
plot the profiles in the tubing as follows:

Figure A2.5
Well Pressure and
Temperature Profiles
Note the change of slope of the pressure gradient at the depth of injection. The fluid
temperature approaches that of the surroundings about halfway along its length.
The pressure gradient in the flowline rapidly increases over its last third. This is due
to high flow velocities as ever increasing volumes of gas breaks out of solution.
Increased frictional pressure losses in the flowline account for the decrease in
optimum lift gas injection rate observed in this example.
A3 Example 3 - Temperature Prediction

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/enthalpy.out
This example shows how PROSPER's Enthalpy Balance temperature model can be
used to predict the wellhead flowing temperature (WHFT) of a high pressure / high
temperature oil well.
Â It is planned to drill an appraisal well to test the extent of a discovery.

The objective is to flow the well for four days at a rate of 10000 STB/d
provided that the wellhead flowing temperature remains below 200
degrees F.
The objective of this example is to determine the WHFT profile versus time.

• Build a temperature prediction model for an offshore appraisal well
• Predict FWHP and FWHT profiles for various rates
• Generate a temperature gradient profile
PROSPER MANUAL
A3.1 Model Set Up

First start PROSPER, then select File ⏐ New to clear any existing data. Set up the
temperature prediction model by clicking Options from main menu and making the
following selections:
• Fluid type: Oil and water
• Flow type: Tubing
• Well type Producer
• Separator Single-stage
• Predicting Pressure and temperature offshore
• Temperature model Enthalpy balance
• Lift method None (Naturally flowing)
• Completion Cased hole
• Gravel pack No
Next, enter the PVT data. Only basic PVT data from the exploration well is available.
Click PVT ⏐ Input data and enter the following:
• Solution GOR 1500 scf/STB
• Oil Gravity 45 API
• Gas Gravity 0.6 specific gravity
• Water Salinity 100000 ppm
• Mole Percent H2S 0
• Mole Percent CO2 0
• Mole Percent N2 0
Select PVT correlations known to match reservoir fluids in this region:

• Select Glaso for Pb, GOR and FVF
• Select Beal et al for oil viscosity
Â The validity of these correlations for this type of fluid behaviour has
been assumed for the purpose of this example only.
Then click | Done to return to the main menu.
A3.2 Defining the Equipment Data

The well equipment, riser, surface environment and the properties of the formations
penetrated by the well must be specified to allow PROSPER to calculate heat losses.
This necessitates significantly more data entry than for predicting pressure only
applications.
Enter the well equipment details. Click System ⏐ Equipment ⏐ All ⏐ Edit and type in
the following deviation survey data:
Bottom MD (ft) TVD (ft)
0 0

14000 14000
Next, enter the surface environment (Offshore) data:
• Air temperature 50 degrees F
• Humidity 60 percent
• Mean sea level WRT origin 100 ft
• Sea bed WRT origin 400 ft
• Air velocity 4 ft/sec
• Sea velocity 3 ft/sec
The user can enter a sea temperature gradient in the enthalpy balance model. We
are going to assume a linear change of temperature from the sea level (50 degree F)
to seabed (42 degree F). Hence, enter the following in the Sea Temperature
Gradient Table:
TVD from mean sea level Sea temperature (degree

(ft) F)
0 50
300 42
Â The above data describes a drilling rig with a rotary table 100 ft
above sea level located in 300 ft of water.
Define the drilling and completion by entering the drilling and completion data as
shown on the table below. This describes a well with all casing strings hung off at
the sea bed and the well is tied back to surface using a 30" riser.
Figure A3.1
Drilling and Completion
Input
Here, we are assuming that the annulus is filled with mud. The users can also
customise their own completion liquid or gas type if the appropriate fluid data is
available.
PROSPER MANUAL
Define the lithology by entering the data shown on the screen below:
Figure A3.2
Litho logy Input
Click | Done when finish.

Then click | Cancel to enter NO surface equipment
Define the production string by entering the following:
• Xmas tree 0 ft
• tubing type mild steel tubing
• measured depth 13600 ft
• Inside diameter 4.778"
• Outside diameter 5.5"
• Roughness 0.0006
Click | Summary to check the data input before returning to the main screen.
Define the reservoir inflow model by clicking System ⏐ Inflow performance. Select PI
Entry IPR and enter the following:
• Reservoir pressure 6100 psig
• Reservoir temperature 290 degrees F
• Water cut 0%
• Click on the | Input Data button and enter a PI of 8 BOPD/psi
Click | Calculate and an AOF around 28660 STB/day will be calculated. Click Main
and return to the Main menu.
A3.3 Calculation Section

The objective of the calculation is to determine whether the wellhead flowing
temperature will rise above 200 degrees F within 4 days whilst flowing at a rate of
10000 STB/d.

Â In order to predict the FWHT and FWHP for a given rate, the Unconstrained
System option should be used.
Sensitivities can be run using the Unconstrained System option.
• In order to see the effects of rate and time on WHFP, make the following
calculations.
• Generate a temperature gradient plot using the Unconstrained Gradient
option.
To do this, click Unconstrained System from the main menu and make the following
selections:

• Time since production started 1 day
• Surface flow line correlation Dukler-Flannigan
• Vertical lift correlation Hagedorn Brown
• Rate type Liquid
• Enter rates of 5000, 10000 and 15000 STB/d
Click | Continue and enter the following sensitivity data:

• For variable 1 select time since production started, and enter 1, 2, 5 and
100 days
Click | Continue and advance to the calculation screen.
Then click | Calculate to start the pressure and temperature computation.
Once the calculation is finished click | Plot. Select Tubing head temperature as the
sensitivity variable and click | Done to display the following plot.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A3.3:
Temperature Sensitivity
Plot
From the plot it can be seen that at 10000 STB/d the wellhead flowing temperature
(WHFT) has reached around 146 degrees F after 5 days of flowing so the design test
sequence is OK.
• It also shows that the well could be flowed at up to 15000 STB/d for 100 days
and the WHFT would not reach the limiting 200 degrees F.
• The calculated WHFT for 100 days production shows that high temperature
well head equipment will be required for long term production rates above
10000 stb/d.
A3.4 Generating a Temperature Gradient Plot

The Unconstrained Gradient option can be used to generate a temperature gradient
for a rate of 10000 STB/d after 5 days of flowing time. To do this, select
Unconstrained Gradient and enter the following:
• First node pressure 4100 psig (this was read from the IPR)
• First node fluid temperature 290 degrees F
• Time since production started 5 days
• Surface flow line correlation Dukler Flannigan
• Vertical lift correlation Hagedorn Brown
• Rate 10000 STB/d
• Rate type Liquid
• First node 13 Casing at 14000 ft
• Last node 1 Xmas tree at 0 ft
Click | Continue, then select Time since production started as the sensitivity variable
and enter 1,5 and 1000 days. Leave the other sensitivity variables blank. Click |

Continue ⏐ Calculate to start the calculations. Once the calculation has finished click
Plot and the following temperature gradient plot will be displayed:
Figure A3.4
Temperature Gradients
To plot the heat transfer coefficient along the well, click | Variables ⏐ Extended and
select Heat Transfer Coefficient. Click | Done to display the following plot:
Figure A3.5
Heat Transfer Coefficient
Plot
PROSPER MANUAL
A4 Example 4 - ESP Lifted Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/espwell.out

• Determine the pump duty required to meet a specified off-take rate
• Select a suitable combination of pump, motor and cable for the service
• Determine the maximum water cut at which the pump can still operate
with the design off-take rate.

• Design an ESP system
• Calculate a flowing gradient for an ESP equipped well.
A4.1 Model Set Up

From the main menu, click File ⏐ New and reinitialise the program input and output
files. Open the file OILWELL.SIN from Example 1 and make the following changes
to set up an ESP example:
• Click Options and select Lift method - Electric Submersible Pump

• Lower the GOR (and the well's ability to naturally flow) by clicking PVT ⏐
Input Data and lowering the GOR from 820 scf/STB to 300 scf/STB
• Revert to unmatched PVT correlations by clicking Correlations ⏐ Reset All.
• Return to the main menu by clicking Done twice.
• Edit the System ⏐ Equipment (Tubing) description to include the annulus
dimensions as per the following input screen:

Figure A4.1
ESP - Down hole
Equipment
• Set the tubing O.D. to 4.5 inches and the casing I.D. to 6.184 inches.
• Return to the main menu.
• Lower the reservoir pressure by clicking on System ⏐ Inflow Performance
and setting the reservoir pressure to 4500 psig.
• Change the water cut (WCT) to 80% and total GOR to 300 scf/stb. Leave the
other parameters at their original values.
If not already done, initialise the ESP databases by following procedures:

Click Design | Electrical Submersible Pump | Pump Databases | Import |
Overwrite and pick up the file PUMPS.DAT from the \SAMPLES\PROSPER
subdirectory.
• Import the motor characteristics and the cables data in the same manner.
• Note that motor files are arranged by manufacturer.
• Append the individual motor files if you want to work with motors from more
than one supplier.
For designing a new ESP installation, do not enter any ESP System data - go
directly to Design | Electrical Submersible Pump | Design
Enter the following design specifications:
Pump depth 8000 ft

Operating frequency 60 Hz
Maximum OD 5.7 inches
Length of cable 8100 ft
Gas separation efficiency 0 percent
Design rate 6000 STB/d
Water cut 80 percent
PROSPER MANUAL
Top node pressure 50 psig

Motor power safety margin 0 percent
Pump wear factor 0 percent
Pipe correlation Dukler Flannigan
Petroleum Experts 2 (reset
Tubing correlation the match parameters if
necessary)
A4.2 Designing the pump

Click Calculate to display the pump duty calculation screen. Click Calculate again
to find the pump duty as per the following example:
Figure A4.2
ESP - Design Duty
Â There is no free GLR at the pump intake, so a gas separator is not

required. The Sensitivity plot can be used to estimate the separator
efficiency required to reduce the intake free GLR to an acceptable
level.
Click | Done and | Design and PROSPER will display the ESP Design screen.

Figure A4.3
ESP - Pump Selection
For this example, select the REDA GN5600 pump from the list of suitable pumps.
The pump needs 115 stages and will require 215 HP at the design rate.
From the list of suitable motors, select a 240 HP REDA 540 Series 91 - Standard
motor with 2210 Volt windings.
Select a #1 Copper cable. (A smaller cable would pass the current - you can select
any cable large enough for the service).
Click Plot to display the design operating point superimposed on the pump
performance curve:
Figure A4.4
GN5600 Operating Point
PROSPER MANUAL
The pump is being run a little close to its maximum output, perhaps the next biggest
pump would be a better choice, especially if the pump is expected to handle a
greater lift duty due to e.g. increasing water cut during the pump's run life.
Return to the design screen and select a GN7000 pump. The same 240 HP motor is
suitable for this pump also. Select a #1 Copper cable and plot the results:
Figure A4.5
GN7000 Operating Point
This pump is operating close to its optimum efficiency and has some excess head
capacity.
A4.3 Checking the design for different conditions.

Now, we must check whether this design will be able to cope with expected
variations in the well conditions expected to occur over the next few years. This is
done using the Calculation section to compute sensitivities as follows:
• Click Main to return to the main menu
• Click Calculation ⏐ System and enter a top node pressure of 50 psi
and a water cut of 80%
• Check that Dukler Flannigan has been selected for surface equipment
and Petroleum Experts 2 is selected for the vertical lift correlation
• Select User Selected rates and Generate 20 rates between 10 and
10,000 BFPD.
• Click Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables:
For variable 1
− Select Water cut
Enter 80, 90
For variable 2
− Reservoir Pressure

Enter 4200, 4500

For variable 3
− Select Operating Frequency
Enter 60, 65, 70
Click Continue | Calculate to perform the sensitivity calculations.
Once the calculations have been completed, click Solution Details, select the
design case variables of 80% water cut, 4500 psi reservoir pressure and 60 Hz
operating frequency by clicking on the variable arrows. The calculated liquid off-take
rate is close to 6000 STB/day. When the calculated rate is slightly higher than the
design rate, this is to the number of stages having being rounded up to the nearest
integer.
Now, increase the water cut to 90% - the off-take rate drops to around 5480
STB/day. Plot the sensitivities by clicking Pump Plot from the pump solution screen
as follows. From the plot following conclusions can be made
• With 90% water cut, can the design off-take of 6000 BFPD be achieved by
increasing the operating frequency. Select 70 Hz. The production rate
increases to around 7080 BFPD. By interpolation, this pump should be
capable of lifting 6000 BFPD at an operating frequency of around 63.5 Hz.
Figure A4.6
ESP Sensitivities
To find the required motor horsepower, return to the sensitivity screen and click on |
Combinations. Input the data shown on the following screen to set up 2 scenarios:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A4.7
ESP Combinations
Calculate the sensitivities then click | Solution Details to inspect the results for each
Case.
For a 90% water cut, the GN7000 pump can lift 6035 STB/day, provided that the
motor can supply the additional horsepower at 63.5 Hz. The horsepower
requirement increases from 225 to 272 HP (+21%), so a larger motor than the
original selection would be required for this service. Before finalising the design,
more extensive sensitivities should be run and the manufacturer's specifications
must be checked to ensure that the specified pump can withstand the additional
shaft torque and that the housing pressure rating is not exceeded.
A5 Example 5 - HSP Lifted Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/hspwell.out
• Select a suitable combination of pump and turbine.

• Design an HSP system
A5.1 Model Set Up

From the main menu, click File ⏐New and reinitialise the program input and output
files. In order to be consistent with the previous examples and be able to compare
the requirements, we will be using the same example. Open the file OILWELL.SIN
from Example 1 and make the following changes to set up an HSP example:

• Click Options and select Lift method – Hydraulic Drive Down hole
Pump
• Make sure that the Artificial lift type is set to – Commingle Annular
Supply
• Lower the GOR (and the well's ability to naturally flow) by clicking PVT
⏐ Input data and lowering the GOR from 820 to 300 scf/STB
• Enter the Power fluid (water) salinity as 10000 ppm.
• Revert to unmatched PVT correlations by clicking Correlations ⏐ Reset
All. Return to the main menu by clicking | Done twice.
• Edit the System ⏐ Equipment (Tubing) description to include the
annulus dimensions as per the following input screen:
Figure A5.1
HSP Down hole equipment
• Set the tubing O.D. to 4.5 inches and the casing I.D. to 6.184 inches.
• Lower the reservoir pressure by clicking on | System ⏐ Inflow performance
and setting the reservoir pressure to 4500 psi.
• Change the water cut and Total GOR to 80% and 300 scf/stb respectively.
• Leave the other parameters at their original values and return to the main
menu.
If not already done, initialise the HSP databases by following procedures:

• Click | Design | Hydraulic Pump | Pump Databases | Import | Overwrite.
• Pick up the file WEIRPUMPS.DAT from the \SAMPLES\PROSPER
subdirectory.
• Import the Turbine characteristics in the same manner.
• Note that the motor files are arranged by manufacturer.
For designing a new HSP installation, do not enter any HSP System data - go
directly to | Design | Hydraulic Pump | Design and enter the following design
specifications:
PROSPER MANUAL
• Pump Depth: 8000 (feet)

• Pump Maximum Allowable OD: 6.1 (inches)
• Turbine Maximum Allowable OD: 6.1 (inches)
• Design (Liquid) Rate: 6000 (STB/day)
• Water Cut: 80 (percent)
• Top Node Pressure: 50 (psig)
• Pump Speed: 6000 (rpm)
• Total GOR: 300 (scf/STB)
• % Power Fluid of Reservoir Fluid: 50 (percent)
• Pump Wear Factor: 0 (fraction)
• Surface Equipment Correlation: Dukler Flannigan
• Vertical Lift Correlation: Petroleum Experts 2 (clear
any correction
parameters if
applicable)
A5.2 Designing The Pump

Click | Calculate to display the pump duty calculation screen. Click Calculate again
to find the pump duty as per the following example:
Figure A5.2
HSP Design duty
Click | Done and | Design and PROSPER will display the HSP Design screen.

Figure A5.3
HSP - Pump Selection
For this example, select the Weir TP115AH(4250-12325) rpm from the list of suitable
pumps. The pump needs 69 stages and will require 284 HP at the design rate.
From the list of suitable turbines, select a weir T55-B.
Click Plot to display the design operating point superimposed on the pump
performance curve:
Figure A5.4
Weir TP115-AH
This pump is operating close to its optimum efficiency.
PROSPER MANUAL
A5.3 Checking the Design for Changed Conditions

Now, we must check whether this design will be able to cope with expected
variations in the well conditions expected to occur over the next few years. This is
done using the | System section to compute sensitivities as follows:
Figure A5.5
HSP – System Calculation
• Click | System and enter a top node pressure of 50 psi and a water cut of
80%
• Check that Dukler Flannigan has been selected for surface equipment and
Petroleum Experts 2 is selected for the vertical lift correlation
• Select User Selected rates and Generate 10 rates between 10 and 10,000
BFPD.
• Click | Continue and enter the following sensitivity variables:
For variable 1
− Select Water cut
Enter 80, 95
For variable 2
− Reservoir Pressure
Enter 4000, 4500
For variable 3
− Select pump speed
Enter 5000-6000-7000
Click | Continue | Calculate to perform the sensitivity calculations.
Once the calculations have been completed, click | Solution Details, select the
design case variables of 80% water cut, 4500 psi reservoir pressure and 6000 rpm

pump speed by clicking on the variable arrows. The calculated liquid off-take rate is
close to 6100 STB/day.
Plot the sensitivities by clicking | Pump Plot from the pump solution screen as
follows:
Figure A5.6
HSP – Sensitivity
To find the required motor horsepower, return to the sensitivity screen and click on |
Combinations. Input the data shown on the following screen to set up 2 scenarios:
Figure A5.7
HSP Combination
Calculate the sensitivities then click | Solution Details to inspect the results for each
Case.
PROSPER MANUAL
For 90% water cut, reservoir pressure of 4000 psig and pump speed of 7000
rpm, the HSP pump can lift about 7000 STB/day, provided that the turbine can
supply the additional power. Before finalising the design, more extensive
sensitivities should be run and the manufacturer's specifications must be
checked to ensure that the specified HSP will work under different scenarios.
A6 Example 6 – Jet Pump Design

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/jetpump.out
The Jet pump design section calculates the pump duty required to achieve a given
design rate. According to the input data such as power fluid information the program
calculates the ratio between the nozzle and throat area and calculates the nozzle
diameter and throat diameter. A pump is then selected from the user-defined
database of jet pump characteristics
A6.1 Menu Options

f jet pump was selected as a lift method in the Options menu the following additional
options will be available in the Design -> Jet Pump menu:
• Design
• Jet Pump Database
A6.2 Jet Pump Design

The Jet Pump design section calculates the head requirement, pump intake and
discharge pressures required to achieve a specified surface production rate. The
program then allows the user to select a Jet pump from a user-entered database that
is suitable for the service.
A6.3 Jet Pump Database
This section allows the input and maintenance of manufacturer's jet pump
characteristics. The user can either modify existing data or add new jet pump data to
the database via the PROSPER main tool bar Design | Database option.

A6.4 Model Set Up

From the Option Menu, select jet pump as the artificial lift method (Figure A6.1).
Select the jet pump type:
• Tubing injection and annular production

• Annular injection tubing production.
Set the correct tubing Flow Type, for this case Annular Flow is required to coincide
with the tubing injection – annular production jet pump selection (Figure A6.1).
Figure A6.1
Defining the PROSPER
options menu
A6.5 PVT Section

From the PROSPER PVT section select the desired power fluid from the drop list box
(Figure A6.2).
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A6.2
PVT section defining
water as the power fluid
In this example the power fluid is 30 API oil with 20cp viscosity at standard
conditions.
Tables of viscosities at different pressure and temperatures (for the expected

conditions) have to be generated. In order to generate the viscosity tables with the
appropriate correlation the following procedure must be completed:
• Select Other Fluid in the drop list box and enter the density of the power fluid
in the input box (Figure A6.3).
Figure A6.3
Defining oil as the power
fluid
• In the input parameters section, input the power fluid parameters:
GOR: 0 scf/stb
Oil Gravity: 30 API (power fluid density)
Gas gravity: 0.7 (It is not used since GOR=0)
Water salinity: 100,000 ppm (Not used)

• Match data input screen. In this section enter the viscosity of the power fluid
at the measured temperature. (Up to 5 tables for different temperatures can
be input).
Figure A6.4
Power fluid match data
• Perform a regression to match all the viscosity correlations with the match
data.
• Review and select the viscosity correlation that needs the least corrections
factors (Multiplier and shift). For this particular case Beal et.al. required the
least correction 0.98 and -0.21.
• Select the most appropriate correlation as previous examples then select

Properties to input the power fluid (Figure A6.5).
Figure A6.5
Power fluid properties
PROSPER MANUAL
• The Properties menu enables tables for viscosities at different temperatures

to be created (Figure A6.6)
Figure A6.6
Generate power fluid
properties
• Enter the range of temperature and pressure data then click Generate to
calculate the table values (Figure A6.7)
Figure A6.7
Power fluid
properties section
• Click Plot to visualize the power fluid viscosities vs. pressure at different
temperatures (Figure A6.8)
PVT Power fluid properties

Â The reason of entering the power fluid in the PVT section as well as in the
match data was to match the viscosity correlations for the power fluid. One
of the viscosity correlations has to be selected (the most close correlation
to the match data). The viscosity tables for different temperatures were
created using the matched correlation.

Figure A6.8
Power fluid properties
Plot showing power fluid
viscosity vs. pressure
at different temperatures
• Once the viscosities tables for the power fluid have been generated, the
regression parameters must be reset. To do this, select Regression
|Parameters | Reset all (Figure A6.9)
Figure A6.9
Regression parameters
• In the PVT input parameter section the properties of the oil must be entered
as per the following table. Complete the PVT matching as for previous
examples
GOR Oil Gravity Gas Gravity Water Salinity

(scf/stb) (0API) (ppm)
100 20 0.7 100000
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A6.10
Oil Input parameters
• Click Match Data and enter the PVT match data shown in the following table
Oil
Pressure GOR Oil FVF viscosity
psig scf/stb rb/stb cp
820 100 1.08 11.1
A6.11
PVT match data
• Perform the regression analysis and select the correlations that need the least
correction. In this particular case Standing for bubble point, solution GOR and
formation volume factor and Petrosky et al for the oil viscosity.
A6.6 Inflow performance relationship

Change the IPR input as per the following data:
Reservoir pressure: 1800 psig

Reservoir Temperature: 150 F

Water cut: 0 %
GOR: 100 scf/stb
Productivity index: 0.45 stb/day/psi
A6.7 Downhole Equipment

Enter the deviation survey, surface equipment, down-equipment, geothermal
gradient and average heat capacities as explain in the user guide. In this particular
example the following information has been used:
Deviation: Vertical well (0 to 4100 ft)

Tubing up to 4000 ft. OD: 2.875 in
ID: 2.441 in
Casing up to 4100 ft ID: 6.36 in
For the geothermal gradient a surface temperature of 60F has been used.
A6.8 Jet Pump Design Calculation

To access this section into the main menu bar and select Design | Jet Pump
In this section the user has to define the measured pump depth, the maximum OD of
the pump, the liquid rate for the design, the water cut, total GOR, well head pressure.
The power fluid surface injection rate and injection pressure must also be entered
(Figure A6.12).
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A6.12
Jet pump design input
screen
Click Calculate | Calculate. The program will calculate the pump duty required
based on the inflow performance relationship, the pressure losses in the tubing and
the entered well head pressure. Based on the power fluid injection rate and
pressure PROSPER will calculate ‘R’ (ratio between nozzle and throat area), the
diameter of the throat and the diameter of the nozzle.
Figure A6.13
Calculation results from the
jet pump design
The next step is to choose a jet pump that best-fits the calculated data, select Done |
Design (Figure A6.14)
The column labelled Desired (Figure A6.14) shows the calculated jet pump design
results. The selected jet pump calculated values from the defined user database
(selected from the drop list box) must closely match the theoretical calculated
results.

Figure A6.14
Jet pump design
After the jet pump design has been completed a system analysis calculation can be
performed (Figure A6.15).
From the main menu bar click Calculation | System | 3 Variables
Enter the following sensitivity values:
Top node pressure: 100 psig

Water cut: 30 %
Total GOR: 100 scf/stb
Vertical lift correlation: Petroleum Experts 2
Click Continue | Continue | Calculate and to plot the system analysis result click
Plot
From the plot main menu bar select Variable and then: VLP curve, Pump discharge
pressure and Pump intake pressure for the plotted variables (Figure A6.15).
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A6.15
System analysis plot
A7 Example 7 - Retrograde Condensate Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/condex.out ( EOS)
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/condex2.out ( BLACK OIL)
A7.1 Entering EOS PVT

A well example will be computed using the Equation of State PVT method.
The objective of this part is to show:
• How the data input for EOS PVT works

• How to calculate PVT tables and a phase envelope
• Comparison of the solution results from the convergence pressure
method.
To set up this problem, firstly clear the existing calculations by clicking File ⏐ New.
Recall the system data from the convergence pressure example by clicking File ⏐
Open ⏐ Analysis (.OUT) and double clicking on the filename of the previously saved
convergence pressure example (CONDEX.OUT).
Options Menu

Select Options and ensure the following options are set:
• PVT Method Equation of State

• Fluid * Retrograde Condensate
• Separator Multi-Stage
• Flow type Tubing flow
• Eq. of State Peng-Robinson
• Predicting Pressure only
• Gravel pack No
Â * Defining the correct fluid at this stage is important, since calculations

cannot continue unless the EOS detected fluid type agrees with the user-
selected fluid.
Click | Done, then PVT Input to display the PVT input screen:
Figure A7.1
EOS PVT Input
• The EOS input data is intended to be loaded from an external PVT simulation
program file using the Import button.
Â In case you want to use volume shift, you can enter the volume shift in the
form of S parameter and click on “ Use Vol. Shift” in the input screen
shown in Figure A-7.3.
To ensure that all the data has been correctly entered, and to check the type of fluid
described by the pseudo components entered.
PROSPER MANUAL
You can do so by pressing the Phase Envelope button and hitting plot. The phase
envelope calculation screen shows the fluid type as shown follows:
Figure A7.2
EOS Calculated Fluid Type
Figure A7.3
EOS Calculated Phase
Envelope

Once the input data has been specified, the user has the option of selecting
Calculation type. The options are:
o Calculated From EOS Model
In this option PROSPER will calculate the fluid properties from
the EOS data entered, using flash process, whenever it needs it.
o Interpolated From Generated Tables
In this case the user generates the tables from the EOS in
PROSPER and then PROSPER during calculations, uses these
tables for property evaluation. This makes the calculations
faster.
o Interpolated From Imported Tables.
In case, the user has elected to import all the properties as a
*.pvx file, it will use the imported tables for property evaluation.
THIS IS FOR CASES WHEN THE USER DOES NOT WANT
TO USE THE EOS OF PROSPER.
For this example, we selected the first option.
In order to use the entered EOS to generate tables, enter a range of pressures and
temperatures.
Click on Generate and | Calculate again check the EOS PVT values.
The saturation pressure at 300 degrees F should be 4596 psig.
Â Click Properties, and PROSPER will display the equivalent Black Oil
PVT properties for the reservoir fluid (Figure A7.4)
Figure A7.4
EOS Black Oil
properties
Click OK to return to the PVT calculation screen.
A7.2 Matching Menu / Correlation Selection

Perform Correlation Comparison entering the following Data:
First node pressure : 4000 psig
PROSPER MANUAL
Water to gas ratio: 0

Gas rate : 92 MMscf/d
Sep GOR: 7416 psig
Figure A7.5
EOS Correlation
Comparison
Â The Duns and Ros Modified bottom hole pressure for the correlation
comparison case is:
• Approx. 6972 psig, Predicted by the EOS method.
Perform | Calculation ⏐ System and use the following data
First Node Pressure 3000, 4000 (psig)

Water to Gas Ratio 0, 20 (STB/MMscf/d)
Tubing / Pipe diameter 4.78, 6.18 (in)
Click | Calculate to produce a system analysis plot similar to that below:

Figure A7.6
EOS System Solution
The calculations could take some time, so please be patient.
A7.3 BLACK OIL Condensate PVT

An identical well example as the previous one will be computed using the black oil
condensate PVT model.
The objective of this part is to show:
• How the data input for black oil condensate PVT works
• Comparison of the solution results from the other PVT methods.
To set up this problem, firstly clear the existing calculations by clicking File ⏐ New.
Recall the condensate example by clicking File ⏐ Open ⏐ and double clicking on the
filename of the previously saved condensate example (CONDEX.OUT).
A7.3.1 Selecting the Options

Select Options and ensure the following options are set:
• Fluid: Retrograde Condensate
• Separator Single - Stage
• Predicting Pressure only
• Gravel pack No
PROSPER MANUAL
Click | Done, then commence entry of the PVT data by clicking | PVT ⏐ Input data.
Enter the data as on the following screen:
Figure A7.7
Black Oil Condensate PVT
Input
Note that the above properties have been derived from an EOS calculation.
A7.3.2 Matching/ Correlation Selection

Click Matching ⏐ Correlation Comparison. Leave the analysis variables set as for
the other PVT methods and repeat the computations. Once the calculations have
stopped, click | Plot to display the following:
Figure A7.8
Gradient Comparison

Â The Duns and Ros Modified bottom hole pressure for the correlation
comparison case is:
• Approx. 7010 psig, Predicted by the EOS method.
• Approx. 7020 psig, Predicted by the Condensate Black Oil
Method.
This is in close agreement with that obtained from compositional modelling - even
though the liquid dropout values have not been matched in the Black Oil model.
Click Main to return to the main menu.
Â For condensate wells, the flow regime is normally mist. Prediction of

slip requires the phase volumes (hold-up) and densities. In mist
flow, the slip between liquid and gas is minimal. Even in this
example the flow regime is slug - but there is little slip between the
phases for the flow rates modelled. Provided that the mixture
density is accurate, lack of precision in the proportion of oil and gas
will cause little error in pressure loss calculations. This also explains
why the main flow correlations give virtually identical results to
Fancher Brown.
For condensate wells, the black oil PVT method can be recommended for:
• Accuracy of mixture density calculations
• Simplicity
• Speed of calculation
• Accuracy of pressure calculations
Calculating the System Solution

To perform the systems analysis, click Calculation ⏐ System. Check that the
calculation setup is unchanged from the previous PVT case.
Proceed to the calculation screen and click Calculate. The solution rates are shown
on the following plot:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A7.9
System Solution
The above condensate example has shown how to set up the PROSPER calculations
for the different condensate PVT methods. It also illustrates that the Black Oil PVT
method is capable of accurate well pressure prediction and is more computationally
efficient than more complex PVT methods.
A8 Example 8 - Gravel Packed Gas Well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/gravel.out

• Design a gravel packed completion for a high rate gas well
• Determine the allowable off-take for a specified drawdown on the formation
• Enter the gravel pack and completion parameters

• Calculate sensitivities on gravel pack and perforation variables
• Calculate the pressure loss across the completion and thereby determine the
drawdown at the sand face.
A8.1 Model Set Up

From the main menu, click on | File ⏐ New to reset input, analysis and output data.
Set up a new problem by making the following selections on the | Options menu:

A8.1.1 Options Menu

• Fluid: Retrograde condensate
• Separator Single stage
• Predicting Pressure and temperature (offshore)
• Model Rough approximation
• Gravel pack Yes
A8.1.2 PVT menu

Click | Done and enter the following data on the PVT ⏐ Input screen:
• Separator pressure 1200 psig
• Separator temperature 120 deg F
• Separator GOR 25,000 scf/STB
• Separator gas gravity 0.7 specific gravity
• Tank GOR 1 scf/STB
• Tank gas gravity 0.7 specific gravity
• Condensate gravity 55 API
• Water to gas ratio 4 bbl/MMscf
• Water salinity 10,000 ppm
• Dew point at reservoir temp. 4500 psig
• Reservoir temperature 220 degrees F
Select the Lee et al gas viscosity correlation, then click | Done to return to the main
menu.
A8.1.3 System Menu (Equip & Inflow)

Equipment Data
Click System ⏐ Equipment ⏐ All ⏐ Edit and enter the following equipment description:
• Deviation Survey
Bottom MD TVD
(ft) (ft)
0 0
10000 10000
• Enter NO surface equipment.
• Enter the tubing string details as follows under down hole section:
PROSPER MANUAL
Bottom MD ID Roughness
(ft) (ins) (ins)
Xmas tree 0
Tubing 500 3.958 0.0006
SSSV 3
Tubing 9800 3.958 0.0006
Casing 10000 8.681 0.0006
• Enter the flowing temperature survey data:
Bottom MD Formation temperature

(ft) (deg F)
0 60
10000 220
Overall heat transfer coefficient 4.0 BTU/hr/ft2/F
Well Inflow and Gravel Pack Input

• Define the well inflow performance as follows:
• IPR method: Petroleum Experts
• Mechanical / Geometrical skin method Karakas & Tariq
• Deviation / Partial penetration skin Cinco / Martin-Bronz
• Reservoir temperature 220 deg F
• Water / Gas ratio 4 BBL/MMscf
Click on the | Input data button on the top right hand corner of the window. In the
reservoir model data entry screen, enter the following:
• Reservoir permeability 300 mD
• Reservoir thickness 100 ft
• Drainage area 640 acres
• Dietz shape factor 31.6
• Well bore radius 0.51 ft
• Perforation interval 50 ft
• Reservoir Porosity 0.2 fraction
• Time 100 days
• Connate water saturation 0.2 fraction
• Non-Darcy coefficient Calculated
• Permeability entered Total permeability
Then click on the | Mech./ Geom. skin tab and enter the following:
• Perforation diameter 0.5 ins
• Shots per foot 6 1/ft
• Perforation length 12 ins
• Damaged zone thickness 12 ins
• Damaged zone permeability 150 mD
• Crushed zone thickness 0.2 ins
• Crushed zone permeability 75 mD
• Shot phasing 60 degrees

• Vertical permeability 30 mD
Click on the | Dev/PROSPER skin tab, and enter the following:

• Deviation 0 degrees
• Penetration 0.5
Click on the | Gravel pack tab and define the gravel pack parameters as follows:
• Gravel pack perm 40000 mD
• Gravel pack length 1.3 ins
• Perforation efficiency 1
Click | Calculate and the program will calculate an AOF of 116 MMscf/day display the
IPR on a plot. Click | Main and return to the main menu.
A8.2 Sensitivity Calculation Menu

To evaluate the sensitivity of the well to completion parameters such as:
• perforation density
• gravel pack permeability
Click | Calculation ⏐ System (Ipr + Vlp).
Select Dukler Flannigan as the surface equipment correlation and Duns and Ros
Modified for the VLP correlation.
Leave the rate method set to Automatic linear and click OK.
Set the top node pressure to 1200 psig and the water/gas ratio to 4 bbl/ MMscf.
Click OK again to display the sensitivity variables screen.
To perform the design sensitivity calculations, enter the following sensitivity

variables:
For variable 1
− Select Shots per foot
Enter 4, 8, 12
For variable 2
− Select Gravel pack permeability
Enter 10000, 40000, 80000
For variable 3
− Select First node Pressure
Enter 1200, 2000, 3000
Click | Continue.
• Calculate to perform the system sensitivity calculations.
PROSPER MANUAL
• From the calculation screen select Sensitivity (Figure A8.1) to plot the sensitivity
data select Variables and select dP Completion as the Y-axis variable, Shots per
foot for the X-axis and gravel pack permeability for the parameter variable.
• Plot the results for 1200 psi top node pressure. A graph similar to Figure A8.2 will
be displayed:
Figure A8.1
Sensitivity calculation
Figure A8.2
Gravel Pack Sensitivity
Â Note that when the sand face pressure drops below the dew point,
liquid dropout occurs. The Petroleum Experts IPR reduces the relative
permeability to gas when liquids are being produced.
• In this producing area, field trials and lab tests have established that gravel pack
failure should not occur provided that the total pressure drop across the
completion is less than 400 psi (for purposes of illustration only)

• By inspection, the above sensitivity plot shows that 12 shots per foot perforations
and a gravel pack permeability of 40 Darcies will be required to ensure that the
well will not have to be choked back unnecessarily.
Return to the calculation screen and click on | Solution Detail, then select the
solution for
• 12 SPF, 40000 mD and 1200 psi.
From the solution summary, we know that the pressure drop across the completion
is almost all due to the gravel pack. In excess of 85 MMscf/day can be safely
produced with this completion design.
To determine the allowable rate
• if the well had been perforated at 8 SPF
Make a sensitivity plot with dP completion on the Y-axis, First node pressure on the
X-axis and Gravel Pack Permeability as the parameter variable.
Figure A8.3
Gravel Pack Sensitivity
Assume that the gravel pack has 40000 mD permeability. Zoom on curve 1 (8 SPF)
near where it is around 400 psi dP completion and read off the First Node Pressure.
You should get around 2500 psi.
Click | Finish and | Done to display the Select variables screen.
To calculate the gas production rate for 400 psi dP completion, use the
Combinations option on the Select variables screen. Enter the following for
combination Case 1:
PROSPER MANUAL
• Shots per foot 8 1/ft

• Gravel pack permeability 40000 mD
• First node pressure 2500 psig
Leave the rate field blank. Click | Continue and then | Calculate. PROSPER will
calculate the system solution. Click | Solution details and check that the well can
flow at 63 MMscf/day with a THP of 2500 and a dP across the completion of 410 psi.
Note that the allowable rate at 8 shots per foot is more than 20 MMscf/day lower
than the allowable with 12 shots per foot.
A8.2.1 IPR Liquid Sensitivity

To evaluate the effect of increased liquid production on IPR and production rates,
click Main to return to the main menu. Click Calculation ⏐ System (Ipr + Vlp).
Leave the input parameters as for the preceding runs. Click | Continue | Variables
and clear the existing sensitivity variable entries. Next, enter the following sensitivity
data for variable 1 only:
− Select Separator GOR

Enter 2000, 5000, 25000 scf/STB
Click | Continue to continue to the calculation screen. Click | Calculate and

calculate the sensitivities. Click Plot ⏐ Variables and select IPR, VLP and dP skin
completion for Y-variable, and choose all three separator GOR, then click | Done to
display the following:
Figure A8.4
IPR liquid sensitivity

Note the effect of Separator GOR on both VLP and IPR pressures. Note that
increasing liquid production increases the completion dP.
Click | Main to return to the main menu. Save the file as GRAVEL.OUT if desired.
A9 Example 9 - Horizontal Well - Friction dP

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/hwell.out
The example shows how to set up the input data for a Horizontal well - Friction dP
IPR model. It is based on the OILWELL example file.
• Note that the reservoir permeability must be increased from 50 in the base
example to 500 millidarcies in order to see the friction pressures drop along the
well bore.
A9.1 Model Set Up

From the main menu, click File ⏐ New to reset input, analysis and output data. Click
File ⏐ Open and select OILWELL.OUT from the SAMPLES sub-directory. This will
avoid the need to enter down hole equipment or PVT data.
A9.1.1 IPR Data Input

Click System ⏐Inflow Performance and enter the following:
IPR Method Horizontal Well - dP Friction loss
Reservoir Pressure 5,000 psig
Reservoir Temperature 210 deg F
Water Cut 0 percent
Click on the | Input data button, and enter the following data for the reservoir and
horizontal well.
Horizontal Well Model Kuchuk and Goode
Reservoir Permeability 500 mD
Reservoir Thickness 200 feet
Horizontal Anisotropy 1 fraction
Vertical Anisotropy 0.2 fraction
Well Length 1,000 feet
Reservoir Length 10,000 feet
Reservoir Width 5,000 feet
Length distance to reservoir edge 2,000 feet
Width distance to reservoir edge 1,000 feet
Bottom of reservoir to well centre 100 feet
PROSPER MANUAL
Next, set up the well completion details i.e. zone data.
• This well has alternating perforated and blank sections, which are identical.
• We will enter the data for two only two zones, one blank one producing.
• Then we will use the editing features to copy identical data to the other zones.
• For the first zone enter the following:
Zone Type Perforated
Skin Method By Hand
Gravel Pack This will be automatically skipped
Zone Length 100 feet
Zone Permeability 500 mD
Flowing Radius 0.15 feet
Zone Roughness 0.001 inches
Click the Zone Data button and enter the following:

• Skin 2
• Well bore Radius 0.354
Click | Done
• Enter the following for the second Zone:
Zone Type Blank
Zone Length 100 feet
Flowing Radius 0.15 feet
Zone Roughness 0.001 inches
• Copy the data for Zone 1 (perforated) and 2 (blank) to other layers as follows:
• Select the layers by clicking the select button to the left of the screen for
Zone 1.
• Hold down the Control key and select Zone 2 also.
• Click Copy to copy the elected layers into memory.
• Click the select button for Zone 3, then Paste to transfer Zone 1 and 2 data
to zones 3 and 4.
• Select Zone 5 and repeat the Paste process.
• Work through to Zone 9 to complete the data input for all 10 zones.

Figure A9.1
Horizontal well - dP Friction
IPR input
A9.2 Coning Calculations for Horizontal Wells

PROSPER has some Steady-State gas / water coning models implemented
specifically for horizontal wells to estimate the critical rates for coning.
• These calculations also calculate the pressure loss along the well bore and allow
the user to display the pressure profiles.
To access these calculations, click Coning, and enter the following:

Rate 40,000 STB/day
Reservoir Porosity 0.2 fraction
Coning Calculation Water Coning
Â All the IPR input must have been defined before performing the
coning calculations.
Click | Calculate, and the breakthrough time and critical rate estimates will be
displayed.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A9.2
Horizontal well – Coning
Calculations Screen
To calculate and display the horizontal well pressure profile and production
contribution from each zone for the entered rate, click Plot. PROSPER will display a
graph similar to the following:
Figure A9.3
Horizontal well - dP Friction
Well pressure profile
The source of inflow can be plotted by clicking Variables and selecting Rate per Unit
Length. As shown in the following plot, more production enters at the heel of the well
than the toe:

Figure A9.4
Horizontal well - Rate per
Unit Length
Click | Finish | Done to return to the IPR calculation screen.

When you click | Calculate from this screen, PROSPER calculates the entire IPR
curve and finds the AOF. Click | Main, and you are returned to the main PROSPER
screen without carrying out the potentially time consuming AOF calculation.
Once the Horizontal well dP friction IPR, has been calculated, System calculations
can be carried out as normal. If you need to calculate a wide range of sensitivity
cases, the dP friction model could be used to prepare a table of test data points to be
entered in one of the fast-calculating multi-rate IPR models.
A10 Example 10 - Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/mlayer.out
The example shows how to set up the input data for a Multi-Layer IPR model. It is
based on the OILWELL example file.
A10.1 Model Set Up

• From the main menu, click File⏐New to reset inputs, analysis and output data.
• Click File ⏐ Open ⏐ Input and Analysis and select OILWELL.OUT from the
SAMPLES sub-directory.
• This will avoid the need to enter down hole equipment or PVT data.
PROSPER MANUAL
A10.2 IPR Data Input

Click System ⏐ Inflow Performance and enter the following:
IPR Method Multi-layer - dP loss

Reservoir Temperature 210 deg F
Relative Permeability No
Click on | Input data, and the layer data entry screen will be displayed.
Figure A10.1
Multi-Layer data Input
The following description shows how to set up a well model with two layers
separated by 100 feet.
A10.2.1 STEP1: Defining the top of the multi-layer system

Enter the location of the top of the producing zone - measured depth 11,400, TVD
10,430. This is the deepest depth in the deviation survey table.
A10.2.2 STEP2: Defining the to Top Producing layer

Enter the following data for Layer 1 (Top Producing Zone):
Layer type Perforated
Layer IPR model Darcy
Layer skin model By hand
Measured depth 11,500 feet
True vertical depth 10,500 feet

Layer pressure 5000 psig

Layer flowing radius 0.25 feet
Layer roughness 0.001 inches
Click the Layer PVT data button and enter the following:
Layer formation GOR 820 scf/STB
Layer oil gravity 34 API
Layer gas gravity 0.7 s.g.
Layer water cut 0 percent
Click | Done.
Click on Layer model data button and enter the following:

Layer permeability 100 mD
Layer drainage area 640 acres
Layer Dietz shape factor 31.6
Layer well bore radius 0.354 feet
Click | Done.
Click on Layer skin data button and enter a skin of 2.
A10.2.3 STEP3: Defining the non producing zone

Layer 2 is the section of blank pipe that separates the two producing layers. Enter
the following for Layer 2.
Layer type Blank
A10.2.4 STEP4: Defining the to Bottom Producing layer

Enter the following for Layer 3:
Layer type Perforated
Layer IPR model P.I. Entry
Layer pressure 4800 psig
Click the | Layer PVT data button and enter the following:
PROSPER MANUAL
Layer formation GOR 820 scf/STB

Layer oil gravity 34 API
Layer gas gravity 0.7 s.g.
Layer water cut 30 percent
Click | Done.
Click Layer model data button and enter

PI 5.
Click | Done | Calculate and PROSPER will calculate the composite IPR at the intake
node.
The IPR plot shows the layer contributions and the combined IPR as in the following
example:
Figure A10.2
Multi-layer dP pressure loss
Click Results to see the layer pressures and production contributions. Crossflow into
a layer appears as a negative production value as in the following example:

Figure A10.3
Multi-layer dP pressure
loss Results Screen
A11 Example 11 – Multilateral well

File: ~/samples/PROSPER/multilat1.out
A11.1 Introduction
Multi-lateral wells are being recognized as a potential option when developing new
oil and gas fields. Often, these types of wells are drilled to save the costs of drilling,
this may occur if drilling individual targets is sub - economic or the platform is
constrained. Sometimes they are not beneficial.
Co-mingling the flow from two targets (branches) may result in higher outflow
performance in the event that a larger tubing size can be specified; this leads to a
lower frictional pressure drop than in obtained in each individual well. But
sometimes, co-mingling fluids may result in greater frictional pressure drop than
expected, so poorer outflow performance than two individual wells will result, it
means that well productivity depends on interference effects in both reservoir and
well bore. Cross flow might represent another potential problem if targets for several
branches are chosen without any proper study.
This is where modelling work can add most of the value: multilateral wells are
different to single wells because they have a variable structure. Both the number of
branches and the way that they are connected is variable, and also the interaction
between each branch should be taken in to account. Hence, a flexible way to model
must be used to understand the behaviour of this type of wells.
PROSPER MANUAL
A11.2 Model Set Up

• Go through the step by step procedure for defining a multi-lateral well

• Consider the situation in which a high angle multilateral side track that will
target a thin zone in a fault block has to be drilled but an investigation of the of
the increase of oil and interference has to be analysed first as well as the
productivity index.
This example can be found in the samples directory under the name of
MULTILAT1.OUT file. However, following the steps indicated below, you would be
able to generate the model from scratch.
Figure A11.1
Well Sketch that displays
the drilling program
The multilateral data entry screen is accessed by choosing | System | Inflow

Performance from the PROSPER main menu, as with the single well IPR.

Figure A11.2
System Summary
Inflow type: Multilateral
1. Begin by starting the program. From the PROSPER main menu, select File ⏐
New to reinitialise the program input and output files. The ‘New’ menu item
under File is only available if a file has already been loaded. If there is no
file loaded skip this step and go to next step.
2. To begin setting up the system options, select Options⏐ Options or double-click

on the ‘SUMMARY DATA’ area and make the following selections:

• Method: Black Oil
• Predict: Pressure and Temperature (Offshore)
• Model: Rough Approximation
• Range: Full System
• Output: Show Calculating Data
• Type: Cased Hole
• Gravel pack: No
• Reservoir: Multi-Lateral well.
Then click Done to exit this screen. This completes the system setup and reinitialises
the program and governs the inputs that the user will be required to enter.
PROSPER MANUAL
Entering the PVT data

3. In this section we will enter the PVT input data required.
4. Select the PVT menu in the main screen:
• Click Input data

or
• Double-click on the ‘PVT DATA’ area of the main screen and enter the following:
Solution GOR: 752 scf/stb

Oil Gravity: 32 API
Gas Gravity 0.67
Mole Percent H2S: 0%
Mole Percent CO2: 0%
Mole Percent N2: 0%
Figure A11.3
PVT Input Screen
Click Done on the above screen to exit. This marks the end of defining the PVT
behaviour
Entering the Equipment data

5. The next task is to define the well bore itself and surface lines (if any). This is
done in the following steps.
• Click System ⏐ Equipment (Tubing etc) on the main PROSPER screen

or
• Double-click on the ‘EQUIPMENT DATA’ area

6. Then click All ⏐ Edit

The program will automatically lead you through the required equipment data
screens starting with the well deviation survey. Enter the following into the deviation
survey data table:
Measured True
Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
0 0
9700 8800

cumulative displacement and the angle of the well.
• Click Done to continue to the surface equipment screen

• Click Cancel to enter NO surface flow line data
• The down-hole equipment screen will then appear. Enter the data in the
screen as follows
• The well has 4.67" ID tubing down to 13000 ft, which is the tie point.
• Click on the Type cells to get a combo box of options and enter the
following down hole equipment:
Type Measured IDs Roughne

Depth ss
(feet) (ins)
(ins)
Xmas 0
tree
Tubing 9700 4.67 0.0006
Figure A11.4
Equipment
Input Screen
PROSPER MANUAL
• Click Done to advance to the geothermal data entry screen. Once on the screen,
enter the following temperature profile:
Measured Formation
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 60
9700 200
Enter an overall heat transfer coefficient of 8 Btu/hr/ft2/F. Click | Done to exit the
screen.
• This takes you to the default heat capacity screen. Let it remain as it is. Click on
Done to go to the next screen.
Figure A11.5
Geothermal Gradient
When satisfied that the well equipment is correct, click Main to return to the
PROSPER main
Notes about Equipment Data Entry Screens
Â i) Make sure that the measured depth of last piece of equipment

in the downhole equipment is the same as the last depth in
geothermal gradient.
ii) All measured depths in the downhole equipment are
converted to true vertical depths as per the deviation survey
entered. Thus the deepest point of the deviation survey
should be at least as deep as last point of equipment/
iii) The geothermal gradient should have a temperature entry

corresponding to depth of wellhead.

iv) If you have a pipeline in the system, the upstream end of the
pipeline should tally with wellhead depth.
Available data for the Top and bottom layer
Top layer:
Reservoir Pressure 3900 psig
Reservoir Temperature 218 degrees F
Oil Gravity 34 API
Gas Gravity 0.67 sp. Gravity
Water Cut 56 percent
Horizontal Permeability 10 md
Formation Thickness 150 feet
Depth of Reservoir Top 8770 feet
Vertical Permeability 10 md
Bottom Layer:
Oil Gravity 34 API
Gas Gravity 0.67 sp. gravity
Water Cut 56 percent
According to the drilling program, the tie point will be considered at measured depth
of 9700 ft m (8800 ft vertical depth). The deviation survey of the original well and the
side track are indicated below.
Completion 1
Measured Vertical Azimuth

Depth depth
feet feet degrees
9850 8920 0
11473 8968 347
11550 8969 332
11650 8971 313
11750 8974 294
11759 8974 292
13550 9013 292
PROSPER MANUAL
13900 9020 292
Side track

Depth Depth
feet feet degrees
9850 8920 0
10700 8770 327
The user interface consists of a framework window that contains several child
child windows include the network windows that contain the system network drawing,
the navigator window that can assist in the viewing of large networks and up to three
visualisation windows, which can show the multilateral network drawn to scale from
three orthogonal points of view.
Figure A11.6
PROSPER
Multilateral
Network
To start drawing your multilateral system considering the well sketch, start selecting
the tie point, junction, completion (1) and Completion (side track) as well as the top
and bottom reservoir.

Figure A11.7
Adding the
completion and
reservoirs
Once you have the basic drawing according to your well sketch and drilling program,
then you can use the button (add link) to finish with this part.
To enter the required data for each section all you have to do is to double click on
each icon. It is recommended to start from the tie point to the reservoir according to
the well sketch.
A Note about Tie Point
Â The tie point defined, is the point above which everything will be a part
of wellbore sketch and thus the pressure loss etc in that section will be a
part of VLP. Everything below the tie point is a part of the IPR and
pressure losses in this section will be evaluated in IPR calculations.
Figure A11.8
Linking the tie point
with the joint,
completion and
reservoir.
PROSPER MANUAL
If you double click on the tie point enter the measured depth and true vertical depth
as indicated previously. The tie point is the node where the IPR is solved and is
located at the top of the system (in vertical depth). Hence, the tie-point can only be a
start point.
The Junction point will be a branching node. It can only have one link into it (from a
tie-point or a completion).
Once these two points have been defined, then, Deviation Survey and Down hole
Equipment and Perforation Details can be entered. In the case of the deviation
survey there is an additional azimuth entry.
When the user put the information respectively for each branch the calculations can
be performed.
Tie point:
Measured depth of 9700 ft m, 8800 ft vertical depth
Junction 1:
The tubing information entry is a two-step process. First we define the model for
pressure loss calculations. We will also be using the following model:
Horizontal Flow Model: Beggs and Brill

Vertical Flow Model: Petroleum Experts 2
Choke Model: ELF
Flow Type: Tubing
Correlation Threshold: No
Threshold Angle: 45 Degrees
Well Bore radius: 0.43 feet
The screens for entering the tubing flow model are as shown below:
Figure A11.9
Tubing Model Selection
screen

Once the model is entered, if on the above screen you Press the Input Data button, it
takes you to the next screen where you enter the deviation survey of this path of the
completion including the azimuth.
Measured True Azimuth

Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
9700 8800 0
9850 8920 0
Figure A11.10
Tubing deviation survey
Input Screen
Once the deviation survey is entered, we will need to enter the equipment
information like the tubing diameters etc, in the next screen. This screen is accessed
by clicking on the TAB called EQUIPMENT in the bottom left hand corner of the
screen shown above.
Tubing Measured IDs Roughne

Type Depth ss
(feet) (ins)
(ins)
Start 9700
Tubing 9850 4.67 0.0006
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A11.11
Tubing description Input
Screen
This finishes the entry of tubing information.
Completion 1
Double click on completion 1 to enter the input data.
Select the information required such as vertical flow model, well bore radius, and
Dietz shape factor.
For this example the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation will be used, a well bore radius of
0.43 ft and Dietz shape factor of 30 will be considered.
Figure A11.12
Completion 1,
Calculation options
screen.
When your press the option Input Data, you will see that there are three tabbed
dialogs in this data input screen, which allow the entry of a deviation survey,

equipment descriptions and completion information. The first two dialogs contain
tables very similar to the ones encountered by selecting System | Equipment from
the PROSPER main menu, and then the ‘Deviation Survey’ and ‘Down hole
Equipment’ push buttons. In the case of the deviation survey there is an additional
azimuth entry.
Enter first the deviation survey:
Figure A11.13
Completion 1
Deviation Survey
Screen
Once you enter the deviation survey, select the equipment and select tubing
according to the deviation survey, the tubing in the completion 1 has been run down
to 13900 ft and has a diameter of 3 in.
Figure A11.14
Completion 1
Equipment
PROSPER MANUAL
According to the drilling program, this completion has been perforated between
11855 ft and 13900 ft.
Figure A11.15
Completion 1
Perforation details
Finally double click on the reservoir and enter the PVT data as well as the
information required to calculate the inflow performance based on the Darcy Model.
The information has been provided at the beginning of this example.
Figure A11.16
Bottom Reservoir
PVT Data
Press Input to continue and enter the information for the reservoir.

Figure A11.17
Bottom Reservoir
Inflow data based
on
Darcy Reservoir
Model
Once finished with the first completion, you can go on entering the correspondent
information for the multilateral section. So just double click on the side track
completion.
Dietz shape factor.
In this case the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation will be used, a well bore radius of 0.43 ft
and Dietz shape factor of 30 will be considered.
Figure A11.18
Sidetrack
Input Data
Select input data and enter first the deviation survey.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A11.19
Sidetrack
Deviation Survey
Once you enter the deviation survey, select the equipment and select tubing,
according to the deviation survey, the tubing in the side track has been run down to
10700 ft and has a diameter of 3 in.
Figure A11.20
Sidetrack
Equipment
According to the drilling program, this completion has been perforated for 700 ft,
from 10000 ft to 10700 ft.

Figure A11.21
Side Track
Perforation
details
Finally double click on the reservoir and enter the PVT data, as well as the
Figure A11.22
Top Layer
PVT Data
Press Input Data to continue and enter the information for the reservoir.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A11.23
Top Layer
Inflow data based
on
Darcy Reservoir
Model
Once entered the information for the two branches (completion 1 and side track),
from PROSPER – Multilateral Network Menu, select the option Visualise all:
Figure A11.24
Visualise All
A11.3 Inflow Calculations

From PROSPER – Multilateral Network Menu, select the option Analyse/Calculate
The Calculate screen gives the option of calculating one IPR point or a curve.

Also, calculations can be switched between infinite and finite conductivity modes of
calculation. In the latter case (finite) the pressure drop in the tubing is taken into
account
Figure A11.25
Calculate
The Finite conductivity solution takes in account the pressure drop and
interference, whilst the Infinite conductivity considers equal pressure and constant
production rate at all times. The flow distribution is used then to calculate the
pressure around the source.
The pressure of the reservoir approaches to a constant value, then if in one

particular branch in the reservoir is surrounded by a constant pressure boundary, the
pressure in the well and the boundary will become constant (steady state pressure),
when the steady state pressure is normalized respect to the flow rate, it provides a
measure of the pressure draw-down required to flow a unit of volume per unit time.
The Details button is used to display pressure and rate-related parameters with
respect to the measured and vertical tubing depths of each branch. If a curve has
been calculated, these details pertain to the last point in the curve.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A11.26
Details
To visualise the results press Plot, and from the menu toolbar select Variables.

Figure A11.27
Plot results
True Vertical Depth
vs. Rate per unit
length and
pressure
Figure A11.28
Results
Considering Infinite
conductivity
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A11.29
Results
Considering
Finite
Conductivity
References:
1.- SPE 5589

Pseudo Skin Factors for Partially Penetrating Directionally drilled Wells
Heber Cinco Ley & H.J. Ramey
2.- SPE 3818

The use of source and Green’s Functions in Solving Unsteady flow Problems in
Reservoirs
Gringarten
3.- Fluid Flow in porous media

By Muskat

A12 Example 12 – Modelling of a smart well completion

using Multilateral option in PROSPER
• Show how a complex smart well completion can be modelled by using

the multilateral option in PROSPER
• Show how different tubing sizes can affect the IPR curve
A12.1 Statement of the problem

The smart well completion that we are going to model has the following structure.
Production packer Quantum packer Diverted flow
50 ft
150 ft 100 ft 100 ft 100 ft 100 ft
100 ft ID=6.969”
ID=4.778”
5 ½” tubing 3 3/8” tubing

(ID=2.041”)
• The horizontal completion consists of concentric casing and tubing.

• The reservoir fluid is flowing into an annular space between the casing and the
tubing through the perforation segments along the casing.
• The fluid is flowing in a direction away from the tie point; let us call this direction
positive x.
• The total fluid then flows into tubing where their direction of flow is changed to the
negative x direction.
• The tie point of the completion is located at a true vertical depth of 10,000 ft
below the wellhead.
PROSPER MANUAL
A12.2 Model Set Up

Begin by starting the program. From the PROSPER main menu, select File ⏐ New to
reinitialise the program input and output files. The ‘New’ menu item under File is only
available if a file has already been loaded.
To begin setting up the system options, select Options⏐ Options or double-click on

the ‘SUMMARY DATA’ area and make the following selections:

• Emulsions: No
• Lift method: Naturally Flowing Well
• Predictin : Pressure and temperature (Offshore)
• Model: Rough approximation
• Calculation range: Full System
• Display: Show calculating data
• Completion: Cased Hole
• Gravel pack: No
• Reservoir inflow type: Multilateral Well
Figure A12.1
System Summary
Then click Done to exit this screen.

A12.3 Entering PVT Data

The purpose of this section is to define the fluid in the system. The fluid properties
enter is assumed to be correct and no matching will be done.
• Select the PVT menu

or
• Double-click on the ‘PVT DATA’ area and enter the following:
Solution GOR: 500 scf/STB
Oil Gravity: 39 API
Gas Gravity: 0.78 specific gravity
Water Salinity: 100000 ppm
Mole Percent N2: 0%
Correlation for Pb, Rs and Bo Glaso
Correlation for oil viscosity Beal et al
Â The solution GOR is the gas dissolved in the oil at the original bubble
point pressure. If the well also produces free gas, it should not be
included here.
Figure A12.2
PVT input screen
Click Done to return to main. This completes the PVT input section.
PROSPER MANUAL
A12.4 Entering the Equipment data

The next task is to define the down hole and surface equipment. Enter the well
equipment as follows:
• Click System ⏐ Equipment (Tubing etc)
or
• Then click All ⏐ Edit
screens starting with the well deviation survey. We will assume the well is vertical
and the deepest point is at a TVD of 10,000 ft, corresponding to the depth of the tie
point of the completion. Enter the following into the deviation survey data table:
Measured True
Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
0 0
10000 10000
Figure A12.3
Deviation survey
• Click Plot to plot the well profile

• Click Finish ⏐ Done to continue to the surface equipment screen

The down hole equipment screen will then appear. Note that the Xmas tree elevation
has been taken to be the same as the deviation survey reference.
The well has 4.778" ID tubing down to 10,000 ft. Click on the Type cells to get a
combo box of options and enter the following down hole equipment:
Type Measured IDs Roughness

Depth
(feet) (ins) (ins)
Xmas tree 0
Tubing 1000 4.778 0.0006
SSSV 4
Tubing 10000 4.778 0.0006
Descriptive information about the downhole equipment can be written in the label
fields as reminder.
Figure A12.4
Down hole equipment
Click Done to advance to the flowing temperature profile screen and enter the
following:
Measured Fluid
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 60
10000 250
Overall heat transfer coefficient: 8 BTU/hr/ft2/F
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A12.5
Geothermal gradient
Click | Done.
The Average Heat Capacities screen will then appear. Click Done to accept the
default value.
Click Summary and check that the equipment input data is consistent. As a further
check click Draw Down hole. When satisfied that the well equipment is correct, click
Main to return to the PROSPER main screen (status screen).
A12.5 Modelling the smart well completion (IPR)

The next task is to construct a model for the smart well completion using the
multilateral option in PROSPER. It is assumed that the user has gone through some
dexterity exercises on multilateral IPR modelling. Such exercises can be found from
the PROSPER online manual, section 7.8. A more fundamental multilateral IPR
example is also presented in the previous section of the tutorial. It is recommended
that the user go through those dexterity exercises before following this example. To
start,
• Click System ⏐ Inflow performance

or
• Double-click on the ‘IPR DATA’ area

A multilateral network construction window will appear, which looks like the figure
display below:
Figure A12.6
Multilateral network
construction window
From the diagram of the completion, in terms of the flow connection, the completion
can be simplified as below
Annular flow,
Tubing flow Fluid flowing in
from reservoir
As can be seen, the flow network is consisted of two sections, the first section
consists of annular flow with fluid flowing in from the reservoir and the second
section consists of tubing flow.
Â The complexity is that the two sections are actually concentric.

However, despite the complexity, this can be modelled in PROSPER.
Two completions can be set up, with one connected to the other, representing the
flowing sections mentioned in the previous paragraph.
The user can introduce the tie point, junctions, completions and reservoir and their
connection into the network from the tool bar in the multilateral network window.
Figure A11.7
Tool bar from the
multilateral network window
PROSPER MANUAL
For this particular smart well completion, a flow network can be constructed as
shown below
Figure A12.8
Construction of the flow
network
The tie point represents the end of the downhole equipment that is specified in the |
System | Equipment section. The item labelled T1 represents the 5 ½” tubing that is
shown in the smart well completion structure. The item (a completion) labelled
Tubing represents the section where tubing flow occurs. Junction1 connects the 5 ½”
tubing and the tubing flow section. The item (a completion) labelled Annular
represents the section where annular flow occurs. The reservoir is connected to the
Annular. Fluid is flowing from the reservoir to the Annular, then to the Tubing via
Junction2, then to the tie point via Junction1 and T1.
After constructing the general network diagrammatically, the next step will be to
describe the network items. We start from the tie point by double-clicking on the item
on the network window. A network item data entry screen for the tie point will be
displayed.

Figure A12.9
Tie point data entry
Since we have a vertical well and the TVD for the tie point is at 10,000 ft, the
measured depth of the tie point is at 10,000 ft as well. Hence, enter the following
data for the tie point position:
• Measured Depth: 10000 ft

• True Vertical Depth: 10000 ft
Next, we are going to specify the data for item T1. To bring up the data entry screen
for item T1, simply click on the item on the equipment screen on the right. The
following screen will be seen:
Figure A12.10:
Tubing T1 data entry
screen
• Horizontal Flow Model: Beggs and Brill
PROSPER MANUAL
• Vertical Flow Model: Petroleum Experts 2

• Choke Model: ELF
• Flow Type: Tubing Flow
• Use Threshold Angle: No
• Threshold Angle: 45 degree
• Well bore Radius: 0.7083
This only specifies the general model of tubing T1. More information is needed, e.g.
the deviation, the tubing length and diameter, etc. These data can be entered in the
Input Data section by clicking on the Input Data button on the top right hand corner
of the screen.
Figure A12.11
screen
We first describe the deviation. Since the smart well completion is perfectly
horizontal, the true vertical depth remains at 10000 ft. This section of the tubing is 50
ft long. Hence, the measured depth should be 10050 ft. We assume that this section
of the well is extending in the direction of positive x, hence, the azimuth is 0 degree.
In short, enter the following data in this screen:
Measured depth True Vertical Azimuth

Depth
Feet Feet Degree
10000 10000 0
10050 10000 0
Next, we proceed on to specify the tubing length, diameter, etc. These data can be
entered in the Equipment section, by clicking the tab labelled ‘Equipment’.

Figure A12.12
screen
This section of the tubing has an internal diameter of 4.778” for its whole length of 50
ft. Hence, input the following data:
Tubing Measured Tubing ID Tubing inside Rate

Type Depth roughness multiplier
Feet Inches Inches
Start 10000
Tubing 10050 4.778 0.0006 1
This completes the definition for tubing T1. Next, we proceed on to Junction1. The
position of Junction1 is totally dependent on the specification of the items upstream.
It’s position, i.e. measured and true vertical depths are calculated. To see the
calculated position, simply click on Junction1 on the equipment window on the right.
Figure A12.13
Junction1 data entry
screen
PROSPER MANUAL
Next we proceed on to specify the completion labelled tubing. We first specify the
general model of the completion:
Figure A12.14
Completion data entry
screen – Tubing flow

• Flow Type: Tubing Flow
• Dietz Shape Factor: 31.6
To enter the deviation, the tubing length and diameter, etc. Click on the Input Data
button on the top right hand corner of the screen.

Figure A12.15
horizontal, the true vertical depth remains at 10000 ft. This section of the completion
is 650 ft long. Hence, the measured depth should be 10700 ft. Again, we assume
that the well is extending in the direction of positive x, hence, the azimuth is 0
degree. In short, enter the following data in this screen:

Depth
Feet Feet Degree
10050 10000 0
10700 10000 0
Figure A12.16
PROSPER MANUAL
This section of the tubing has an internal diameter of 2.041” for its whole length of
650 ft. Hence, input the following data:
Tubing Measured Tubing ID Tubing inside Rate

Type Depth roughness multiplier
Feet Inches Inches
Start 10050
Tubing 10700 2.041 0.0006 1
The next step is to define the perforation details of this completion.
Figure A12.17
Since this section of the completion is meant for tubing flow only, i.e. no production
or inflow from reservoir, we can specify this section of the completion by introducing
a very high skin, say 5000, so that the production is negligible. The corresponding
true vertical depths of the perforation interval will be calculated automatically. In
short, enter the following:
Perforation Interval MD Perforation Interval MD Skin Model Local

Start End Choice Skin
Feet Feet
10050 10700 Enter by hand 5000
This completes the definition for completion Tubing. Next, we proceed on to

Junction2. The position of Junction2 is again totally dependent on the specification of
the items upstream. It’s position, i.e. measured and true vertical depths are
calculated. To see the calculated position, simply click on Junction2 on the
equipment window on the right.

Figure A12.18
Junction2 data entry
screen
The definition of completion ‘Annular’ is very similar to completion ‘Tubing’. The

major differences are:
• The flow type of this completion is annular flow instead of tubing flow
• The description of the deviation of this completion is different because it is no
longer extending towards the positive x direction. Contrary, it extends towards
the negative x direction. Hence, we have to adjust the value of the azimuth to
model this situation
• The perforation of this completion is divided into three segments
Bearing these differences in mind, we start the definition of completion Annular by

clicking on the completion labelled ‘Annular’ in the equipment list on the right hand
side of the window.
Figure A12.19
screen – Annular flow
PROSPER MANUAL

• Flow Type: Annular Flow
• Dietz Shape Factor: 31.6
To enter the deviation, the tubing length and diameter, etc. Click on the Input Data
button on the top right hand corner of the screen.
Figure A12.20
horizontal, the true vertical depth remains at 10000 ft. This section of the completion
is 500 ft long. Hence, the measured depth should be 11200 ft. But this time the well
is extending in the negative x direction, hence, the azimuth is 180 degree for this
completion. In short, enter the following data in this screen:

Depth
Feet Feet Degree
10700 10000 0
11200 10000 180

Figure A12.21
This section of the casing has a internal diameter of 6.969”, tubing has an internal
diameter of 2.041” and an external diameter of 2 3/8”. Hence, input the following
data:
Tubing Measured Tubing Tubing Tubing Tubing Casing Casing

Type Depth ID inside OD outside ID inside
roughness roughness roughness
Feet Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches Inches
Start 10700
Tubing 11200 2.041 0.0006 2.375 0.0006 6.969 0.0006
The next step is to define the perforation details of this completion.
Figure A12.22
PROSPER MANUAL
Since this section of the completion has three sections of perforation, the following
data is entered. The local skin is assumed to be zero.
Perforation Interval MD Perforation Interval MD Skin Model Local

Start End Choice Skin
Feet Feet
10700 10800 Enter by hand 0
This completes the definition for completion ‘Annular’. Next, we proceed on to define
the reservoir by clicking on the reservoir item on the equipment window on the right.
Figure A12.23
Reservoir data entry
screen
Enter the following for the reservoir model type and reservoir fluid properties:
• Reservoir Model : Darcy

• Reservoir Pressure : 6000 psig
• Oil Gravity : 39 API
• Gas Gravity : 0.78 s.g.
• Water Salinity : 100000 ppm
• Water Cut : 0 percent
• Total GOR : 500 scf/STB
Next, we need to define the reservoir parameter. This can be done by clicking on the
‘Input Data’ button on the top right hand corner of the screen.

Figure A12.24
Reservoir data entry
screen
Enter the following for the reservoir model:
• Reservoir Permeability: 20 mD
• Reservoir Thickness: 50 feet
• Drainage Area: 500 acres
• Reservoir Top Depth: 9975 feet
• Vertical Permeability: 5 mD
This basically completes the model specification. Click | Done to leave the data entry
screen.
To visualise the model constructed, from the PROSPER multilateral network window,
we click on | Visualise | Front to see the front view of the completion. The windows
can be arranged nicely by clicking on | Window | Tile.
Figure A12.25
Network view and Front
view of the model
PROSPER MANUAL
Calculating production rate from pressure

This section shows the user how to use the PROSPER multilateral option to calculate
the production rate from the reservoir by specifying a pressure at the tie point.
Click on | Analyse | Calculate:
Figure A12.26
Multilateral calculation
screen
The Multilateral calculation screen will appear. Set the calculation option to One
Point. Since we are going to specify the tie point pressure, we set the Pressure or
Rate Option to ‘Rate from Pwf’. To see the production rate at 3000 psig tie point
pressure, enter a value of 3000 psig in the Pressure entry box in the One point
results section.
Then click on | Calculate. PROSPER will now do the calculation iteratively to find a
solution. This will take some time dependent on the speed of the computer.
Once the calculation is completed, the user can see the solution results by clicking
the button | Details under the One point results section.

Figure A12.27
Multilateral calculation -
branch and layer results
The overall production for a tie point pressure of 3000 psig will be around 9950
STB/day. The user can view the results for each branch, by selecting the branch of
interest in the Select Branch combo box. The results can be plotted by clicking on
the | Plot button. To see the pressure drop along the branches, in the plot window,
click in | Variables. Then select all three branches, set the Y-axis as measured depth
and the X-axis as Pressure.
Figure A12.28
Pressure along the
branches
PROSPER MANUAL
It can be seen that the pressure drop along the Annulus is negligible if compared to
the pressure drop along the tubing. If the casing size is fixed, then there is a
possibility of increased production by increasing the tubing size. By increasing the
tubing size, the pressure drop in the tubing might be reduced significantly, and hence
the production increased.
Due to the restriction of the tubing used in the well bore (5 ½” OD, 4.778” ID), the
maximum tubing size that can be used in the completion is 3 ½” OD tubing. Below is
a summary of the tubing sizes that can be used.
Tubing option Tubing OD Tubing ID

1 (Base case) 2 3/8” 2.041”
2 3 ½” 2.922”
In order to see the effect of different tubing sizes, we have to change the model.
Double click on the Tubing completion and change the tubing ID to 2.922”:
Figure A12.29
Changing the
tubing ID
We also need to change the tubing ID and OD in the annular section. Click on the
completion ‘Annular’ in the equipment list on the right and change the tubing ID to
2.922” and OD to 3.5”.

Figure A12.30
Changing the tubing ID
and OD
Click on | Done once finished.
The calculation should be repeated by clicking | Analyse | Calculate | Calculate.

PROSPER will recalculate the production. When the calculation stop, click on | Details
and a total production of around 11600 STB/day is observed, i.e. about 1600
STB/day increment in production. Hence, we will use a 3 ½” tubing for the design.
PROSPER MANUAL
Creating the IPR curve

This section shows the user how to generate an IPR curve for the completion. From
the PROSPER multilateral network window, click on | Analyse | Calculate. In order to
calculate a curve, set the calculation option to Curve.
Figure A12.31
Calculating a IPR curve
Under the Curve Calculation section, set the Minimum Pressure as 10 psig and the
Number of Points as 10. Click on | Calculate to start the IPR calculation. The
calculation will take some time, dependent on the speed of the computer. Click on |
Plot to see the IPR after the calculation has finished.

Figure A12.32
IPR curve for the smart
well completion
Click on | Finish to return to the PROSPER multilateral network window.
System Calculation
Once the inflow performance has been generated, it can be used to determine the
production rate given a wellhead pressure.
Exit the PROSPER Multilateral Network window by clicking on | Finish | Done. In the
PROSPER main screen, click on | Calculation | System (IPR + VLP).
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A12.33
System calculation
We are going to determine the production rate for a wellhead pressure of 200 psig.
Set the following data in the System calculation screen:
• Top Node Pressure: 200 psig

• Surface Equipment Correlation: Dukler Flannigan
• Vertical Lift Correlation: Petroleum Experts 2
• Solution Node: Bottom Node
• Rate Method: Automatic – Linear
Click on | Continue. We are not going to do any sensitivity studies. However, note
that in System Calculation for multilateral option, only the sensitivity variables that
are affecting the lift curve can be chosen. Those sensitivity variables that are
affecting both the IPR and VLP cannot be chosen since multilateral IPR model is
much more complex than the ordinary single branch IPR.
Click on | Continue | Calculate to start the calculation. Click on | Plot to see the
solution. The calculation shows that a production of around 13000 STB/day can be
achieved.

Figure A12.34
System calculation
PROSPER MANUAL
A13 Example 13 - Gas Injector with down-hole chokes

using Multi-lateral model
• Go through the step by step procedure for defining a multi-lateral gas
injector.
• Determine the gas injection rate into the reservoirs for a series of wellhead
pressures.
• See the effect of varying the choke opening on the injectivity.

• Build multi-lateral gas injectors in PROSPER.
• How to perform sensitivity calculation in multilateral wells.
This example can be found in the samples directory under the name of
MULTILAT3.OUT file. However following the steps indicated below, you would be
able to generate the model from scratch.
The example that we will be setting is as described in the sketch below:
Figure A13.1
Sketch of the TIE POINT @ 13000
Completion
Reservoir 1 Top
@ 13103 feet
Reservo
Reservoir 2 Top
@ 15206 feet
Reservo
Tubing ID=4.67”
Tubing OD=5.5”
Casing ID=8.5”
• The well is a straight hole completion with injection catering to two different
reservoirs, separated from each other by approximately 100 feet.
• The flow paths are as drawn by the arrows.

• The flow comes through the 5.5” tubing and at 13103 feet TVD it splits into two
parts one going through the top choke into the annulus and subsequently into the
top reservoir.
• The rest of the tubing flow continues downwards, and goes through the bottom
choke from tubing to annulus and to bottom reservoir.
Â The tie point defined at 13000 feet of TVD is the point above which
everything will be a part of well bore sketch and thus the pressure
loss etc in that section will be a part of VLP. Everything below the tie
point is a part of the IPR and pressure losses in this section will be
evaluated in IPR calculations.
A13.1 Model Set Up

1. Begin by starting the program. From the PROSPER main menu, select File ⏐ New
to reinitialise the program input and output files. The ‘New’ menu item under
File is only available if a file has already been loaded. If there is no file
loaded skip this step and go to next step.
2. To begin setting up the system options, select Options⏐ Options or double-click
• Fluid: Dry and Wet Gas

• Well type: Injector
• Gravel pack: No
Then click Done to exit this screen. This completes the system setup and reinitialises
the program and governs the inputs that the user will be required to enter.
PROSPER MANUAL
A13.2 Entering the PVT data

1. In this section we will enter the PVT input data required.
2. Select the PVT menu in the main screen.

or
• Double-click on the ‘PVT DATA’ area of the main screen and enter the following:
Gas Gravity: 0.65

Separator Pressure: 9000 Psig
Condensate to Gas Ratio: 0.0 STB/MMSCF
Condensate Gravity: 35 API
Water to Gas Ratio: 0 STB/MMscf
Mole Percent N2: 0%
Figure A13.2
PVT Input Screen
For this case we are using Lee et.al as the correlation to predict gas
viscosities. We also are not matching to any laboratory data.
behaviour

A13.3 Entering the Equipment data

• The next task is to define the well bore itself and surface lines (if any). This is
done in the following steps.

Or
• Then click All ⏐ Edit
screens starting with the well deviation survey. Enter the following into the deviation
survey data table:
Measured True
Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
0 0
13000 13000


• The down-hole equipment screen will then appear. Enter the data in the
screen as follows
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A13.3
Down hole Equipment
Input Data Screen
• Click on the Type cells to get a combo box of options and enter the
following down hole equipment:
Depth
(feet) (ins) (ins)
Xmas tree 0
Tubing 13000 4.67 0.0006
• Click Done to advance to the geothermal data entry screen. Once on the
screen, enter the following temperature profile:
Measured Formation
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 60
13000 270
Enter an overall heat transfer coefficient of 3 Btu/hr/ft2/F. Click | Done to exit
the screen.
• This takes you to the default heat capacity screen. Let it remain as it is.
Click on Done to go to the next screen.
• Now enter the injected fluid temperature as 135 F in the next screen.

Figure A13.4
Equipment Input Screen
Click Summary and check that the equipment input data is consistent. As a further
check click Draw Down hole.
Figure A13.5
Well Bore Sketch
When satisfied that the well equipment is correct, click Main to return to the
PROSPER main.
A13.4 Defining the IPR data (Inflow)

This example assumes that the user is familiar with drawing the multi-lateral
IPR sketches in PROSPER. If you need assistance in that area, please refer the
section 7.8 of the manual or Example A11 for the details.
The next task is to enter the Inflow Performance model as follows:

• Click System ⏐ Inflow performance
PROSPER MANUAL
Or
• Double-click on the ‘IPR DATA’ area
When entering the IPR section, the first entry screen that appears asks for the
injected fluid PVT data. Supply the following data:
Gas Gravity: 0.65

Condensate to Gas Ratio: 0.0 STB/MMscf
Water to Gas Ratio: 0.0 STB/MMscf
As shown in the following screen.

Figure A13.6
Injection Gas PVT Input
Screen
• Click on Continue to move to the next screen, which is the Multilateral

Network screen:
Figure A13.7
Multi-lateral Network
screen
Based on the sketch in Figure A.13.1, the flow path will have the following equipment
in the well:
• Tie Point @ (13000, 13000)

• A 5.5” tubing from Tie –Point to (13100, 13100)
• A junction at (13100,13100) where the fluid from the two completions
commingles.

• A Completion in the upper reservoir, with annular flow, a choke at 13103

feet TVD.
• A second Completion starting from (13100, 13100) to (15206, 15206) with
tubing flow, choke at 15206 feet followed by annular flow in the perforation
interval.
• Two reservoirs at the depths indicated.
Â The co-ordinates used to describe the different parts of the smart

well are as per (measured depth, TVD).
• A Sketch drawn on basis of this will look as shown below
Figure A13.8
Down hole network
System Drawing
The next task is to define the various components as drawn in the above screen. We
will start from the tie point and work our way towards the reservoirs.
• Defining the Tie Point .

The tie point is at (13000, 13000) feet. On the above drawing double click on
the tie point. A screen appears and enter the data as shown:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A13.9
Tie point Input data
screen
Â Please note that on the right hand side of the input screen there is a
window that has all the components of the drawing listed in it. You
can proceed with data by clicking the next piece of equipment on this
window. This window will be always available during the whole
process of data entry.
• Defining the Tubing up to the Junction
The junction is the point where the fluids from the two reservoirs
commingle; it is at a depth of (13100, 13100) and is connected to the
tubing with a 4.67” ID tubing.
The tubing information entry is a two-step process. First we define the

model for pressure loss calculations. We will also be using the following
model:

Choke Model: ELF
Flow Type: Tubing
Â i) In well bore pressure computations, selecting the correlation

threshold option as “Yes” gives the flexibility of changing from
vertical flow model to a horizontal flow modelling case the
angle with vertical exceeds the threshold angle defined. We
are not using this option however PROSPER requires you to
define the threshold angle and horizontal flow model even
though these will not be used in calculations.

ii) Defining the flow model will be needed at equipment level as

we go on. We will be using the same models unless otherwise
noted.
The screens for entering the tubing flow model are as shown below:
Figure A13.10
screen
Once the model is entered, if on the above screen the Input Data button is pressed,
the next screen is displayed, where the deviation survey, including the azimuth, is to
be entered.

Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
13000 13000 0
13100 13100 0
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A13.11
Input Screen
Â Note that for all the pieces of downhole equipment where the
deviation survey needs to be specified, PROSPER will calculate the
measured depth and TVD of the starting point automatically. For
example in this the starting point is at (13000,13000).
Once the deviation survey is entered we will need to enter the equipment
information, like the tubing diameters etc, in the next screen. This screen is
accessed by clicking on the TAB called EQUIPMENT in the bottom left hand corner
of the screen shown above.
Tubing Measured IDs Roughness

Type Depth
(feet) (ins) (ins)
Start 13000
Tubing 13100 4.67 0.0006

Figure A13.12
Screen
• Defining the Junction

To proceed to the next item, which is the junction called Com. Point, click on its
icon in the view screen showing all the items on the right hand side of the screen
shown in the figure above. The following screen is displayed:
Figure A13.13
Junction Data Screen
Â Note that for this screen the TVD and measured depth have
automatically been picked up from the last point entered for the
tubing, which is (13100,13100).
PROSPER MANUAL
• Defining the first completion

The completions are all defined in a similar way to the tubing, i.e. we have to
define the following:
I) Defining the flow Model

II) Defining the deviation survey
III) Defining the equipment.
The information for this part of the input for top completion is as follows
The Flow Model

Choke Model: ELF
Flow Type: Annular
Dietz Shape Factor: 31.6
Figure A13.14
Top Completion Model
Input Screen
The Deviation Survey

Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
13100 13100 0
13203 13203 0

Figure A13.15
Top Completion
Screen
The Equipment

Type Depth ID Inside OD Outside ID Inside
(feet) (ins) Roughness (ins) Roughness (ins) Roughness
(ins) (ins) (ins)
Start 13100
Casing 13103 4.67 0.0006
Choke 13103 4.67

Tubing 13203 4.67 0.0006 5.5 0.0006 8.5 0.0006
Â Note that we have defined the main flow type as annular but have
tubing flow from 13100 to 13103. This is done by using the casing in
that bit of the equipment description
Figure A13.16
Top Completion
equipment description
Input Screen
PROSPER MANUAL
Perforation Details
In the completion section, the additional piece of data entered is the detail of
the perforations. We need to define the measured depth\ TVD where the
completion has been perforated. For the top completion we have perforations
all along the reservoir thickness of 100 feet.
Start End Non-Darcy Local Skin

Measured Measured Skin
Depth Depth
(feet) (feet)
13103 13203 Calculated 0
Â Note that we have defined the perforation interval in terms of the

measured depth. The program will calculate true vertical depths
automatically on basis of the deviation survey entered for the
completion. You could also enter the true vertical depth and the
measured depths will be calculated automatically.
This data is entered in the perforation details screen, which is accessed by clicking
on the PERFORATION DETAILS Tab as shown above.
Figure A13.17
Top Completion
Perforation Input Screen
• To enter the skin data scroll towards the right hand side of the data entry
screen, by using the bottom scroll bar

Figure A13.18
Â i) You could use the various skin models to calculate the local
geometric and Non-Darcy skin on this screen, by changing the
Skin Model / Non Darcy entry Method choice from enter by
hand to the applicable one.
ii) If we had selected the Gravel Pack option in the main option
screen in step1 of this example, the gravel pack entry screen
would be available as well.
The local is zero for the top completion. To calculate the Non-Darcy factor, hit
on the ‘Calculate’ button. Enter the reservoir permeability (50 mD) and click on
‘Done’ to calculate the Non-Darcy factor. The calculated value will be
displayed on the screen.
This finishes the data entry for the top completion.
• Defining the Top Reservoir
The next step is defining the top reservoir. To go to the reservoir data entry
screen, click on the top reservoir in the right hand window of the above
screen.
The Top Reservoir Model

Reservoir Model: Petroleum Experts
Reservoir pressure: 8600 Psig
Gas Gravity: 0.65
Water salinity: 150,000 ppm
Water to gas ratio: 0.0 STB/MMSCF
Condensate to gas ratio: 0.0 STB/MMSCF
PROSPER MANUAL
Â The reservoir Pressure is defined at the reservoir top.
Figure A13.19
Top reservoir Model Input
Screen
The next step is specify the reservoir characteristics. This is done by pressing
the INPUT DATA button on the above screen.
Top Reservoir Parameters

Reservoir Permeability: 10 mD
Drainage Area: 500 acres
Reservoir Top depth: 13103 feet
Vertical Permeability: 10 mD
Time since injection start: 1000 days
Reservoir Porosity: 0.15 fraction
Connate water saturation: 0.2 fraction
Figure A13.20
Top reservoir Input
Screen

This completes the top reservoir data entry.
• Defining the bottom completion
The Flow Model

Choke Model: ELF
Flow Type: Annular
Dietz Shape Factor: 31.6
Figure A13.21
Bottom Completion
Model Input Screen
The Deviation Survey

Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
13100 13100 0
15306 15306 0
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A13.22
Bottom Completion
Screen
The Equipment

Type Depth ID Inside OD Outside ID Inside
(feet) (ins) Roughness (ins) Roughness (ins) Roughness
(ins) (ins) (ins)
Start 13100
Casing 15206 4.67 0.0006
Choke 15206 4.67
Tubing 15306 4.67 0.0006 5.5 0.0006 8.5 0.0006
Â Note that we have defined the main flow type as annular but have
tubing flow from 13100 to 15206. This is done by using the casing in
that bit of the equipment description
Figure A13.23
Bottom Completion
Equipment description
Input Screen

Perforation Details
For the bottom completion we have perforations all along the bottom reservoir
thickness of 100 feet.
Start End Non-Darcy Local Skin

Measured Measured Skin
Depth Depth
(feet) (feet)
15206 15306 Calculated 0
Figure A13.24
Bottom Completion
To enter the skin data, scroll towards the right hand side of the data entry screen by
using the bottom scroll bar.
The local is zero for the bottom completion. To calculate the Non-Darcy factor, hit on
the ‘Calculate’ button. Enter the reservoir permeability (50 mD) and click on ‘Done’ to
calculate the Non-Darcy factor. The calculated value will be displayed on the screen.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A13.25
This finishes the data entry for the bottom completion.
• Defining the Bottom Reservoir

The next step is defining the bottom reservoir. To go to the reservoir data
entry screen, click on the bottom reservoir in the right hand window of the
above screen.
Bottom Reservoir Model

Reservoir Model: Petroleum Experts
Reservoir pressure: 8600 Psig
Gas Gravity: 0.65
Water salinity: 150,000 ppm
Water to gas ratio: 0.0 STB/MMSCF
Condensate to gas ratio: 0.0 STB/MMSCF

Figure A13.26
Bottom Reservoir
Model Input Screen
Bottom Reservoir Parameters

Reservoir Permeability: 10 mD
Drainage Area: 500 acres
Reservoir Top depth: 15206 feet
Vertical Permeability: 10 mD
Time since injection start: 1000 days
Reservoir Porosity: 0.2 fraction
Connate water saturation: 0.2 fraction
Figure A13.27
Bottom reservoir
Input Screen
This completes data entry. Click on Done to exit to the main drawing of the system.
The next step is to visualise the system defined. To see the system defined on the
main drawing screen click on, VISUALISE | ALL as shown in the figure below.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A13.28
Invoking Visualisation
of the System
Once this is done, we can see the Top, Side and Front view of the completion
system defined as shown in the following figure.
Figure A13.29
Different views of the
completions

Once we have established that the system is okay, we need to generate the IPR for
the system. This is done by clicking on ANALYZE | CALCULATE on the above
screen. Once this is done the calculate screen appears as shown below:
Figure A13.30
IPR Calculation
Option screen
On this screen, there are various Calculation options; we will select the following
options and hit Calculate.
Point Or Curve: Curve

Conductivity Switch: Finite Conductivity
Allow cross-flow: No
Maximum Pressure: 10000 Psig
Number of Points: 10
Â i) Curve Option allows the user to generate the whole IPR

curve. The user can also use this screen do a point
calculation and see the pressure/ production profiles along
the whole network.
ii) There are two point calculations available, one is calculating
rate from bottom hole pressures and other is calculating
PROSPER MANUAL
pressure for a given rate at tie point.

iii) The Conductivity switch is to use/ ignore the pressure loss in
the completion during the calculations. Selecting ‘Finite
conductivity’ includes pressure loss in IPR calculations.
iv) The minimum pressure for producers is the minimum tie point
pressure below which no calculations will be made. For
injectors it is the highest pressure at tie point above which no
calculations will be made.
v) The number points is the number of calculations that are
made to generate the IPR curve
On basis of these options, the IPR of the system is as follows:
Figure A13.31
IPR of the
Injection Well
On the IPR Plot Click Main to take you to the multi-lateral drawing. Click | Finish |
Done to come to main PROSPER screen.
A13.6 System Calculations

Once the IPR has defined, from the main PROSPER screen, we can proceed and
perform the sensitivity calculations as follows:
• Click on Calculation
• Click on System (VLP + IPR)
• Enter the following data

Top Node pressure: 8000 Psig

Surface Equipment Correlation: Beggs and Brill
Vertical Lift Correlation: Petroleum Experts 2
Solution Node: Bottom Node
Rate Method: Automatic Geometric
Â Before we able to perform system sensitivities with multi-lateral make

sure that the whole IPR curve has been generated in the IPR
definition section.
Figure A13.32
System Calculation
Input Data screen
• Once this screen is defined, we want the wellhead injection pressure to be a

sensitivity variable. To define that on this screen, press Continue. This takes us
to the next screen, where the sensitivities variables are selected as indicated
Figure A13.33
Sensitivity Variable
Selection screen
PROSPER MANUAL
• As soon as you select this variable. Enter the five values in this from 7000 Psig to
7800 Psig as shown below
Figure A13.34
Sensitivity Variable
value Input screen
• Once the values are defined click on Done.

• Click on Continue on the next screen.
• Click on Calculate on the next screen.
Figure A13.35
System Solution
Calculation Screen
• Once the calculations are finished on the calculation screen, hit on Sensitivity.
The sensitivity plot is shown. On this plot click on Variable and select the Gas
Rate as variable. This gives us the plot of gas injection rate versus the well head
pressures:

Figure A13.36
Gas Injection
Rate versus well
head pressure
If we want to look at the pressure and production profiles, in the completion for one
of the cases, On the main calculation screen shown below press on Solution Details:
Figure A13.37
Accessing
Solution Details
Once the solution details is pressed the following screen with the details of the
solution comes up. This screen gives the details of pressure temperature, density etc
at the well head and tie point.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A13.38
Solution Details
On the solution details screen, we can go into further details of the inflow, if we press
Inflow Layer Details button as shown above.
Figure A13.39
Inflow Layer
Details

On this screen Press on Plot. On the plot screen, by going to variable screen, we
can select the completions, and variables we want to see. Following are some of
these plots.
Figure A13.40
Top Completion
Pressure and
reservoir
pressure
variation
Figure A13.41
Bottom
Completion Rate
per segment
PROSPER MANUAL
Â i) You can plot the details for other completions, tubing etc as well
by selecting the appropriate variables by going to the top section
of the plot.
ii) If you want to do sensitivity on various inflow variables like
down-hole choke sizes, reservoir pressures, perforation intervals
etc, go back to the IPR section, make the changes and
regenerate the whole IPR curve, before doing sensitivities again.
A14 Example 14 - Using Multi-lateral model and PCP

A vertical well was producing from a lower layer and then a re-entry from the same
well was developed to an upper zone and be able to produce from the two zones
simultaneously.
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/pcp multilateral.out
A14.1 Model Set Up

How to set up the model
• Go through the step by step procedure for defining a multi-lateral well
• Determine how much the multilateral well would produce considering the
PCP.
Â Note: To be able to build this model, the user must set the pump and
the rod database first. To learn how to set up the correspondent
database for Progressive Cavity Pumps the user must refer to
Chapter 11 section 11.7.1 of PROSPER manual.

Figure A14.1
Well Sketch that displays

the drilling program and
completion.
The multilateral data entry screen is accessed by choosing | System | Inflow

Performance from the PROSPER main menu, as with the single well IPR.
Figure A14.2
System Summary
Inflow type: Multilateral
Begin by starting the program. From the PROSPER main menu, select File ⏐ New to
reinitialise the program input and output files.
The ‘New’ menu item under File is only available if a file has already been
loaded. If there is no file loaded skip this step and go to next step.
• To begin setting up the system options, select Options⏐ Options or double-click

PROSPER MANUAL

• Gravel pack: No
Then click Done to exit this screen. This completes the system setup and
reinitialises the program and governs the inputs that the user will be required
to enter.
Entering the PVT data
In this section we will enter the PVT input data required.

Select the PVT menu in the main screen.
or
• Double-click on the ‘PVT DATA’ area of the main screen and enter the
following:
Solution GOR: 100 scf/stb

Oil Gravity: 13 API
Gas Gravity 0.67
Mole Percent N2: 0%
Figure A14.3
PVT Input Screen

behaviour
Entering the Equipment data
The next task is to define the well bore itself and surface lines (if any). This is done in
the following steps.

or
Then click All ⏐ Edit
screens, starting with the well deviation survey. Enter the following into the deviation
survey data table:
Measured True
Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
0 0
4000 4000

The down-hole equipment screen will then appear. Enter the data in the screen as
follows:
Click on the Type cells to get a combo box of options and enter the following
downhole equipment:
Depth
(feet) (ins) (ins)
Xmas tree 0
Tubing 4000 2.89 0.0006
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A14.4
Equipment Input Screen
• Click Done to advance to the geothermal data entry screen. Once on the
screen, enter the following temperature profile:
Measured Formation
Depth Temperature
(feet) (deg F)
0 60
4000 159
Enter an overall heat transfer coefficient of 8 Btu/hr/ft2/F. Click | Done to exit the
screen.
• This takes you to the default heat capacity screen. Let it remain as it is.
Click on Done to go to the next screen.

Figure A14.5
Geothermal Gradient

When satisfied that, the well equipment is correct. Click Main to return to the
PROSPER main screen.
Notes about Equipment Data Entry Screens
Â v) Make sure that the measured depth of last piece of equipment

in the downhole equipment is same as the last depth in the
vi) All measured depths in the downhole equipment are
converted to true vertical depths as per the deviation survey
entered. Thus the deepest point of the deviation survey
should be at least as deep as last point of equipment /
vii) The geothermal gradient should have a temperature entry
corresponding to depth of wellhead.
viii) If you have a pipeline in the system, the upstream end of the
pipeline should tally with wellhead depth.
Available data for the Top and bottom layer

Top layer:
Oil Gravity 13 API
Water Cut 0 percent
PROSPER MANUAL

Bottom Layer
Oil Gravity 13 API
Water Cut 0 percent
According to the drilling program, the tie point will be considered at measured depth
of 9700 ft (8800 ft vertical depth). The deviation survey of the original well and the
side track are indicated below.
Side Track

Depth depth
feet feet degrees
4050 4050 0
4090 4090 0
4150 4140 0
4300 4200 0
4330 4210 0
Vertical
section

Depth Depth
feet feet degrees
4050 4050 0
4400 4400 0
The user interface consists of a framework window that contains several child
child windows include the network windows that contain the system network drawing,
the navigator window that can assist in the viewing of large networks and up to three
visualisation windows, which can show the multilateral network drawn to scale from
three orthogonal points of view.

Figure A14.6
PROSPER
Multilateral
Network
To start drawing your multilateral system according to the well sketch, start selecting
the tie point, junction, Completion (1) and Completion (side track) as well as the top
and bottom reservoir.
Figure A14.7
Adding the
completion and
reservoirs
Once drafted the basic drawing according to your well sketch and drilling program, it
is possible to connect the blocks using the button Add Link.
To enter the required data for each section all you have to do is to double click on
each icon. It is recommended to start from the tie point to the reservoir according to
the well sketch.
PROSPER MANUAL
Â The tie point is the point above which everything will be part of wellbore
sketch and thus the pressure loss etc in that section will be a part of VLP.
Everything below the tie point is a part of the IPR and pressure losses in
this section will be evaluated in IPR calculations.
Figure A14.8
Linking the tie point
with the joint,
completion and
reservoir.
After double clicking on the tie point, enter the measured depth and true vertical
depth as indicated previously. The tie point is the node where the IPR is solved, and
is located at the top of the system (in vertical depth). Hence, the tie-point can only be
a starting point.
The Junction point will be a branching node. It can only have one link into it (from a
tie-point or a completion).
Once these two points have been defined, then Deviation Survey, Downhole
Equipment and Perforation Details can be entered. In the case of the Deviation
Survey, there is an additional azimuth entry.
When the user has entered the information for each branch, the calculations can be
performed.
Tie point :
Data: Measured depth of 4000 ft, True Vertical Depth of 4000 ft
Junction 1:
The tubing information entry is a two step process. First we define the model for
pressure loss calculations. We will also be using the following model:


Choke Model: ELF

Flow Type: Tubing
Completion 1:
The screens for entering the flow model are as shown below:
Figure A14.9
screen
Once the model is entered, selecting the Input Data button, the following screen is
displayed, where the deviation survey, including the azimuth, can be entered:

Depth Vertical
(feet) Depth
(feet)
4050 4050 0
4400 4400 0
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A14.10
Input Screen
Once the deviation survey is entered, we will need to enter the equipment
information like the tubing diameters etc, in the following screen. This screen is
accessed by clicking on the TAB called EQUIPMENT in the bottom left hand corner
of the screen shown above.
Tubing Measured IDs Roughne

Type Depth ss
(feet) (ins)
(ins)
Start 4050
Tubing 4500 2.89 0.0006
Figure A14.11
Screen
According to the drilling program, this completion has been perforated from 4200 ft to
4400 ft.

Figure A14.12
Vertical well
Perforation details
Re entry 1 (completion 2 multilateral)

Then double click on completion 2, labelled Re entry.
Dietz shape factor.
For this example the Petroleum Experts 2 correlation will be used, a well bore radius of
0.345 ft and Dietz shape factor of 30 will be considered.
Figure A14.13
Re entry 1,
Calculation options
screen.
When pressing the option Input Data, there are three tabbed dialogs in this data
input screen, which allow the entry of a deviation survey, equipment descriptions and
completion information. The first two dialogs contain tables very similar to the ones
encountered by selecting System | Equipment from the PROSPER main menu and
then the ‘Deviation Survey’ and ‘Downhole Equipment’ buttons. In the case of
the deviation survey there is an additional azimuth entry.
PROSPER MANUAL
Enter first the deviation survey:
Figure A14.14
Re entry
Deviation Survey
Screen
Once entered the deviation survey, select the equipment and select tubing,
according to the deviation survey, the tubing in the completion 1 has been run down
to 4330 ft and has a diameter of 2.89 in.
Figure A14.15
Re entry
Equipment
According to the drilling program, this completion has been perforated from 4100 ft to
4250 ft:

Figure A14.16
Completion 1
Perforation details
Finally double click on the reservoir and enter the PVT data, as well as the
Figure A14.17
Lower sand
PVT Data
Press Input Data to continue and enter the information for the reservoir:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A14.18
Bottom Reservoir
Inflow data based
on
Darcy Reservoir
Model
Now the correspondent data for the second sand can be entered.
Figure A 14.19
Re entry
PVT Data
Select input data and enter first the deviation survey.

Figure A14.20
Re entry
Input Data
Press input to continue and enter the information for the reservoir.
Once you enter the information for the two branches (completion 1 and side track),
from PROSPER – Multilateral Network Menu, select the option Visualise all:
Figure A14.21
Visualise All

From PROSPER – Multilateral Network Menu, select the option Analyse/Calculate
The Calculate screen gives the option of calculating one IPR point or a curve.
Also, calculations can be switched between infinite and finite conductivity modes of
calculation. In the latter case the pressure drop in the tubing is taken into account.
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A14.22
Calculate
The finite conductivity solution takes in account the pressure drop and
interference, whilst the Infinite conductivity considers equal pressure and constant
production rate at all times. The flow distribution is used then to calculate the
pressure around the source.
The pressure of the reservoir approaches a constant value, then if in one particular
branch in the reservoir is surrounded by a constant pressure boundary, the pressure
in the well and the boundary will become constant (steady state pressure), when the
steady state pressure is normalized respect to the flow rate, it provides a measure of
the pressure draw-down required to flow a unit of volume per unit time.
The Details button is used to display pressure and rate-related parameters with
respect to the measured and vertical tubing depths of each branch. If a curve has
been calculated, these details pertain to the last point in the curve.

Figure A14.23
Plot
A14.3 System Calculations

From the PROSPER main screen just perform a nodal analysis without the PCP
pump to determine if the well is capable to flow on its own.
The well has a wellhead pressure of 120 psig
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A14.24
Calculation
IPR+VLP
VLP / IPR calculations:
Figure A14.25
VLP IPR results
Notice that with out the pump and based on the nodal analysis the well can produce
only 90.6 bpd.

A14.4 PCP Set Up and Design

In order to be able to set a Progressive Cavity Pump, you will have to set the Pump
And Rod string database as explained in the previous example.
Provided the fact that you have the pump database set up according to data
provided by the manufacture then you can set from the main screen the PCP.
Progressive Cavity Pump set up
Figure A14.26
PCP
Based on the completion program, the pump is to be set at 3900 ft, and it is
expected to produce 700 bpd:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A14.27
PCP
Calculate the head requirements
Figure A14.28
PCP
When the calculation is finished, select done and design; form this panel you will be
able to select the pump and rods, the more pumps there are in the database, the
wider is the range of choices.

Figure A14.29
PCP design
For this particular design and pump selection, if one wants to produce 800 bpd at
downhole conditions, 265 RPM of pump speed are required. Also the program will
provide rod stress, etc.
From the main screen select Calculation/ System (IPR+VLP) to perform nodal
analysis considering the pump, it is possible to see that now we will be able to lift
700 bpd:
Figure A14.30
PCP results
In Plot, choose the option Variables. Change the variables, selecting IPR, VLP and
Pump Discharge:
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A14.31
PCP results
This finishes the tutorial section.
A15 Example 15. Condensate Black Oil Model Validation

Condensate black oil models in PROSPER should never be matched using the
previously described matching method for oils. This is because the black oil model
for condensate in PROSPER uses a mathematical model and matching could throw
the model out of bounds.
Black oil modelling is a technique that works back from values of density and GOR
measured at known surface conditions to predict properties at other points in the
system and the technique is fast and accurate when applicable. The black oil
condensate model is preferential to use as the computational time is significantly
faster than using an EOS PVT approach. The matched EOS can be used to validate
the black oil condensate model.
The use of Volume Shift as an EOS match parameter will inevitably cause mass
balance errors in the EOS if used for multiple temperature and pressures (like a
pressure gradient calculation) and will adversely impact the results in PROSPER.
A15.1 Objectives
File: ~/samples/PROSPER/condvalid.out
The main objectives of this example are to show:

• How to use a gradient calculation to compare pressure loss using different
PVT methods

• How to compare a PROSPER matched EOS gradient traverse calculation

result to validate using the black oil gas condensate model
A15.2 Model Set Up

Begin by opening the above PROSPER file and from the main menu select PVT |
Input Data to access the PVT section (Figure A15-1) or double click in the PVT
window section of the main PROSPER interface.
Figure A15-1
Compositional data
A matched EOS can be passed to PROSPER via the Import…PRP button, from PVTP
for example.
PROSPER will use the EOS data to generate condensate black oil model data.
Select Generate to activate the EOS Calculation Range dialogue (Figure A15-2).
Figure A15-2
EOS calculation
range dialogue
The temperature corresponds to the reservoir temperature and the pressure values
range from initial reservoir to depleted reservoir conditions.
PROSPER MANUAL
Select Calculate | Calculate to generate the black oil properties (Figure A15-3).
Figure A15-3
Compositional data
The saturation pressure shown in Figure A15-3 is the dew point pressure
required for the black oil model.
Select OK | OK | Properties (Figure A15-4) to generate the black oil fluid properties
from the EOS flashed through the separator stages down to standard conditions. At
this point we have all the properties to build a black oil fluid model.
Figure A15-4
Black oil fluid
properties from
EOS
A15.3 Tubing Correlation Comparison using the EOS

Prior to using the black oil condensate model is it important to see how the PVT
using the EOS model impacts pressure losses in the tubing. A Tubing Correlation
Comparison calculation will be done to validate the well using measured flowing
conditions. The black oil model will be used to evaluate the applicability of the
method vs. the EOS.

From the main PROSPER menu select Matching | Correlation Comparison |

Tubing and input the values as shown in Figure A15-5.
Figure A15-5
EOS correlation
comparison
No sensitivity variables will be used in the calculation and the Petroleum Experts 4
vertical flow correlation will be used.
Select Calculate | Calculate | Plot
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A15-6
EOS gradient profile

A15.4 Black Oil Model Validation

From the Options menu select the black oil fluid model options then enter the
previously calculated black oil data in the PVT section.
Repeat the Correlation Comparison Calculation and plot the data to see if the EOS
match point is still valid using the gas condensate black oil model (Figure A15-7)
Figure A15-7
Match point
comparison using the
black oil condensate
model
Zooming in to investigate the off-set gradient point shown in Figure A15-8 shows that
the error is approximately 10.0psig indicating that for this case the black-oil
condensate model is valid with the EOS gradient predictions.
Figure A15-8
Match point using the
black oil condensate
model
PROSPER MANUAL
Figure A15-8 indicates that for this case the black-oil condensate
Â model can be used due to the agreement in the EOS gradient
traverse results.
This finishes the tutorial section.
A16 Files location

The PROSPER files for the above tutorials can be found in the directory where the
software is installed, usually under:
C:\Program Files\Petroleum Experts\IPM 5.0

Appendix B References
B1 PVT Calculations
The following reference was used for the Glasø, Lasater, Standing and Vazquez-Beggs
correlations:
1. Sutton, R.P. and Farshad, F.F.: ‘Evaluation of Empirically Derived PVT Properties
for Gulf of Mexico,’ SPE Reservoir Engineering, (Feb. 1990), 79-86.
2. Beal, C.: ‘The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural Gas, Crude Oil and its Associated
Gases at Oil Field Temperatures and Pressures,’ Trans., AIME (1946) 165, 94-98.
3. Beggs, H.D. and Robinson, J.R.: ‘Estimating the Viscosity of Crude Oil Systems,’
JPT (Sept. 1975), 1140-1144.
4. Carr, N.L., et al : ‘Viscosity of Hydrocarbon Gases Under Pressure,’ Trans., AIME

(1954), 264-268.
5. Eilerts et al: ‘Phase Relations of Gas Condensate Fluids,’ Monograph 10, U.S.
Bureau of Mines, Washington D.C. (1957).
6. Brinkman, F.H. and Sicking, J.N.: ‘Equilibrium Ratios for Reservoir Studies’, SPE
(Nov. 1959), SPE reprint series No. 15, 240-246.
7. Katz, D.L. and Kurata, F.: ‘Retrograde Condensation’, Ind. Eng. Chem. (June,
1940) 32, No. 6, 817-827.
8. Katz, D.L., Monroe, R.R. and Trainer, R.P.: ‘Surface Tension of Crude Oils
Containing Dissolved Gases,’ Trans., AIME (1943), 1624, 285-294.
9. Lee et al: ‘The Viscosity of Natural Gases’, Trans., AIME (1966), 997-1002.
10. Lohrenz et al: ‘Calculating Viscosities of Reservoir Fluids From Their

Compositions’, JPT (Oct. 1964), 1171-1176.
11. Coats, K.H.: ‘An Equation of State Compositional Model’, paper SPE 8284
presented at SPE Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition, Las Vegas,
Nevada, Sept. 23-26, 1979.
12. Nghiem, L.X., Fong, D.K. and Aziz, K.: ‘Compositional Modelling with an Equation
of State’, paper SPE 9306 presented at SPE Annual Technical Conference and
Exhibition, Dallas, Texas, Sept. 21-24, 1980.
13. Winkler, H.W., Eads, P.T.: ‘Algorithm for More Accurately Predicting Nitrogen-
Charged Gas-Lift Valve Operation at High Pressures and Temperatures’, paper
SPE 18871 presented at SPE Production Operations Symposium, Oklahoma City,
Oklahoma, March 13-14, 1988.
14. Peng, D.-Y. and Robinson, D.B.: ‘A New Two-Constant Equation of State’, I.&E.C.
Fundamentals (1976) 15, No.1, 59-64.
2-4 Appendix B - References
B2 IPR Calculations
1. Dietz: ‘Determination of Average Reservoir Pressure From Build Up Surveys,’
Trans., AIME.(1965).
2. Fetkovich M.J.: ‘The Isochronal Testing of Oil Wells,’ paper SPE 4529 presented
at the SPE 1973 Annual Fall Meeting, Las Vegas, Sept. 30-Oct. 3.
3. Forcheimer et al: Zeits V. Dutching, (1901), 45, 1782-1786.
4. Goode P.A. and Kuchuk F.J., ‘Inflow Performance of Horizontal Wells,’ SPE
Reservoir Engineering (Aug. 1991) 6, No. 3, 319-323.
5. Jones L.G., Blount, E.M et al: ‘Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow Tests to
Predict Performance of Wells Having Turbulence,’ paper SPE 6133 presented at
the 1976 SPE Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition, New Orleans, Oct. 3-6.
6. Vogel J.V.: ‘Inflow Performance Relationships for Solution Gas Drive Wells,’ JPT
(Jan. 1968), 83-92.
7. Houzé, O.P., Horne, R. and Ramey, H.J. Jr.: ‘Infinite Conductivity Vertical Fracture
in a Reservoir with Double Porosity Behaviour’, paper SPE 12778 presented at
SPE Regional Meeting, Long Beach, California, April 11-13, 1984.
8. Karakas, M. and Tariq, S.: ‘Semi-Analytical Productivity Models for Perforated

Completion’, paper SPE 18271 presented at SPE Annual Fall Technical
Conference and Exhibition, Houston, Texas, Oct. 2-5, 1988.
9. Dikken, B.J.: ‘Pressure Drop in Horizontal Wells and its Effect on Their Production
Performance’, Journal of Petroleum Technology, November, 1990; Trans., AIME,
289.
10. Chaperon, I.: ‘Theoretical Study of Coning Towards Horizontal and Vertical Wells
in Anisotropic Formations: Subcritical and Sub-Critical Rates’, Paper SPE 15377
presented at the 1986 SPE Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition, New
Orleans, Oct. 5-8.
11. Goode, P.A. and Wilkinson, D.J., : ‘Inflow Performance of Partially Open
Horizontal Wells’, Paper SPE 19341 presented at the 1989 SPE Eastern Region
Meeting, Morgantown, WV, Oct. 24-27. Also Journal of Petroleum Technology,
August 1991, pp 983-985.
12. Papazatacos, P., Herring, T.R., Martinsen, R. and Skjaeveland, S.M.: ‘Cone
Breakthrough Time for Horizontal Wells’, Paper SPE 19822 presented at the 64th
Annual Technical Conference, San Antonio, Texas, Oct. 8-11.
13. Cinco-Ley, H., Samaniego, F. and Dominguez, N.: ‘Transient Pressure Behaviour
for a Well With a Finite-Conductivity Vertical Fracture’, Paper SPE 6014 presented
at the 51st Annual Technical Conference, New Orleans, Louisiana, Oct. 3-6, 1976.
14. Mavor, M.J. and Cinco Ley, H: 'Transient Pressure Behaviour of Naturally
Fractured Reservoirs', Paper SPE 7977 presented at the California Regional
Meeting of the SPE, Ventura, California, April 1979
15. Wong, D., Harrington, A. and Cinco Ley, H: 'Application of the Pressure
Derivative Function in th Pressure Transient testing of Fractured Wells', Paper SPE

Appendix B - References 3-4
13056 presented at the 59th annual Technical Conference, Houston, Texas, Sept.
16-19, 1984
16. Warren, J.E and Root, P.J.: 'The behaviour of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs',
Paper SPE 426, SPEJ (Spet 1963), 245-255
17. Hegre, T.T. and Larsen, L.: 'Productivity of Multifractured Horizontal Wells', Paper
SPE 28845 presented at the European Petroleum Conference of the SPE, London,
UK, October 1994
18. Urbanczyk, C.H, and Wattenbarger, R.A: 'Optimization of Well Rates under Gas
Coning Conditions.', SPE Advanced Technology Series, Vol. 2, No. 2, April 1994.
19. Larsen, L.: 'Productivity Evaluations of Wells in Long Rectangular Drainage Areas.'
B3 Multiphase Flow Calculations

1. Anand, et al, ‘Predicting Thermal Conductivities of Formations from Other Known
Properties,’ JPT (Oct. 1980).
2. Ashford, F.E, and Pierce, P.E.: ‘The Determination of Multiphase Pressure Drops
and Flow Capacities in Downhole Safety Valves (Storm Chokes)’, paper SPE 5161
presented at the 1974 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, Houston Oct. 6-9.
3. Beggs, H.D. and Brill, J.P.: ‘A Study of Two Phase Flow in Inclined Pipe,’ JPT
(May 1973), 606-617.
4. Churchill-Chu, ‘Correlating Equations for Laminar and Turbulent Free Convection

from a Horizontal Cylinder,’ International Journal Heat Mass Transfer (1975) 18,
1049-1053.
5. Fancher, and Brown, G.G.: ‘Prediction of Pressure Gradients for Multiphase Flow
in Tubing,’ SPE Journal (Mar. 1963), 59-64.
6. Fortunati, ‘Two Phase Flow Through Well-head Chokes,’ paper SPE 3742
presented at 1972 SPE European Spring Meeting, Amsterdam, May 17-18.
7. Hagedorn, A.R. and Brown, K.E.: ‘Experimental Study of Pressure Gradients

Occurring During Continuous Two-Phase Flow in Small-Diameter Vertical
Conduits,’ JPT (Apr. 1965), 475-484.
8. Mandhane et al, ‘A Flow Pattern Map for Gas-liquid Flow in Horizontal Pipes,’
International Journal Multiphase Flow, 1, 537-541.
9. Moody, ‘Friction Factor for Pipe Flow,’ Trans., AIME (1944), 66, 671-675.
10. Mukherjee, H. and Brill, J.P.: ‘Liquid Holdup Correlations for Inclined Two-Phase
Flow,’ JPT (May 1983), 1003-1008.
11. Oranje, ‘Condensate Behaviour in Gas Pipeline is Predictable,’ Oil and Gas Journal
(July 1973), 39-43.
12. Orkiszewski, ‘Predicting Two Phase Pressure Drop in Vertical Pipes,’ JPT (June
1967), 829-833.
PROSPER MANUAL
4-4 Appendix B - References
13. Duns, H. Jr and Ros, N.C.J.: ‘Vertical Flow of Gas and Liquid Mixtures in Wells,’
Proc., Sixth World Petroleum Congress, Frankfurt (1963) 451.
14. Tansev, E. Startzman, R.A. and Cooper, A.M.: ‘Predicting Pressure Loss and
Heat Transfer in Geothermal Wellbores,’ paper SPE 5584 presented at the 1975
SPE Annual Fall Meeting, Dallas, Sept. 28-Oct. 1.
15. Gould, T.L, Tek, M.R. and Katz, D.L.: ‘Two-Phase Flow Through Vertical, Inclined,
or Curved Pipe,’ JPT, August, 1974, 915-925.
B4 Temperature Calculations
1. Chiu, K. and Thakur, S.C.: ‘Modeling of Wellbore Heat Losses in Directional Wells
Under Changing Injection Conditions,’ paper SPE 22870 presented at the 1991
SPE Annual Fall Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 517 - 528.
2. Hasan, A.R. and Kabir, C.S.: ‘Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow in
Wellbores: Part I - Formation Temperature,’ paper SPE 22866 presented at the
1991 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 469 - 478.
3. Hasan, A.R. and Kabir, C.S.: ‘Heat Transfer During Two-Phase Flow in
Wellbores: Part II - Wellbore Fluid Temperature,’ paper SPE 22948 presented at
the 1991 SPE Annual Fall Meeting, Dallas, Oct. 9-9. pp 695 - 708.
4. Carslaw, H.S. and Jaeger, J.C.: ‘Conduction of Heat in Solids,’ Oxford Science
Publications, Oxford, U.K., 1959.

Appendix C - Equations
C1 Black Oil Model for Condensate
PSEP
TSEP
Total GOR is the total of separator and
γgtot TANK
tank GOR.
Rtot = Rsep + Rtnk
Feed gas gravity ( γ gtot ) is the weighted

average of separator and tank gas
γ gsep γ gtnk gravities.
GOR sep GOR tnk (γ g sep Rsep + γ g tnk Rtnk )
γ g tot =
Rtot
C1.1 Mass Balance Calculations

Based on the principles of mass balance the following equations can be derived.
Known Parameters:
Produced Gas Gravity γgt

Condensate specific gravity γc
The condensate to gas ratio CGR STB/SCF
Air Mol. Wt. 28.966 lb/lb.mol
Water density 62.43 lb/cu.ft
Air density @ SC 0.0764 lb/Scf
Mol.wt of condensate Mc lb/lb.mol
Basis of calculations : 1 SCF of Produced gas.

The gas gravity of the mixture γ can be evaluated using the following equation
γ =
MWmix
lb ( )
lb.mol = 1
×
Total.Mass.of .mixture.entering ⎛ lb ⎞
28.966 lb (
lb.mol
) ⎜ ⎟
⎛ lb ⎞ Total .moles.of .mixture.entering ⎝ lb.mol ⎠
28.966⎜ ⎟
⎝ lb.mol ⎠
Total inlet mass calculation:
Mass of Produced gas = Vol of gas @SC x Density of gas @SC

2-14 Appendix C - Equations
= Vol of gas @SC x Gas gravity x Density of air @SC
⎛ lb ⎞
= 1(SCF ) × γ gt × 0.0764⎜ ⎟
⎝ SCF ⎠
= 0.0764γ gt (lb )
Mass of Condensate = Vol of Cond @SC x Density of Cond. @SC
= Vol of Cond.@SC x sp.gravity x Density of water @SC
Cu. ft ⎛ lb ⎞
= CGR(STB ) × 5.615 × γ c × 62.43⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
STB ⎝ Cu . ft ⎠
= 5.615 × 62.43 × γ c × CGR(lb )
Thus, Total mixture mass = Mass of Produced gas + Mass of

Â Condensate
Mass.of .Mix = 0.0764 × γ gt + 5.615 × 62.43 × CGR × γ c (lb )
Total inlet moles calculation:
Moles of Produced gas = Mass of gas/ Mol.Wt.of gas
= Mass of gas / Gas gravity x Mol.Wt. air
0.0764γ gt (lb )
=
⎛ lb ⎞
γ gt × 28.966⎜ ⎟
⎝ lb.mol ⎠
0.0764
= (lb.mol )
28.966
Moles of Cond. = Mass of Cond./ Mol.Wt.of Cond
Petroleum Experts
Appendix C - Equations 3-14
5.615 × 62.43 × γ c × CGR(lb )

=
⎛ lb ⎞
Mc⎜ ⎟
⎝ lb.mol ⎠
5.615 × 62.43 × γ c × CGR

= (lb.mol )
Mc
Â Thus, total mixture moles = Moles of Produced gas + Moles of

Condensate
0.0764 5.615 × 62.43 × CGR × ρ

Moles of Mix = + (lb.mol )
28.966 Mc
Thus the gas gravity of the inlet mixture is
1 Total.Mass.of .mixture.entering ⎛ lb ⎞
γ= × ⎜ ⎟
⎛ lb ⎞ Total.moles.of .mixture.entering ⎝ lb.mol ⎠
28.966⎜ ⎟
⎝ lb.mol ⎠
⎧ ⎫
1 ⎪ 0.0764 × γ gt + 5.615 × 62.43 × CGR × γ c ⎪⎛ lb ⎞
= ×⎨ ⎬⎜ ⎟
⎛ lb ⎞ ⎪ 0.0764 + 5.615 × 62.43 × CGR × γ c ⎪⎝ lb.mol ⎠
28.966⎜ ⎟
⎝ lb.mol ⎠ ⎩ 28.966 Mc ⎭
γ gt + 4588.3 × CGR × γ c
Â γ=
γ
1 + 132904 × CGR × c
Mc
This expression thus gives, the average gas gravity of a mixture, which
has a condensate to gas ratio of CGR STB/SCF, with the gas having a
gas gravity of γgt and the condensate having a specific gravity of γc and
molecular weight of Mc.
This also can be used to work out the condensate to gas ratio of a
mixture gas if the gas gravity is known as shown in the following
equation.
PROSPER Manual
C1.2 Using the mass balance results to define

Condensate Model
Based on this formulation based on the separator gas gravity and the average total
gas gravity, the effective CGR vaporised in separator gas is estimated as follows
γ g sep - γ g tot
CGRsep =
4588.3 γ c - 132904 γ g sep γ c /M c
Separator liquid/gas ratio ( CGRsep ) referred to separator liquid.
Also assuming that the condensate is above dew point, the initial CGR under
reservoir conditions is,
1
CGRres =
Rsep + Rtnk
Thus, the gas gravity under reservoir conditions can be found as

γ g tot + 4588.3 γ c CGRres
γ g res =
1 + 132904 γ c CGRres /M c
γ
gsep
γgtnk
Rsep
P=Psep Rtnk
T=Tsep
γ gres
ρcondsc
Cres
SEPARATOR TANK
Thus, we can have two independent equations, which are

• At Reservoir conditions:
γ g t + 4588 γ csc CGRres
γ g res =
1 + 132904 γ csc CGRres /M c
• At Separator Conditions:
γ g sep - γ g tot
CGR sep =
4588.3 γ csc - 132904 γ g sep γ csc /M c
NOTE:
γgt > γgsep ⇒ CGRsep negative
At and above Dew Point:
Petroleum Experts
1
CGRres =
Rsep + Rtnk
The CGR at pressures lower than dew point is estimated by a second degree
polynomial as shown
2
⎛ P f ⎞
CGR = CGRmin + (CGRres − CGRmin )⎜ − ⎟
⎜P f ⎟⎠
⎝ dewpoint 1 −
where
Pmin
f =
Pdew
Pmin being the maximum liquid dropout pressure and a function of the dewpoint
pressure.
i.e. Pmin = F (Pdewpoint )
Pdew is an input to the model.

The vaporised CGR curve as a function of pressure looks as below:
comp
f is from maximum liquid dropout or mix

condensate in solution.
CGR = CGRmin + (CGRres - CGRmin ) *
f 2
⎛ P ⎞
P 1 ⎜ -f⎟
Pdew ⎜ Pdewpo int ⎟
⎜ 1- f ⎟
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎠
C1.3 Estimation of CGRmin

First calculate condensate mole fraction:
Mc
γ g tot -
% Gas Mole Fraction = 28.966
Mc
γg-
28.966
7.08
f = 0.15 + + 1.45 * % Condensate (From Eilerts et al)
TRES - 161
Bg
CGRmin = CGRres - Lmax
561.5 Bo
PROSPER Manual
Where Lmax is the maximum liquid dropout percentage.
Thus we need to estimate Bo and Bg to find CGRmin from the following equation
=
CGR res − Lmax Bg
CGRmin
561.5 Bo
C2 Multiphase Pseudo Pressure
⎛k ∂P ⎞
q o = 2πrh⎜⎜ o ∗ ⎟⎟
⎝ µ o ∂r ⎠
⎛ k g ∂P ⎞
q g = 2πrh⎜ ∗ ⎟
⎜µ ∂ r ⎟
⎝ g ⎠
⎛k ∂P ⎞
q w = 2πrh⎜⎜ w ∗ ⎟⎟
⎝ µ w ∂r ⎠
Total Mass Flow Rate:
⎛ k kg k ⎞ ∂P
mr = 2πrh⎜ ρ o o + ρ g + ρw w ⎟
⎜ µ µg µ w ⎟⎠ ∂r
⎝ o
Change of Mass Flow Rate Across Annulus:

∂m r ∂ ⎧⎪ ⎛ k kg k ⎞ ∂P ⎫⎪
= 2πh ⎨r ⎜ ρ o o + ρ g + ρ w w ⎟ ⎬ ......................
∂r ∂r ⎪⎩ ⎜⎝ µ o µg µ w ⎟⎠ ∂r ⎪⎭
Change in Mass Flow Rate = Change in Density / Mass accumulation in Annulus

∂m r ∂ρ
= 2πrh φ ..............................................................
∂r ∂t
ρ = So ρ o + S g ρ g + S w ρ w
∂ ⎧⎪ ⎛⎜ k o kg k ⎞ ∂P ⎫⎪ ∂ρ
1 and 2 ⇒ ⎨r ⎜ ρ o + ρg + ρw w ⎟ ⎬ = rφ .......................
∂r ⎪⎩ ⎝ µ o µg µ w ⎟⎠ ∂r ⎪⎭ ∂t
By Definition: 1 ⎛∂ ρ ⎞ ∂r _
C = *⎜ ⎟ or =ρc
ρ ⎜⎝ ∂P ⎟⎠ T
∂P
C = S wC w + S o Co + S g C g
Petroleum Experts
Equation 3 becomes:
∂ ⎧⎪ ⎛⎜ ρ o ρg ρ ⎞ ∂P ⎫⎪ _
∂P
⎨r ⎜ k o + kg + kw w ⎟ ⎬ = r φ ρ c
∂r ⎪⎩ ⎝ µ o µg ⎟
µ w ⎠ ∂r ⎪⎭ ∂t
To Linearize this Equation:

p
⎛ k ρg ρ ⎞
m( p ) = ∫ ⎜ ρ o o + k g + k w w ⎟∂P
⎜ µ µg µ w ⎟⎠
0 ⎝ o
k o ⎛⎜ k g µo k µ ⎞
p
=∫ ρ + ρ + w o ρ w ⎟∂P
µ o ⎜⎝ ko µ g ko µ w ⎟
o g
0 ⎠
k ⎛ ⎞
p
qg q
= ∫ o ⎜⎜ ρ o + ρ g + w ρ w ⎟⎟∂P
0
µo ⎝ qo qo ⎠
k ⎛ ⎞
p
GORout B g WORout Bw
= ∫ o ⎜⎜ ρ o + ρg + ρ w ⎟⎟∂P
0
µo ⎝ Bo Bo ⎠
Combining we get:
∂ ⎛ ∂m( p ) ⎞ rφ r c µ o ∂m( p)
⎜ r ko ⎟= ∗
∂r ⎝ ∂r ⎠ F ∂t
GORout Bg WORout Bw
Where F = ρo + ρg + ρw
Bo Bo
∂ 2 m( p ) 1 ∂m( p) _
µ o ∂m( p)
⇒ + = φ c
∂r 2
r ∂r Bo ∂t
So ρ o + S g ρ g + S w ρ w
C = c
F
For Condensates:
∂ 2 m( p ) 1 ∂m( p) µ g ∂m( p)
+ = φc
∂r 2
r ∂r kg ∂t
So ρo + S g ρg + Sw ρ w
C=c
Fg
Bo CGRout B WGR
Fg = ρo + ρ g + w ρw
Bg Bg
PROSPER Manual
C3 Temperature Models
Enthalpy Balance temperature model in PROSPER applies the general energy
equation for flowing fluid:
⎛ mv 2 ⎞ ⎛ mgz ⎞
∆U + ∆⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ + ∆⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ + ∆( pV ) − Q = 0
⎝ 2g c ⎠ ⎝ gc ⎠
In terms of Enthalpy H = U + pV , this is written:
⎛ mv 2 ⎞ ⎛ mgz ⎞
∆H + ∆⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ + ∆⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − Q = 0
⎝ 2g c ⎠ ⎝ gc ⎠
If heat transfer with the surroundings (Q) is neglected, the usual pressure equation
solved in multiphase flow results. PROSPER solves the general energy equation by
considering the enthalpy balance across an incremental length of pipe. The
enthalpy term includes the effects of pressure (including Joule-Thomson effect) and
phase changes.
The algorithm commences by calculating the

enthalpy at the known pressure and temperature
of the first calculation node. i.e. H1 at (T1,P1)
For a given pipe increment, the enthalpy (H2) at

the other end of the pipe is estimated. The
difference (H2-H1) is compared to ∆H.
Where
∆Q 1V 2
∆H = - + ∆Lcosθ + tot
ρ l ql + ρ g qg 2 g
If previous calculations exist, then:
dt
P2 = P1 − G∆L ; T2 = T1 − ∆L
dz
to give the first estimate
of H2
We now deal with a piece of tubing of pipe length

∆L,
P+P T +T
and P = 1 2 ; T= 1 2
2 2
The total heat transfer coefficient is estimated for
the T, P of the iteration step to calculate the heat
exchanged. Using the energy equation, we can
find dh. If dh does not equal H2-H1, the iteration
continues until convergence. The Enthalpy
Petroleum Experts
Balance method solves the energy equation simultaneously for both

temperature and pressure. The solution temperature at the downstream side of
the pipe increment is therefore the value of T2 when the iteration has converged.
The heat transfer coefficient is used to calculate dQ within the enthalpy balance
iterations and not the temperature.
The heat transfer coefficient is itself a function of the temperature of both the fluid
and the surroundings; therefore iteration is required to find both the heat transfer
coefficient and the enthalpy balance. The formation is a thermal sink at
temperature Te. The temperature profile near the wellbore is dependent upon
producing time and the thermal diffusivity of the formation. The heat diffusivity
equation accounts for localised heating (or cooling) of the formation by the well
fluids.
For a pipe increment, the heat flow is calculated using:

⎡ ⎤
⎢ (T − T ) ⎥
⎢ f e ⎥
dQ = 2π ⎢ ⎥ ∆L
⎢ f (t ) + 1 ⎥
⎢ k r U ⎥
⎣ e to TO ⎦
Where: T − T is the temperature difference between the fluid and the

f e
formation at infinity.
k is the effective thermal conductivity of the formation (including
e
allowance for well fluids in porous formations)
f (t ) is the solution of the heat diffusivity equation
The exact solution of heat diffusivity equation is:
1 4 ∞ − x 2u2 du
= ∫0 e
f (t ) π 2 U ( J 2 (u) + Y 2 (u))
0 0
(Carslaw and Jaeger Page 336)
This integral poses numerical problems as u→0 and is slow. This equation is
evaluated for very early times only.
For intermediate times, PROSPER uses a fit of the TD vs tD generated using the
exact solution. At later times a logarithmic approximation is used:
⎛ αt ⎞⎟ k
f (t ) = 0.982 log ⎜ 1 + 1.81 Where thermal diffusivity α =
e⎜ r ⎟⎠ ρ Cp
⎝ n
This formulation approximates the exact solution with less than 1% error. (From
Kwan-Chu and Subash Thakur).
U TO is the overall heat transfer coefficient.
1 1 1 1 1
= + + +
U TO h f hc hr hco
PROSPER Manual
The overall heat transfer coefficient takes into account forced convection inside the
pipe and free convection outside the pipe plus radiation and conduction.
Heat transfer from the pipe is in three terms:
• Conduction ∆Q = 2π k ∆L
(T1 − T2 )
⎛r ⎞
log e ⎜ 2 ⎟
⎝ r1 ⎠
• Forced Convection ∆Q = 2π r2 h f ∆L ( T1 − T2 )
• Free Convection ∆Q = 2π r1 (hc + h f ) ∆L ( T1 − T2 )

and Radiation
Now, let us examine the components of the overall heat loss coefficient individually:
h f is due to forced convection inside the pipe

1
0.023 k Ren0.8 Pr 3
hf =
rti
Where k is the average conductivity.
k av = k gas (1 − holdup) + k liquid ( holdup)
Ren = mixture Reynolds number (depends on VLP correlation

used)
Cpµ
Pr = i.e. mixture Prandtl number
k
C p = CPgas (1 − holdup) + CPliquid (holdup)
In the annulus, the free convection term is:

1
0.049 (Gr Pr ) 3 Pr0.0074 k

hc =
⎛r ⎞
rto log e ⎜ ci ⎟
⎝ rto ⎠
(rci − rco ) 3 ρ 2a β g ( Tto − Tci )
where: Gr = i.e. mixture Grashof number
µ a2
and ρa = mixture density
1 ⎛ ∂ρ ⎞
β=− ⎜ ⎟ thermal expansion coefficient
ρ ⎝ ∂T ⎠ P
The convection terms are themselves a function of temperature. Iteration is

therefore required to find the annulus temperature for the convection term and
determine the overall heat transfer coefficient
Petroleum Experts
H2
The radiation term is given by:

H1 σ (Tto2 + Tci2 ) (Tto + Tci )
hr =
1 rto ⎛ 1 ⎞
+ ⎜ − 1⎟
ε to rci ⎝ ε ci ⎠
rti H1 P1 , T 1
where σ is the Stefan-Boltzman
constant and ε is emissivity.
rto
rci
rco
rcem
The Conduction Terms. An example is for the tubing, where:

⎛r ⎞
rto log e ⎜ to ⎟
⎝ rti ⎠
hco =
ki
Similar expressions are used for each casing string and each term combined to find
the total conductivity term U .
TO
C4 Default Thermal Properties Database

The data listed below is at standard conditions. Correlations are used to estimate
thermal properties at other temperatures and pressures.
C4.1 Dry Rock Properties
Cp Conductivity Specific
Rock BTU/hr/ft/degF Gravity
BTU/lb/degF
Sandstone 0.183 1.06 2.64
Shale 0.224 0.7 2.4
Limstone 0.202 0.54 2.71
Dolomite 0.219 1.0 2.87
Halite 0.219 2.8 2.17
Anhydrite 0.265 0.75 2.96
Gypsum 0.259 0.75 2.32
Lignite 0.3 2.0 1.5
Volcanics 0.2 1.6 2.65
PROSPER Manual
C4.2 Rock In Situ Fluids
Cp Conductivity
BTU/lb/degF BTU/hr/ft/degF
H2O (Low salinity) 1.0 0.35
H2O (High salinity) 1.02 0.345
Heavy Oil 1.04 0.34
Medium Oil 0.49 0.083
Light Oil 0.5 0.0815
Gas 0.26 0.0215
The dry rock properties are modified to wet rock properties upon the porosity,
permeability and rock consistency.
C4.3 Downhole Equipment
Conduction Heat Emissivity

Transfer coefficient
BTU/ft/hr/degF
Mild Steel Tubing 26 0.65
Plastic Coated Tubing 20 0.65
Stainless Steel (13%) 18 0.4
Stainless Steel (15%) 15 0.3
Line Pipe 27 0.9
Plastic Coated Pipe 20 0.9
Flexible 0.3 0.95
Bitumen 0.6 0.95
Foam 0.02 0.8
Concrete 0.1 0.9
C5 Rough Approximation Temperature Model
The ambient temperature at point x is:

Ta ( x ) = Ta1 − G2 ( x − L1 ) sin θ
Petroleum Experts
which implies that the rate of change of temperature with depth

UπD
dT
dx
=−
& p
mC
[
T − Ta1 + G2 ( x − L1 ) sin θ ]
The fluid temperature at point x is then found from
⎡ ⎛ UπD ⎞ ⎤
− ⎢ ⎜⎜ ⎟ ( x − L1 ) ⎥
WC p WC p ⎢⎣ ⎝ ⎟
p ⎠ ⎥⎦
T ( x ) = Ta1 − G2 ( x − L1 ) sin θ + G1 sin θ + (T1 − Ta1 ) − G2 sin θ
WC
e
UπD UπD
Where:
Ta1 = Ambient temperature at L1
T1 = Fluid temperature at entry
T(x) = Fluid temperature at current location
θ = Deviation angle
m& = Fluid mass flow rate
Cp = Specific heat capacity
U = Overall heat transfer coefficient referred to pipe inside diameter
D = Pipe inside diameter
G = Geothermal gradient
W = Product of phase mass flow rates and heat capacities m& oCpo +
m& wCpw + m& gCpg
C6 Choke Calculation
From Bernoulli:
1 1
P + ρ V2 = P + ρ V2
1 2 1 1 o 2 o 0
From Mass Conservation:
ρ AV =ρ A V
1 1 1 0 0 0
In the throat, the maximum velocity is the speed of sound. Under critical
conditions, the choke becomes independant of the downstream pressure and
temperature.
⎛
n ⎞⎟ ⎜
P ⎛ V 2 ⎞ n + 1⎟⎟⎠ ⎜
⎜
⎝
1 ⎜ ⎛ 1 ⎞ 0 ⎟
= ⎜ 1 + ⎜ n - 1⎟ ⎟
⎜ ⎝ ⎠
ms ⎟⎠
P 2 V
o ⎝
PROSPER Manual
λ ρ + λ ρ
V2 =
g g i i
ms λ λ
g l
+
ρ V2 ρ V2
g gs l ls
λ C + λ C
l pl g pg
n =
λ C + λ C
l vl g vg
q
g
λ = ; λ = 1 - λ
g q + q l g
l g
Vms : 2 phase sound velocity from FORTUNATI, Vms will be much lower than the
velocity of either phase. Critical conditions are reached at much lower velocities.
C
p Po g
For a mono phase V 2 = 144
g C ρ
r
C7 Multi-Phase Flow Correlations
− For deviated wells, the Beggs and Brill hold up correction is used.
− To determine interfacial tension, the Parachor technique is used.
− Petroleum Experts correlation uses the Gould et al Flow Map and for the various
flow regimes we use the following:
Bubble flow: Wallis and Griffith

Slug flow: Hagedorn and Brown
Transition: Duns and Ros
Annular Mist flow: Duns and Ros
Petroleum Experts
1-2 APPENDIX D – DIETZ SHAPE FACTORS
Appendix D Dietz Shape

Factors
In bounded reservoirs
1 4.86
31.6 2
1 2.07
30.9
2
1 2.72
31.6 4
1 0.232
27.6 4
1 0.115
27.1 4
60°
1
21.9 3.39
3
1 22.6 1 3.13
2 2
1 5.38 1 0.607
4 2
1 2.36 0.111
1
5
2
4 0.098
12.9 3
In water-drive reservoirs
4.57 19.1

2-2 Appendix D - Dietz Shape Factors
In reservoirs of unknown
1 10.8 production character
25
2
D
Petroleum Experts
Appendix E File Formats
E1 Introduction
This appendix contains examples of some file formats used by PROSPER. For
further details and advice regarding interfacing PROSPER with other applications,
please contact Petroleum Experts Limited customer support.
E2 External PVT Tables

PROSPER can directly import proprietary PVT table files generated by Petroleum Experts
PVT Package. The following file format description can be followed to re-format
PVT tables obtained from other sources.
* TEST EXAMPLE OF AN OIL PVT TABLE IMPORT FILE
* (BLANK LINES AND LINES WITH AN ASTERISK (*) IN COLUMN 1
* ARE IGNORED)
*
* UNITS for the imported PVT variables must be defined in field units
* NUMBER OF TABLES (MAX 10)

5
* DATA COLUMN IDENTIFIERS

* - CAN BE IN ANY ORDER
* - COLUMNS CAN BE MISSING
* - ANY INDIVIDUAL ITEM > 3.4e35 = missing item
*
*
* PRES - Pressure
* GOR - Gas-Oil Ratio]
* OFVF - oil Formation Volume Factor
* OVIS - oil Viscosity
* ODEN - oil Density
* OCOM - oil Compressibility
* GFVF - gas Formation Volume Factor
* GVIS - gas Viscosity
* WVIS - water Viscosity
* WCOM - water Compressibility
* ZFAC - Z Factor
* GDEN - gas density
* CGR - produced cgr
*
OFVF GOR OVIS ODEN PRES
*
* TABLE IDENTIFIER RECORD
*
* N LINES TEMP BP
*
* N - Table Number
* LINES - Number of lines in the table (max 15)
* TEMP - Table Temperature
* BP - Table Bubble Point Pressure (Dew Point for condensate)
1 3 100 1300
1.21 453 .99 46 2000
1.31 454 .98 47 2010
1.41 455 .97 49 2020
2 3 200 1310
2.21 553 .89 56 3000
2.31 554 .88 57 3010
2.41 555 .87 59 3020
3 3 300 1390
3.21 653 .79 76 4000
3.31 654 .78 77 4010
3.41 655 .77 79 4020
2-6 APPENDIX E - FILE FORMATS
4 3 400 1400
4.21 753 .69 86 5000
4.31 754 .68 87 5010
4.41 755 .67 89 5020
5 3 500 1800
5.21 853 .59 96 6000
5.31 854 .58 97 6010
5.41 855 .57 99 6020
Note:
Import table units must be defined in field units. Once the data has been imported
the PROSPER units system can be used to display the values in any desired units.
E3 Lift Curves
The following is an example of a flowing well lift curve in ECLIPSE format:
-- VFP TABLE for PRODUCER --
VFPPROD
1 10430 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' /
100 1000 10000 /
114.696 514.696 5014.7 /
0 0.5 0.9 /
0.8 1 5 /
0 /
1 1 1 1 2002.17 1258.71 2733.66 /
1 1 2 1 1479.42 1083.09 2655.25 /
1 1 3 1 413.537 806.953 4503.13 /
1 2 1 1 3948.98 2376.35 3439.27 /
1 2 2 1 3619.42 1985.43 3270.18 /
1 2 3 1 494.134 928.339 3352.16 /
1 3 1 1 4913.94 4485.14 4672.16 /
1 3 2 1 4895.27 4343.38 4563.92 /
1 3 3 1 3925.4 2141.93 3460.48 /
2 1 1 1 3629.53 2559.11 3358.56 /
2 1 2 1 3539.7 2209.16 3216.7 /
2 1 3 1 1098.95 1408.86 4038.35 /
2 2 1 1 4817.47 3863.58 4190.39 /
2 2 2 1 4746.81 3540.81 3985.01 /
2 2 3 1 1916.92 1594.64 3434.72 /
2 3 1 1 5347.77 5166.94 5283.46 /
2 3 2 1 5337.64 5102.83 5210.6 /
2 3 3 1 5138.74 3590 4155.85 /
3 1 1 1 8202.54 8206.84 8494.42 /
3 1 2 1 8081.09 8085.64 8397.43 /
3 1 3 1 7436.73 7142.24 8450.65 /
3 2 1 1 9393.27 9014.22 9196.49 /
3 2 2 1 9308.64 8911.21 9105.01 /
3 2 3 1 8567.24 7774.64 8436.27 /
3 3 1 1 9912.37 9798.83 9952.61 /
3 3 2 1 9906.65 9776.86 9924.11 /
3 3 3 1 9813.74 9404.22 9463.37 /
Gas Lifted Well (4 Variable) Lift Curves

-- VFP TABLE for PRODUCER --
VFPPROD
1 10430 'LIQ' 'WCT' 'GOR' /
100 1000 10000 /
114.696 1014.7 /
0.5 0.9 /
0.82 5 /
0 0.2 0.5 /
1 1 1 1 4236.42 2633.35 3373.19 /
1 1 1 2 3825.95 2143.51 3274.85 /
1 1 1 3 3124.78 1852.12 3267.76 /
1 1 2 1 679.721 1006.21 3341.52 /
1 1 2 2 663.546 996.833 3405.81 /
1 1 2 3 641.284 977.228 3341.56 /
1 2 1 1 4983.68 4569.28 4613.82 /
1 2 1 2 4855.84 3445.19 4260.77 /
1 2 1 3 4234.42 2708.11 3888.35 /
1 2 2 1 4324.78 2288.63 3403.99 /
1 2 2 2 3770.29 1978.18 3361.59 /

APPENDIX E – FILE FORMATS 3-6
1 2 2 3 2893.22 1811.06 3390.73 /

2 1 1 1 5416.3 4901.7 4903.34 /
2 1 1 2 5416.24 4900.79 4902.04 /
2 1 1 3 5416.15 4899.42 4900.17 /
2 1 2 1 4853.52 2622.82 3962.47 /
2 1 2 2 4853.36 2606.9 3962.25 /
2 1 2 3 4853.12 2591.41 3961.94 /
2 2 1 1 5925.14 5771.07 5819.76 /
2 2 1 2 5925.09 5770.6 5819.25 /
2 2 1 3 5925.01 5769.9 5818.5 /
2 2 2 1 5814.71 4954.63 4912.08 /
2 2 2 2 5814.64 4953.02 4911.18 /
2 2 2 3 5814.53 4950.61 4909.88 /
E4 IPR
*
* This is an example IPR input file
*
The format is pressure, rate, curve value
*
The numbers can be space, tab or comma delimited
* Up to twenty points per curve, up to five curves
*
*Blank lines or lines with an asterisk (*) in the first
* column are ingored.
*
0 5000 1000
1000 4000 1000
2000 3000 1000
3000 2000 1000
4000 1000 1000
5000 0 1000
*
* Next curve
*
0 3000 2000
1000 2000 2000
2000 1000 2000
3000 0 2000
E5 ESP PUMPS
* Blank lines or lines begining with an asterisk are ignored.
* The format for the pump data is
* Line 1 Manufacturer pumpname size (ins) frequency(hz) Min. rte Max. rate No. of Stages
* Line 2 six coefficients for head curve (ft of water)
* Line 3 six coefficients for power curve (HP)
* Curves are polynomials of the form
* Y = AO + A1*x + A2*x*2 + A3*x**3 + A4*x**4 + A5*x**5
****************************
****************************
****************************
*** CENTRILIFT PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************
CENTRILIFT DC-800 3.38 60 550 950 1

* A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
-1.695826E-14 3.474714E-11 -3.873426E-08 8.776504E-06 -7.290256E-04 2.06500E+01
3.389608E-16 -6.347699E-13 1.397720E-10 1.695927E-07 1.838891E-05 9.70000E-02
CENTRILIFT DC-1000 3.38 60 700 1300 1

0.0000000000 1.629606E-13 -3.038773E-09 -4.764406E-07 -2.538143E-03 2.05000E+01
-1.535787E-17 8.375897E-14 -1.485183E-10 4.492726E-08 1.474800E-04 8.501001E-02
PROSPER MANUAL
E6 ESP MOTORS
*Manufacturer
Reda
* Number of motors, rpm, frequency
2 3450. 60.0
*Series OD
456 4.56
*amps
6.53822E-01 -1.34128E+00 8.86349E-01 -1.06114E-01 5.61883E-01 3.43896E-01 *
*rpm
-6.24718E+01 2.04999E+02 -3.03911E+02 1.45552E+02 -1.15803E+02 3.58291E+03 *
*efficiency
-5.57129E-01 1.60591E+00 -7.30540E-01 -1.98693E+00 2.49918E+00 1.91886E-03 *
* power factor
-5.44220E-01 2.16557E+00 -2.81504E+00 7.11957E-01 1.04810E+00 2.49609E-01 *
*Series OD
540 5.4
*amps
-2.16508E-01 6.79101E-01 -5.79651E-01 3.59379E-01 5.24583E-01 2.26834E-01 *
*rpm
-2.14557E+01 8.55182E+01 -1.66122E+02 9.44086E+01 -1.44510E+02 3.58175E+03 *
*efficiency
3.67150E-01 -1.64327E+00 3.01018E+00 -3.02514E+00 1.72215E+00 4.17187E-01 *
* power factor
4.64765E-01 -2.48102E+00 5.12024E+00 -5.23541E+00 2.71560E+00 2.75835E-01 *
*Series Type HP VOLTS AMPS

456 S 100.0 1075 51
456 S 100.0 1355 46
456 S 100.0 2205 29
456 S 110.0 1190 60
456 S 120.0 1255 70
456 S 120.0 1295 59
456 S 120.0 2245 35
456 T 200.0 2710 46
456 T 220.0 2380 60
456 T 240.0 2250 70
456 T 240.0 2590 59
540 S 180.0 945 120

540 S 180.0 1945 59
540 S 200.0 1100 115
540 S 200.0 2140 54
540 S 225.0 1135 127
540 S 225.0 2235 64
540 T 450.0 2270 127
540 T 480.0 2475 122
540 T 480.0 3345 89
540 T 540.0 2835 120
540 T 600.0 3300 115
E7 ESP CABLES
* Cable Type
* Volt drop coefficient Maximum ampage
#1 Copper
0.26 115
#2 Copper
0.33 95
#4 Copper
0.53 70
#6 Copper
0.84 55
#8 Copper
1.32 50
#10 Copper
2.08 50

APPENDIX E – FILE FORMATS 5-6
#12 Copper
3.32 50
#1 Aluminium
0.33 95
#2 Aluminium
0.53 70
#4 Aluminium
0.84 55
#6 Aluminium
1.32 50
#8 Aluminium
2.08 50
#10 Aluminium
3.32 50
E8 HSP PUMPS
*
* H Y D R A U L I C D R I V E D O W N H O L E P U M P S
* ================= ========= =============== =========
* This is a sample pump import file. Blank lines or lines begining

* with an asterisk are ignored. The format for the pump data is
* Line 1 Manufacturer pumpname size (mm) reference Speed(rpm) Min.
* operating rate Max. operating rate No. of stages Max no. of Stages Min
* Speed Max Speed
* Line 2 six coefficients for head curve (ft of water) (a0 to a5)
* Line 3 six coefficients for power curve (HP) (a0 to a5)
* This data is supplied FOR EXAMPLE PURPOSES ONLY

********** DO NOT USE FOR SYSTEM DESIGN
* Contact your pump supplier for current performance data
****************************
****************************
****************************
*** WEIR PUMPS ***
****************************
****************************
****************************
WEIR TPL115 118 11500 2000 12200 1 18 3825 11500

439.726 -0.0145605 1.7487e-7 -4.0609e-11 -1.2e-15 6.7794e-20
15.0445 0.00470131 -8.1656e-7 9.018e-11 -5.0595e-15 9.7463e-20
E9 HSP TURBINES
Turbine Manufacturer
WEIR
* Number of Turbines
1
****************
* *
* WEIR T30 *
* *
****************
* Turbine Type
T30
* Reference Speed (rpm)

15000.0
* Maximum Speed (rpm)

15000.0
* Maximum Test Pressure (psi)

8910.00
PROSPER MANUAL
* Maximum Working Pressure (psi)

5940.00
* Maximum Stage Pressure (psi)

370.00
* Maximum Number Of Stages

50
* Maximum Turbine Supply Flow (bbl/day)

3911.67
* Maximum Total Shaft Torque (lb.ins)

843
* Maximum Stage Torque (lb.ins)

128
* Turbine Casing OD (inches)

3.46
* Max. Velocity Over Turbine Casing (ft/sec)

25.000
* Number of Settings
4
* Setting should be an alphanumeric string with NO embedded spaces (up to 8 characters)

* Setting Efficiency Mininum Maximum Head Head Head Power Power Power
* Rate Rate (a1) (a2) (a3) (a1) (a2) (a3)
* (percent) (bbl/day) (bbl/day)
A 52.750 1235.26 2038.18 0.000311733 -0.53145 447.209 2.2765e-6 -0.00245738 0.551433

B 56.000 1523.49 2460.23 0.000146428 -0.163852 184.132 1.6612e-6 -0.00126675 -0.431372
C 60.460 1873.48 3232.27 0.000116043 -0.281785 395.769 1.8284e-6 -0.0037038 2.46547
D 64.000 2367.59 3788.14 6.97987e-5 -0.150449 243.193 2.0903e-6 -0.00670166 7.15005

Prosper Complete

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Prosper Complete

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Prosper Complete

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Petroleum Experts

Single Well Systems Analysis

All names of companies, wells, persons or products contained in this documentation

Address: Registered Office:

Petroleum Experts Limited Petroleum Experts Limited

4.1.1 File ........................................................................................................................................................... 2

6.3.3 Downhole Equipment............................................................................................................................. 24

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD

7.8.3 Example of How to Set Up a Simple System................................................................................................. 72

11.2 Electrical Submersible Pump Design.............................................................................................................. 23

A2 Example 2 - Well and Flow line Modelling............................................................................................................. 9

A14.1 Model Set Up............................................................................................................................................ 144

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD

By separately modelling each component of the producing well system, then

1.1 Using PROSPER

1. PROSPER is a fundamental element in the Integrated Production Model

4. It can be used to accurately predict both pressure and temperature profiles

5. The sensitivity calculations capabilities easily allow the engineer to model

8. The multiphase flow correlations implemented can be adjusted to match

15. The following situations can be modelled:

Well Flow Configuration:

Artificial Lift Method:

1.2 PROSPER and Systems Analysis

i.e. ∆ptotal = ∆pgravity + ∆p friction + ∆pacceleration

The acceleration component is usually small except in systems involving significant

separately validated; therefore dependency on other components of the well model

1.2.1 A Note About PROSPER

• long pipelines transporting Retrograde Condensate.

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD

1.3.1 Example 1 – Naturally Flowing Oil Well

This example demonstrates how to:

1.3.2 Example 2 – Gas Lift Design

This example demonstrates how to:

1.3.3 Example 3 – Well and Flowline Modelling

1.3.4 Example 4 – Temperature Prediction

1.3.5 Example 5 – ESP Lifted Well

This example demonstrates how to:

1.3.6 Example 6 – HSP Lifted Well

This example demonstrates how to:

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD

1.3.7 Example 7 – Retrograde Condensate Well

This example demonstrates how to:

1.3.8 Example 8 – Gravel Packed well

This example demonstrates how to:

1.3.9 Example 9 – Horizontal Well – Friction dP

1.3.10 Example 10 – Multi-Layer dP Pressure Loss

1.3.11 Example 11 – Multi-lateral well

1.3.12 Example 12 – Modelling of a smart well

1.3.13 Example 13 – Gas injector with downhole chokes

This example demonstrates how to:

1.3.14 Example 14 – Multilateral model including PCP

This example demonstrates how to:

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD

2.1 PROSPER Files

2.1.1 PVT Data (*.PVT)

2.1.2 Input Data (*.SIN)

2.1.3 Analysis Data (*.ANL)

2.1.4 Output Data (*.OUT)

PETROLEUM EXPERTS LTD